JP2020018903A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of properly adjusting the shooting intensity with respect to the control input of a control handle.SOLUTION: An MPU 201 in a main control unit 110 multiplies voltage generated in a variable resistor VR1 in accordance with the rotary control input of a control handle 51 by the positive real number with processing in S1605, adds offset voltage to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number with processing in S1606, and outputs the voltage to a shooting control unit 400 as shooting application voltage Eα. With this, the variation of the voltage of the shooting application voltage Eα is made less than the variation of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1, and the variation of voltage E1 applied to a shooting solenoid 142 by a voltage supply part 304 in the shooting control unit 400 can be made small. Consequently, the range of the rotary control input of the control handle 51 for shooting a ball to a game area can be adjusted.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 37

Description

  The present invention relates to a ball-and-ball game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

As shown in Patent Document 1 below, as a launching device for a ball-and-ball type gaming machine, a ball launching device for a ball-and-ball game in which a ball is hit by a solenoid with a launching intensity corresponding to the operation amount of a rotary operation type operation handle. It has been known. In this ball launching device, a solenoid mounted on a mounting frame of a game board is mounted on a support frame, one end of the support frame is pivotally supported on the mounting frame, and a first adjustment knob is provided. Is provided, and the support frame is brought into contact with and supported by the eccentric disk. Therefore, by rotating the first adjustment knob, the solenoid can be adjusted in the vertical direction.
Further, the adjustment gear is supported on the shaft pin of the support frame, and the guide protrusion provided on the adjustment gear and the guide rib provided on the mounting frame rotate the second adjustment knob meshed with the adjustment gear, thereby providing a solenoid. In the front-rear direction. Thus, a plurality of adjustments of up, down, front and back of the solenoid are performed, and by adjusting the position where the mallet of the solenoid collides with the ball, the emission intensity of the ball hit by the solenoid is adjusted.

JP 2000-202094 A

  In the conventional launching device exemplified in Patent Document 1, it may be difficult to appropriately adjust the launching intensity with respect to the operation amount of the operating handle.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately adjusting the firing intensity with respect to the operation amount of an operation handle.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a launching unit that launches a ball, an operating member, and a first value changing unit that changes a first value based on an operation amount of the operating member. Ball control means for controlling the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means based on the first value changed by the first value changing means, wherein the first value changing means changes the firing strength. Set value means for setting a second value separately from the first value, and combined value means for combining the second value set by the set value means and the first value changed by the first value change means Wherein the sphere control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means based on the value synthesized by the synthesis value means.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the first value changing means includes at least a variable resistor that changes a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member. Means, and a DC voltage supply means for supplying a DC voltage to the first voltage dividing means, wherein the combined value means generates a voltage value generated in the variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the DC voltage supply means. Is set as the first value, and the first value is combined with the second value set by the setting value means.

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, further comprising a conversion value unit configured to multiply a value synthesized by the synthesis value unit by a positive real number, and the ball control unit performs the conversion. The firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means is controlled based on the value multiplied by a positive real number by the value means.

  According to a fourth aspect of the present invention, there is provided a gaming machine, wherein: a launching means for launching a ball; an operating member; a first value changing means for changing a first value based on an operation amount of the operating member; Ball control means for controlling the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means based on the first value to be changed, wherein the first value to be changed by the first value changing means is a positive real number. Conversion value means for multiplying the converted value into a third value, wherein the sphere control means controls the emission intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means based on the third value converted by the conversion value means It is.

  According to a fifth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect, the first value changing means has at least a variable resistor that changes a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member. Means, and a DC voltage supply means for supplying a DC voltage to the first voltage dividing means, wherein the converted value means comprises a voltage value generated in the variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the DC voltage supply means. Is converted into a third value by multiplying the first value by a positive real number.

  According to a sixth aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the fourth or fifth aspect, set value means for setting a second value separately from the first value changed by the first value changing means, and the setting thereof Value combining means for combining the second value set by the value means and the third value converted by the conversion value means, wherein the sphere control means is configured to output the value based on the value combined by the value combining means. , For controlling the firing intensity of a sphere fired from the firing means.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first value changing means changes the first value based on the operation amount of the operation member. When the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operating member and the second value that is set by the setting value unit are combined by the combination value unit, the ball control unit sets the value combined by the combination value unit. And controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means. Therefore, the combined value means combines the second value with the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, so that the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means changes based on the operation amount of the operation member. In addition to the first value, the second value set by the setting value means can be changed.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, since the DC voltage is supplied from the DC voltage supply unit to the first voltage dividing unit, the operation amount of the operation member is reduced. When the resistance value of the variable resistor changes based on this, the voltage value generated in the variable resistor changes. The combining value means combines the voltage value that changes based on the operation amount of the operating member as the first value with the second value set by the setting value means. Here, in general, combining voltage values can be realized with a simple configuration. Therefore, by setting the first value synthesized by the synthesized value unit to be the voltage value, the synthesized value unit can synthesize the first value with the second value with a simple configuration.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, the ball control means combines the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means by the synthetic value means. Is controlled based on a value obtained by multiplying the value obtained by the conversion value means by a positive real number. Here, the conversion value unit can change the amount of change of the combined value that changes according to the operation amount of the operation member by multiplying the value combined by the combination value unit by a positive real number. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of change in the emission intensity of the sphere, which changes depending on the operation amount of the operation member, can be changed by the conversion value means.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, the first value changing means changes the first value based on the operation amount of the operation member. When the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member is converted to a third value by multiplying the converted value by a positive real number, the ball control unit determines, based on the third value converted by the conversion value unit, The firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means is controlled. Here, the conversion value means multiplies the first value, which changes according to the operation amount of the operation member, by a positive real number to obtain the third value, so that the change amount of the first value can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of change in the emission intensity of the sphere, which changes depending on the operation amount of the operation member, can be changed by the conversion value means.

According to the gaming machine of the fifth aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, since the DC voltage is supplied from the DC voltage supply unit to the first voltage dividing unit, the operation amount of the operation member is reduced. When the resistance value of the variable resistor changes based on this, the voltage value generated in the variable resistor changes. The conversion value means sets a voltage value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member as a first value and multiplies the first value by a positive real number to obtain a third value. Here, generally, multiplying the voltage value by a positive real number can be realized by a simple configuration. Therefore, by setting the first value converted by the conversion value means to the third value as a voltage value, the conversion value means can convert the first value into the third value with a simple configuration.
According to the gaming machine of the sixth aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the fourth or fifth aspect, the ball control means combines the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means by the synthetic value means. Control based on the value. Therefore, the combined value means combines the second value with the third value obtained by changing the amount of change of the first value by the conversion value means, and adds the emission intensity of the ball fired from the firing means to the third value. There is an effect that it can be changed also by the second value set by the setting value means.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in the state where the front frame and the lower plate unit were opened. (A) is a perspective view of a firing unit in a state where an opening / closing member constituting a ball feeding mechanism before a ball is placed is opened, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an internal configuration of the ball feeding mechanism by removing a lid member. It is a perspective view of the shown firing unit. (A) is a perspective view of a firing unit in a state where an opening and closing member constituting a ball feeding mechanism in a state where a ball is arranged is opened, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an internal configuration of the ball feeding mechanism by removing a lid member. It is a perspective view of the shown firing unit. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the launch control device. It is a figure showing voltage change of each signal of a launch control device. It is a figure showing change of the maximum value of the voltage applied to a firing solenoid at the time of changing a variable resistor of an addition voltage adjustment part of a firing control device. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a change in the maximum value of the voltage applied to the firing solenoid when the variable resistor of the addition voltage adjusting unit of the firing control device is changed and the variable resistor of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit is changed. It is the figure which showed the timing chart of the firing permission signal, the firing control signal, the voltage applied to the firing solenoid, and the ball feed control signal and the DC voltage applied to the ball feed solenoid. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. It is a figure showing a command outputted from a main control unit to a payout control unit. (A) is a figure which showed the arrangement | positioning of the signal pin of the connector provided in the main control apparatus, (b) is a figure which showed the arrangement | positioning of the signal pin of the connector provided in the payout control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in a main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 19 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation process executed in the main process of FIG. 18. 20 is a flowchart illustrating a variation start process executed in the variation process of FIG. 19. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process. 22 is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 21. It is the flowchart which showed the NMI interruption process performed by the main control device and the payout control device. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a payout control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a payout control apparatus. 26 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed in the main process of FIG. 25. 27 is a flowchart showing a winning ball payout number setting process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 26. 27 is a flowchart illustrating a state setting process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 26. 26 is a flowchart showing a status notification process executed in the main process of FIG. 25. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a launch control device of a second embodiment. It is the figure which showed the voltage change of each signal of the launch control device of 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the change of the maximum value of the voltage applied to the firing solenoid when changing the variable resistor of the voltage fluctuation adjustment part of the firing control device of 2nd Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the electric constitution of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a launch control device of a third embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the timer interruption process of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the firing control process of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the control signal processing of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the contents of a magnification determination table memory. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the contents of an offset voltage determination table memory. FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating a change in each voltage when the firing control process illustrated in FIG. 37 is executed. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a change in a maximum value of a voltage E1 applied to a firing solenoid when an offset voltage is a positive voltage. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a change in the maximum value of a voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the offset voltage is a negative voltage. By adjusting the variable resistor VR2 of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0, and the positive real number is multiplied. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when an offset voltage is added by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 to the multiplied voltage. It is the block diagram which showed the electric constitution of the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the flowchart of the firing control processing of the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a change in each voltage when the firing control process illustrated in FIG. 46 is performed. By adjusting the variable resistor VR2 of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0, and the positive real number is multiplied. The change of the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the offset voltage is added by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 to the obtained voltage and further monitoring the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is shown. FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the contents of a magnification determination table memory. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the contents of a magnification determination table memory. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the contents of an offset voltage determination table memory. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the contents of an offset voltage determination table memory.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 5) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a firing rail 143 for guiding the ball fired from the shooting solenoid 142 to the front area of the game board 13. (See FIG. 5).

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 5) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used, for example, to change the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or to change the effect content at the time of the reach effect. Is operated by

  In addition, light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot.

  In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs. Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing spheres that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided. Inside the operation handle 51, a firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 5) is provided. A touch sensor 51a for permitting driving, a push button type stop switch 51b for stopping firing of a ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 detected by a change in electric resistance. And a variable resistor VR1 (see FIG. 8). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 changes in accordance with the rotation operation amount. Then, a ball is fired with an intensity corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 that changes according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, whereby the front surface of the game board 13 is jumped with an amount of flight corresponding to the operation of the player. A ball is driven into. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided with wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. And so on. In addition, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. In addition, the opening that connects the ball guide passage at the tip end of the inner rail 61 to which the return ball preventing member 68 is attached and the game area is defined as a firing port 68a. The ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 is launched into the game area via the firing port 68a. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  A first symbol display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a, which are light emitting means, and a seven-segment display 37b, is provided in the upper right portion of the game area as viewed from the front (the upper right portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 performs a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing probability, reducing the time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not, by the lighting state, and a symbol corresponding to a probability change in a stop symbol. The lighting state indicates whether the symbol is a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or an off-design, or the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. The seven-segment display device 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated with a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emitted colors. .

  In addition, the above-mentioned pachinko machine 10 being in a probable change state is a game state in which the jackpot probability increases and the game easily shifts to the special game state. Further, during the probable change in the present embodiment, it is a game state in which the probability of hitting the second symbol increases and a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a reduced working hours, it is a state of a game in which the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 with the probability of the big hit as it is. Also, the pachinko machine 10 being in the normal state is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is in progress (the state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased). In addition, according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the opening time of the electrically-powered accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 and the number of times the electrically-driven accessory is opened per one time are changed. It is good.

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 including a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “display device”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner when a winning in the first entrance 64 is triggered. And a second symbol display device 82 composed of a light emitting diode (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) that variably displays the second symbol when the ball passes through the second entrance 67. .

  The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, and, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display having an 8-inch size, and the variable display device unit 80 includes a center frame so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. 86 are provided. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. Decorative display is performed according to. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Also, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 until the stop symbol (any one of the probable jackpot symbol, the ordinary jackpot symbol, and the off symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The number of times the ball is held is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of times the ball is held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the number of lighting of the holding lamp 85. The four holding lamps 85 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the winning in the first entrance 64 is configured to be held up to four times. However, the maximum number of holdings is not limited to four, and three or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). In addition, the holding lamp 85 is deleted, and the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning in the first entrance 64 is held numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is held. The display may be performed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) by the number of times. Further, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the holding lamp 85.

  The second symbol display device 82 has a display portion 83 of a second symbol and a holding lamp 84, and each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67, a display symbol (second symbol) is displayed on the display portion 83. The symbol “O” and the symbol “X” are alternately lit to perform a variable display, and when the variable display is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “O” in the present embodiment), The one entrance 64 is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of times held is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit by the holding lamp 84. In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the plurality of lamps on and off in the display unit 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. 81 may be used. Similarly, the holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, as with the first entrance 64, the maximum number of times of passage through the second entrance 67 is not limited to four, but is three or less, or five or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of times of suspension is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the suspension lamp 84.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big hit is stopped and the LED 37a is turned on. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 122a for the variable resistor VR2 (see FIG. 8) and an operation knob 122b for the variable resistor VR3 (see FIG. 8). The power supply 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 123. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). The operation knob 122a of the variable resistor VR2 and the operation knob 122b of the variable resistor VR3 are operated to adjust the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142. The RAM erase switch 123 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an internal configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are opened.

  The pachinko machine 10 is provided with an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell, and an inner frame 12 is supported on the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. In a game arcade, the outer peripheral surface of the outer frame 11 is fixed to an installation location called an island in the game arcade. The inner frame 12, the front frame 14, and the lower plate unit 15 are configured to be openable to the front side with respect to the outer frame 11, so that the back side and the inside which are not touched from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Inspection and adjustment are performed by opening the inner frame 12 and the like to the front side with respect to the outer frame 11.

  An upper hinge (not shown) and a lower hinge (not shown) made of metal are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view to support the inner frame 12. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable with the side provided with the upper hinge and the lower hinge as an opening / closing axis.

  The inner frame 12 mainly includes an inner frame base 52 made of ABS resin and formed in a rectangular shape. A substantially circular central window 52a is formed in the center of the inner frame base 52. A mounting portion for the game board 13 is provided on the back side of the inner frame base 52, and the game board 13 is detachably mounted.

  The lower part of the central window 52a of the inner frame base 52 is formed in a concave shape with the front side open, and a flat mounting surface 52b is formed on the back side. On the mounting surface 52b, a firing unit 140 for firing a ball to the front of the game board 13, a passage forming member 53 for forming a passage for discharging the ball to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50, and the like are mounted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the firing unit 140 which is mounted on the lower part on the front side of the inner frame base 52 and forms a part of the inner frame 12 will be described. FIG. 5 shows a state in which the ball G1 is held by the delivery member 155 of the ball feed mechanism 144 and before the ball G1 is arranged on the front surface of the cap 142b that covers the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142. I have.

  FIG. 5A is a perspective view of the firing unit 140 in a state where the opening / closing member 152 configuring the ball feed mechanism 144 is opened, and FIG. 5B illustrates a state in which the lid member 153 is moved in the state of FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the firing unit 144 showing the internal configuration of the detachable ball feed mechanism 144.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the firing unit 140 includes a base plate 141 fixed to a mounting surface 52b (see FIG. 4) below the inner frame base 52 by screws, and a firing solenoid 142 mounted on the base plate 141. A firing rail 143 having a substantially M-shaped side surface and fixed to the base plate 141 at one end of the firing solenoid 142 so as to extend in parallel with the longitudinal direction of the firing solenoid 142, and a base end portion of the firing rail 143 (the firing solenoid). The ball feed mechanism 144 guides and guides the balls one by one to the end on the 142 side), and is mounted on the base plate 141 so as to support and position the balls placed on the base end of the firing rail 143. And a positioning member 145.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the base plate 141 is formed by pressing a flat metal plate made of a zinc alloy or the like, and is tightly attached to the mounting surface 52b of the inner frame base 52 with screws. Fixed. The firing rail 143 is for guiding the ball immediately after being fired by the firing solenoid 142, and extends linearly while maintaining a predetermined firing angle (launch angle) (a boss (not shown) fixed to the base plate 141). ) Are fixed with screws (not shown). The ball fired by the turning operation of the operation handle 51 is launched obliquely upward along the firing rail 143 and guided to the game area.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, as a launching device for launching a ball, a one-unit solenoid (launching) in which a linear solenoid is accommodated in a case member is used instead of a conventionally used combination of a motor and a launching hammer. The solenoid 142) is employed. The firing solenoid 142 is provided with a metal plunger 142a disposed in parallel with the firing rail 143 in the longitudinal direction, and a resin cap 142b covering the tip of the plunger 142a. As the material of the cap 142b, a polyester-based thermoplastic elastomer is employed in the present embodiment. During a state in which the player turns the operation handle 51 (while the touch center 51a is on and the stop switch 51b is off), the firing solenoid 142 repeats excitation and non-excitation every predetermined time. The plunger 142a repeatedly appears and disappears in response to this. When the plunger 142a projects, the sphere positioned on the firing rail 143 by the positioning member 145 is fired obliquely upward and directed by the firing rail 143. The variable resistor VR1 linked to the operation handle 51 is electrically connected to the firing solenoid 142, and the projection speed of the plunger 142a is adjusted based on the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 (the stroke amount is substantially constant). ), The launch speed of the ball, and thus the flying distance, are adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.

  The firing solenoid 142 is fixed to a pair of bosses (not shown) erected on the base plate 141 and a bolt 141b by attaching a bolt (not shown) and a nut 148, respectively. In the ball firing unit 140, the height of the firing solenoid 142 with respect to the base plate 141 is changed by adjusting the tightening of bolts and nuts 148 provided above and below the firing solenoid 142, so that the relative position between the plunger 142a and the firing rail 143 is changed. The mounting position of the ball can be adjusted, and the hit point of the ball can be adjusted. At the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10, even if there is a variation in manufacturing or assembling each part, the ball and the nut 148 are adjusted after the ball launching unit 140 is assembled to the pachinko machine 10 to finely adjust the flying distance of the ball. be able to. The firing solenoid 142 is entirely disposed inside the outer peripheral edge of the base plate 141, and when the ball firing unit 140 is assembled from the base plate 141 side to the inner frame base 52, the firing solenoid 142 is connected to other components. It is prevented from being damaged by being caught in the device.

  The positioning member 145 is a member for supporting a ball mounted on the right end (base end) of the firing rail 143 and positioning the ball at the hitting position. The firing rail 143 is provided from the base plate 141. On the side of the surface to be formed. The positioning member 145 is provided with a fastening hole penetrating along its axial direction, and the positioning member 145 is screwed to the base plate 141 by inserting a screw into the fastening hole. Here, the fastening hole of the positioning member 145 is formed not at the center of the columnar shape but at an eccentric position. For this reason, the hitting position of the ball placed on the firing rail 143 can be delicately changed by appropriately rotating the positioning member 145 and then tightening the screw. In, the amount of flight of the ball can be easily adjusted.

  The ball feed mechanism 144 feeds balls continuously guided from the upper plate 17 one by one to the base end of the firing rail 143. The ball feed mechanism 144 includes a resin pedestal member 151 fixed to the base plate 141 so as to cover the upper portion of the firing solenoid 142, and a resin that is pivotally supported on one side of the pedestal member 151 and can be opened and closed. And an opening / closing member 152 made of stainless steel. A locking claw 151a is integrally formed on the pedestal member 151 toward the front side where the opening / closing member 152 is provided, and the locking claw 151a is provided on the opening / closing member 152 in a closed state overlapping the front surface of the pedestal member 151. Is formed with a locking hole 152a for catching. Normally, the opening / closing member 152 is in a closed state in which one side is pivotally supported by the pedestal member 151 and the other side is locked by the pedestal member 151 by the locking hole 152a so as to overlap the front surface of the pedestal member 151. This closed state is released by removing the locking claw 151a of the base member 151 from the locking hole 152a of the opening / closing member 152, and the opening / closing member 152 can be opened forward with respect to the base member 151. Further, the opening / closing member 152 can be detached from the pedestal member 151 by sliding upward by opening it to the maximum with respect to the pedestal member 151.

  On the front surface of the opening / closing member 152, an inlet 152b for introducing a sphere guided from the upper plate 17 is provided at a left end portion in a front view, and the sphere is introduced from the introduction port 152b to the back side of the opening / closing member 152. Is done. A cover member 153 is detachably attached to the back side of the opening / closing member 152, and the cover member 153 covers a ball feed solenoid 154 and a delivery member 155. The ball feeding solenoid 154 and the sending member 155 are members that operate to send out the balls one by one, and as shown in FIG. 5B, the ball feeding solenoid 154 is provided in a storage space recessed in the opening / closing member 152. Are arranged side by side up and down.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, the delivery member 155 is a resin member in which one side of the introduction port 152b with respect to the opening / closing member 152 is pivotally supported up and down by a pin. One side has a holder portion 155a which is recessed so as to accommodate only one ball. A metal piece 156 is attached to an upper side portion connecting the shaft portion into which the pin is inserted and the holder portion 155a so as to face the ball feed solenoid 154.

  When the ball feed solenoid 154 is turned on (excited), the metal piece 156 is pulled by the magnetic force of the ball feed solenoid 154, and the delivery member 155 rotates upward. As a result, the ball is placed in the holder 155a. When balls are continuously introduced from the inlet 152b, the first ball G1 is accommodated in the holder portion 155a to restrict vertical movement, and the subsequent ball G2 is supported by the ball accommodated in the holder portion 155a. Downflow is regulated.

  Next, the ball feeding operation of the ball G1 by the ball feeding mechanism 144 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 shows a state in which the ball G1 flows downstream from the delivery member 155 of the ball feed mechanism 144, and the ball G1 is arranged on the front surface of the cap 142b that covers the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142.

  FIG. 6A is a perspective view of the firing unit 140 in a state where the opening / closing member 152 constituting the ball feed mechanism 144 is opened, and FIG. 6B illustrates a state in which the lid member 153 is moved in the state of FIG. FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the firing unit 140 showing an internal configuration of the detachable ball feeding mechanism 144.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, when the ball feed solenoid 154 is turned off (non-excited) in a state where the ball G1 is housed in the holder portion 155a (see FIG. 5), the sending member 155 rotates downward by its own weight. Then, the ball G1 housed in the holder part 155a flows down. At this time, since the transfer of the subsequent ball G2 to the holder portion 155a is regulated by the upper side of the sending member 155, only the ball G1 housed in the holder portion 155a is sent downward by the vertical movement of the sending member 155. The ball G1 sent downward passes through an outlet 152c (see FIG. 5A) formed by the opening / closing member 152 and the cover member 153, as shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B. Then, it is guided onto the firing rail 143. Then, the ball G1 guided on the firing rail 143 rolls to the base end of the firing rail 143 due to the weight of the ball G1 and is disposed on the front surface of the cap 142b that covers the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142. Therefore, when the ball feed solenoid 154 is repeatedly turned on (excited) and turned off (de-energized), the balls are arranged one by one on the front surface of the cap 142b covering the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 in synchronization with the repetition. Then, by turning on and off the firing solenoid 142 in synchronization with turning on and off the ball feed solenoid 154, the balls arranged on the front surface of the cap 142b covering the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 are fired one ball at a time toward the game area. can do.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In order to instruct peripheral control devices (sub-control devices) such as the pay-out control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (work area) for storing values of various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. Area). The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The payout control device 111 is connected to the input / output port 205 via connectors 207 and 217, and the sound lamp control device 113 is connected via connectors 208 and 228, respectively. In addition, the input / output port 205 is connected to the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 82, the emission control device 112, the external output terminal board 261, and various switches 206 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown). ing. A hall computer 262 is configured to be connectable to the external output terminal board 261, and data and the like can be output from the main controller 110 to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261.

  When the main controller 110 issues an instruction to fire a ball, the firing control device 112 arranges the ball feed solenoid so as to arrange the ball in front of a cap 142b (see FIG. 5) that covers the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142. 154 is controlled, and the firing solenoid 142 is controlled so as to have a ball launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The driving of the firing solenoid 142 and the ball feeding solenoid 154 is permitted when predetermined conditions are satisfied.

  Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the payout control is performed on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (not operated). The firing permission signal SG3 is input from the signal conversion circuit 241 of the board 111 to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. When the firing permission signal SG3 is input to the input / output port 205, the MPU 201 outputs a firing control signal α and a ball feed control signal β from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 112. When the firing control signal α is input to the firing control device 112, a voltage is supplied to the firing solenoid 142, and the firing solenoid 142 moves a ball previously disposed on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. Fire at the game area with the strength according to. When the ball feed control signal β is input to the firing control device 112, a voltage is supplied to the ball feed solenoid 154, and the ball feed solenoid 154 in the ball feed mechanism 144 sends out one ball, and the ball is sent out. The sphere is located on the front of firing solenoid 142.

  Here, the firing permission signal SG3 will be described. The firing permission signal SG3 is a signal output from the signal conversion circuit 241 in the payout control device 111 to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. The signal conversion circuit 241 that outputs the firing control signal SG3 mainly includes an AND circuit that is a logic circuit. The firing permission signal SG3 is turned on only when the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the stop switch 51b is turned off, and turned off if any of the sensors does not satisfy the above condition. When the player rotates the operation handle 51 for the purpose of firing, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the stop switch 51b is turned off. Therefore, in principle, the player operates the operation handle 51 for the purpose of firing. In the state where the rotating operation of 51 is performed, a ball is fired by the firing solenoid 142.

  Although details will be described with reference to FIG. 12, the firing of the ball by the firing solenoid 142 and the arrangement of the ball on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 performed by the ball feeding solenoid 154 in the ball feeding mechanism 144 are not performed at the same time. Is configured.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.

  The work area of the RAM 213 is provided with a total prize ball number memory 213a, an upper command storage buffer 213b, a payout error flag 213c, and a payout permission flag 213d.

  The total prize ball number memory 213a is a memory that stores the total number of unpaid prize balls to be paid out by the payout control device 111. When the ball hit into the game area wins one of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and this is detected by the main controller 110, the payout of the number of prize balls according to the winning is performed by the prize ball command. (See FIG. 15), the main controller 110 instructs the payout controller 111. The total number of prize balls paid out by the prize ball command is added and stored in the total prize ball memory 213a. If the value of the total prize ball memory 213a is not 0, a prize ball is paid out, and the value is decremented by 1 each time one prize ball is detected. The payout of prize balls is performed until the value of the total prize ball number memory 213a becomes 0.

  The upper command storage buffer 213b is a buffer that stores an upper command (a first byte command) of the 2-byte commands output from the main controller 110 to the payout controller 111 shown in FIG. The main controller 110 outputs a payout return command, a payout initialization command, and 15 types of prize ball commands to the payout control device 111. The upper command storage buffer 213b stores these upper commands (99H , AAH, FOH to FEH) are stored. The contents of the upper command storage buffer 213b are cleared to 0 when the lower command (the second byte command) is input.

  The payout error flag 213c is a flag that is turned on when the payout control device 111 cannot normally input a 2-byte command output from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111 shown in FIG. When the payout error flag 213c is turned on, the character “C” is displayed on the 7-segment LED 121 by the state notification processing (S906 in FIGS. 25 and 29), and the occurrence of the command error is notified. The payout error flag 213c once turned on is turned off when a normal command of 2 bytes is input. When the payout error flag 213c is turned off, the error display of the 7-segment LED 121 is also canceled.

  The payout permission flag 213d is a flag for permitting the payout of the prize ball or the loaned ball, and is turned off in the startup process (S808, S811, S812 in FIG. 24), and the normal output from the main control device 110. When a command (payment initialization command, payout restoration command, prize ball command, etc.) is input, the command is turned on. That is, the payout permission flag 213d is a flag for confirming that the main control device 110 has started up.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110 is connected to input / output port 215 via connectors 207 and 217, and 7-segment LED 121, payout motor 216, external output terminal board 261 and the like are connected to each other. Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 241, and further connected to a prize ball detection switch (not shown) for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The seven-segment LED 121 is a display (display means) for notifying the state of the payout control device 111. When the payout control device 111 inputs a command output from the main control device 110 and determines that the command is an unspecified command (invalid command), the character “C” is displayed by the 7-segment LED 121. Is displayed and the occurrence of the command error is notified. Further, a hall computer 262 is configured to be connectable to the external output terminal board 261, and data and the like can be output from the payout control device 111 to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261. An error or the like generated in the payout control device 111 can also be output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 262.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and displays the display control device 114. This controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed in the above. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110 is connected to the input / output port 225 via connectors 208 and 228, and the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the like are also connected.

  The display control device 114 controls the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. It has. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, the ROM 232, the work RAM 233, and the image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Note that the pachinko machine 10 is a model having the same design as the design displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having different jackpot lottery probabilities and different numbers of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce cost.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the symbol display command input from the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs. The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores effect data such as symbols (background symbols and third symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The video RAM 234 is a memory for storing the effect data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 234.

  The image controller 236 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read out the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 having a RAM erasure switch 123. ing. The power supply unit 251 supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, and supplies a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches, solenoids, motors, etc., a voltage of 5 volts for logic, a RAM A backup voltage or the like for backup is generated, and these 12 volt, 5 volt, and backup voltages are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like with necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption) has occurred when this voltage falls below 22 volts. The power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing.

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit that outputs a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 123 is pressed. Main controller 110 clears backup data (contents of RAM 203) when RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

  Next, the launch control device 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the launch control device 112. The firing control device 112 includes a voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301, an added voltage adjusting unit 302, an adding circuit unit 303, a voltage supplying unit 304, a firing solenoid control unit 305, and a ball feed solenoid control unit 306. Have been.

  The voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 is a circuit that divides the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51, and includes an operational amplifier OP1 and a variable resistor having a variable resistance value. VR2. Here, the resistance value of the variable resistor VR2 can be adjusted by the operation knob 122a (see FIG. 3).

  The positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 on the input side of the power supply fluctuation adjustment unit 301 is connected to a variable resistor VR1 that detects the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance.

  In addition, a DC power supply DC1 of 5 volts is connected to one end of the variable resistor VR1, and the other end of the variable resistor VR1 is grounded. This is because the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 changes in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51, a DC voltage corresponding to the change in the resistance value is generated in the variable resistor VR1, and the generated DC voltage ( This is for inputting the signal SA1) to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1.

  The negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 is short-circuited with the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1, and the output of the operational amplifier OP1 is directly fed back to the negative input terminal of the operational amplifier OP1. Therefore, the operational amplifier OP1 is used as a buffer circuit that outputs the DC voltage input from the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 to the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 with an amplification degree of almost 1.

  One end of a variable resistor VR2 is connected in series to the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1, and the other end of the variable resistor VR2 is grounded. Therefore, the DC voltage (signal SA1) input from the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 has an amplification degree of almost 1, and is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1, and the output DC voltage is variable. The voltage is divided by the resistor VR2. The divided DC voltage is input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303. The DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 can be adjusted by adjusting the resistance value of the variable resistor VR2 with the operation knob 122a (see FIG. 3).

  In addition, a variation in the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is reduced by the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2, thereby playing a game. It is possible to adjust the range of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 and the width of the range in which the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the region is obtained. However, the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 is obtained by dividing the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by the variable resistor VR2. (Refer to signal SB1 in FIG. 9). This reduced voltage can be compensated for by the DC voltage input to the addition circuit unit 303 from the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 described below.

  The addition voltage adjustment unit 302 is a circuit that generates a DC voltage having a constant value, and includes a DC power supply DC2 of 12 volts, a resistor R1 having a fixed resistance value, a variable resistor VR3 having a variable resistance value, and a Zener. It is composed of a diode D1 and a capacitor CD1. Here, the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3 can be adjusted by the operation knob 122b (see FIG. 3).

  The other end of the variable resistor VR3 is grounded, and one end of the variable resistor VR3 is connected to the cathode of the Zener diode D1, one end of the capacitor CD1, and one end of the resistor R1. Since the anode of the Zener diode D1 is grounded, the Zener diode D1 and the variable resistor VR3 are connected in parallel. Further, since the other end of the capacitor CD1 is grounded, the capacitor CD1 and the variable resistor VR3 are connected in parallel similarly to the Zener diode D1. Therefore, a parallel circuit is formed by the capacitor CD1, the Zener diode D1, and the variable resistor VR3. The other end of the resistor R1 is connected to a DC power supply DC2 of 12 volts. The Zener diode D1 is used for stabilizing the constant voltage generated in the Zener diode D1 in order to make the DC voltage generated in the Zener diode D1 a constant value (constant voltage). The resistor R1 is used to limit the current supplied from the DC power supply DC2 of 12 volts.

  A 12-volt DC voltage supplied from a 12-volt DC power supply DC2 is divided by a resistor R1 and a parallel circuit of a capacitor CD1, a zener diode D1, and a variable resistor VR3. The constant DC voltage (Zener voltage) generated in the Zener diode D1 is also generated in the variable resistor VR3 connected in parallel with the Zener diode D1. Here, by adjusting the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3 with the operation knob 122b (see FIG. 3), the DC voltage output from the variable resistor VR3 can be adjusted at a voltage equal to or lower than the Zener voltage. Note that the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 is input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303. Here, by inputting the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, the range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is changed. Instead, only the range can be adjusted (see signal SC1 in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10). Therefore, by dividing the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301, the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 is changed. Even if the voltage becomes lower than the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1, the reduced voltage can be compensated for by the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3.

  Since the DC voltage supplied from the 12-volt DC power supply DC2 is made constant using the Zener diode D1, the DC voltage supplied from the 12-volt DC power supply DC2 becomes unstable, and the DC voltage varies. Also, the DC voltage generated in the Zener diode D1 has a stable constant value (constant voltage). Therefore, a stable constant voltage is also generated in the variable resistor VR3 connected in parallel with the Zener diode D1, so that the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 also becomes a stable constant voltage.

  The addition circuit unit 303 adds (adds) the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 and the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302. ) Output circuit, and includes resistors R2, R3, R4, and R5 having fixed resistance values, and an operational amplifier OP2.

  The variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 is connected to one end of the resistor R2, and the variable resistor VR3 of the added voltage adjusting unit 302 is connected to one end of the resistor R3. Here, the resistance values of the resistors R2, R3, R4, and R5 are all the same, and the other end of the resistor R3 is connected to the other end of the resistor R2 and the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2. ing. One end of a resistor R4 and one end of a resistor R5 are connected to a minus input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2. Is grounded.

  Therefore, the circuit composed of the resistors R2, R3, R4, and R5 and the operational amplifier OP2 uses a DC voltage (signal SB1) input from one end of the resistor R2 (generated at the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301). And a DC voltage input from one end of the resistor R3 (generated at the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjusting unit 302) and added (added) to function as an addition circuit that outputs the result from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2. I do. The DC voltage output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 is input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the voltage supply unit 304.

  The voltage supply unit 304 is a circuit that supplies a voltage to the firing solenoid 142. The voltage supply unit 304 includes an operational amplifier OP3, a low-pass filter F1, a DC-DC converter CV1 that is a booster, and a DC power supply DC3 that supplies a 32 volt DC voltage. And a capacitor CD2. Since the minus input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 and the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 are short-circuited, the operational amplifier OP3 functions as a buffer amplifier. The plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 is connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303. Therefore, the DC voltage generated at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit 303 is input from the plus input terminal of the operational amplifier OP3, has an amplification of almost 1, and is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3.

  The output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 is connected to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F1, and the low-pass filter F1 reduces noise (high-frequency component) superimposed on the DC voltage output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3. The output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 is connected to the input terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, and the DC-DC converter CV1 is further connected to a DC power supply DC3 for supplying a DC voltage of 32 volts. A DC voltage of 32 volts is supplied from the power supply DC3 to the DC-DC converter CV1. Therefore, the DC voltage (signal SC1) output from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 is boosted to the DC voltage Ec by the DC-DC converter CV1.

  One end (plus terminal) of a capacitor CD2 is connected to the output terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, and the other end of the capacitor CD2 is grounded. Therefore, the boosted DC voltage Ec output from the output terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1 is applied to the capacitor CD2 when the conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 described later is cut off. As a result, the capacitor CD2 stores an electric charge determined by the product of the capacitance of the capacitor CD2 and the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2. Note that a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 142 in accordance with the charge stored in the capacitor CD2.

  One end of a firing solenoid 142 is connected to the output terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, and the other end of the firing solenoid 142 is connected to the drain terminal D of the FET switch SW1 of the firing solenoid control unit 305. . Further, a diode D2 is connected between one end and the other end of the firing solenoid 142 at a stage subsequent to the capacitor CD2. Connected to the other end. This diode D2 suppresses back electromotive force (surge voltage) generated after the firing operation of the ball of the firing solenoid 142.

  The firing solenoid control unit 305 is a circuit for controlling on / off of the firing solenoid 142, and includes a resistor R6 having a fixed resistance value, a low-pass filter F2, a Schmitt trigger inverter IC1, an FET switch SW1, and a 5-volt switch. And a DC power supply DC1 for supplying a DC voltage.

  The input terminal of the low-pass filter F2 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and one end of the resistor R6 is connected between the input / output port 205 and the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2. The other end of the resistor R6 is connected to the DC power supply DC1, and when the input / output port 205 is in the on state (5 volt state), 5 volts is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2. Is in the off state (zero volt state), the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2 is in the non-input state (zero volt state). Since the input / output port 205 is repeatedly turned on and off, a firing control signal α which is a pulse signal generated when the input / output port 205 is turned on is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2.

  When the emission control signal α is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2, the noise (high-frequency component) superimposed on the emission control signal α is reduced by the low-pass filter F2. The output terminal of the low-pass filter F2 is connected to the input terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1, and the firing control signal α input to the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1 has its waveform shaped and inverted by the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1. Then, it is output as the firing control signal γ from the output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1.

  The output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1 is connected to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1. One end of the drain terminal D of the FET switch SW1 is connected to the other end of the firing solenoid 142 connected to the DC-DC converter CV1 and the anode of the diode D2, and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 is grounded. Therefore, when the firing control signal γ is input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1 (5 volt state), the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 conduct, and the firing solenoid 142 is connected to the capacitor CD2. A voltage E1 (maximum value Ec volts) generated by the stored charge is applied. As a result, the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 projects, and fires a ball disposed on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 toward the game area. Although details will be described with reference to FIG. 12 (d), the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD2 becomes the maximum value Ec volt at the moment of application, and with the lapse of time, The voltage value decreases.

  On the other hand, when the firing control signal γ is not input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1 (in a zero volt state), the conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 is cut off, and the firing solenoid 142 receives a voltage. E1 is not applied. As a result, the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 is returned from the projected state to the initial state by a spring (not shown) provided inside the firing solenoid 142.

  The ball feed solenoid control unit 306 is a circuit for controlling on / off of the ball feed solenoid 154, and includes a resistor R7 having a fixed resistance value, a low-pass filter F3, a Schmitt trigger inverter IC2, an FET switch SW2, The DC power supply DC1 supplies a DC voltage of 12 volts, and the DC power supply DC2 supplies a DC voltage of 12 volts.

  The input terminal of the low-pass filter F3 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and one end of the resistor R7 is connected between the input / output port 205 and the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3. The other end of the resistor R7 is connected to the DC power supply DC1, and when the input / output port 205 is on (5 volts), 5 volts is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3. Is in the off state (zero volt state), the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3 is in the non-input state (zero volt state). Since the input / output port 205 is repeatedly turned on and off, the ball feed control signal β which is a pulse signal generated when the input / output port 205 is turned on is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3.

  When the ball feed control signal β is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3, the noise (high-frequency component) superimposed on the ball feed control signal β is reduced by the low-pass filter F3. The output terminal of the low-pass filter F3 is connected to the input terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2. It is inverted and output as the ball feed control signal δ from the output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2.

  The output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2 is connected to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2. The drain terminal D of the FET switch SW2 is connected to the other end of the ball feed solenoid 154 and the anode of the diode D3. One end of the ball feed solenoid 154 has a cathode of the diode D3 and a DC power source DC2 for supplying a 12 volt DC voltage. Is connected. The source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 is grounded. Therefore, when the ball feed control signal δ is input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2 (5 volt state), the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 conduct, and the DC power supply is supplied to the ball feed solenoid 154. A DC voltage E2 of 12 volts supplied from DC2 is applied. As a result, the ball feeding solenoid 154 is turned on (excited), the metal piece 156 of the sending member 155 is pulled by the magnetic field of the ball feeding solenoid 154, and the sending member 155 rotates upward (see FIG. 5). Accordingly, the ball G1 is in a state of being accommodated in the holder 155a (see FIG. 5). The surge voltage generated when the ball feeding solenoid 154 is switched from on to off is suppressed by the diode D3.

  On the other hand, when the ball feed control signal δ is not input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2 (zero volt state), the conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 is cut off, and the ball feed solenoid 154 is turned off. No DC voltage E2 is applied. As a result, the sending member 155 rotates downward by its own weight, and the ball G1 housed in the holder 155a is sent out downward, and is arranged on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 6).

  Next, the operation of the firing control device 112 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating voltage changes of respective signals of the firing control device 112 illustrated in FIG. 8, and FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating changes in the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjusting unit 302 of the firing control device 112 illustrated in FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (a change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) when the firing solenoid 142 is activated.

  Further, FIG. 11 shows that the firing solenoid 142 when the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjusting unit 302 of the firing control device 112 shown in FIG. 8 is changed and the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 is changed. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a change in the maximum value of the applied voltage E1 (a change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2). FIG. 12 shows the firing permission signal SG3, the firing control signals α and γ, and the firing solenoid 142. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a timing chart of an applied voltage E1, ball feed control signals β and δ, and a DC voltage E2 applied to a ball feed solenoid 154.

  In FIG. 9, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the voltage of each signal. As shown in FIG. 9, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is set from a minimum value of zero degrees to a maximum value of 120 degrees, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 The DC voltage generated at the resistor VR1 (see FIG. 8) changes. When the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1, that is, the signal SA1, is input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 in the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301, the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 outputs A signal having an amplification degree of almost 1 is output (see FIG. 8). In the present embodiment, when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is zero degrees, the DC voltage value of the signal SA1 is about 0.7 volt, and the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is the maximum value 120. In this case, the DC voltage value of the signal SA1 is set to about 4.3 volts.

  Next, the signal output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 is divided by the variable resistor VR2, and the divided DC voltage signal SB1 is input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 (FIG. 8). In the present embodiment, when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is zero, which is the minimum value, the DC voltage value of the signal SB1 is about 0.25 volt, and the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is the maximum. When the value is 120 degrees, the DC voltage value of the signal SB1 is set to about 1.55 volts.

  On the other hand, the DC voltage (about 2.25 volts in the present embodiment) generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 is input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 (FIG. 2). 8). Therefore, the signal SB1 input to the resistor R2 of the adder circuit 303 and approximately 2.25 volts input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit 303 are added (added), and output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2. You.

  The signal output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 is input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3, which is a buffer amplifier, and is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 with an amplification degree of approximately 1 (FIG. 8). reference). The signal output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 has its noise component (high-frequency component) removed by the low-pass filter F1, and is output as the signal SC1 from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 (see FIG. 8). When the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is zero degree, which is the minimum value, the DC voltage value of the signal SC1 is approximately 0.25 volts of the DC voltage value of the signal SB1 input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303. And the DC voltage value of 2.25 volts input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit 303, which is approximately 2.50 volts, and the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is 120 degrees, which is the maximum value. At this time, the DC voltage of the signal SC1 is about 1.55 volts of the signal SB1 input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303, and the DC voltage value of 2.1.5 V input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303. It is about 3.80 volts, which is the sum of 25 volts.

  The signal SC1 output from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 is input to the input terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, is boosted, and becomes a DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2 (see FIG. 8).

  Next, referring to FIG. 10, a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjusting unit 302 of the firing control device 112 shown in FIG. 8 is changed ( The change of the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) will be described. In FIG. 10, the following conditions are set in order to clarify a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 due to a change in the variable resistor VR3.

  Voltage division by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 is not performed (the signal SA1 output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 is not divided), and the signal SA1 is input as the signal SB1 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303. I do. Under this condition, when the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 generates a constant value DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 (FIG. 10A), A comparison is made between the case where the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is not generated by the variable resistor VR3 of FIG. 302 (FIG. 10B).

  In FIG. 10, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2). Here, when the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 becomes less than 17.5 volts, the ball hit by the firing solenoid 142 becomes a foul ball. Also, when the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 becomes larger than 21 volts, the ball hit by the firing solenoid 142 becomes a right-hit ball. The foul ball is a launch rail 143 (see FIG. 5) that does not reach the launch port 68a where the return ball preventing member 68 (see FIG. 2) is located because the launching force (firing strength) of the launch solenoid 142 is weak. It means a ball returning to the side. A right-hit ball is a ball that has a strong launching force (firing strength) of the firing solenoid 142, moves along the rail 62 after being launched from the launch port 68a, and directly hits the return rubber 69 (see FIG. 2). Means

  As shown in FIG. 10B, when the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is not generated by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is reduced. When changing from zero degrees to 120 degrees, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 changes from about 4.5 volts to about 28.5 volts. Further, the range of the ball to be fouled is such that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is from zero to less than 66 degrees, and the range of the ball to be right-handed is that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 84 degrees to 120 degrees. I have. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is provided is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 10, the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 that becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area usually has a target value of 65 degrees which is the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51. It is set within an arbitrary range including.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10B, when the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is not generated by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, the turning operation of the operation handle 51 is performed. The target value of the amount of 65 degrees is not included in the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 (not less than 66 degrees and not more than 84 degrees), and the target value of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 65 degrees. , Can not hit the ball into the game area. Therefore, it is necessary to adjust the firing intensity of the ball (the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, that is, the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) with respect to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 10A, when a constant value DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is generated by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, When the amount of turning operation of the handle 51 is changed from zero degrees to 120 degrees, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 can be changed from about 6.0 volts to about 30.0 volts. . Further, the range of the ball to be fouled is when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is from zero degrees to less than 57 degrees, and the range of the ball to be hit right is when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 75 degrees to 120 degrees. I have. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is provided is 57 degrees or more and 75 degrees or less. Accordingly, the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 generates a constant DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, and includes 65 degrees which is the target value of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51. In this manner, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 that is the firing intensity at which the ball is struck into the game area can be adjusted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 11, the case where the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 of the firing control device 112 shown in FIG. 8 is changed and the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 is changed is shown. The change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) will be described. In FIG. 11, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the variable resistor VR3 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 is changed while the variable resistor VR3 of the added voltage adjusting unit 302 is changed. To clarify the change, the following conditions are used.

  The variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 generates a constant DC voltage to be input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, and the DC voltage is input to the variable resistor VR2 by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301. When the signal SB1 is divided into a signal SB1 (FIG. 11A), as in FIG. 10B, the signal SB1 is input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302. When the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is not divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 (the signal SA1 is directly used as the signal SB1) ( FIG. 11 (b)).

  11, as in FIG. 10, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 and the vertical axis represents the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2). I have.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 does not generate a constant DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, and the variable resistor VR3 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 When the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is not divided by the device VR2, the signal is applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degrees to 120 degrees. The maximum value of voltage E1 varies from about 4.5 volts to about 28.5 volts. Further, the range of the ball to be fouled is such that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is from zero to less than 66 degrees, and the range of the ball to be right-handed is that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 84 degrees to 120 degrees. I have. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into the game area in which the winning opening and the like are provided is not less than 66 degrees and not more than 84 degrees, and the target value of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is set. Is not included in the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 (not less than 66 degrees and not more than 84 degrees). Also, the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for hitting the ball into the game area, which originally requires fine adjustment of the launching strength of the ball, is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the width of the range Is 18 degrees.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11A, a constant value DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is generated by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, and the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 When the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 into a signal SB1 (FIG. 11A), the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degrees to 120 degrees. In this case, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 changes from about 16.0 volts to about 24.0 volts. In this case, the range in which the ball is a foul ball is such that the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is from zero degrees to less than 23 degrees, and the range in which the ball is a right-handed ball is that the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 77 degrees and 120 degrees. Degree. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is provided is 23 degrees or more and 77 degrees or less. Accordingly, a constant value DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is generated by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, and the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 is connected to the variable resistor VR2. When the input signal is divided and the signal SB1 is obtained, an operation handle having a firing intensity at which a ball is hit into the game area is included so as to include 65 degrees which is a target value of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. It is possible to adjust the range of the amount of rotation operation of 51.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11A, the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 generates a constant value DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, and the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301. When the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 to obtain the signal SB1, the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area is 23 degrees or more. It is 77 degrees or less, and the width of the range is 54 degrees. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 11 (a), as compared with 18 degrees which is the range width of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which the ball is hit into the game area in the case of FIG. 11 (b). In the example, the range width of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 at which the firing intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area is increased by 36 degrees. Therefore, the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 does not generate a DC voltage having a constant value input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, and the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 controls the variable resistor VR2. Compared with the case where the input signal is not divided (see FIG. 11B), the constant value DC input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302. When a voltage is generated and the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to obtain a signal SB1 (FIG. 11A), the ball is placed in the game area. Since the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving is widened, the firing intensity of the ball for driving the ball into the game area can be finely adjusted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 12, the relationship between the firing permission signal SG3, the firing control signals α and γ, and the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, and the ball feed control signals β and δ and the voltage applied to the ball feed solenoid 154 The relationship with the applied DC voltage E2 will be described. FIG. 12 shows the relationship between the firing permission signal SG3, the firing control signals α and γ, and the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, and the relationship between the ball feed control signals β and δ and the DC voltage E2 applied to the ball feed solenoid 154. 6 is a timing chart showing a relationship. In the present embodiment, the output time S1 of the firing control signal α is 12 ms, the output time S2 of the ball feed control signal β is 74 ms, and the output period S3 of the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β is 602 ms. . By setting the output cycle S3 of the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β to 602 ms, the firing of the ball by the firing solenoid 142 is reduced to 99.67 or less per minute.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, when the player touches the operation handle 51, the touch sensor 51a is turned on. If the stop switch 51b is off (from t1 to t4), the firing permission signal SG3 input from the signal conversion circuit 241 to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 is turned on (5 volt state).

  Then, the firing control signal α is output from the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 to the firing solenoid control unit 305 of the firing control device 112 for each output period S3 for each output period S3 (the state becomes zero volt, FIG. b)). The firing control signal α output to the firing solenoid control unit 305 is inverted by the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1 (see FIG. 8) to become a firing control signal γ (see FIG. 12C).

  The firing control signal γ is input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1 (see FIG. 8). As a result, the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1 is turned on (5 volt state), and the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 are electrically connected during the output time S1 (see FIG. 8). When the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 are turned on, as shown in FIG. 12D, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD2 is applied to the firing solenoid 142 as a voltage E1 (FIG. 8). reference). As a result, the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 protrudes, and fires a ball disposed on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 toward the game area (see FIG. 5). After the output time S1 has elapsed, the firing control signal α is turned off (5 volt state), so that the firing control signal γ is also turned off (zero volt state). When the firing control signal γ is turned off, the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1 is also turned off (zero volt state), and the conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 is cut off (FIG. 8). As a result, the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 is returned from the projected state to the initial state by a spring (not shown) provided inside the firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 5).

  The voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 becomes the maximum value Ec at each of t1, t2, and t3, and the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 decreases as the charge stored in the capacitor CD2 decreases. (See FIG. 12D). The voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2 is the maximum voltage value at each of t1, t2, and t3 of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142.

  When the player releases his / her hand from the operation handle 51, the firing permission signal SG3 is turned off (when the player touches the operation handle 51 after t4 in FIG. 12A, the stop switch 51b is on. The firing control signal α is not output from the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and the voltage E1 is not applied to the firing solenoid 142. Therefore, the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 is not protruded and remains in the initial state (see FIG. 5).

  As shown in FIG. 12 (e), when the firing permission signal SG3 is in the ON state, the ball feed control signal β is output from the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 to the ball feed solenoid controller 306 of the firing controller 112 in an output cycle. An output time S2 is output for each S3 (becomes a zero volt state). The ball feed control signal β output to the ball feed solenoid control unit 306 is inverted by the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2 (see FIG. 8) to become a ball feed control signal δ (see FIG. 12 (f)).

  The ball feed control signal δ is input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2 (see FIG. 8). As a result, the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2 is turned on (5 volt state), and the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 are electrically connected during the output time S2 (see FIG. 8). When the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 are turned on, as shown in FIG. 12 (g), a DC voltage E2 (12 volts) is applied to the ball feed solenoid 154 by the DC power supply DC2 ( See FIG. 8). As a result, the ball feed solenoid 154 is turned on (excitation state), the metal piece 156 of the sending member 155 is pulled by the magnetic field of the ball feeding solenoid 154, and the sending member 155 rotates upward (see FIG. 5). Accordingly, the ball G1 is in a state of being accommodated in the holder 155a (see FIG. 5). After the output time S2 has elapsed, the ball feed control signal β is turned off (5 volt state), so that the ball feed control signal δ is also turned off (zero volt state). When the ball feed control signal δ is turned off, the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2 is also turned off (zero volt state), and the conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 is cut off ( See FIG. 8). As a result, the sending member 155 rotates downward by its own weight, and the ball G1 housed in the holder 155a is sent out downward, and is arranged on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 6).

  When the firing permission signal SG3 is off (after time t4 in FIG. 12A), the ball feed control signal β is not output from the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and the DC voltage is also applied to the ball feed solenoid 154. E2 (12 volts) is not applied. Therefore, the delivery member 155 is not rotated upward but remains rotated downward by its own weight (see FIG. 6).

  The timing at which the firing solenoid 142 starts firing the ball and the timing at which the ball feeding solenoid 154 starts feeding the ball are the same as shown in FIG. 12, but the timing at which the firing solenoid 142 fires the ball. Does not coincide with the timing at which the ball is placed in front of the firing solenoid 142 by the ball feed solenoid 154. The reason will be described. The output time S2 of the ball feed control signal β for controlling the operation of the ball feed solenoid 154 is 74 ms, which is longer than the output time S1 of the firing control signal α for controlling the operation of the firing solenoid 142, which is 12 ms. . This is because the firing solenoid 142 completes firing of the ball during the time from when the ball feeding solenoid 154 starts feeding the ball to when the ball accommodated in the holder 155a of the ball feeding mechanism 144 is sent downward. This means that a longer time is required compared to the time required. Due to this time difference, the ball whose ball feed solenoid 154 has started ball feeding at the same time as the timing at which the firing solenoid 142 starts firing the ball fires a ball previously arranged on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142. After 142 is completed, it will be placed in front of firing solenoid 142. Therefore, even when the timing at which the firing solenoid 142 starts firing a ball and the timing at which the ball feed solenoid 154 starts ball feeding are simultaneous, the firing of the ball of the firing solenoid 142 and the ball toward the front of the firing solenoid 142 are performed. Is not simultaneous, and the firing of the ball by the firing solenoid 142 and the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 154 are performed alternately.

  Next, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 13A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 13B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9" and one type of petal-shaped sub-type formed smaller than the main symbols. Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are provided with an accessory design imitating a character such as a furoshiki, a helmet, etc., with a talisman covering almost the front of the wooden box, An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed in front of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. It is configured as follows. When shifting to the high-probability state (probable change state) after the end of the jackpot, a fluctuation display is performed in which main symbols (corresponding to “high-probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added are aligned. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low-probability state after the end of the big hit, a fluctuation display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to “low-probability symbols”) to which even-numbered numbers are aligned are provided. Here, the high-probability state refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as added value after the jackpot ends, that is, a so-called probability change (probable change). The normal state (low-probability state) refers to a state in which the probability of success is not constant, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of success is lower than that in the case of probability change.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and a lower two-thirds is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect and a character.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. For this reason, a total of 20 third symbols of 10 main symbols and 10 sub symbols are set in each symbol row, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity. The variable display is performed. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, a third symbol is displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols in three rows and three columns. In the main display area Dm, five effective lines, that is, an upper line L1, a middle line L2, a lower line L3, a rising line L4, and a rising line L5 are set. Then, at the time of each game, the variable display stops in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and at the time of the stop, the combination of the big hit symbols on any of the activated lines (in this embodiment, If they are arranged with the same combination of the main symbols), the big hit movie will be displayed as a big hit.

  The sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three notice areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Here, the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3 are usually covered with a double-sided opaque door that is electrically opened and closed by a solenoid (not shown). When opened, the display area becomes visible to the player. The center notice area Ds2 is a display area that is always visible without being covered by the door.

  As shown in FIG. 13B, on the actual display screen, a total of nine main symbols and three sub symbols are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, the left and right doors are closed, and the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3 are covered and hidden, so that the display screen cannot be viewed. If one or both of the left and right doors are opened during the change display, a moving image is displayed in the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3, and the player is informed that the state is easier to transition to the big hit than usual. It is suggested. In the center notice area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in the present embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or a different character is displayed. And an announcement performance is performed. Although the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into upper and lower display areas Dm and Ds in principle, the third symbol and characters are displayed larger across the display areas Dm and Ds. A display effect can be performed.

  Next, a counter provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37, lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 82, and the like.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37, a first random number counter C1 used for a jackpot lottery, a first hit type symbol counter C2 used for selecting a jackpot symbol, and a stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. In addition, a second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 82, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated at an interval of 4 ms, which is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 18), or at an interval of 2 ms, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21). The data is appropriately stored in the counter buffer. The RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored in synchronization with the ball winning timing.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 738 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738). In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) is executed. It is updated once and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 18). The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once every timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment), and is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored in the area. The number of random hit values at the time of low probability and the high probability are set at two types. The number of random numbers at the time of low probability is two, and the value is “373,727”. Yes, the number of random number values that will be a big hit at a high probability is 14, and the value is "59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733".

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 at the time of a big hit. In the present embodiment, the first hit type counter C2 is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 4 to obtain the maximum value ( That is, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 4). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64. Stored in the area. Note that the value of the random number that becomes the high probability state after the big hit is “1, 2, 3”, the value of the random number that becomes the low probability state after the big hit is “0, 4”, and two types of the hit types are determined. You. Therefore, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots, a high probability state and a low probability state, and a display mode corresponding to a loss. Any one of the three types of display modes is selected.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop pattern selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. A "reach out of front and rear" (for example, in the range of 0 to 8) to stop, and a "reach other than front and rear out of reach" (for example, in the range of 9 to 38) in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than before and after the reach symbol after the reach is also generated. , "Stop completely" (for example, in the range of 39 to 238) in which no reach occurs, three stop (effect) patterns are selected. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203. Is stored in

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random numbers from which the stop pattern is selected. This depends on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability state or the low-probability state, in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random number value is stored (that is, the number of reserved), and the like. This is for changing the selection ratio of the stop pattern.

  For example, in the high-probability state, a table in which the range of the random value corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is as large as 10 to 238 is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur, It becomes easy to select "completely out of order". In this table, the “reach out of front and rear” is narrowed to 0 to 5 and the “reach other than front and rear out” is also narrowed to 6 to 9, making it difficult to select “reach out of front and rear” or “reach other than front and rear out”. Further, if the random numbers are not stored in the reserved ball storage area in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, the disturbance corresponding to the "completely out" stop pattern is required. A table whose numerical value range is as narrow as 51 to 238 is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely out of range”. In this table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop pattern of “reach other than front and rear out” is widened to 9 to 50, and “reach other than front and back out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, the ball entry time of the ball into the first entrance 64 can be ensured, so that the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously.

  Of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is configured to be added one by one in the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The other variation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 240, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240). In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”.

  A rough display mode such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and the like is determined by the first variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Further, the second variation type counter CS2 determines the variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (the middle symbol in the present embodiment) stops after the occurrence of the reach. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the display control device 114 determines the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 81. Therefore, by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode by a combination of the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol. The values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 18) described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  The value of the variation type counter CS3 is, for example, added one by one in the range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is also referred to as “third variation type counter”. The third symbol display device 81 according to the present embodiment performs a decorative effect according to the display mode of the first symbol display device 37. In addition to the symbol variation, the third symbol display device 81 slides a fluctuating symbol. For example, a notice effect such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the announcement effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3. More specifically, an effect pattern that does not add or subtract the time required for the notice effect to the fluctuation time, or subtracts the fluctuation time to shorten the time of fluctuation display, or selects the fluctuation time is selected. . In addition, similarly to the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random numbers from which the effect pattern is selected, and determines whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state. The selection ratio of each effect pattern is configured to be different depending on whether it is in the low probability state, in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random number value is stored, and the like.

  As described above, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and the time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time is determined by the variation type counter CS3. Therefore, the final variation time until the final stop symbol stops is determined by the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter which is sequentially incremented by one in a range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 250). In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is determined that the ball has passed the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Acquired when detected. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is executed once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 18).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a command output from main controller 110 to payout controller 111 will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing commands output from main control device 110 to payout control device 111. The command is composed of 2 bytes, and is output from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111 in the order of the first byte and the second byte via the connectors 207 and 217 as 8-bit parallel data. In the first byte of the command, the most significant bit is set ("1"), and in the second byte, the most significant bit is reset ("0"). Therefore, the payout control device 111 can determine whether the input data is the first byte or the second byte of the command by setting or resetting the most significant bit.

  In the pachinko machine 10, not all commands shown in FIG. 15 are necessarily used. That is, some pachinko machines 10 use only a part of the commands shown in FIG. For example, there is also a pachinko machine 10 that uses only a payout return command, a payout initialization command, a five-prize-ball payout command, and a fifteen-prize-ball payout command.

  Data input / output between the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 is performed only in one direction from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111. This is because the number of input signals to the main control device 110 that performs the main control of the game is reduced as much as possible, so that an illegal act on the main control device 110 is suppressed. For this reason, even if the output command data changes due to noise, disconnection or short-circuit of the signal line, fraud, etc., main controller 110 cannot detect the change and cannot detect an abnormality.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the command output from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111 is composed of 2 bytes, and when these are added or exclusive ORed one by one, the least significant one byte after the operation is calculated. Is set to FFH. Accordingly, the payout control device 111 adds or exclusive ORs the input 2-byte command one byte at a time, and if the result is not FFH, determines that the command is not a normal command and inputs the command. Is invalidated, and the character "C" is displayed on the 7-segment LED 121 provided in the payout control device 111 to notify a command error.

  Commands output from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111 include a prize ball command instructing payout of a prize ball. Since the prize ball command has a great effect on the player and the game arcade, even if the output of the command is only in one direction from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111, the command is input in the payout control device 111. The configuration is such that it can be determined whether or not the command is normal.

  If there is a disconnection in the signal line that outputs the prize ball command, it can be reliably detected by the above method (the result of addition or exclusive OR is FFH). That is, if any signal line is disconnected, the data (bit) of that signal line always becomes the same data (“0 and 0” or “1 and 1”) in both the first byte and the second byte. Therefore, when the first byte and the second byte of the command are added or exclusive ORed, the bit corresponding to the disconnected signal line becomes 0, and the result of the addition or exclusive OR does not become FFH. It is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the payout control device 111 is started, the payout return command and the payout initialization command always output from the main control device 110 are used, and a signal line for transmitting these commands, It is possible to detect whether or not there is a short circuit (solder bridge) in the connectors 207 and 217 for connecting the signal lines.

  FIG. 16A is a diagram showing an arrangement of signal pins of a connector 207 provided in the main control device 110, and FIG. FIG.

  A short circuit of a signal line or a signal pin or a solder bridge occurs in an adjacent signal line (pin). As shown in FIG. 16A, the connector 207 of the main control device 110 has signal pins arranged adjacent to each other in bit order. Therefore, by setting the first byte of the payout initialization command to AAH (1010B) and the second byte to 55H (0101B), the output of the payout initialization command causes the adjacent signal line or signal pin of the connector 207 to be connected. Can be set or reset alternately. Therefore, when the payout control device 111 can normally input the payout initialization command, it is possible to detect the absence of a short circuit or a solder bridge in these signal lines or signal pins.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 16B, the connector 217 of the payout device 111 has signal pins arranged in two stages. Therefore, by setting the first byte of the payout return command to 99H (1001B) and the second byte to 66H (0110B), the output of the payout return command causes the signal lines adjacent to the connector 217 in the vertical and horizontal directions to be output. Alternatively, the signal pins can be set or reset alternately. In addition, by setting the first byte of the payout initialization command to AAH (1010B) and the second byte to 55H (0101B), the output of the payout initialization command causes the signal line or signal pin obliquely adjacent to the connector 217 to be output. Can be set or reset alternately. Therefore, when the payout control device 111 can normally input the payout return command and the payout initialization command, it is possible to detect the absence of a short circuit or a solder bridge in these signal lines or signal pins.

  The connector 217 may be configured in the arrangement shown in FIG. 16A, or the connector 207 may be configured in the arrangement shown in FIG. Further, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 may be connected using a connector other than the arrangement shown in FIG. 16 (a) or 16 (b). In such a case, the payout return command and the payout initialization command are configured as data for alternately setting or resetting signal lines or signal pins adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions of the connector.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (in the present embodiment, at a period of 2 ms). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a startup process and The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, for example, every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt processing, first, various pay switches are read (S501). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information). Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (738 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), the counter value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, first type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and second random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are set to the maximum value (this embodiment). Then, when they reach 738, 4, 238, 250), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Thereafter, a start winning process (see FIG. 22) accompanying the winning in the first entrance 64 is executed (S504), a firing control process is executed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and turns on the launch of the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is not operated. / Off determination. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the payout control is performed on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (not operated). The firing permission signal SG3 is input from the signal conversion circuit 241 of the board 111 to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. When the firing permission signal SG3 is input to the input / output port 205, the MPU 201 outputs the firing control signal α from the input / output port 205 to the firing solenoid control unit 305 (see FIG. 8) of the firing control device 112, and fires. The ball feed control signal β is output from the input / output port 205 to the ball feed solenoid control unit 306 of the control device 112. When the firing permission signal SG3 is not input to the input / output port 205, the MPU 201 does not output the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β.

  The start winning process executed in the process of S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start winning) (S601). If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the number N of pending balls of the first symbol display device 37 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). It is determined (S602). If there is a prize in the first entrance 64 and the number N of active balls is less than 4 (S602: Yes), the number N of active balls is incremented by 1 (S603), and further updated in step S503. The values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in the first of the free reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S604). On the other hand, whether there is no prize in the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the number of active balls is not N <4 (S602: No). , S603 and S604 are skipped, the start winning process ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S701). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the dispatching / launching control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. This start-up process is started by a reset interrupt process when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S101). More specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value, and the control devices on the sub side (the peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are set in an operable state. In order to wait, a wait process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed. Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasure switch 123 provided on the power supply 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S110. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 123 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105). If not, the RAM 203 is not stored (S105: No). Since the backup data is not stored, the process also proceeds to S110 in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S110 in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S213 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S110, a payout initialization command (see FIG. 15) is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S110). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the ball payout control (FIG. 28). After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S111, S112).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 123. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 123 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S111, S112) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (S111, S112) of the RAM 203 is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S111, S112), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S111), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S112). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S113.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 123 is not turned on (S104: No), the power-off information is stored (S105: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S104: No). S107: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command (see FIG. 15) at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S113. I do. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the ball payout control while holding the data stored in the RAM 213 (see FIG. 28).

  In the process of S113, the interrupt is permitted, and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, the output data such as the command updated in the previous process is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S201). Specifically, the presence / absence of prize detection information detected in the switch reading process of S501 is determined, and if there is prize detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the acquired ball number is transmitted to the payout control device 111. As shown in FIG. 15, the prize ball command is composed of 15 types of 2-byte commands of FE01H to F00FH, and by this external output processing, a total of 2 bytes are continuously transmitted one by one via the connectors 207 and 217. The byte is transmitted (output) to the payout control device 111. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop symbol command, a stop command, an effect time addition command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted via the connectors 208 and 228. It is transmitted (output) to the sound lamp control device 113. Furthermore, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted (output) to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when their counter value reaches the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and the second process are performed. A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). The details of the fluctuation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the fluctuation process, a large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 in the case of the big hit state is executed (S205). In other words, the specific winning opening 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “○” or “X”) by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S206). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained at the timing of passing, and the second symbol display device 82 Of the second symbol is displayed on the display unit 83. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol hits, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the above-described processes from S201 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S208: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 is repeatedly executed (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the change type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when their counter value reaches the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Here, the execution time of each processing of S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, so the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 can also be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S207, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 23 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S211 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power shutdown notification command indicating that the power has been shut down is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). The message is transmitted (S212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the processing of S207 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206 or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. It can be started from the processing of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201, similarly to the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S101). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S201. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the fluctuation processing (S204) will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. In the fluctuation processing, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is currently underway (S301). The term “big hit” includes the middle of the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of the big hit and the middle of the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is being hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), it is determined whether or not the number N of operation pending balls is larger than 0 (S303). If the number N of operation-reserved balls is 0 (S303: No), the present process is terminated as it is. If the number of active balls N> 0 (S303: Yes), the number N of active balls is subtracted by 1 (S304), and the data stored in the reserved ball storage area is shifted (S305). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side, and includes a first reserved area → an execution area, a second reserved area → The data in each area is shifted in the order of the first reserved area, the third reserved area → the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area → the third reserved area, and so on. After the data shift processing, a fluctuation start processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the changing time has elapsed (S307). The display time during the fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the fluctuation type counter CS3. If it has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308). In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation is started, the red LED is turned off. Turns off and turns on the green LED.If the green LED is turned on, turns off the green LED and turns on the blue LED.If the blue LED is turned on, turns on the blue LED. A display mode for turning off the red LED and turning on the red LED is set. Note that the fluctuation process is executed every 4 ms, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed for each fluctuation process, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, in order to make the player confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED, the variation process counts a counter (not shown) by 1 each time the execution is performed, and when the counter reaches 100, the lighting of the LED is performed. The color is changed, and the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset (cleared to 0) when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuating time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S309). The setting of the stop symbol is determined as to whether or not a large hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. It is determined whether the symbol is in the low probability state. In the present embodiment, the red LED is turned on when the high probability state is reached after the jackpot, the green LED is turned on when the low probability state is set, and the blue LED is turned on when the state is off. . The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stopped symbol is set in the process of S309, the fluctuation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. A command is set (S310). When receiving the stop command, the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to stop. The variation of the third symbol display device 81 stops after the variation time elapses, and the variation effect of 1 in the third symbol display device 81 ends by receiving the stop command.

  Next, the change start process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the change start process (S306), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit has occurred based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S401). Whether or not a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the first hit random number counter value and the mode at that time. As described above, “373, 727” is the hit value among the numerical values 0 to 738 of the first random number counter C1 at the time of normal low probability, and “59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367” at the time of high probability. , 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733 "are the winning values.

  If it is determined that the hit is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is confirmed, and the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S402). ). In the processing of S402, whether to shift to the high probability state or the low probability state after the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2. When the transition state after the big hit is set, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the stop symbol of the jackpot of the third symbol display device 81 is set by the display control device 114. That is, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 can be set by setting the transition state after the big hit in the process of S402. Note that among the numerical values 0 to 4 of the first hit type counter C2, if the value is "0, 4", the state shifts to the low probability state, and if the value is "1, 2, 3", the state shifts to the high probability state.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S403). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S403, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol is determined. You. At this time, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are checked, and rough symbol variations such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. The fluctuation time is determined, and the fluctuation time (in other words, the number of fluctuation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol Z2) stops after the occurrence of the reach based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. decide.

  Note that the relationship between the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation time and the relationship between the value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are defined in advance by a table or the like. However, the fluctuation time can be set using only the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, and can be set only by the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Whether to perform the setting or to set both values of both the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is appropriately determined in accordance with the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game condition each time.

  If it is determined in the processing of S401 that the hit is not a big hit (S401: No), a display mode at the time of departure is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. The effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out of reach. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of the value corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 depends on whether the state is the high probability state, the low probability state, and the number of operation suspensions N. The tables are set differently.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S405), the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the departure symbol. Is determined. At this time, as in the process of S403, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are checked, and based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are performed. And the like, and the fluctuation time until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol Z2) stops after the occurrence of the reach based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. (For example, the number of fluctuating symbols).

  When the processing of S403 or the processing of S405 is completed, an effect time to be added to or subtracted from the fluctuation time determined by the first and second type counters CS1 and CS2 is determined (S406). At this time, the addition or subtraction of the rendering time is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display is performed. The fluctuation time of the device 81 is set. In the present embodiment, the determination of the effect time addition / subtraction is determined according to the value of the third variation type counter CS3, when the variation display time is not changed, when the variation display time is added by 1 second, and when the variation display time is added by 2 seconds. In the case of adding seconds, four types of added values are determined, in which the variable display time is subtracted by 1 second.

  In the case where the variable display time is added or subtracted, a notice effect in which the expected value of the jackpot is increased in the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a slip effect in which the variable symbol is made longer than usual and the slip is accompanied by a slip effect, or the like) An effect of displaying an advance notice character, an effect of shortening the fluctuation time of a fluctuating symbol shorter than usual, and immediately stopping, and the like are performed. When the value of the first random number counter C1 is a big hit, the probability that the added value of 2 seconds is selected is set to be high, so that the player can expect the big hit by confirming the announcement effect. Can be.

  Next, a variation pattern command is set in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the process of S403 or S405 (S407), and a stop symbol command is set in accordance with the stop symbol set in the process of S402 or S404. (S408). Then, an effect time addition command is set according to the effect time addition value determined in the process of S406 (S409), and the process returns to the fluctuation process.

  Next, payout control executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a start-up process of the payout control device 111. This start-up process is executed when the power is turned on. First, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, RAM access is permitted (S802), and an external interrupt vector is set (S803).

  After that, a data backup process is performed on the RAM 213 in the MPU 211. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 (S804). If it is not stored (S804: No), the backup data is not stored, so the process proceeds to S811. Transition. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 (S804: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S805). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S805: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S811 in such a case. As described later in the process of S917 in FIG. 25, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 213. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 213 is correctly stored.

  In the initialization processing of the RAM in S811, S812, all the areas of the RAM 213 are cleared to 0 (S811), and the initial value of the RAM 213 is set (S812). After that, initialization of peripheral devices of the MPU 211 is performed (S809), interruption is permitted (S810), and the process proceeds to the main processing.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is set (S804: Yes) and the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal (S806: Yes), the data backed up in the RAM 213 is held, In addition to clearing the power-off occurrence information (S807), the pay-out permission flag 213d is turned off in order to wait for the payout of payout balls (S808). After that, initialization of peripheral devices of the MPU 211 is performed (S809), interruption is permitted (S810), and the process proceeds to the main processing.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to a flowchart of FIG. The main process first receives a prize ball command, a payout return command, and a payout initialization command from the main control device 110, and performs a command determination process for determining the type of the command (S901). Although the details of the command determination process will be described later, in this process, when a normal command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the payout permission flag 213d is turned on, and the payout of the prize ball or the loaned ball is permitted.

  That is, after execution of the command determination process (S901), the state of the payout permission flag 213d is determined (S902), and if the payout permission flag 213d is not turned on (S902: No), the main control device 110 is still in a started state. In such a case, the command determination process (S901) is repeatedly executed until the payout permission flag 213d is turned on in the command determination process (S901). On the other hand, in the process of S902, if the payout permission flag 213d is turned on (S902: Yes), the main control device 110 has already been started up. When it is determined that the return operation is started, the state return operation is performed (S903).

  After that, the setting of the lower plate full state or the lower plate full release state is executed according to the change of the state of the lower plate 50 (S904). That is, the full state of the lower plate 50 is determined by the detection signal of the lower plate full switch, and when the lower plate is full, the setting of the lower plate full state is executed. Then, the lower plate full state release state is set. In addition, the setting of the tank ball absence state or the tank ball absence release state is executed according to the change of the state of the tank ball (S905). That is, the tank ball absence switch is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball absence switch, and when the tank ball has become empty, the setting of the tank ball absence state is executed. Execute the settings. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a notification state, and if there is a notification state, the notification is made by the 7-segment LED 121 provided in the payout control device 111 (S906). The state notification process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a prize ball payout process is executed by each process of S907 to S909. That is, if the prize ball is not in the payout disabled state and the value of the total prize ball number memory 213a that stores the number of prize balls is not 0 (S907: No, S908: No), the prize ball is paid out. The ball control process is started (S909). On the other hand, if the prize ball cannot be paid out (S907: Yes) or the value of the total prize ball number memory 213a is 0 (S908: Yes), the process shifts to the ball lending payout process.

  In the ball lending payout processing from S910 to S912, if the ball lending is not in the ball lending impossible state and a ball lending payout request is received from the card unit (S910: No, S911: Yes), the ball lending is paid out. To start the ball lending control process. On the other hand, if the rental ball cannot be paid out (S910: Yes) or if the rental ball payout request has not been received (S911: No), the process proceeds to S913. Also, after the ball lending control process (S912) ends, the process similarly shifts to S913.

  In the processing of S913, control of the vibrator 134 (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged (S913). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 (S914). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored (S914: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. Since no output has been made and the power has not been cut off, in such a case, the processing shifts to S901, and the main processing from S901 to S913 is repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S914, if the power-off occurrence information is stored (S914: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. 23 has been executed. Therefore, in such a case, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S915), and the command determination process is executed again in order to prevent the omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110 (S916). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the RAM 213 (S917), access to the RAM 213 is prohibited (S918), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed. Here, for example, the RAM determination value is a checksum value in the stack area and the work area of the RAM 213 to be backed up.

  In the processing of S914, the power-off occurrence information is checked at the end of one cycle of the main processing of the payout control device 111. Therefore, when returning from the state before the power-off, the processing is started. After the end of the processing, the processing can be started from the processing of S901. That is, the main process can be started in a manner similar to the case where the main process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 211 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not changed in the initialization process (S801). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S901. Therefore, the control load of the payout control device 111 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the payout control device 111 to malfunction or run away. Further, since the power-off process is executed at the timing when each process is completed, the amount of information to be backed up in the RAM 213 can be reduced.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed in the main process of the payout control device 111. The command determination process determines whether the received command is a normal command, and if the command is a normal command, executes a process corresponding to the command.

  First, it is checked whether or not there is a new received command (S1001). If there is no new received command (S1001: No), this process ends. If there is a new received command (S1001: Yes), it is determined whether the received command is the first byte data or the second byte data (S1002). As described above with reference to FIG. 15, if the most significant bit is set, it is the first byte data (S1002: Yes). Is checked (S1003).

  When two bytes of the command are received, the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is cleared to 0. Therefore, the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is 0 when the data of the first byte is received normally. Therefore, if the value of the higher-order command storage buffer 213b is not 0 (S1003: No), since some abnormality has occurred, the payout error flag 213c is turned on (S1004), and the process proceeds to S1005. On the other hand, if the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is 0 (S1003: Yes), the process skips S1004 and shifts the process to S1005. In the processing of S1005, the received first byte data is written to the upper command storage buffer 213b and stored (S1005).

  In the process of S1002, if the received command is not the first byte data but the second byte data (S1002: No), the second byte data of the received command and the upper command storage in the process of S1005 The value stored in the buffer 213b, that is, the data of the first byte is added (S1006). If the result of the addition is FFH (S1007: Yes), since the received command is normal, it is checked whether the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is F0H or more (S1008).

  As shown in FIG. 15, if the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is equal to or greater than F0H (S1008: Yes), the received command is a prize ball command. In such a case, a prize ball payout number setting process is executed. (S1009). On the other hand, if the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is not equal to or greater than F0H (S1008: No), the received command is the payout return command or the payout initialization command, and in such a case, the state setting process is executed ( S1010). After executing the prize ball payout number setting processing or the state setting processing, the processing shifts to S1001, and the processing described above is repeated. The prize ball payout number setting processing or the state setting processing will be described later.

  In the process of S1007, if the result of the addition of the first byte data and the second byte data is not FFH (S1007: No), some abnormality has occurred. Therefore, in such a case, the pay-out error flag 213c is turned on (S1011) to indicate the occurrence of a command error, and the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is cleared to 0 (S1012), and the received 2-byte command is deleted. Disable. This can prevent malfunction of the payout control device 111 due to reception of an abnormal command. After the processing in S1012, the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processing is repeated.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the prize ball payout number setting process (S1009) executed in the command determination process. In the prize ball payout number setting process, the value of the total prize ball number memory 213a is updated according to the received prize ball command.

  First, it is checked whether the number of winning balls of the received winning ball command is 1 or more and 15 or less (S1101). If not (S1101: No), an incorrect winning ball command is received (FIG. 15). reference). Therefore, in such a case, the received command is invalidated, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the number of award balls in the received award ball command is 1 or more and 15 or less (S1101: Yes), the number of award balls indicated by the award ball command is added to the total award ball number memory 213a (S1102). The added number of winning balls are paid out by the above-described winning ball control process (S909). After that, the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is cleared to 0 (S1103), and the payout permission flag 213d is turned on (S1104) to prepare for the reception of the next command, and the payout of the prize balls is permitted. Further, the pay-out error flag 213c is turned off (S1105), and this processing ends.

  As described above, since the payout error flag 213c is turned off by receiving a normal command, even when an abnormal command is temporarily input due to the influence of noise or the like, the normal command is input. By releasing the notification of the command error, the game can be continued normally.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a state setting process (S1010) executed in the command determination process. In the state setting processing, processing corresponding to the payout return command or the payout initialization command is executed.

  If the received command is the payout return command (S1201: Yes), the process proceeds to S1206. Then, the payout permission flag 213d is turned on (S1206), the payout of the prize ball is permitted, the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is cleared to 0 (S1207), and a payout error is prepared in preparation for receiving the next command. The flag 213c is turned off (S1208), and this process ends.

  If the received command is the payout initialization command (S1201: No, S1202: Yes), the state of the payout permission flag 213d is checked (S1203). If the payout permission flag 213d is off (S1203: No), the payout initialization command is normally received. In such a case, the work area of the RAM 213 is cleared to 0 (S1204), and the work area is initialized. The initial value of the time is set (S1205), and the work area of the RAM 213 is initialized.

  Thereafter, as in the case of receiving the payout return command, the payout permission flag 213d is turned on (S1206), the payout of the prize balls is permitted, the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is cleared to 0 (S1207), In addition, in preparation for the reception of this command, the payout error flag 213c is turned off (S1208), and this processing ends.

  Even if the received command is the payout initialization command (S1201: No, S1202: Yes), if the payout permission flag 213d is turned on (S1203: Yes), any of the normal commands shown in FIG. Upon receiving the command, the payout control of the prize balls is enabled. Therefore, in such a case, in order to avoid initialization of the work area of the RAM 213, the processing from S1204 to S1206 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S1207. Thereafter, the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is cleared to 0 (S1207), the payout error flag 213c is turned off in preparation for the reception of the next command (S1208), and this processing ends.

  If the received command is neither a payout return command (S1201: No) nor a payout initialization command (S1202: No), an incorrect prize ball command is received (see FIG. 15). , The received command is invalidated, and this processing ends.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the state notification process (S906) executed in the main process. In the state notification process, first, the state of the payout error flag 213c is confirmed (S1301), and if it is on (S1301: Yes), the character "C" is displayed on the 7-segment LED 121 to indicate that a command error has occurred. A notification is issued (S1302). On the other hand, when the payout error flag 213c is not turned on (S1302: No), or after the process of S1302, other states of the payout control device 111, such as the full state of the lower plate 50 and the storage state of the ball of the tank, etc. Is notified (S1303), and this process ends.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 based on the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51. Changes. The DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301, and the divided DC voltage is input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303. When the DC voltage output from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 is input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 outputs the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301. And the DC voltage output by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjusting unit 302 is added. Then, based on the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit 303, the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 is controlled by the voltage supply unit 304.

  Here, as shown in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, in the conventional ball launching apparatus, when adjusting the launching strength of the ball hit by the solenoid, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are turned. The firing intensity is adjusted by mechanically moving the solenoid up and down and back and forth. Therefore, when the player or the like causes an impact on the gaming machine or when the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are loosened due to a change with time, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are out of adjustment. Occurs. Therefore, there has been a problem that a predetermined firing intensity corresponding to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle is not generated due to a shift of the position where the mallet of the solenoid collides with the ball.

  On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 is changed by the variable resistor of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302. By the adjustment by VR3, the DC voltage divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 is generated from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 to the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302. The DC voltage obtained by adding the obtained DC voltages is output. Therefore, by adjusting the DC voltage input to the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 by the variable resistor VR3, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 (the game width) at which the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area becomes When the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the ball is fired into the area is in the range of 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, the ball is added to the game area without changing the range width (18 degrees). It is possible to change the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 at which the firing intensity is applied. For example, when the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the shooting intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is in the range of 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, the center value 75 degrees of the range is added by the variable resistor VR3. By adjusting the DC voltage input to the operational amplifier OP2 of the circuit unit 303, the center value is set to 66 degrees, and the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51, which is a firing intensity at which a ball is driven into the game area, is 57 degrees or more and 75 degrees. The following range can be set.

  Therefore, as described above, by adjusting the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, the operation handle It is possible to adjust the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 to be the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area so as to include, for example, 65 degrees, which is the target value of the amount of rotation of the 51.

  Further, by dividing the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 by the variable resistor VR2, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51. Of the divided voltage (the difference between the minimum DC voltage value generated in the variable resistor VR2 and the maximum DC voltage value), and the fluctuation width of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (to the variable resistor VR1). (The difference between the minimum DC voltage value and the maximum DC voltage value). That is, the gradient of the divided voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 (a straight line connecting the minimum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 and the maximum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 (the signal SB1 in FIG. 9) ) Changes the gradient of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (the minimum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 and the maximum of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1) in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. It can be made smaller than a straight line connecting the values (the slope of the signal SA1 in FIG. 9).

  Here, the divided voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 becomes a voltage input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303, and thus a fluctuation width (gradient) of the voltage input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303. Can be reduced, and the fluctuation range of the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 (the gradient of the signal SC1 in FIG. 9) can be reduced. Then, as the fluctuation width (slope) of the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit section 303 decreases, the fluctuation width (slope) of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply section 304 also decreases. . Since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 for hitting a ball into the game area is within a certain range (for example, 17.5 volts to 21.0 volts (see FIG. 11)), the voltage applied to the firing solenoid 142 By reducing the fluctuation range (inclination) of E1, it is possible to widen the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area (for example, the firing intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area is obtained). The rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the range width of 18 degrees can be set in the range of 23 degrees or more and 77 degrees or less, and the range width can be expanded to 54 degrees (see FIG. 11). )). Therefore, the range of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 can be adjusted so as to include the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, for example, 65 degrees.

  The voltage divided by the variable resistor VR2 is smaller than the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. However, the reduced voltage can be compensated for by the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303. As a result, even if the range of variation in the firing intensity of the sphere is reduced by the variable resistor VR2, the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is increased by the variable resistor VR3, thereby turning the operation handle 51. The firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 with respect to the operation amount can be the firing intensity for driving the ball into the game area.

  In addition, the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the shooting intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area can be changed to have a wide range width. That is, it is possible to widen the range of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area. Therefore, the firing intensity for hitting a ball into the game area can be finely adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.

  Here, as shown in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, in the conventional ball launching device, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are turned to mechanically move the solenoid up and down, back and forth. Since the emission intensity is adjusted, the accuracy of the adjustment of the emission intensity depends on the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob. There was a problem that it was low.

  However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the firing intensity of the sphere fired by the firing solenoid 142 is changed by the direct current input from the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303. The voltage and the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 are adjusted. In general, the DC voltage has a property that it is easy to finely and accurately adjust and is resistant to change over time (it is hard to get out of order). Alternatively, the range width can be finely and accurately adjusted, and the adjustment can be made strong against change over time (to prevent deviation).

  Further, since the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 includes the variable resistor VR2, the DC voltage input from the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, the DC voltage input from the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 may change from the initially set value due to the aging of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 or the like. In this case, when the DC voltage input from the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 changes, the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 to the voltage supply unit 304 also changes. I do. Then, since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 also changes, the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area changes from the initially set range. . Further, there is a case where the range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area becomes smaller than the range width initially set.

  In these cases, the voltage value input from the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 is changed (finely adjusted) by the variable resistor VR2, so that the voltage supplied from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 to the voltage supply unit The output voltage output to 304 can be changed (finely adjusted). Thus, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, it is possible to change (fine-adjust) the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 or the range width thereof, which is the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area, to the initially set range or the initially set range width. it can.

  Further, the voltage value input from the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 is changed using the variable resistor VR2. Generally, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the range of the turning amount of the operation handle 51 or the range width of the turning amount of the operation handle 51 which can be the firing strength at which the ball is hit into the game area can be finely adjusted by using the inexpensive variable resistor VR2 having a simple configuration.

  Further, since the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 includes the variable resistor VR3, the DC voltage input from the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 can be changed (finely adjusted). The DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is the same as the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303. It is only added by the addition circuit unit 303. Therefore, the fluctuation width of the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 is the same as the fluctuation width of the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303. However, only the voltage value of the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 can be changed (finely adjusted). The firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 is determined based on the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 to the voltage supply unit 304. Therefore, by changing (fine-adjusting) the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, the operation handle 51 having the firing intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area is provided. Can be finely adjusted without changing the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 (for example, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that has the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area). The range from 66 degrees to 84 degrees can be changed to a range from 57 degrees to 75 degrees (see FIG. 10). Therefore, when the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 deteriorates due to, for example, aging, and the ball cannot be driven into the game area unless the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is set to be larger than the initially set range. However, by changing (fine-adjusting) the DC voltage input from the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 with the variable resistor VR3, the operation handle 51 having the firing intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area can be obtained. Can be finely adjusted to the initially set range.

  Further, by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, the DC voltage input to the resistance R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 can be changed (finely adjusted). As a result, the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 to the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, in general, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 or the range width thereof can be finely adjusted by using the simple configuration and the inexpensive variable resistor VR3 so that the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area can be obtained.

  Further, since the voltage applied to the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 is kept constant by the Zener diode D1, it is assumed that the voltage value of the DC voltage supplied to the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 by the DC power supply DC2 fluctuates. Also, the DC voltage applied to the variable resistor VR3 has a stable constant value. Therefore, the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 can be stabilized. As a result, the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 to the voltage supply unit 304 can also be stabilized, and the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be stabilized. Accordingly, it is possible to stabilize the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area.

  Further, the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is stabilized by the Zener diode D1. In general, a Zener diode has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a constant voltage circuit or the like composed of a complicated circuit. Therefore, the voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistance R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is stabilized by using a simple configuration and an inexpensive zener diode D1, and the ball is driven into the game area. It is possible to stabilize the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 that becomes the emission intensity.

  Lastly, as in the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game board 13 is made larger than the conventional pachinko machine, the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 tends to have a variation in the firing intensity. However, as described above, the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 adjusts the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area, and the variable resistance VR of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301. By adjusting the width of the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 to be the firing intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area by the device VR2, even if the game board 13 is enlarged, the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can play the game. The range and the range width of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 can be adjusted so as to be driven into the region. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the variation of the firing strength of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  Next, a pachinko machine according to a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is obtained by changing the launch control device 112 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment to another launch control device 300. The launch control device 300 according to the second embodiment adds a handle monitoring unit 307, a voltage increasing unit 308, and a limiter unit 309 to the launch control device 112 according to the first embodiment, and performs the addition used in the first embodiment. The configuration is such that the voltage adjustment unit 302 is omitted. Further, instead of the DC-DC converter CV1 of the voltage supply unit 304 used in the first embodiment, a DC-DC converter CV2 having a different voltage boosting degree is used, and a functional block using the DC-DC converter CV2 is provided. The second voltage supply unit 310 is provided.

  According to the launch control device 300 of the second embodiment, in addition to being able to adjust the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area or the width of the range, the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 can be adjusted. Is larger than a prescribed value (105 degrees in the present embodiment), a right-hit ball can be reliably fired, and the firing intensity of the right-hit ball can be kept constant.

  FIG. 30 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the launch control device 300 according to the second embodiment. The same parts as those of the launch control device 112 of the first embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 8 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The handle monitoring unit 307 is a circuit that detects that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 has become larger than a specified value (105 degrees in the present embodiment). The comparator OP4 used as a comparator and the resistance value are fixed. , A variable shunt regulator Reg1 used as a reference voltage source, a capacitor CD3, and a DC power supply DC2 for supplying a DC voltage of 12 volts.

  A variable resistor VR1 of the operating handle 51 is connected to a minus input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4, and a DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to a turning operation amount of the operating handle 51 is: The signal is input to the negative input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the comparator OP4.

  On the other hand, one end of a resistor R8 is connected to a plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4, and a DC power supply DC2 for supplying a DC voltage of 12 volts is connected to the other end of the resistor R8. . One end of a resistor R9 is connected to a plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4, and one end of a resistor R10 is connected to the other end of the resistor R9. The other end of the resistor R10 is grounded. Further, the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 includes the cathode of the variable shunt regulator Reg1, the plus terminal that is one end of the capacitor CD3, and the plus input terminal (non-inverting input) of the operational amplifier OP6 of the limiter unit 309 described later. Terminals) are connected. Here, the anode of the variable shunt regulator Reg1 and the other end of the capacitor CD3 are grounded, and the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg1 is connected between the resistors R9 and R10. The capacitor CD3 is used to prevent oscillation of the variable shunt regulator Reg1.

  When a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC2 to the resistor R8, a DC voltage is supplied to the variable shunt regulator Reg1, and a reference voltage is generated from the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg1 (in the present embodiment). , About 2.45 volts). Generally, the reference voltage provided by the variable shunt regulator is highly accurate. Since this high-precision reference voltage is applied to the resistor R10 connected in parallel with the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg1, the other end of the resistor R9 is connected to one end of the resistor R10 and the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg1. Then, by connecting one end of the resistor R9 to the cathode of the variable shunt regulator Reg1, a highly accurate DC voltage is applied to the resistors R9 and R10 (about 3.85 volts in the present embodiment). The highly accurate DC voltage applied to the resistors R9 and R10 is input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4.

  Here, the reference voltage (about 2.45 volts in the present embodiment) applied to the resistor R10 is added to the value obtained by dividing the resistance value of the resistor R9 by the resistance value of the resistor R10. A DC voltage is obtained by adding a DC voltage having a value obtained as described above and a reference voltage (about 2.45 volts in the present embodiment) applied to the resistor R10 (about 3.85 in the present embodiment). bolt).

  In this way, a high-precision DC voltage (this voltage is applied to the resistors R9 and R10 formed using the reference voltage (about 2.45 volts in the present embodiment) of the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg1). In the embodiment, by inputting about 3.85 volts) to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4, the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 is compared. The reference voltage is used as the reference voltage, and the comparator OP4 functions as a comparator. In this embodiment, about 3.85 volts is used as the comparison reference voltage, and this comparison reference voltage is generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees. DC voltage.

  When the player rotates the operation handle 51 and a DC voltage (signal SA2) generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of the rotation operation is input to the minus input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4. The comparator OP4 compares the DC voltage input to the negative input terminal (inverted input terminal) with the comparative DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverted input terminal) of about 3.85 volts. The DC voltage input to the minus input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4, that is, the DC voltage (signal SA2) generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is the plus voltage of the comparator OP4. When the comparison DC voltage input to the input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) is about 3.85 volts or less (when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees or less), the output terminal of the comparator OP4 is high. It becomes an impedance state. On the other hand, the DC voltage input to the negative input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the comparator OP4, that is, the DC voltage (signal SA2) generated in the variable resistor VR1 in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is positively input. If the comparison DC voltage input to the terminal (non-inverting input terminal) is greater than about 3.85 volts (when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees), the output terminal of the comparator OP4 is at zero volts. State.

  The voltage raising unit 308 inputs a DC voltage to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, and adds the voltage when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 becomes larger than a specified value (105 degrees in the present embodiment). This is a circuit that raises the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the circuit unit 303 to a predetermined value, and includes an operational amplifier OP5 functioning as a buffer amplifier, three resistors R11, R12, R13 having a fixed resistance value, and a reference. It comprises a variable shunt regulator Reg2 used as a voltage source, a capacitor CD4, and a DC power supply DC2 for supplying a DC voltage of 12 volts.

  One end of a resistor R11 is connected to a positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5, and a DC power supply DC2 for supplying a DC voltage of 12 volts is connected to the other end of the resistor R11. One end of a resistor R12 is connected to a plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5, and one end of a resistor R13 is connected to the other end of the resistor R12. The other end of the resistor R13 is connected to the output terminal of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitor 307. Further, the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5 is connected to the cathode of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 and the positive terminal which is one end of the capacitor CD4. Here, the anode of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 and the other end of the capacitor CD4 are grounded, and the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 is connected between the resistors R12 and R13. The capacitor CD4 is used to prevent oscillation of the variable shunt regulator Reg2. Further, the resistor R11 is a resistor for limiting the current supplied from the DC power supply DC2.

  The negative input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5 and the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5 are short-circuited, and are further connected to one end of the resistor R3 of the adder circuit 303.

  A DC power supply DC2 that supplies a DC voltage of 12 volts is connected to the resistor R11, and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC2. Further, the DC voltage input to the minus input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307, that is, the DC voltage (signal SA2) generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of turning operation of the operating handle 51 ) Is less than or equal to about 3.85 volts, which is the comparison DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4, the output terminal of the comparator OP4 is in a high impedance state. Therefore, most of the reference voltage (about 2.45 volts in the present embodiment) generated at the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 is applied to the output terminal of the comparator OP4.

  Here, the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5 will be described. The DC voltage (signal SA2) generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is a comparison DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4, which is about 3. When the voltage is 85 volts or less, the output terminal of the comparator OP4 is in a high impedance state. Therefore, most of the reference voltage (about 2.45 volts in the present embodiment) generated at the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 is applied to the output terminal of the comparator OP4. Therefore, almost no voltage is applied to the resistors R12 and R13. Thus, the voltage at the cathode of the variable shunt regulator Reg2, that is, the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5 is substantially the same as the reference voltage output from the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg2. It is a voltage value (about 2.45 volts in the present embodiment). A voltage (about 2.45 volts in the present embodiment) substantially the same as the reference voltage output from the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 is input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5, Is approximately 1 and is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5, so that a DC voltage of about 2.45 volts is input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit 303.

  On the other hand, the DC voltage input to the minus input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4, that is, the DC voltage (signal SA2) generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is compared with the comparator OP4. Is greater than the comparison DC voltage (approximately 3.85 volts in the present embodiment) input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal), the output terminal of the comparator OP4 is in a state of zero volts. In this case, since the other end of the resistor R13 is grounded, when a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC2 to the resistor R11, the DC voltage is also supplied to the variable shunt regulator Reg2, and the variable shunt regulator is controlled. A reference voltage is generated from the Ref terminal of Reg2 (about 2.45 volts in the present embodiment). Since the reference voltage of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 is applied to the resistor R13 connected in parallel with the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg2, the other end of the resistor R12 is connected to one end of the resistor R13 and the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg2. By connecting one end of the resistor R12 to the cathode of the variable shunt regulator Reg2, a highly accurate DC voltage is applied to the resistors R12 and R13 (about 4.90 volts in the present embodiment).

  Therefore, the resistance R12 and the resistance R13 (at the cathode of the variable shunt regulator Reg2) have a value obtained by integrating the reference voltage applied to the resistance R13 to the value obtained by dividing the resistance value of the resistance R12 by the resistance value of the resistance R13. A DC voltage obtained by adding the DC voltage and the reference voltage applied to the resistor R13 is applied (about 4.90 volts in the present embodiment).

  The DC voltage of the cathode of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 (approximately 4.90 volts in the present embodiment) is input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5, the amplification degree is almost 1, and the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5. , A DC voltage of about 4.90 volts is input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit 303.

  Thus, the DC voltage input to the minus input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307, that is, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of turning operation of the operating handle 51 When (the signal SA2) is equal to or lower than the comparison DC voltage (about 3.85 volts in the present embodiment) input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4, Is 105 degrees or less), the DC voltage input from the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage raising unit 308 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is approximately 2.45 volts. The DC voltage of about 2.45 volts is added by the addition circuit unit 303 to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301. Accordingly, the voltage divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 is smaller than the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51. The reduced voltage is divided by the voltage increasing unit 308. It can be supplemented by a DC voltage of about 2.45 volts input from the operational amplifier OP5 to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit 303.

  On the other hand, the DC voltage input to the minus input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307, that is, the DC voltage (signal SA2) generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of turning operation of the operating handle 51 ) Is greater than the comparison DC voltage (about 3.85 volts in the present embodiment) input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 (rotation of the operation handle 51). When the operation amount is larger than 105 degrees), the DC voltage input from the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage increasing unit 308 to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 is approximately 4.90 volts.

  The limiter unit 309 is a circuit that limits the voltage value so that the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 does not exceed about 3.85 volts. , A diode D4, and a DC power supply DC2 for supplying a DC voltage of 12 volts.

  The positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 is connected to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307, and as described above, the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of this comparator OP4. Since a DC voltage of about 3.85 volts is applied to the inverting input terminal by the variable shunt regulator Reg1, the DC voltage of about 3.85 volts is also applied to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6. Is applied.

  One end of a resistor R14 is connected to the negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6, and the other end of the resistor R14 is connected to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the buffer amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310. It is connected to the. This resistor R14 is used for the purpose of preventing overshoot of the DC voltage limited by the operational amplifier OP6. Further, a resistor R15 having a fixed resistance connected between the addition circuit unit 303 and the second voltage supply unit 310 is used for stabilizing the operation of the limiter unit 309 (for balance with the resistor R14). ing. Therefore, the emission control device 300 may be configured by deleting both the resistors R14 and R15.

  The output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6 is connected to the cathode of the diode D4, and the anode of the diode D4 is connected to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310. Note that one end of a power supply terminal of the operational amplifier OP6 is supplied with a DC voltage of 12 volts from the DC power supply DC2, and the other end of the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier OP6 is grounded.

  The voltage value of the DC voltage input to the negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6, that is, the voltage of the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 When the value is equal to or less than about 3.85 volts, which is the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 (when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than 105 degrees). In this case, a DC voltage of 12 volts is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6. However, even if a DC voltage of 12 volts is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6, the conduction of the diode D4 is cut off, so that the output DC voltage of 12 volts is entirely applied to the diode D4. Therefore, the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 changes to the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6. If the voltage value is equal to or less than 3.85 volts (when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than 105 degrees), the limiter unit 309 connects the positive input terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 ( The voltage value of the DC voltage input to the non-inverting input terminal is not limited.

  On the other hand, the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6, that is, the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 Is larger than about 3.85 volts, which is the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 (when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is less than 105 degrees). If it is larger, the voltage at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6 is about 3.85 volts, which is the same as the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6. Therefore, the diode D4 conducts, and the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 decreases. Therefore, the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 decreases. Then, when the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 becomes about 3.85 volts or less, the DC voltage of 12 volts from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6. The voltage is output, the conduction of the diode D4 is cut off, and the restriction of the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 is interrupted.

  In this way, the limiter unit 309 limits the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 so as not to exceed about 3.85 volts. are doing.

  The second voltage supply unit 310 is a circuit that supplies a voltage to the firing solenoid 142, and includes an operational amplifier OP3, a low-pass filter F1, a DC-DC converter CV2 that is a booster, and a DC power supply DC3 that supplies a 32-volt DC voltage. And a capacitor CD2. Note that the voltage supply unit 304 and the second voltage supply unit 310 of the first embodiment are different from each other in that the DC-DC converter CV1 is replaced with a DC-DC converter CV2, but the DC-DC converter CV1 and the DC-DC converter The only difference from CV2 is the degree of boosting of the voltage. Therefore, the operation of the voltage supply unit 304 and the operation of the second voltage supply unit 310 in the first embodiment are the same, and a detailed description of the second voltage supply unit 310 is omitted.

  Next, the operation of the launch control device 300 of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 30 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a voltage change of each signal of the launch control device 300 of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 30. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing voltage fluctuations of the launch control device 300 of the second embodiment shown in FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (a change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) when the variable resistor VR2 of the adjustment unit 301 is changed.

  First, the operation of the launch control device 300 of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 30 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 31, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the voltage of each signal. The rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is set from a minimum value of zero degrees to a maximum value of 120 degrees, and the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by the rotation operation of the operation handle 51, that is, When the signal SA2 is input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 in the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, a signal having an amplification degree of approximately 1 is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 (see FIG. 30). When the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is zero degree, the DC voltage value of the signal SA2 is about 0.7 volt, and when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 120 degrees which is the maximum value, The DC voltage value of SA2 is about 4.3 volts.

  Next, the signal output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 is divided by the variable resistor VR2, and the divided DC voltage signal SB2 is input to the resistor R2 of the adder circuit 303 (FIG. 30). When the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is zero degrees, the DC voltage value of the signal SB2 is about 0.20 volt, and when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 120 degrees which is the maximum value, The DC voltage value of SB2 is about 1.15 volts.

  On the other hand, the DC voltage (signal SC2) generated at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage increasing unit 308 is input to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 (see FIG. 30). As described above with reference to FIG. 30, the signal SC2 which is a DC voltage generated at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage increasing unit 308 is a DC voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51. , Ie, when the voltage value of the signal SA2 is about 3.85 volts or less (when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is from zero degrees to 105 degrees or less), it becomes about 2.45 volts and the signal becomes When the voltage value of SA2 is greater than about 3.85 volts (when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees and up to 120 degrees), the voltage is about 4.90 volts.

  The signal SB2 input to the resistor R2 of the adder circuit 303 and the signal SC2 input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit 303 are added (added) by the operational amplifier OP2 and output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2. The voltage is input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 via the resistor R15 (see FIG. 30). Here, the DC voltage value input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 is limited by the limiter circuit 309 so as not to exceed about 3.85 volts. .

  The signal input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3, which is the buffer amplifier of the second voltage supply unit 310, is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 with an amplification of about 1. The signal output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 is subjected to a low-pass filter F1 to remove noise components (high-frequency components), and output as a signal SD2 from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 (see FIG. 30). When the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is zero degree, the DC voltage value of the signal SD2 is added to about 0.20 volts of the DC voltage value of the signal SB2 input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit 303. It is approximately 2.67 volts, which is a sum of approximately 2.45 volts of the DC voltage value of the signal SC2 input to the resistor R3 of the circuit unit 303, and when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is 120 degrees. , The DC voltage value of the signal SD2 is about 3.85 volts (the DC voltage value of the signal SB2 input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit section 303 is about 1.00 volts, and the resistance R3 of the addition circuit section 303 is The DC voltage obtained by adding the DC voltage value of the signal SC2 input to the DC power supply to about 4.90 volts is about 5.90 volts, and the limiter section 309 outputs the signal which is the DC voltage output from the addition circuit section 303. S The voltage value of 2 is limited so as not to exceed about 3.85 volts).

  The signal SD2 output from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 is input to the input terminal of the DC-DC converter CV2. DC voltage Ec).

  Next, referring to FIG. 32, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 of the firing control device 300 of the second embodiment shown in FIG. The change in the maximum value (change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) will be described.

  In FIG. 32, the operation of the firing control device 300 of the second embodiment and the change of the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 is changed are shown. For the sake of clarity, the case where the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to obtain a signal SB2 (FIG. 32A), and FIG. 10B Similarly to the above, the voltage input to the variable resistor VR2 is not divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 (the signal SA2 is used as it is as the signal SB2), and the voltage increasing unit 308 sends the signal to the adding circuit unit 303. (FIG. 32 (b)) when no DC voltage is input to the resistor R3.

  In FIG. 32, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2). As shown in FIG. 32B, the voltage input to the variable resistor VR2 is not divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301, and the voltage is increased from the voltage increasing unit 308 to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303. When the input DC voltage is not generated, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is about 4.5 when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degrees to 120 degrees. It varies from volts to about 28.5 volts. Further, the range of the ball to be fouled is such that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is from zero to less than 66 degrees, and the range of the ball to be right-handed is that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 84 degrees to 120 degrees. I have. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into the game area in which the winning opening and the like are provided is not less than 66 degrees and not more than 84 degrees, and the target value of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is set. Is not included in the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 (not less than 66 degrees and not more than 84 degrees). Furthermore, the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area, which originally requires fine adjustment of the launching intensity of the ball, is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less. The width is 18 degrees. The foul ball is a launch rail 143 (see FIG. 5) that does not reach the launch port 68a where the return ball preventing member 68 (see FIG. 2) is located because the launching force (firing strength) of the launch solenoid 142 is weak. It means a ball returning to the side. A right-hit ball is a ball that has a strong launching force (firing strength) of the firing solenoid 142, moves along the rail 62 after being launched from the launch port 68a, and directly hits the return rubber 69 (see FIG. 2). Means

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32A, when the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 into a signal SB2, the signal SB2 is applied to the firing solenoid 142. The maximum value of the voltage E1 varies from about 17.1 volts to about 25.0 volts. In this case, the range of the ball to be fouled is from zero degrees to less than 19 degrees of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51, and the range to be the right-handed ball is the range of the turning operations of the operation handle 51 from 105 degrees to 120 degrees. ing. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is provided is 19 degrees or more and 105 degrees or less. Therefore, when the voltage input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to obtain the signal SB2, 65 degrees which is the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 65 degrees. Can be adjusted so that the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is included.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 into a signal SB2, the ball is placed in the game area. Is within a range of 19 degrees or more and 105 degrees or less, and the width of the range is 86 degrees.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 32 (a), compared with 18 degrees which is the range width of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, which is the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area in the case of FIG. 32 (b). In the case of, the range width of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 at which the shooting intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is increased by 68 degrees. Therefore, the voltage input to the variable resistor VR2 is not divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, and the DC voltage input from the voltage increasing unit 308 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is not generated. Compared to the case (see FIG. 32 (b)), when the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to obtain a signal SB2 (FIG. 32 (a) )), Since the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area is widened, the firing intensity of the ball for driving the ball into the game area can be finely adjusted.

  Further, when the voltage input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to obtain a signal SB2 (FIG. 32A), the range of the right-hit ball is manipulated. The amount of turning operation of the handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees and up to 120 degrees. At this time, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is set to a voltage that can reliably fire a right-hit ball. The voltage is raised to a value of about 25.0 volts by the voltage raising unit 308, and the voltage value is set to a constant value by the limiter unit 309. Therefore, when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, a right-hit ball can be reliably fired. When the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the limiter unit 309 even if the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is increased more than necessary. Is constant at about 25.0 volts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 from becoming an overvoltage, so that the deterioration of the firing solenoid 142 can be reduced. In addition, since the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 can be prevented from being an overvoltage, it is possible to prevent damage to the return rubber 69 and the like hitting a ball fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is changed by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 based on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Change. Then, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 that changes according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, and the divided DC voltage is added to the addition circuit unit 303. The DC voltage output from the voltage raising unit 308 is input to the resistor R2, and the DC voltage is input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303. Then, a voltage obtained by adding the DC voltage divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 and the DC voltage output by the voltage increasing unit 308 is output from the adding circuit unit 303. Then, based on the output voltage output from the addition circuit unit 303, the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 is controlled by the second voltage supply unit 310.

  By dividing the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 by the variable resistor VR2, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51. The fluctuation width of the applied voltage (the difference between the minimum DC voltage value generated in the variable resistor VR2 and the maximum DC voltage value) is generated in the fluctuation width of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (the variable resistor VR1). (The difference between the minimum DC voltage value and the maximum DC voltage value). That is, the gradient of the divided voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 (a straight line connecting the minimum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 and the maximum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 (the signal SB1 in FIG. 9) ) Changes the gradient of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (the minimum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 and the maximum of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1) in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. It can be made smaller than a straight line connecting the values (the slope of the signal SA1 in FIG. 9).

  Here, the divided voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 becomes a voltage input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303, and thus a fluctuation width (gradient) of the voltage input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303. Can be reduced, and the fluctuation range of the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 (the gradient of the signal SC1 in FIG. 9) can be reduced. Then, as the fluctuation width (slope) of the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the adding circuit unit 303 decreases, the fluctuation width (slope) of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 also decreases. . Since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 for hitting a ball into the game area is within a certain range (for example, 17.5 volts to 21.0 volts (see FIG. 11)), the voltage applied to the firing solenoid 142 By reducing the fluctuation range (inclination) of E1, it is possible to widen the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area (for example, the firing intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area is obtained). The rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the range width of 18 degrees can be set in the range of 23 degrees or more and 77 degrees or less, and the range width can be expanded to 54 degrees (see FIG. 11). )). Therefore, the range of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 can be adjusted so as to include the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, for example, 65 degrees.

  The voltage divided by the variable resistor VR2 is smaller than the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. However, the reduced voltage can be compensated for by the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303. As a result, even if the range of variation in the firing intensity of the sphere is reduced by the variable resistor VR2, the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is increased by the variable resistor VR3, thereby turning the operation handle 51. The firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 with respect to the operation amount can be the firing intensity for driving the ball into the game area.

  In addition, the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the shooting intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area can be changed to have a wide range width. That is, it is possible to widen the range of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area. Therefore, the firing intensity for hitting a ball into the game area can be finely adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.

  Furthermore, the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 is determined by the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 and the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage increasing unit 308. The adjustment is performed by the DC voltage input from the output terminal to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303. In general, the DC voltage has a property that it is easy to finely and accurately adjust and is resistant to change over time (it is hard to get out of order). Alternatively, the range width can be finely and accurately adjusted, and the adjustment can be made strong against change over time (to prevent deviation).

  Further, since the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 includes the variable resistor VR2, the DC voltage input from the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, the DC voltage input from the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 may change from the initially set value due to the aging of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 or the like. In this case, when the DC voltage input from the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 changes, the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 to the voltage supply unit 304 also changes. I do. Then, since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 also changes, the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area changes from the initially set range. . Further, there is a case where the range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area becomes smaller than the range width initially set.

  In these cases, the voltage value input from the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 is changed (finely adjusted) by the variable resistor VR2, so that the voltage supplied from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 to the voltage supply unit The output voltage output to 304 can be changed (finely adjusted). Thus, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, it is possible to change (fine-adjust) the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 or the range width thereof, which is the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area, to the initially set range or the initially set range width. it can.

  Further, the voltage value input from the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 is changed using the variable resistor VR2. Here, in general, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the range of the turning amount of the operation handle 51 or the range width of the turning amount of the operation handle 51 which can be the firing strength at which the ball is hit into the game area can be finely adjusted by using the inexpensive variable resistor VR2 having a simple configuration.

  According to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 includes the DC voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 input to the negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) and the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal). 3.85 volts (a DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees), which is a comparison reference voltage input to the terminal. Then, when the handle monitor unit 307 detects that the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the voltage raising unit 308 changes the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 to about 2.45. Raise from bolts to about 4.90 volts. When the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 increases, the output voltage output from the addition circuit unit 303 also increases. Therefore, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the second voltage supply unit 310 Can be increased to about 25.0 volts, which is a voltage value that can reliably fire a right-hit ball. Therefore, when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be switched accurately and stably.

  In addition, the handle monitoring unit 307 detects the case where the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees by the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 and inputs the variable resistor to the minus input terminal (inverted input terminal). The DC voltage generated at VR1 and about 3.85 volts, which is a comparison reference voltage input to a plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) (when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees, This is performed by comparing with a DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1). Generally, a DC voltage is accurate and has a property of being resistant to change with time (it is unlikely to be out of order). Therefore, the handle monitoring unit 307 can accurately detect a case where the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees, and can make the detection more resistant to change over time (harder to change).

  The comparison reference voltage of about 3.85 volts input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 is connected in parallel to the variable shunt regulator Reg1 and the variable shunt regulator Reg1. A constant voltage value is obtained by a circuit including resistors R9 and R10 and a capacitor CD3 connected in parallel to the variable shunt regulator Reg1. Accordingly, the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 outputs the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by the turning operation of the operation handle 51 input to the minus input terminal (inverted input terminal) to the plus input terminal (non-inverted input terminal). About 3.85 volts (DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees), which is a comparison reference voltage input to the terminal). Accurate and stable. Therefore, the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 determines that the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is larger than the comparison reference voltage of about 3.85 volts, that is, the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees. The case can be accurately and stably detected. Here, a circuit generally configured by a variable shunt regulator has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a constant voltage circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, a circuit composed of the variable shunt regulator Reg1, which is simple and inexpensive, the resistors R9 and R10 connected in parallel to the variable shunt regulator Reg1, and the capacitor CD3 connected in parallel to the variable shunt regulator Reg1 is provided. By using this, it is possible to accurately and stably detect when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 performed by the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 is larger than 105 degrees.

  When the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the voltage booster 308 reduces the DC voltage input from the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage booster 308 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit 303 by about 2. Accurate and stable switching from 45 volts to about 4.90 volts. Accordingly, the DC voltage output from the addition circuit unit 303 and input to the second voltage supply unit 310 can also be accurately and stably switched. Therefore, when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be accurately and stably switched.

  When the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the DC voltage input from the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage booster 308 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit 303 is changed from about 2.45 volts to about 4.90. Switch to bolts. Here, when the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 becomes approximately 4.90 volts, the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 is transmitted from the firing solenoid 142 to the firing port 68a. It is set so that the ball fired via the rail moves along the rail 62 and reaches the return rubber 69. That is, when the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 becomes approximately 4.90 volts, the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 is the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142. Is set to be about 25.0 volts, which is a voltage value that can reliably fire a right-hit ball. Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 to the game area can be reliably applied to the return rubber 69 along the rail 62, and the normal Game can be played reliably.

  The operational amplifier OP6 of the limiter unit 309 has an output terminal connected to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310, and the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) also has a resistor R14. Is connected to the minus terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 via the. Then, about 3.85 volts, which is the comparison reference voltage, that is, the DC voltage of the cathode terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg1 of the handle monitoring unit 307 is input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6. . Here, the operational amplifier OP6 inputs the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 to a negative terminal (inverting input terminal), and inputs the DC voltage and the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6. The comparison reference voltage (about 3.85 volts) is compared. When the DC voltage input to the negative terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 becomes larger than about 3.85 volts, the limiter unit 309 controls the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310. Limiting is started to limit the DC voltage at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6 to approximately 3.85 volts. Therefore, the DC voltage (DC voltage input to the minus terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6) at which the limiter unit 309 starts limiting the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 and the limiter unit 309 The DC voltage (DC voltage at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6) that limits the voltage input to the two-voltage supply unit 310 has the same voltage value. Accordingly, the limiter unit 309 sets the DC voltage for starting the restriction of the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 and the DC voltage for restricting the voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 together by one. Can be determined by the DC voltage at the cathode terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg1 (approximately 3.85 volts, which is the comparison reference voltage). Therefore, the limiter unit 309 uniformly sets and changes the DC voltage that starts limiting the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 and the DC voltage that limits the voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310. It can be carried out. The limiter unit 309 starts limiting the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 (the DC voltage input to the minus terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6). Both the DC voltage (DC voltage at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6) that limits the voltage input to the two voltage supply unit 310 and the DC voltage at the cathode terminal of one variable shunt regulator Reg1 (approximately 3. 85 volts). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for a dedicated power supply required for the limiter unit 309 to limit the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310.

  Here, as shown in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, in the conventional ball launching device, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are misaligned, and the position where the mallet of the solenoid collides with the ball is determined. By shifting, the firing strength of the ball is weakened, and even when the operation amount of the operation handle is set to the maximum value, the ball is placed on the right end of the game area where the ball fired by the solenoid flows down, for example, a return rubber (see FIG. 2). There was a problem that it was not possible to hit, and it was not possible to play a normal game.

  On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, even if the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is increased more than necessary, , The DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 is limited to a constant value of about 3.85 volts. Here, when the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 is set to about 3.85 volts, the sphere fired from the firing solenoid 142 via the firing port 68a moves along the rail 62 and returns. The emission intensity reaches rubber 69. That is, when the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 is set to about 3.85 volts, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is a voltage that can reliably fire a right-hit ball. The value is set to be about 25.0 volts. Therefore, when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 to the game area is made a right-hit ball, and is reliably applied to the return rubber 69 along the rail 62. And a normal game can be played reliably. When the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the limiter unit 309 even if the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is increased more than necessary. Is constant at about 25.0 volts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 from becoming an overvoltage, and thus it is possible to prevent damage to the return rubber 69 and the like hitting a ball fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  Next, a pachinko machine according to a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine of the third embodiment is obtained by changing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area or the width of the range is determined by using a voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, an addition voltage adjustment unit 302, and an addition circuit unit 303 using an electronic circuit. However, in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment, the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 executes the range or the range width of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into the game area. The adjustment is performed by the startup process (see FIG. 35) and the firing control process (see FIG. 37).

  According to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area or the width of the range can be adjusted widely (see FIG. 44A). On the other hand, in some cases, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area or the width of the range can be adjusted to be narrow.

  FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. Note that the same parts as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above with reference to FIG.

  The A / D converter 501 is an analog-digital converter that converts a DC voltage (analog value) generated in the variable resistor VR1 into a digital value and outputs the converted digital value to the input / output port 205. The A / D converter 501 has an input terminal (analog input terminal) connected to the variable resistor VR1 built in the operation handle 51, and an output terminal (digital output terminal) connected to the input / output port 205.

  The A / D converter 502 is an analog-digital converter that converts a DC voltage (analog value) generated in the variable resistor VR2 into a digital value and outputs the converted digital value to the input / output port 205. The A / D converter 502 has an input terminal (analog input terminal) connected to the variable resistor VR2 provided on the operation knob 122a, and an output terminal (digital output terminal) connected to the input / output port 205.

  The A / D converter 503 is an analog-digital converter that converts a DC voltage (analog value) generated in the variable resistor VR3 into a digital value and outputs the converted digital value to the input / output port 205. The A / D converter 503 has an input terminal (analog input terminal) connected to the variable resistor VR3 provided on the operation knob 122b, and an output terminal (digital output terminal) connected to the input / output port 205.

  The operation handle 51 is an operation member for adjusting the firing strength of a ball hitting the front of the game board 13. The variable resistor VR1 built in the operation handle 51 is connected to the input / output port 205 via the A / D converter 501. Therefore, when the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 changes in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 of the player, a DC voltage corresponding to the change in the resistance value is generated in the variable resistor VR1, and the generated voltage is generated. The DC voltage (analog value) is input to the A / D converter 501. The input DC voltage is converted into a digital value by the A / D converter 501 and output to the input / output port 205. Thereby, the DC voltage generated in variable resistor VR1 is input to main controller 110 as a digital value.

  The operation knob 122a is an operation element for adjusting a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 input to the input / output port 205 by a positive real number. The operation knob 122a is provided with a variable resistor VR2 and a 5-volt DC power supply DC1. One end of the variable resistor VR2 is connected to a 5-volt DC power supply DC1, and the other end of the variable resistor VR2 is grounded. The variable resistor VR2 is connected to the input / output port 205 via the A / D converter 502. Therefore, when the operation knob 122a is operated, the resistance value of the variable resistor VR2 changes, and a DC voltage corresponding to the change in the resistance value is generated in the variable resistor VR2. When the DC voltage (analog value) generated in the variable resistor V2 is input to the A / D converter 502, the input DC voltage is converted into a digital value by the A / D converter 502, and the input / output port 205. As a result, the DC voltage generated in variable resistor VR2 is input to main controller 110 as a digital value.

  The operation knob 122b is an operation element for adjusting a DC voltage applied to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 input to the input / output port 205. The operation knob 122b is provided with a variable resistor VR3 and a 5-volt DC power supply DC1. One end of the variable resistor VR3 is connected to a 5-volt DC power supply DC1, and the other end of the variable resistor VR3 is grounded. The variable resistor VR3 is connected to the input / output port 205 via the A / D converter 503. Therefore, when the operation knob 122b is operated, the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3 changes, and a DC voltage corresponding to the change in the resistance value is generated in the variable resistor VR3. When the DC voltage (analog value) generated in the variable resistor V3 is input to the A / D converter 503, the input DC voltage is converted into a digital value by the A / D converter 503, and the input / output port 205. As a result, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 is input to the main controller 110 as a digital value.

  The signal conversion circuit 241 is incorporated in the launch control device 400. The signal conversion circuit 241 is provided on condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is off (not operated). Then, a firing permission signal SG3 is output to the input / output port 205. The firing permission signal SG3 input to the input / output port 205 is input to the main control device 110.

  The D / A converter 504 converts the emission applied voltage Eα (digital value) output from the input / output port 205 into an analog value, and outputs the converted analog value to the emission control device 400 as the emission applied voltage Eα. It is an analog converter. The D / A converter 504 has an input terminal (digital input terminal) connected to the input / output port 205 and an output terminal (analog output terminal) connected to the launch control device 400.

  When the firing permission signal SG3 is input to the main control device 110, the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 emits the firing applied voltage Eα (digital value), the firing control signal α, and the ball feed control signal β from the input / output port 205. Output to the control device 400 via the input / output port 205. The output firing applied voltage Eα (digital value) is converted by the D / A converter 504 into an analog firing applied voltage Eα, and by the converted firing applied voltage Eα and the firing control signal α, the firing solenoid 142 Fire a ball at the game area. In response to the output ball feed control signal β, the ball feed solenoid 154 places the ball in front of the cap 142b (see FIGS. 5B and 6B) that covers the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142. I do.

  The magnification determination table memory 202a is a memory that stores a magnification determination table that determines a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 input to the input / output port 205 by a positive real number. When the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the operation knob 122a is read by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, the MPU 201 corrects the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the DC voltage. Is determined by a magnification determination table.

  The offset voltage determination table memory 202b determines a DC voltage (hereinafter, referred to as “offset voltage”) to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 input to the input / output port 205 by a positive real number. It is a memory that stores an offset voltage determination table. When the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the operation knob 122b is read by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, the MPU 201 corrects the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the DC voltage. The offset voltage to be added to the voltage multiplied by the real number is determined by the offset voltage determination table.

  The magnification memory 203a is a memory that stores, when the MPU 201 determines a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number, the determined magnification. When a DC voltage is generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the operation knob 122a, and the generated DC voltage is read by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the processing of S1401 of the start-up processing shown in FIG. In accordance with the obtained DC voltage, the MPU 201 determines a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number in the magnification determination table in the processing of S1402 of the startup processing. The determined magnification for multiplying the positive real number is stored in the magnification memory 203a.

  The offset voltage memory 203b is a memory that stores, when the MPU 201 determines an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number, the determined offset voltage. is there. When a DC voltage is generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the operation knob 122b, and the generated DC voltage is read into the main controller 110 in the processing of S1403 of the start-up processing shown in FIG. In accordance with the voltage, the MPU 201 determines an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number in the offset voltage determination table in the processing of S1404 of the startup processing. The determined offset voltage is stored in the offset voltage memory 203b.

  Next, the launch control device 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the launch control device 400. The firing control device 400 is obtained by changing the electrical configuration of the firing control device 112 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. The emission control device 400 omits the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, the added voltage adjustment unit 302, and the addition circuit unit 303 used in the emission control device 112, and adds a positive input terminal (non-input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the voltage supply unit 304. (Inverting input terminal) is connected to the input / output port 205. Further, the emission control device 400 has a configuration in which the signal conversion circuit 241 is built. In the description of FIG. 34, the same portions as those of the launch control device 112 of the first embodiment described above with reference to FIG.

  When the firing application voltage Eα is output from the input / output port 205 and the output firing application voltage Eα is input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the voltage supply unit 304, the firing application voltage Eα becomes , Are output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 with an amplification degree of almost 1. The voltage output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 has its noise component (high-frequency component) removed by the low-pass filter F1, and is output from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1.

  The voltage output from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 is input to the input terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, is boosted, and becomes a DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2. Thus, the capacitor CD2 stores an electric charge determined by the product of the capacitance of the capacitor CD2 and the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2. The voltage E1 (maximum value Ec volts) is applied to the firing solenoid 142 in accordance with the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD2.

  Next, referring to FIG. 35, a process of determining a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated at variable resistor VR1 of operation handle 51 by a positive real number, and the voltage generated at variable resistor VR1 of operation handle 51. A process for determining an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying by a positive real number will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. The start-up processing shown in FIG. 35 occurs in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 between the processing of S112 and the processing of S113 of the start-up processing of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. Processing for determining a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated by the real resistor by a positive real number and processing for determining an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number (processing of S1401 to S1404) ) Is added. Therefore, the same portions as those in the start-up processing of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 17 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the start-up processing of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, after the initialization of the RAM 203 (S112) is performed, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the operation knob 122a is read (S1401), and the read variable resistor VR2 is read. Is determined from the magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a by using the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number. It is stored in the magnification memory 203a (S1402).

  As described above, the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 in the startup process (S1401), and multiplies the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Since the magnification to be performed is determined (S1402), there is no need to read the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 after the start-up processing of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment. Therefore, even after the start-up process, compared with a pachinko machine that reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2, a firing control process for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 (FIG. 36 described later) (The processing of S1501) can be reduced, and the firing control processing can be sped up.

  Further, the pachinko machine of the third embodiment reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 in the start-up process (S1401), and multiplies the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. (S1402), even if the operation knob 122a changes from the set position during the game and the resistance value of the variable resistor VR2 changes, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number. There is no change in magnification. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the operation strength of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 from changing due to the operation knob 122a changing from the set position during the game.

  Here, the magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the contents of the magnification determination table memory 202a. The magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a includes a ratio for multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number according to the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR2. It is a table for determination by the MPU 201.

  In the magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 in accordance with a change in the voltage generated from the variable resistor VR2 (from zero volt to 5 volts). The magnification for multiplying a given DC voltage by a positive real number is set from zero to 2.0.

  Therefore, if the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 read in the processing of S1401 of the startup processing shown in FIG. 35 is, for example, zero volts, the MPU 201 performs the operation of the operation handle in the processing of S1402 of the startup processing. The magnification for multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 at 51 by a positive real number is determined to be “zero”. When the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined to be “zero”, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by zero. You. That is, a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is zero volt.

  Further, if the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 read in the processing of S1401 of the startup processing is, for example, 5.0 volts, the MPU 201 performs the operation of the operation handle 51 in the processing of S1402 of the startup processing. Is determined to be "2.0" for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 incorporated therein by a positive real number. When the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined to be “2.0”, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 becomes 2 .0 times.

  Since the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 is set from zero volts to 5.0 volts, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is set to a positive value. If it exceeds 5.0 volts when multiplied by a real number, the MPU 201 sets the firing applied voltage Eα to 5.0 volts regardless of the positive multiplication factor determined in the processing of S1402 in the start-up processing shown in FIG. And output from the input / output port 205 to the launch control device 400.

  The description returns to the start-up process shown in FIG. After the processing in S1402, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the operation knob 122b is read (S1403), and the offset voltage determination table memory 202b is used by using the read DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. The offset voltage to be added to the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined from the offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table and stored in the offset voltage memory 203b (S1404). After the processing in S1404, the flow shifts to the processing in S113.

  As described above, the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 in the start-up process (S1403), and reads the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51. Since the offset voltage to be added to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number is determined (S1404), there is no need to read the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 after the start-up processing of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment. Therefore, even after the start-up process, compared with a pachinko machine that reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3, a firing control process for controlling the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 36 described later) (The process of S1501) can be reduced, and the firing control process can be sped up.

  In the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 is read in the startup process (S1403), and the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is set to a positive value. Since the offset voltage to be added to the voltage multiplied by the real number is determined (S1404), even if the operation knob 122b changes from the set position during the game and the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3 changes, the offset voltage is generated in the variable resistor VR1. There is no change in the offset voltage applied to the voltage obtained by multiplying the input voltage by a positive real number. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the operation strength of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 from changing due to the operation knob 122 b changing from the set position during the game.

  Here, an offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing the contents of the offset voltage determination table memory 202b. The offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b generates, in the variable resistor VR3, an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number. 5 is a table to be determined by the MPU 201 according to the voltage being applied.

  The offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b includes a voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 in accordance with a change in the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 (from zero volt to 5 volts). The offset voltage to be added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage by a positive real number is set from -2.8 volts to +2.8 volts.

  Therefore, if the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 read in the processing of S1403 of the startup processing shown in FIG. 35 is, for example, zero volts, the MPU 201 performs the operation of the operation handle in the processing of S1404 of the startup processing. An offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 at 51 by a positive real number is determined to be "-2.8 volts". When the offset voltage applied to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined to be “−2.8 volts”, the voltage is generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51. "-2.8 volts" is added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage by a positive real number.

  Further, if the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 read in the processing of S1403 of the startup processing is, for example, 2.5 volts, the MPU 201 performs the processing of the operation handle 51 in the processing of S1404 of the startup processing. Is determined to be "zero volt" by adding a voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. When the offset voltage to be added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined to be “zero volt”, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is reduced. "Zero volts" is added to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number. That is, nothing is added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number.

  Further, if the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 read in the processing of S1403 of the start-up processing is, for example, 5.0 volts, the MPU 201 executes the operation handle 51 in the processing of S1404 of the start-up processing. Is determined to be "2.8 volts" to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. When an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined to be “2.8 volts”, the voltage is generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51. "2.8 volts" is added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage by a positive real number.

  As described above, the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 is set from zero volts to 5.0 volts, and thus is generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51. When adding an offset voltage to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage by a positive real number exceeds 5.0 volts, regardless of the offset voltage determined in the processing of S1404 of the start-up processing shown in FIG. The voltage Eα is set to 5.0 volts and output from the input / output port 205 to the launch control device 400.

  By the processing of S1401 to S1404 in the start-up processing shown in FIG. It is possible to determine an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage that is present by a positive real number.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a process of outputting the firing applied voltage Eα to the firing control device 400 and a process of outputting the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β to the firing control device 400 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 36 is performed by the firing control process (S505, the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β) of the timer interrupt process of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. Is changed to a process of outputting the firing applied voltage Eα to the firing control device 400, and after the firing control process (S1501), the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β are sent to the firing control device 400. This is a process to which a control signal process (S1502) to be output is added. Therefore, the same parts as those in the start-up processing of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above with reference to FIG.

  In the timer interruption process, after the start winning process (S504), a firing control process (S1501) for outputting the firing applied voltage Eα from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 is executed. After the execution of the firing control process, a control signal process (S1502) for outputting the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 is executed, and the timer interrupt process ends.

  Here, the launch control process (S1501) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the firing control process (S1501) of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment. In the firing control process, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number, and an offset voltage is added to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number to generate a firing applied voltage Eα to the firing control device 400. This is the output process.

  In the firing control process (S1501), first, it is determined whether or not the firing permission signal SG3 output from the signal conversion circuit 241 in the firing control device 400 has been input (S1601), and the firing permission signal SG3 has not been input. If (S1601: No), this firing control process (S1501) ends.

  On the other hand, if the firing permission signal SG3 has been input (S1601: Yes), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is read (S1604) and multiplied by the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a. Based on the magnification, the voltage generated in the read variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number (S1605).

  After the processing of S1605, based on the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b, an offset voltage is added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number (S1606). The voltage to which the offset voltage is added is output to the firing control device 400 as the firing applied voltage Eα (S1607), and the firing control process (S1501) ends.

  By this firing control processing (S1501), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operating handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number, and the voltage multiplied by the positive real number is added to an offset voltage to obtain a firing applied voltage Eα. The firing application voltage Eα can be output to the firing control device 400.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 41, a description will be given of a voltage change due to the processing of S1604 to S1607 in the firing control processing (S1501) shown in FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a change in each voltage when the firing control process illustrated in FIG. 37 is executed. In FIG. 41, the magnification for multiplying the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a is about 0.36. Further, the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is about 2.25 volts.

  In FIG. 41, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the voltage. As shown in FIG. 41, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is set from a minimum value of zero degrees to a maximum value of 120 degrees, and by the rotation operation of the operation handle 51, as shown in FIG. The DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 changes from about 0.7 volts to about 4.30 volts, and the amount of change is about 3.60 volts. The voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is read by the MPU 201 in the processing of S1604 of the firing control processing (S1501) shown in FIG. 37, and is stored in the magnification memory 203a in the processing of S1605 of the firing control processing. When the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number based on a magnification that is multiplied by a positive real number (about 0.36 in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment), as shown in FIG. The voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number changes from about 0.25 volts to about 1.55 volts, and the amount of change is about 1.30 volts.

  Therefore, by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0, the amount of voltage change can be compared with the DC voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1. Can be reduced. In the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the magnification for multiplying the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a is about 0.36, but the magnification for multiplying the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a is, for example, 1 When the magnification is set to about 1.1 which is larger than 0.0, the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number changes from about 0.77 volts to about 4.73 volts. The change is about 3.96 volts. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number by a factor greater than 1.0, thereby increasing the amount of change in the voltage as compared with the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1. Can be.

  In the process of S1606 of the firing control process (S1501) shown in FIG. 37, the operation handle 51 is controlled based on the offset voltage (about 2.25 volts in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment) stored in the offset voltage memory 203b. When an offset voltage is added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, as shown in (c), the voltage generated by the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number. The voltage to which the offset voltage is added changes from about 2.50 volts to about 3.80 volts, and the amount of change is the amount of change in the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by a positive real number. The same is about 1.30 volts. Therefore, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 is increased by a positive real number without changing the amount of change of the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 by the positive real number due to the offset voltage. Can be increased, and that voltage can be used as the firing applied voltage Eα input to the firing control device 400.

  In the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is about 2.25 volts, but the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR3. For example, when the voltage is -0.25 volts, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 and multiplied by a positive real number changes from about zero volts to about 1.30 volts. Therefore, if the offset voltage is made negative, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 becomes a positive real number without changing the amount of change of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by the positive real number. By reducing the voltage value of the doubled voltage, the voltage can be used as the firing applied voltage Eα input to the firing control device 400.

  In the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is about 2.25 volts, but the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR3. For example, when the voltage is set to zero volt, the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number changes from about 0.25 volt to about 1.55 volt. Therefore, if the offset voltage is set to zero volt, the firing voltage Eα input to the firing control device 400 is applied to the firing control device 400 without adding an offset voltage to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. be able to.

  As described above, by the firing control process (S1501) shown in FIG. 37, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is changed, and the firing applied voltage Eα output to the firing control device 400 is adjusted. Can be. The voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is determined by the adjusted firing applied voltage Eα.

  Here, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to make the offset voltage a positive voltage will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (a change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) when the offset voltage is a positive voltage. In FIG. 42, the following conditions are set in order to clarify a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142.

  The voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to a voltage multiplied by 1.0 by the positive offset voltage. When the voltage is added (FIG. 42 (a)), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the voltage is changed to a voltage multiplied by 1.0. The case where the offset voltage by the resistor VR3 is not applied (the offset voltage is set to zero volt) (FIG. 42B) is compared.

  Here, FIG. 42 (b) shows a case where the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is the firing applied voltage Eα that is directly input to the firing control device 400. Therefore, this comparison shows a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (a change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) when the offset voltage is applied as a positive voltage.

  In FIG. 42, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2). Here, when the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 becomes less than 17.5 volts, the ball hit by the firing solenoid 142 becomes a foul ball. When the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 becomes larger than 21.0 volts, the ball hit by the firing solenoid 142 becomes a right-hit ball. The foul ball is a launch rail 143 (see FIG. 5) that does not reach the launch port 68a where the return ball preventing member 68 (see FIG. 2) is located because the launching force (firing strength) of the launch solenoid 142 is weak. It means a ball returning to the side. A right-hit ball is a ball that has a strong launching force (firing strength) of the firing solenoid 142, moves along the rail 62 after being launched from the launch port 68a, and directly hits the return rubber 69 (see FIG. 2). Means

  As shown in FIG. 42B, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by the variable resistor VR2, multiplied by 1.0, and the variable resistor is adjusted to a voltage multiplied by 1.0. When the offset voltage by VR3 is not applied (offset voltage is set to zero), when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degree to 120 degrees, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is reduced. The maximum varies from about 4.5 volts to about 28.5 volts. Further, the range of the ball to be fouled is such that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is from zero to less than 66 degrees, and the range of the ball to be right-handed is that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 84 degrees to 120 degrees. I have. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is provided is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less. Here, as shown in FIG. 42, the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing strength at which the ball is hit into the game area usually has a target value of 65 degrees which is the target value of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51, for example. It is set in an arbitrary range including.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by the variable resistor VR2, multiplied by 1.0, and changed to a voltage multiplied by 1.0. When the offset voltage by the resistor VR3 is not applied (the offset voltage is set to zero), the target value of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 of 65 degrees is within the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51. (Not less than 66 degrees and not more than 84 degrees), the ball cannot be hit into the game area at 65 degrees which is the target value of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. Therefore, it is necessary to adjust the firing intensity of the ball (the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, that is, the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) with respect to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 42A, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by the variable resistor VR2 to multiply by 1.0, and the voltage multiplied by 1.0 is applied. When a positive offset voltage is applied by the variable resistor VR3 to the control valve 51, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degrees to 120 degrees. Can be varied from about 6.0 volts to about 30.0 volts. Further, the range of the ball to be fouled is when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is from zero degrees to less than 57 degrees, and the range of the ball to be hit right is when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 75 degrees to 120 degrees. I have. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is provided is 57 degrees or more and 75 degrees or less. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to a voltage multiplied by 1.0 by the positive offset. When the voltage is applied, the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 to be the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is adjusted so as to include the target value of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 of 65 degrees. Can be.

  Next, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the offset voltage is set to a negative voltage by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (a change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) when the offset voltage is a negative voltage. In FIG. 43, the following conditions are set in order to clarify the change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142.

  The voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to the voltage multiplied by 1.0 to reduce the negative offset voltage. When added (FIG. 43 (a)), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to 1.0 by multiplying the voltage generated by the variable resistor VR2 to 1.0, and the voltage is adjusted to 1.0 times the voltage. The case where the offset voltage by the resistor VR3 is not applied (the offset voltage is set to zero) (FIG. 43B) is compared. Here, FIG. 43 (b) shows a case where the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is the firing applied voltage Eα that is directly input to the firing control device 400. Therefore, this comparison shows a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (a change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) when the offset voltage is applied as a negative value.

  The condition of FIG. 43 (b) is the same as the condition of FIG. 42 (b) described above (the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2). The pachinko machine used in FIG. 43 and the pachinko machine used in FIG. 42 are obtained by multiplying the voltage by 1.0 and not adding the offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3 to the voltage multiplied by 1.0 (when the offset voltage is set to zero). Are different from each other, and the change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is different due to the difference in the model (for example, the difference in the capacity of the capacitor CD2).

  In FIG. 43, the horizontal axis represents the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2). As shown in FIG. 43 (b), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by the variable resistor VR2, multiplied by 1.0, and the variable resistor is adjusted to a voltage multiplied by 1.0. When the offset voltage by VR3 is not applied (offset voltage is set to zero), when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degree to 120 degrees, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is reduced. The maximum varies from about 7.8 volts to about 32.0 volts.

  Further, the range of the ball to be fouled is when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is from zero to less than 47 degrees, and the range of the ball to be hit right is when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is more than 65 degrees to 120 degrees. I have. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is provided is 47 degrees or more and 65 degrees or less. As described above with reference to FIG. 42, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 at which the shooting intensity at which a ball is hit into the game area is usually a target value of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 as shown in FIG. 43, for example. It is set within an arbitrary range including a certain 65 degrees.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 43B, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to 1.0 by multiplying the voltage generated by the variable resistor VR2 to a voltage multiplied by 1.0. When the offset voltage by the resistor VR3 is not applied (the offset voltage is set to zero), the target value of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 of 65 degrees is within the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51. (Not less than 47 degrees and not more than 65 degrees). Therefore, it is necessary to adjust the firing intensity of the ball (the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, that is, the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) with respect to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 43A, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by the variable resistor VR2 to multiply by 1.0, and the voltage multiplied by 1.0 is applied. When a negative offset voltage is applied by the variable resistor VR3 to the motor, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degree to 120 degrees. Can be varied from about 6.0 volts to about 30.0 volts. Further, the range of the ball to be fouled is when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is from zero degrees to less than 57 degrees, and the range of the ball to be hit right is when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 75 degrees to 120 degrees. I have. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is provided is 57 degrees or more and 75 degrees or less. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to the voltage multiplied by 1.0 by the negative offset. When the voltage is applied, the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 to be the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is adjusted so as to include the target value of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 of 65 degrees. Can be.

  Next, referring to FIG. 44, the variable resistor VR2 of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 33 is adjusted to increase the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by 1.0. A change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to a voltage multiplied by a positive real number at a smaller magnification and the offset voltage is added to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number (capacitor CD2 (A change in the DC voltage Ec applied to). FIG. 44 shows that the variable resistor VR2 is adjusted to multiply the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0, and to obtain a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage by a positive real number. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (a change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) when an offset voltage is applied by adjusting the variable resistor VR3. In FIG. 44, the following conditions are set in order to clarify a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142.

  The voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to a positive real number by a factor smaller than 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the voltage of the variable resistor VR3 is multiplied by the positive real number. The voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 as in the case where the offset voltage is applied by adjustment (FIG. 44 (a)) and FIG. 42 (b). This is compared with the case where the offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3 is not added (the offset voltage is set to zero) to the voltage multiplied by 1.0 and the voltage multiplied by 1.0 (FIG. 44B). Since the pachinko machine used in FIG. 44 and the pachinko machine used in FIG. 42 are the same, the change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 shown in FIG. ) Is the same as the change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 shown in FIG.

  44, as in FIG. 42, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2). I have.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (b), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the variable resistor is adjusted to a voltage multiplied by 1.0. When the offset voltage by VR3 is not applied (offset voltage is set to zero), when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degree to 120 degrees, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is reduced. The maximum varies from about 4.5 volts to about 28.5 volts. Further, the range of the ball to be fouled is such that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is from zero to less than 66 degrees, and the range of the ball to be right-handed is that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 84 degrees to 120 degrees. I have. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into the game area in which the winning opening and the like are provided is not less than 66 degrees and not more than 84 degrees, and the target value of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is set. Is not included in the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 (not less than 66 degrees and not more than 84 degrees). Also, the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for hitting the ball into the game area, which originally requires fine adjustment of the launching strength of the ball, is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the width of the range Is 18 degrees.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44A, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 to a magnification smaller than 1.0 (the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment). Is about 0.36), and when the offset voltage is applied by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number, the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 becomes zero degree. , The maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 changes from about 16.0 volts to about 24.0 volts. In this case, the range in which the ball is a foul ball is such that the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is from zero degrees to less than 23 degrees, and the range in which the ball is a right-handed ball is that the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 77 degrees and 120 degrees. Degree. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is provided is 23 degrees or more and 77 degrees or less. Accordingly, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to a positive real number by a factor of less than 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the variable resistor VR is adjusted to a voltage multiplied by the positive real number. When VR3 is adjusted and an offset voltage is applied, the rotation of the operation handle 51 at which the ball is shot into the game area so as to include 65 degrees, which is the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, is included. The range of the dynamic operation amount can be adjusted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 44A, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to a positive real number by a factor less than 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2. When an offset voltage is added by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 to a voltage multiplied by the positive real number, the range of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area is 23 degrees or more and 77 degrees or less. And the width of the range is 54 degrees. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 44 (a), as compared with 18 degrees which is the range width of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51, which is the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area in the case of FIG. 44 (b). In the example, the range width of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 at which the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is increased by 36 degrees. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3 is not added to the multiplied voltage of 1.0. The voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 to make the magnification smaller than 1.0 times as compared with the case where the offset voltage is set to zero (FIG. 44B). When the offset voltage is added by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number in FIG. 44 (FIG. 44 (a)), the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area is used. Since the range of the rotation operation amount is widened, the firing intensity of the ball for hitting the ball into the game area can be finely adjusted.

  The voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and an offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3 is not added to the multiplied voltage by 1.0 ( When the offset voltage is set to zero) and it is desired to narrow the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into the game area, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is determined. The variable resistor VR2 may be adjusted and multiplied by a positive real number at a magnification greater than 1.0, and the variable resistor VR3 may be adjusted to add the offset voltage to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number. With this adjustment, it is possible to narrow the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area.

  Next, the control signal processing (S1502) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing control signal processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. The control signal process is a process of outputting the launch control signal α and the ball feed control signal β to the launch control device 400. By executing the control signal processing, the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β corresponding to the above-described timing chart shown in FIG. Is output.

  In the control signal processing (S1502), first, it is determined whether or not the firing permission signal SG3 output from the firing control device 400 has been input (S1701), and if the firing permission signal SG3 has been input (S1701: Yes). It is determined whether or not the firing control signal α is zero volts, that is, whether or not the firing control signal α is output (S1702).

  If the firing control signal α is not zero volt, that is, if the firing control signal α is not output (S1702: No), when the firing control signal α falls to zero volt, that is, the firing control signal α is output It is determined whether 602 ms or more has elapsed from the time (S1703). In the process of S1703, the output cycle of the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β is set to 602 ms. Accordingly, the launch control signal α and the ball feed control signal β are output from the input / output port 205 (see FIG. 33) to the launch control device 400 at a cycle of 602 ms (see S3 in FIG. 12).

  When the firing control signal α falls to zero volts, that is, when 602 ms or more has elapsed from when the firing control signal α was output (S1703: Yes), the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β fall. Since the period, that is, the period for outputting the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β, the firing control signal α is set to zero volt (S1704), and the ball feed control signal β is set to zero volt (S1705). By the processing in S1704 and S1705, the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β are output to the firing control device 400. After the processing in S1705, the flow shifts to the processing in S1708.

  On the other hand, when the firing control signal α falls to zero volts, that is, when 602 ms or more has not elapsed since the firing control signal α was output (S1703: No), the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β Since this is not the cycle of falling, that is, the cycle of outputting the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β, the next processing is S1708 while maintaining the current output state of the launch control signal α and the ball feed control signal β. Move to the processing of.

  When the firing permission signal SG3 is not input in the processing of S1701 (S1701: No), and when the firing control signal α is zero volt, that is, when the firing control signal α is output in the processing of S1702 (S1702: Yes). It is determined whether the firing control signal α has fallen to zero volts, that is, whether 12 ms or more has elapsed since the firing control signal α was output (S1706). In the process of S1706, the output time of the firing control signal α is set to 12 ms. Therefore, the firing control signal α is output from the input / output port 205 (see FIG. 33) to the firing control device 400 with an output time of 12 ms (see S1 in FIG. 12).

  Even when the firing permission signal SG3 is not input (S1701: No), when the firing control signal α falls to zero volt, that is, whether 12 ms or more has elapsed since the firing control signal α was output. This is determined (S1706) when the firing control signal α has fallen to zero volts and 12 ms or more has not elapsed, and the output time of the firing control signal α has been lost even if the input of the firing permission signal SG3 has been lost. During 12 ms, the firing control signal α is kept at zero volts, that is, the output of the firing control signal α is continued. By the processing of S1701 and S1706, even if the player releases his / her hand from the operation handle 51 when 12 ms or more has not elapsed since the time when the firing control signal α dropped to zero volt (the input of the firing permission signal SG3 is lost. ), The firing control signal α is normally output (maintained at zero volt) for the output time of 12 ms.

  When the firing control signal α falls to zero volts, that is, when 12 ms or more has elapsed since the firing control signal α was output (S1706: Yes), 12 ms, which is the output time of the firing control signal α, has elapsed. The firing control signal α is set to 5 volts (S1707). By the processing in S1707, the output of the firing control signal α is stopped. After the processing in S1707, the flow shifts to the processing in S1708.

  On the other hand, when the firing control signal α falls to zero volts, that is, when 12 ms or more has not elapsed since the time when the firing control signal α was output (S1706: No), it is within the output time of the firing control signal α. Then, while maintaining the output state of the firing control signal α, the processing shifts to the next processing of S1708.

  In the process of S1708, it is determined whether or not the ball feed control signal β is zero volt, that is, whether or not the ball feed control signal β is output (S1708). If the ball feed control signal β is not zero volt, that is, if the ball feed control signal β is output (S1708: Yes), when the ball feed control signal β falls to zero volt, that is, the ball feed control signal β is output It is determined whether or not 74 ms or more has elapsed since the time of the execution (S1709). In the process of S1709, the output time of the ball feed control signal β is set to 74 ms. Therefore, the ball feed control signal β is output from the input / output port 205 (see FIG. 33) to the launch control device 400 with an output time of 74 ms (see S2 in FIG. 12).

  Note that, even when the firing permission signal SG3 is not input (S1701: No), the processing from S1706 to S1708 is executed, and when the ball feed control signal β falls to zero volt, that is, when the ball feed control signal β Since it is determined whether or not 74 ms has elapsed since the time of output (S1709), the input of the firing permission signal SG3 is not performed when 74 ms or more has not elapsed since the ball feed control signal β fell to zero volt. Even if the ball feed control signal β is output, the ball feed control signal β can be maintained at zero volt for 74 ms, which is the output time of the ball feed control signal β, that is, the output of the ball feed control signal β can be continued. Thus, when the ball feed control signal β has fallen to zero volts and 74 ms or more has not elapsed, even if the player releases his hand from the operation handle 51 (even if the firing permission signal SG3 is no longer input), The feed control signal β is normally output (maintained at zero volt) for the output time of 74 ms.

  When the ball feed control signal β falls to zero volts, that is, when 74 ms or more has elapsed since the ball feed control signal β was output (S1709: Yes), 74 ms which is the output time of the ball feed control signal β Has elapsed, the ball feed control signal β is set to 5 volts (S1710). By the processing in S1710, the output of the firing control signal α is stopped. After the processing in S1710, the control signal processing (S1502) ends.

  When the ball feed control signal β is not zero volt in the process of S1708, that is, when the ball feed control signal β is not output (S1708: No) and when the ball feed control signal β falls to zero volt, that is, the ball feed If 74 ms or more has not elapsed since the control signal β was output (S1709: No), this control signal processing (S1502) ends while the current output state of the ball feed control signal β is maintained.

  By this control signal processing (S1502), the launch control signal α and the ball feed control signal β are output from the input / output port 205 (see FIG. 33) to the launch control device 400. In response to the firing control signal α, the firing solenoid 142 fires a ball toward the game area. In response to the output ball feed control signal β, the ball feed solenoid 154 places the ball in front of the cap 142b (see FIGS. 5B and 6B) that covers the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142. I do.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is changed by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 based on the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. Change. The MPU 201 calculates a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 and a magnification determination table ( (See FIG. 39), and the magnification for multiplying the determined positive real number is stored in the magnification memory 203a. Then, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by the MPU 201 by the positive real number according to the magnification multiplied by the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a. Further, the MPU 201 stores an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. The offset voltage is determined using the determined offset voltage determination table (see FIG. 40), and the determined offset voltage is stored in the offset voltage memory 203b. Then, the MPU 201 determines the firing applied voltage Eα by adding the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. The MPU 201 outputs the determined firing application voltage Eα from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400. The output firing applied voltage Eα is input to the voltage supply unit 304 of the firing control device 400, and the voltage supply unit 304 controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  Here, as shown in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, in the conventional ball launching apparatus, when adjusting the launching strength of the ball hit by the solenoid, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are turned. The firing intensity is adjusted by mechanically moving the solenoid up and down and back and forth. Therefore, when the player or the like causes an impact on the gaming machine or when the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are loosened due to a change with time, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are out of adjustment. Occurs. Therefore, there has been a problem that a predetermined firing intensity corresponding to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle is not generated due to a shift of the position where the mallet of the solenoid collides with the ball.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 42, according to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to a positive real number by adjusting the variable resistor VR2. By adjusting the variable resistor VR3 to a voltage multiplied by the positive real number, a firing applied voltage Eα obtained by adding a positive offset voltage can be output to the firing control device 400. Therefore, the magnification of multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number by the variable resistor VR2 is set to 1.0, and the offset voltage is set to a positive voltage by the variable resistor VR3. The range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area (the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area, is 66 to 84 degrees) When the range is 18 degrees, it is possible to change the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area without changing the range width of 18 degrees. For example, when the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the shooting intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is in the range of 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, the center value 75 degrees of the range is operated by the variable resistor VR2. The center value is set to 66 degrees by adjusting the magnification of multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the handle 51 by a positive real number to 1.0, and adjusting the positive offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3 to 66%. The amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 at which the launch intensity at which the ball is hit into the area can be set to a range of 57 degrees or more and 75 degrees or less.

  Therefore, even when the range of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 at which the ball is shot into the game area is shifted to a larger value than the target value, the target value of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is set. It is possible to adjust the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing strength at which the ball is hit into the game area so as to include, for example, 65 degrees.

  As shown in FIG. 43, according to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to the variable resistor VR2 and multiplied by a positive real number. The firing application voltage Eα obtained by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 to a voltage multiplied by a positive real number and adding a negative offset voltage can be output to the firing control device 400. Therefore, the magnification of multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number by the variable resistor VR2 is set to 1.0, and the offset voltage is set to a negative voltage by the variable resistor VR3. The width of the range of the turning amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area (the turning amount of the operating handle 51 that is the firing strength at which the ball is hit into the game area is 47 to 65 degrees) , The range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 can be changed without changing the range width of 18 degrees) without changing the range width. For example, when the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is in the range of 47 degrees or more and 65 degrees or less, the center value 56 degrees of the range is operated by the variable resistor VR2. The center value is set to 66 degrees by adjusting the magnification of multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the handle 51 by a positive real number to 1.0, and adjusting the negative offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3 to make the center value 66 degrees. The amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 at which the launch intensity at which the ball is hit into the area can be set to a range of 57 degrees or more and 75 degrees or less.

  Therefore, even when the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is shifted to a smaller value than the target value, the target value of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 is It is possible to adjust the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 to be the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area so as to include, for example, 65 degrees.

  Further, by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 and multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 by a real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0 in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51, The amount of change in the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by a positive real number according to the amount of rotation operation (the minimum voltage of the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by a positive real number) The difference between the value and the maximum value) is made smaller than the amount of change in the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (the difference between the minimum value and the maximum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1). it can. That is, the slope of the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by a positive real number (connects the minimum value and the maximum value of the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number). The straight line (slope of FIG. 41B) is defined by the slope of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (the minimum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1) in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. It can be made smaller than a straight line connecting the maximum value (the slope of FIG. 41A).

  Here, since the firing applied voltage Eα is adjusted by a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the change amount of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 (Slope) also decreases. Since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 for hitting a ball into the game area is within a certain range (for example, from about 17.5 volts to about 21.0 volts (see FIG. 44)), the voltage E1 is applied to the firing solenoid 142. By reducing the amount of change (slope) of the voltage E1, the range width of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area can be widened (for example, the firing intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area) The rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the range width of 18 degrees can be set in the range of 23 degrees or more and 77 degrees or less, and the range width can be expanded to 54 degrees (FIG. 44)). Therefore, the range of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 can be adjusted so as to include the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, for example, 65 degrees.

  In addition, the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the shooting intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area can be changed to have a wide range width. That is, it is possible to widen the range of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area. Therefore, the firing intensity for hitting a ball into the game area can be finely adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.

  Further, by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 and multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number at a magnification larger than 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51, The amount of change in the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by a positive real number (the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number) in accordance with the amount of rotation operation of the variable resistor 51 Of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (the difference between the minimum value and the maximum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1). be able to.

  Here, since the firing applied voltage Eα is adjusted by a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the change amount of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 (Tilt) also increases. Therefore, when it is desired to narrow the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into the game area, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2. By multiplying by a positive real number at a magnification greater than 1.0, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area can be narrowed.

  Here, as shown in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, in the conventional ball launching device, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are turned to mechanically move the solenoid up and down, back and forth. Since the emission intensity is adjusted, the accuracy of the adjustment of the emission intensity depends on the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob. There was a problem that it was low.

  However, according to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 is determined by the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 and the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. And it is adjusted by. In general, the DC voltage has a property that it is easy to finely and accurately adjust and is resistant to change over time (it is hard to get out of order). Alternatively, the range width can be finely and accurately adjusted, and the adjustment can be made strong against change over time (to prevent deviation).

  Further, since the pachinko machine of the third embodiment is provided with the variable resistor VR2 for adjusting the magnification of multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is generated. It is possible to change (fine-adjust) the magnification by which the applied voltage is multiplied by a positive real number. Here, the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 may change from the initially set value due to the aging of the input / output port 205 and the like. In this case, since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 also changes, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area changes from the initially set range. Resulting in. Further, there is a case where the range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area becomes smaller than the range width initially set.

  In these cases, by changing (fine-tuning) the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 by the variable resistor VR2, the voltage supply within the firing control device 400 from the input / output port 205 is changed. The firing applied voltage Eα output to the unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted). Thus, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, it is possible to change (fine-adjust) the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 or the range width thereof, which is the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area, to the initially set range or the initially set range width. it can.

  Further, the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is changed by using the variable resistor VR2. Generally, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the range of the turning amount of the operation handle 51 or the range width of the turning amount of the operation handle 51 which can be the firing strength at which the ball is hit into the game area can be finely adjusted by using the inexpensive variable resistor VR2 having a simple configuration.

  Further, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 can be simply multiplied by a positive real number by the MPU 201 without using a complicated circuit or the like.

  Also, the MPU 201 generates the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 in the processing of S1402 of the startup processing based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 read in the processing of S1401 of the startup processing shown in FIG. Is determined by multiplying the applied voltage by a positive real number. Therefore, the MPU 201 can accurately determine the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number.

  Further, the MPU 201 applies an offset voltage to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Therefore, the offset voltage can be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number without using a complicated circuit or the like.

  Also, the MPU 201 generates the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 in the processing of S1404 of the startup processing based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 read in the processing of S1403 of the startup processing shown in FIG. The offset voltage to be added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the applied voltage by a positive real number is determined. Therefore, the MPU 201 can accurately determine an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number.

  Further, the pachinko machine of the third embodiment is provided with a variable resistor VR3 for adjusting an offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Can be changed (fine-tuned). Here, the offset voltage is simply added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Therefore, without changing the amount of change of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, only the voltage value can be changed (finely adjusted) to obtain the firing applied voltage Eα. The firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 is determined based on the firing applied voltage Eα. Therefore, by changing (finely adjusting) the offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the rotation of the operation handle 51 that has a firing intensity at which a ball is driven into the game area is achieved. The range of the operation amount can be finely adjusted without changing the range of the operation amount (for example, the operation amount of the operation handle 51, which is the firing intensity at which the ball is shot into the game area, is 66 degrees or more) The range of 84 degrees or less can be changed to a range of 57 degrees or more and 75 degrees or less (see FIG. 42).

  Therefore, when the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 deteriorates due to, for example, aging, and the ball cannot be driven into the game area unless the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is set to be larger than the initially set range. However, by changing (fine-adjusting) the variable resistor VR3 to an offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the firing intensity at which the ball is shot into the game area is adjusted. The range of the amount of rotation of the handle 51 can be finely adjusted to the initially set range.

  Further, by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3, it is possible to change (finely adjust) the offset voltage to be added to the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. As a result, the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, in general, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 or the range width thereof can be finely adjusted by using the simple configuration and the inexpensive variable resistor VR3 so that the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area can be obtained.

  Next, a pachinko machine according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment is obtained by changing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area or the width of the range is determined by using a voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, an addition voltage adjustment unit 302, and an addition circuit unit 303 using an electronic circuit. When the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than a specified value (105 degrees in the case of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment), a right-hit ball is reliably fired and a right-hit ball is shot. The steering monitor 307, the voltage riser 308, and the limiter 309 using an electronic circuit make the emission intensity constant. In the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, a start-up process (see FIG. 35) executed by the main control device 110 and a launching process are performed by the main control device 110 to set the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 or the width of the range for driving the ball into the game area. Adjustment is performed by the control process (see FIG. 46), and when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 becomes larger than a specified value, a right-hit ball is reliably fired and the firing intensity of the right-hit ball is kept constant. Is performed by the firing control process (see FIG. 46) executed by main controller 110.

  According to the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the range of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area or the range width thereof can be adjusted widely (see FIG. 48A). On the other hand, in some cases, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area or the width of the range can be adjusted to be narrow. Furthermore, when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than a specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment), a right-hit ball can be reliably fired and a right-hit ball can be shot. Can be made constant.

  FIG. 45 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment. In the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, a monitoring memory 202c and a limit value memory 202d are provided in the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment. Therefore, the same portions as those of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 33 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The monitoring memory 202c indicates that the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 has become larger than a specified value (105 degrees in the case of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment), that is, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51. Is a memory that stores a specified value as a voltage so that the MPU 201 detects that the value becomes larger than a specified value. The MPU 201 compares the specified value stored in the monitoring memory 202c with the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 in the process of S1807 of the firing control process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the voltage generated in the VR VR is equal to or lower than a specified value stored in the monitoring memory 202c. By this determination, the MPU 201 can determine that the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 has become larger than the specified value.

  The limit value memory 202d is a memory that stores a limit value as a voltage value that limits the voltage value so that the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 does not exceed a predetermined value. When the MPU 201 determines in the processing of S1807 of the firing control processing shown in FIG. 46 to be described later that the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 has become larger than a specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment). In the process of S1811 of the firing control process shown in FIG. 46, the firing applied voltage Eα is limited to the limit value stored in the limit value memory 202d. When the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 becomes larger than a specified value due to the limitation of the voltage value, it is possible to reliably fire a right-hit ball and keep the firing intensity of the right-hit ball constant. Can be.

  The magnification memory 203a and the offset voltage memory 203b have the same configuration as the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, but the timings at which the respective values are stored in the magnification memory 203a and the offset voltage memory 203b are different. I do.

  The magnification memory 203a will be described. When a DC voltage is generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the operation knob 122a, and the generated DC voltage is read by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the process of S1802 of the launch control process shown in FIG. In accordance with the obtained DC voltage, the MPU 201 stores the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number in the magnification determination table memory 202a in the processing of S1803 of the firing control processing shown in FIG. Determined by the determined magnification determination table. By the processing in S1803 of the firing control processing, the determined magnification to multiply by the positive real number is stored in the magnification memory 203a.

  The offset voltage memory 203b will be described. When a DC voltage is generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the operation knob 122b, when the generated DC voltage is read into the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the processing of S1804 of the firing control processing shown in FIG. In accordance with the obtained DC voltage, the MPU 201 determines the offset voltage to be added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number in the offset control process in the step S1805 of the firing control process shown in FIG. It is determined by the offset voltage determination table stored in the memory 202b. The offset voltage determined by the processing in S1805 of the firing control processing is stored in the offset voltage memory 203b.

  Next, the launch control process (S1501) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the firing control processing of the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment. The firing control process of the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment includes a process of determining a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, and a process of multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. This is a process of determining an offset voltage to be added to the applied voltage and a process of outputting the firing applied voltage Eα to the firing control device 400. The firing control process (S1501) of the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment is a process executed in the above-described timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  In the launch control process (S1501) of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the launch permission signal SG3 output from the launch control device 400 is input (S1801), and the launch permission signal SG3 is input. If not (S1601: No), this firing control process (S1501) ends.

  On the other hand, if the firing permission signal SG3 has been input (S1601: Yes), the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the operation knob 122a is read (S1802), and generated in the read variable resistor VR2. Using the DC voltage, a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined from the magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a and stored in the magnification memory 203a. (S1803).

  As described above, in the firing control process (S1501) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) of the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, the MPU 201 reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 ( (S1802) Since the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is determined (S1803), the magnification for multiplying the positive real number is determined each time the timer interrupt processing is executed (every 2ms). can do. Therefore, while confirming the firing strength of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 by rotating the operation handle 51, the firing strength of the ball can be adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2.

  After the processing in S1803, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the operation knob 122b is read (S1804), and the offset voltage determination table memory 202b is used by using the read DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. The offset voltage to be added to the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined from the offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table and stored in the offset voltage memory 203b (S1805).

  As described above, in the firing control process (S1501) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) of the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, the MPU 201 reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 ( (S1804) Since the offset voltage to be added to the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is determined (S1805), the offset voltage is determined every time the timer interrupt processing is executed (every 2ms). can do. Therefore, while confirming the emission intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 by rotating the operation handle 51, the emission intensity of the ball can be adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR3.

  After the execution of the process of S1805, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is read (S1806), and the voltage generated in the read variable resistor VR1 is lower than a specified value of the monitoring memory 202c. That is, it is determined whether the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than a specified value (105 degrees in the case of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment) (S1807).

  The voltage generated in the read variable resistor VR1 is equal to or less than a specified value of the monitoring memory 202c, that is, the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than a specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment). If there is (S1807: No), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 read in the processing of S1806 is multiplied by a positive real number based on the magnification multiplied by the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a (S1808). .

  After execution of the processing in S1808, based on the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b, an offset voltage is added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number (S1809). The added voltage is output as the firing application voltage Eα to the firing control device 400 (S1810), and the firing control process (S1501) ends. As described above, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than the specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is reduced. The voltage is multiplied by a positive real number, and an offset voltage is added to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number to obtain a firing applied voltage Eα.

  On the other hand, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 read in the process of S1807 is larger than the specified value of the monitoring memory 202c, that is, the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 is equal to the specified value (the fourth embodiment). If it is larger than 105 degrees (Pachinko machine: 105 degrees) (S1807: Yes), the voltage of the firing application voltage Eα is set to the limit value of the limit value memory 202d and output to the firing control device 400 (S1811). By the process of S1811, the voltage value of the firing applied voltage Eα output to the firing control device 400 is limited to the limit value of the limit value memory 202d, and thus the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 becomes larger than the specified value. In this case, a right-hit ball can be reliably fired, and the firing intensity of the right-hit ball can be made constant.

  If the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is equal to or smaller than the specified value (105 degrees in the case of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment) by the launch control process (S1501) of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the operation handle An operation for hitting a ball into the game area by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of 51 by a positive real number and adding the offset voltage to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number to obtain the firing applied voltage Eα. The range of the amount of rotation of the handle 51 or the range thereof can be adjusted widely, and the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area or the range thereof can be adjusted to be narrow. it can.

  When the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 becomes larger than the specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment), the voltage value of the firing applied voltage Eα output to the firing control device 400 is reduced. Since the limit value is limited to the limit value in the limit value memory 202d, a right-hit ball can be reliably fired, and the firing intensity of the right-hit ball can be constant.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a description will be given of a voltage change due to the firing control process (S1501) of the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a change in each voltage when the firing control process (S1501) illustrated in FIG. 46 is executed. In FIG. 47, the magnification for multiplying the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a is about 0.29. Further, the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is about 2.47 volts. The specified value of the monitoring memory 202c is set to about 3.85 volts (a DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees), and The limit is about 3.85 volts.

  In FIG. 47, the horizontal axis represents the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the voltage. As shown in FIG. 47, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is set from a minimum value of zero degrees to a maximum value of 120 degrees, and as shown in FIG. The DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 45) changes from about 0.7 volts to about 4.30 volts, and the amount of change is about 3.60 volts.

  The voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than the specified value of the monitoring memory 202c, that is, the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is equal to or smaller than the specified value (105 in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment). If it is not more than (degrees), the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is read into the MPU 201 in the processing of S1806 of the firing control processing (S1501) shown in FIG. 46, and S1808 of the firing control processing In the process (1), the MPU 201 corrects the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 based on the magnification (approximately 0.29 in the case of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment) that is multiplied by a positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a. Times the real number.

  Then, as shown in (b), the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number changes from about 0.20 volts to about 1.15 volts, and the amount of change is about 0.95 volts. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number by a factor smaller than 1.0, so that the amount of change in the voltage is reduced as compared with the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1. Can be.

  In the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the magnification for multiplying the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a is about 0.29, but the magnification for multiplying the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a is, for example, 1 When the magnification is set to about 1.1, which is larger than 0.0, the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number changes from about 0.77 volts to about 4.73 volts. The amount will be about 3.96 volts. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number by a factor greater than 1.0, thereby increasing the amount of change in the voltage as compared with the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1. Can be.

  In the process of S1809 of the firing control process, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 based on the offset voltage (approximately 2.47 volts in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment) stored in the offset voltage memory 203b. When the offset voltage is added to a voltage obtained by multiplying by a positive real number, the voltage becomes the firing applied voltage Eα. As shown in (c), the firing applied voltage Eα is such that the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than a specified value of the monitoring memory 202c, that is, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is If it is less than or equal to the prescribed value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment), the change will be from about 2.67 volts to about 3.47 volts (when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees). , The amount of change is about 0.80 volts. Here, as shown in (b), the amount of change in the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by a positive real number is from about 0.20 volts to about 1.00 volts (of the operation handle 51). (When the rotation operation amount is 105 degrees), and the change amount is about 0.80 volt.

  Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than the specified value, a voltage obtained by adding the offset voltage to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 shown in FIG. The change amount of the firing application voltage Eα) is the same as the change amount of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by a positive real number shown in (b). Therefore, when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than the specified value, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by the offset voltage does not change the change amount of the voltage multiplied by a positive real number. The voltage value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by a positive real number can be increased.

  In the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is about 2.47 volts, but the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is reduced to, for example, -0.20 volt. Then, a voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number changes from about zero volts to about 0.95 volts. Therefore, if the offset voltage is made negative, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is changed to a positive real number without changing the amount of change of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. The voltage value of the doubled voltage can be reduced.

  The voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is larger than a specified value of the monitoring memory 202c, that is, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is a specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment). If it is larger, the voltage of the firing applied voltage Eα is set to about 3.85 volts which is the limit value of the limit value memory 202d in the processing of S1811 of the firing control processing (S1501) shown in FIG.

  Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than the specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment), as shown in FIG. It can be limited to a constant voltage.

  Next, referring to FIG. 48, the variable resistor VR2 of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 45 is adjusted to increase the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by 1.0 times. A firing solenoid when a positive real number is multiplied by a small magnification, an offset voltage is added by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number, and a DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is further monitored. A change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the capacitor 142 (change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) will be described. FIG. 48 shows that the variable resistor VR2 is adjusted to multiply the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0, and to change the voltage to a positive real number. The resistor VR3 is adjusted to add an offset voltage. Further, when the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is monitored, a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (applied to the capacitor CD2) FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a change in the DC voltage Ec). In FIG. 48, the following conditions are set in order to clarify a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142.

  By adjusting the variable resistor VR2, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0, and the voltage obtained by multiplying the positive real number by the variable resistor VR3. When the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is monitored (FIG. 48A), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted. The resistor VR2 is adjusted and multiplied by 1.0, the offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3 is not added to the voltage multiplied by 1.0 (the offset voltage is set to zero), and the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is further adjusted. This is compared with the case where the DC voltage is not monitored (FIG. 48B).

  The change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 shown in FIG. 48 (b) depends on the voltage E1 (variable resistor VR1 of the operating handle 51) applied to the firing solenoid 142 shown in FIG. Is the same as the change of the maximum value of the firing applied voltage Eα input to the firing control device 400 as it is. Therefore, from this comparison, a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment (change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) can be found.

  In FIG. 48, as in FIGS. 42, 43, and 44, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the maximum value of the voltage E1 (applied to the capacitor CD2) to the firing solenoid 142. DC voltage Ec).

  As shown in FIG. 48 (b), the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to 1.0 by multiplying the voltage generated by the variable resistor VR2, and the variable resistor is adjusted to a voltage multiplied by 1.0. When the offset voltage by VR3 is not applied (offset voltage is set to zero) and the voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is not monitored, the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is reduced from zero to 120 degrees. When changed, the maximum value of voltage E1 applied to firing solenoid 142 varies from about 4.5 volts to about 28.5 volts. Further, the range of the ball to be fouled is such that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is from zero to less than 66 degrees, and the range of the ball to be right-handed is that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 84 degrees to 120 degrees. I have. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into the game area in which the winning opening and the like are provided is not less than 66 degrees and not more than 84 degrees, and the target value of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is set. Is not included in the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 (not less than 66 degrees and not more than 84 degrees). Also, the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for hitting the ball into the game area, which originally requires fine adjustment of the launching strength of the ball, is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the width of the range Is 18 degrees.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48 (a), the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 to a magnification smaller than 1.0 (the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment). Then, the voltage is multiplied by a positive real number at about 0.29), the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to add the offset voltage to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number, and the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is monitored. In this case, when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degrees to 120 degrees, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is about 17.1 volts to about 25.0 volts. Has changed. In this case, the range of the ball to be fouled is from zero degrees to less than 19 degrees of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51, and the range to be the right-handed ball is the range of the turning operations of the operation handle 51 from 105 degrees to 120 degrees. ing. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is provided is 19 degrees or more and 105 degrees or less.

  Therefore, by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number with a magnification smaller than 1.0, and the voltage is multiplied by the positive real number. When VR3 is adjusted to add an offset voltage, and further, when the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is monitored, 65 degrees, which is the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, is included. It is possible to adjust the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 48A, the variable resistor VR2 is adjusted to multiply the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0. When the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to add the offset voltage to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number, and when the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is monitored, an operation for driving a ball into the game area is performed. The range of the turning operation amount of the handle 51 is 19 degrees or more and 105 degrees or less, and the width of the range is 86 degrees.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 48 (a), as compared with 18 degrees which is the range width of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing strength at which the ball is hit into the game area in the case of FIG. 48 (b). In the case of, the range width of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 at which the shooting intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is increased by 68 degrees. Accordingly, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the voltage multiplied by 1.0 is not added with the offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3 ( The offset voltage is set to zero). Further, the variable resistor VR2 is adjusted to adjust the variable resistance of the operation handle 51 as compared with the case where the voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is not monitored (FIG. 48B). The voltage generated in the resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number at a magnification of less than 1.0, the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to add the offset voltage to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number, and When the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 is monitored (FIG. 48 (a)), the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area is expanded, so that the ball is driven into the game area. It is possible to finely adjust the radiation strength of the sphere.

  Further, the variable resistor VR2 is adjusted to multiply the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0 times, and the voltage is multiplied by the positive real number. When VR3 is adjusted to apply an offset voltage and the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is monitored (FIG. 48 (a)), the range of the right-handed ball is the rotation of the operation handle 51. Although the operation amount is larger than 105 degrees and up to 120 degrees, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 at this time is set to about 25 which is a voltage value that can surely fire a right-hit ball. The voltage value is limited to about 25.0 volts. Therefore, when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, a right-hit ball can be reliably fired.

  Further, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is approximately equal even if the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is increased more than necessary. Limited to 25.0 volts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 from becoming an overvoltage, and thus it is possible to prevent damage to the return rubber 69 and the like hitting a ball fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  Further, when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, that is, about 25.0 volts, is less than the absolute maximum rated voltage value of the firing solenoid. Is set. Therefore, even if the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is increased more than necessary, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 does not exceed the absolute maximum rating, so that the damage of the firing solenoid 142 is prevented. be able to.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is changed by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 based on the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. Change. The MPU 201 calculates a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 and a magnification determination table (FIG. 39) stored in a magnification determination table memory 202a. ), And the determined magnification for multiplying the positive real number is stored in the magnification memory 203a. Then, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by the MPU 201 by the positive real number according to the magnification multiplied by the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a. Further, the MPU 201 stores an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. The offset voltage is determined using the determined offset voltage determination table (see FIG. 40), and the determined offset voltage is stored in the offset voltage memory 203b. Then, the MPU 201 determines the firing applied voltage Eα by adding the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. The MPU 201 outputs the determined firing application voltage Eα to the firing control device 400. The output firing applied voltage Eα is input to the voltage supply unit 304 of the firing control device 400, and the voltage supply unit 304 controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  According to the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to a positive real number by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the voltage is adjusted to a voltage multiplied by the positive real number. By adjusting the VR3, the firing application voltage Eα to which the positive offset voltage is added can be output to the firing control device 400. Therefore, the magnification of multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number by the variable resistor VR2 is set to 1.0, and the offset voltage is set to a positive voltage by the variable resistor VR3. Without changing the width of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the ball is shot into the game area, without changing the width of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the shot intensity is shot at the ball. Can be changed.

  Therefore, even when the range of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 at which the ball is shot into the game area is shifted to a larger value than the target value, the target value of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is set. It is possible to adjust the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing strength at which the ball is hit into the game area so as to include, for example, 65 degrees.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to a positive real number by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the voltage is multiplied by the positive real number. The firing application voltage Eα to which the negative offset voltage is added by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 can be output to the firing control device. Thus, the magnification of multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number by the variable resistor VR2 is set to 1.0, and the offset voltage is set to a negative voltage by the variable resistor VR3. Without changing the width of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the ball is shot into the game area, without changing the width of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the shot intensity is shot at the ball. Can be changed.

  Therefore, even when the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is shifted to a smaller value than the target value, the target value of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 is It is possible to adjust the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 to be the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area so as to include, for example, 65 degrees.

  Further, by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 to multiply the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR1 in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51, The amount of change in the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by a positive real number (the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number) in accordance with the amount of rotation operation of the variable resistor 51 Of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (the difference between the minimum value and the maximum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1). be able to. That is, the slope of the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by a positive real number (connects the minimum value and the maximum value of the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number). The straight line (the slope of FIG. 47 (b)) is defined as the slope of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (the minimum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1) in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. It can be made smaller than a straight line connecting the maximum value (the slope of FIG. 47A).

  Here, since the firing applied voltage Eα is adjusted by a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the change amount of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 (Slope) also decreases. Since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 for driving a ball into the game area is within a certain range (for example, about 17.5 volts to about 21.0 volts (see FIG. 48)), the voltage E1 is applied to the firing solenoid 142. By reducing the amount of change (slope) of the voltage E1, the range width of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area can be widened (for example, the firing intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area) The rotation width of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the range width 18 degrees can be set in the range of 19 degrees or more and 105 degrees or less, and the range width can be expanded to 86 degrees (FIG. 48)). Therefore, the range of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 can be adjusted so as to include the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, for example, 65 degrees.

  In addition, the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the shooting intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area can be changed to have a wide range width. That is, it is possible to widen the range of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area. Therefore, the firing intensity for hitting a ball into the game area can be finely adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.

  Further, by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 and multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number at a magnification larger than 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51, The amount of change in the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by a positive real number (the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number) in accordance with the amount of rotation operation of the variable resistor 51 Of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (the difference between the minimum value and the maximum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1). be able to.

  Here, since the firing applied voltage Eα is adjusted by a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the change amount of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 (Tilt) also increases. Therefore, when it is desired to narrow the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2. What is necessary is to multiply the positive real number by a factor larger than 1.0 and adjust the variable resistor VR3 to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number to add an offset voltage. With this adjustment, it is possible to narrow the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area.

  Further, the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 is adjusted by the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 and the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. In general, the DC voltage has a property that it is easy to finely and accurately adjust and is resistant to change over time (it is hard to get out of order). Alternatively, the range width can be finely and accurately adjusted, and the adjustment can be made strong against change over time (to prevent deviation).

  Further, since the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment is provided with the variable resistor VR2 for adjusting the magnification of multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is adjusted. It is possible to change (fine-adjust) the magnification by which the applied voltage is multiplied by a positive real number. Here, the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 may change from the initially set value due to the aging of the input / output port 205 and the like. In this case, since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 also changes, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area changes from the initially set range. Resulting in. Further, there is a case where the range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area becomes smaller than the range width initially set.

  In these cases, the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 is changed (finely adjusted) by the variable resistor VR2, and is output from the input / output port 205 to the voltage supply unit 304. The firing applied voltage Eα can be changed (finely adjusted). Thus, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, it is possible to change (fine-adjust) the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 or the range width thereof, which is the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area, to the initially set range or the initially set range width. it can.

  Further, the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is changed by using the variable resistor VR2. Generally, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the range of the turning amount of the operation handle 51 or the range width of the turning amount of the operation handle 51 which can be the firing strength at which the ball is hit into the game area can be finely adjusted by using the inexpensive variable resistor VR2 having a simple configuration.

  Further, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number by the MPU 201. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 can be simply multiplied by a positive real number without using a complicated circuit or the like.

  The MPU 201 stores the data in the magnification determination table memory 202a in the processing of S1803 of the firing control processing based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 read in the processing of S1802 of the firing control processing shown in FIG. The magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is determined using the obtained magnification determination table. Therefore, the MPU 201 can accurately determine the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number.

  Further, the MPU 201 applies an offset voltage to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Therefore, the offset voltage can be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number without using a complicated circuit or the like.

  Further, the MPU 201 generates the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 in the processing of S1806 of the firing control processing based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 read in the processing of S1805 of the firing control processing shown in FIG. The offset voltage to be added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage by a positive real number is determined using the offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b. Therefore, the MPU 201 can accurately determine an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number.

  Further, the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment is provided with a variable resistor VR3 for adjusting an offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Can be changed (fine-tuned). This offset voltage is only added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Therefore, only the voltage value of the firing applied voltage Eα can be changed (finely adjusted) without changing the amount of change in voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Here, the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 is determined based on the firing applied voltage Eα. Therefore, by changing (finely adjusting) the offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the rotation of the operation handle 51 that has a firing intensity at which a ball is driven into the game area is achieved. It is possible to finely adjust only the range of the rotation operation amount without changing the range width of the operation amount. Therefore, when the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 deteriorates due to, for example, aging, and the ball cannot be driven into the game area unless the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is set to be larger than the initially set range. However, by changing (fine-adjusting) the variable resistor VR3 to an offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the firing intensity at which the ball is shot into the game area is adjusted. The range of the amount of rotation of the handle 51 can be finely adjusted to the initially set range.

  Further, by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3, it is possible to change (finely adjust) the offset voltage to be added to the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. As a result, the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the voltage supply unit 304 in the firing control device 400 can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, in general, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 or the range width thereof can be finely adjusted by using the simple configuration and the inexpensive variable resistor VR3 so that the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area can be obtained.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the MPU 201 controls the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 and the prescribed value of 3.85 volts stored in the monitoring memory 202c (operation handle). (A DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees). Then, when the MPU 201 detects that the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the MPU 201 increases the firing applied voltage Eα to about 3.85 volts. Here, since the firing applied voltage Eα is a voltage input to the voltage supply unit 304 in the firing control device 400, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 is reliably right-handed. It can be raised to about 25.0 volts, the voltage value at which a ball can be fired. Therefore, when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be switched accurately and stably.

  Further, the MPU 201 executes the detection when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees by detecting the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51. Generally, the detection of a DC voltage is accurate, and has a property of being resistant to change with time (hard to change). Therefore, the MPU 201 can accurately detect the case where the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, and can make the detection more resistant to change over time (harder to change).

  Further, the MPU 201 operates accurately and stably. Therefore, when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the MPU 201 reduces the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the voltage supply unit 304 in the firing control device 400 by about 3 Accurate and stable switching to .85 volts. Therefore, when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be accurately and stably switched.

  Here, as shown in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, in the conventional ball launching device, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are misaligned, and the position where the mallet of the solenoid collides with the ball is determined. By shifting, the firing strength of the ball is weakened, and even when the operation amount of the operation handle is set to the maximum value, the ball is placed on the right end of the game area where the ball fired by the solenoid flows down, for example, a return rubber (see FIG. 2). There was a problem that it was not possible to hit, and it was not possible to play a normal game.

  On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the MPU 201 raises the firing applied voltage Eα to about 3.85 volts. Here, the firing applied voltage Eα raised to about 3.85 volts is the firing intensity at which the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 via the firing opening 68 a moves along the rail 62 and reaches the return rubber 69. Is set to be. That is, when the firing applied voltage Eα input to the voltage supply unit 304 in the firing control device 400 becomes about 3.85 volts, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is surely right-handed. The voltage is set to be about 25.0 volts, which is a voltage value at which a ball can be fired. Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 to the game area can be reliably applied to the return rubber 69 along the rail 62, and the normal Game can be played reliably.

  When the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, even if the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is increased more than necessary, the limit value (about 3.85) stored in the limit value memory 202d is used. (Volts), the MPU 201 limits the firing applied voltage Eα input to the voltage supply unit 304 in the firing control device 400 to a constant value of about 3.85 volts. When the firing applied voltage Eα input to the voltage supply unit 304 is limited to a constant value of about 3.85 volts, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is limited to about 25.0 volts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 from becoming an overvoltage, and thus it is possible to prevent damage to the return rubber 69 and the like hitting a ball fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  Further, based on the limit value (about 3.85 volts) stored in the limit value memory 202d, about 25.0 volts, which is the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 limited by the MPU 201, is used as the firing solenoid. Is set to less than the absolute maximum rated voltage value. Therefore, even if the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is increased more than necessary, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 does not exceed the absolute maximum rating of the firing solenoid 142, so that the firing solenoid 142 is damaged. Can be prevented.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  For example, the numerical values given in the embodiments are merely examples, and other numerical values can be naturally used.

  The pachinko machine of the first embodiment is configured such that the DC voltage input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 can be adjusted by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, but is not necessarily limited to this. Instead of the variable resistor VR2, a fixed resistor having a fixed resistance value may be used. In this case, the range width of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area which can be changed by the variable resistor VR2 (the rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area) The difference between the minimum value of the amount and the maximum value of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area cannot be adjusted, but only the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area can be adjusted. Naturally, the range width of the rotation operation amount can be widened.

  In the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is configured to be adjustable by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, but is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a fixed resistor having a fixed resistance value may be used instead of the variable resistor VR3. In this case, it becomes impossible to adjust the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area which can be changed by the variable resistor VR3. The range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 at which the firing intensity is applied can be naturally changed.

  In the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, the DC voltage input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 is configured to be adjustable by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, but is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 may be input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303. In this case, the range width of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area cannot be changed, but the resistance R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is controlled by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302. By adjusting the DC voltage to be input to the game area, it is possible to adjust the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area.

  In the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is configured to be adjustable by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, but is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 may be deleted, and the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 may be directly input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the voltage adjustment unit 304. good. In this case, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area cannot be changed, but the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 controls the operational amplifier OP3 of the voltage adjustment unit 304. By adjusting the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal), it is possible to adjust the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, which is the firing intensity at which a ball is driven into the game area.

  Further, the pachinko machine of the first embodiment is not provided with the limiter unit 309 provided in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, but is not necessarily limited thereto. May be provided with a limiter unit 309. In this case, the anode terminal of the diode D4 of the limiter unit 309 and the other end of the resistor 14 are connected to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the voltage supply unit 304 of the pachinko machine of the first embodiment. . Then, a power supply that outputs a DC voltage of 3.85 volts may be connected to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 of the limiter unit 304. As a result, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, which is changed by the turning operation of the operation handle 51, can be set to a constant voltage of 25.0 volts by the limiter unit 309.

  Note that by setting the DC voltage of the power supply connected to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 of the limiter unit 304 to be smaller than 3.85 volts, the firing solenoid 142 changed by the turning operation of the operation handle 51 can be used. The maximum value of the applied voltage E1 can be smaller than 25.0 volts. On the other hand, by setting the DC voltage of the power supply connected to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 of the limiter section 304 to be greater than 3.85 volts, The maximum value of the applied voltage E1 can be greater than 25.0 volts.

  Also, the pachinko machine of the first embodiment is not provided with the handle monitoring unit 307 and the voltage increasing unit 308, but is not necessarily limited to this, and the handle monitoring unit provided in the second embodiment is not limited thereto. The unit 307 and the voltage increasing unit 308 may be provided in the firing control device 300 of the first embodiment. In this case, for example, one end of a fixed resistor having the same resistance value as the resistors R2 and R3 is connected to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit 303 in parallel with the resistors R2 and R3. The output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage raising unit 308 is connected to the other end of the fixed resistor. Then, the negative input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 is connected to the positive input terminal (non-inverted input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301. With this configuration, the DC voltage divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 and the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 are output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303. A DC voltage obtained by adding the voltage and the DC voltage generated at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage increasing unit 308 is output. Therefore, when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the DC voltage input from the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage booster 308 to the fixed resistor of the addition circuit 303 is changed from about 2.45 volts to about 4.90. Switch to bolts. Here, when the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 becomes approximately 4.90 volts, the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 is transmitted from the firing solenoid 142 to the firing port 68a. It is set so that the ball fired via the rail moves along the rail 62 and reaches the return rubber 69. That is, when the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 becomes approximately 4.90 volts, the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 is the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142. Is set to be about 25.0 volts, which is a voltage value that can reliably fire a right-hit ball. Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 to the game area can be reliably applied to the return rubber 69 along the rail 62, and the normal Game can be played reliably.

  In the pachinko machine of each embodiment, the DC voltage input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 is generated by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, and the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 Is generated by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, but the invention is not limited to this. The variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 and the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 are Instead of a resistor having a fixed value, a DC voltage input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 and a DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 may be generated. When a DC voltage to be input to the resistor R2 of the adding circuit unit 303 and a DC voltage to be input to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 are generated by using a resistor having a fixed resistance value, the resistance value is fixed. Therefore, the DC voltage input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 and the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 cannot be readjusted. However, in general, the resistance value is fixed by the variable resistor. Since the resistance is lower, the costs of the launch control device 112 and the launch control device 300 can be reduced.

  In addition, the pachinko machine of each embodiment is configured to output the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β input to the firing control device 112 from the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. The firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β input to the firing control device 112 are fired from the input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111 or the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. You may comprise so that it may output to the control apparatus 112.

  Further, in the pachinko machine of each embodiment, the signal conversion circuit 241 is provided in the payout control device 111, but the present invention is not limited to this. The signal conversion circuit 241 is provided in the launch control device 112. Is also good. In this case, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the signal conversion is performed on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing permission signal SG3 output from the circuit 241 is output from the signal conversion circuit 241 provided in the firing control device 112 to the input / output port 205, and is input to the main control device 110.

  In the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, when the handle monitoring unit 307 detects that the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 has become larger than 105 degrees, the voltage applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage raising unit 308. The maximum value of E1 was increased to about 25.0 volts, which is a voltage value that can reliably fire a right-handed ball. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 detected by the handle monitoring unit 307 (the operation handle for increasing the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage increasing unit 308). 51 may be set to, for example, 105 degrees or less, or may be set to be larger than 105 degrees.

  When the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 detected by the handle monitoring unit 307 is set to, for example, 105 degrees or less, the value obtained by dividing the resistance R9 of the handle monitoring unit 307 by the resistance R10 is used as the rotation of the operation handle 51. The resistance R9 of the handle monitoring unit 307 when the operation amount is 105 degrees is made smaller than a value obtained by dividing the resistance R9 by the resistance R10. As a result, the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 decreases, and the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 detected by the handle monitoring unit 307 is set to 105 degrees or less. can do. Therefore, the right-handed ball can be fired from the firing solenoid 142 even when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 becomes 105 degrees or less.

  When the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 detected by the handle monitoring unit 307 is set to be larger than, for example, 105 degrees, a value obtained by dividing the resistance R9 of the handle monitoring unit 307 by the resistance R10 is used. The resistance R9 of the handle monitoring unit 307 when the rotation operation amount is 105 degrees is made larger than a value obtained by dividing the resistance R9 by the resistance R10. As a result, the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 increases, and the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 detected by the handle monitoring unit 307 is set to be larger than 105 degrees. can do. Therefore, the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for firing the right-handed ball from the firing solenoid 142 can be made larger than 105 degrees.

  The pachinko machine of the second embodiment is provided with a limiter unit 309. With this limiter unit 309, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, regardless of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, The maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 was 25.0 volts. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees can surely fire a right-hit ball. Any voltage value is possible, for example, 23.0 volts.

  When the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is set to, for example, 23.0 volts, the value obtained by dividing the resistance R9 of the handle monitor 307 by the resistance R10 is the voltage applied to the firing solenoid 142. The resistance R9 of the handle monitor 307 when the maximum value of E1 is 25.0 volts is made smaller than the value obtained by dividing the resistance R9 by the resistance R10. As a result, the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 of the limiter unit 309 decreases, and the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is set to, for example, 23.0 volts. be able to. In this case, damage to the return rubber 69 colliding with the right-handed ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 can be further reduced.

  However, as described above, the detection of the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 by the handle monitoring unit 307 and the setting of the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the limiter unit 309 are both performed by the resistance of the handle monitoring unit 307. Since R9 is calculated based on the value obtained by dividing the resistance by the resistance R10 of the handle monitoring unit 307, the setting of only one of the handle monitoring unit 307 and the limiter unit 309 cannot be changed. When changing the setting of only one of the handle monitoring unit 307 and the limiter unit 309, the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 and the limiter unit 309 What is necessary is just to comprise so that the direct-current voltage input into the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 may be input from an independent separate circuit (a direct-current voltage generation circuit or the like). With this configuration, the setting of only one of the handle monitoring unit 307 and the limiter unit 309 can be changed.

  The pachinko machine of the second embodiment is provided with a limiter unit 309. With this limiter unit 309, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, regardless of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, The maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 was 25.0 volts. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the limiter unit 309 may be deleted. According to this configuration, when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the limiter 309 sets the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 to a constant voltage of 25.0 volts. This is only impossible, and when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the right-handed ball can be reliably fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  Further, the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment converts the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 into the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301. And the DC voltage output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage increasing unit 308, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one end of a fixed resistor having the same resistance value as the resistors R2 and R3 is connected to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 in parallel with the resistors R2 and R3. A variable resistor having a variable resistance value is connected to the other end. Then, a DC power supply for outputting a DC voltage is connected to one end of the variable resistor, and the other end of the variable resistor is grounded.

  With this configuration, by inputting the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303, the voltage from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 is The DC voltage obtained by adding the DC voltage divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the fluctuation adjusting unit 301, the DC voltage generated at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage increasing unit 308, and the DC voltage generated at the variable resistor. Is output. Therefore, by adjusting the DC voltage input to the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 by the variable resistor, the range width of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 (the game area When the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 at which the launching strength of the ball is driven falls within the range of 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, the ball is moved into the game area without changing the range width of 18 degrees). It is possible to change the range of the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing intensity to be driven.

  In the pachinko machine of the third embodiment and the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, first, the MPU 201 reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2, and converts the DC voltage generated in the read variable resistor VR2. MPU 201 multiplies the voltage generated in variable resistor VR1 of operation handle 51 by a positive real number, then reads the DC voltage generated in variable resistor VR3 by MPU 201, and reads the read variable resistor. The MPU 201 adds the offset voltage to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number using the DC voltage generated at the VR3, and fires the firing applied voltage Eα. It was configured to output to the control device 400.

  However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, first, the MPU 201 reads a DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3, and uses the read DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3, The MPU 201 applies an offset voltage to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51, and then reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 by the MPU 201, and generates the DC voltage in the read variable resistor VR2. The MPU 201 multiplies a voltage obtained by adding the offset voltage to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 to a positive real number using the DC voltage, and generates the firing applied voltage Eα by the firing control device 400. May be output.

  In the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment and the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, the magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a has a variable magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. The setting is made so as to increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the resistor VR2. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a frequently used positive real number multiplication factor may be finely set. Alternatively, the magnification for multiplying the positive real number that is less frequently used may be set roughly.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 49, a description will be given of a magnification determination table in which the magnification for multiplying the positive real number frequently used is finely set, and the magnification for multiplying the positive real number less frequently used is roughly set. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the contents of the magnification determination table memory 202a.

  In the magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 in accordance with a change in the voltage generated from the variable resistor VR2 (from zero volt to 5 volts). The magnification for multiplying a given DC voltage by a positive real number is set from zero to 2.0.

  However, this magnification determination table finely sets a magnification (from zero to 1.0 times) for multiplying a positive real number that is frequently used, and a magnification (1.0 times) for a positive real number that is rarely used. (Up to 2.0 times larger). Therefore, even if the change in the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 is from zero volts to 5 volts, the variable resistor VR2 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 at a multiple of a positive real number frequently used. The magnification can be finely adjusted. Therefore, according to the magnification determining table, it is possible to finely adjust the magnification for multiplying the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number at the frequently used positive real number magnification. Can be.

  Further, in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment and the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a is a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Is set so as to increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is set to a positive value. The magnification to be multiplied by a real number may be set so as not to increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2.

  Here, referring to FIG. 50, a magnification determining table in which a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is set so as not to increase in proportion to the voltage generated in variable resistor VR2. Will be described. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the contents of the magnification determination table memory 202a.

  In the magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 in accordance with a change in the voltage generated from the variable resistor VR2 (from zero volt to 5 volts). The magnification for multiplying a given DC voltage by a positive real number is set from zero to 2.0.

  However, the magnification determination table is set so that the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number does not increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2. Therefore, according to this magnification determination table, even if the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR2 increases proportionally, the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number does not increase proportionally. can do.

  In the pachinko machine of the third embodiment and the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b is a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Is set so as to increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the offset voltage that is frequently used is finely divided. The offset voltage which is set and used less frequently may be roughly set.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 51, an offset voltage determination table in which the frequently used offset voltage is set finely and the infrequently used offset voltage is roughly set will be described. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing the contents of the offset voltage determination table memory 202b.

  The offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b includes a voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 in accordance with a change in the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 (from zero volt to 5 volts). The offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the DC voltage by a positive real number is set from -2.8 volts to 2.8 volts.

  However, this offset voltage determination table finely sets the frequently used offset voltage (from 2.0 volts to 2.8 volts), and sets the less frequently used offset voltage (from -2.8 volts to 2.0 volts). (Less than bolt) is set roughly. Therefore, even when the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 changes from zero volts to 5 volts, the offset voltage is finely adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 in an offset voltage that is frequently used. Can be adjusted. Therefore, according to the offset voltage determination table, the offset voltage to be added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is finely adjusted at the frequently used offset voltage. be able to.

  In the pachinko machine of the third embodiment and the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b is obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. The offset voltage applied to the set voltage is set so as to increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The offset voltage to be added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage by a positive real number may be set so as not to increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3.

  Here, referring to FIG. 52, a setting is made such that an offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is not proportionally increased with respect to the voltage generated in variable resistor VR3. The offset voltage determination table will be described. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the contents of the offset voltage determination table memory 202b.

  The offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b includes a voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 in accordance with a change in the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 (from zero volt to 5 volts). The offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the DC voltage by a positive real number is set from -2.8 volts to 2.8 volts.

  However, this offset voltage determination table is set so that the offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number does not increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. . Therefore, even if the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 increases proportionally, the offset voltage applied to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number can be set not to increase proportionally. .

  In the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is larger than a specified value (105 degrees in the case of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment), that is, the variable resistance VR1 of the operation handle 51 is generated. The monitoring memory 202c that stores the specified value for the MPU 201 to detect that the voltage being applied has become larger than the specified value, and the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 has a predetermined value. Although a limit value memory 202d for storing a limit value so as not to exceed the limit value is provided in the ROM 202, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a rewritable memory for storing various data in a power-on state is provided. At the same time, a flash memory, which is a memory capable of retaining its contents even after the power is turned off, is provided in the main controller 110, Of one monitoring memory 202c or limit value memory 202d in the flash memory, or may be provided both a monitoring memory 202c and limit value memory 202d.

  When the monitoring memory 202c is provided in the flash memory, the specified value as the voltage stored in the monitoring memory 202c can be rewritten. Thus, the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 detected by the MPU 201 (the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 that causes the MPU 201 to increase the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142) is set to, for example, 105 degrees or less. Or set to be greater than 105 degrees.

  When the flash memory is provided with the limit value memory 202d, the limit value as the voltage value stored in the limit value memory 202d can be rewritten. Thus, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, which is changed by the turning operation of the operation handle 51, can be set to 25.0 volts or less, or can be set to more than 25.0 volts.

  In the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, one specified value as a voltage stored in the monitoring memory 202c is stored. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the specified value as a voltage is stored in the monitoring memory 202c. A plurality of values may be stored. In this case, the MPU 201 stores, in a predetermined area of the RAM 203, one specified value selected by a setter who sets the state of the pachinko machine from a plurality of specified values stored in the monitoring memory 202c. Then, the MPU 201 uses one specified value stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 to determine that the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 has become larger than the specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment). In other words, it may be configured to detect that the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 has become larger than a specified value. With this configuration, the specified value as the voltage stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 can be rewritten without using the flash memory. Therefore, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 detected by the MPU 201 (MPU 201 Can increase the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51) to, for example, 105 degrees or less, or can be set to more than 105 degrees.

  In the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, one limit value as a voltage stored in the limit value memory 202d is stored. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a voltage is stored in the limit value memory 202d as a voltage. May be stored. In this case, the MPU 201 stores, in a predetermined area of the RAM 203, one limit value selected by a setter who sets the state of the pachinko machine from the plurality of limit values stored in the limit value memory 202d. The MPU 201 is configured to limit the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 that is changed by the turning operation of the operation handle 51, using one limit value stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Just do it. With this configuration, it is possible to rewrite the limit value as a voltage stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 without using a flash memory. The maximum value of the applied voltage E1 can be set to 25.0 volts or less, or can be set to more than 25.0 volts.

  In the first embodiment, the command output from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main control device 110 may output the voice lamp control device 113 or another command. The present invention may be applied to commands output to the peripheral control device. When applied to the command output to the sound ramp control device 113, the game effect can be performed only when a normal effect command is input, so that the game effect control is performed normally. Can be made. In such a case, according to the arrangement of the signal pins of the connectors 208 and 228, which connect the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, the signal lines are set so that adjacent pins alternately set and reset. Composing a command to detect a short circuit or a solder bridge.

  When an abnormal command is input, the occurrence of a command error is reported by the 7-segment LED 121. Instead, a lamp (lamp display device (light decoration unit) provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 is used instead. 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) may be turned on or blinked to notify the user, or a predetermined error sound or the like may be output from the speaker (sound output device 226) to notify the user. Further, the occurrence of the command error may be output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261. If the occurrence of the command error is output to the hall computer 262, the occurrence of the error can be immediately reported to the manager of the game arcade. Note that if the command error is not reported by the pachinko machine 10 and is output only to the hall computer 262, if the player inputs an abnormal command as a result of misconduct, The fraudulent activity can be reported to the manager of the game hall without being noticed by the player who has committed the fraud. Therefore, it can be used for extracting a wrongdoer.

  Further, the first embodiment is applied to a command composed of 2 bytes, but the present invention may be applied to a command composed of 3 bytes or more or a command composed of 1 byte. For example, when the command is composed of three or more bytes, the first predetermined input data and the second predetermined input data are subjected to addition or exclusive OR to determine the result. . Further, the first predetermined input data and the second predetermined input data are set so that the outputs of adjacent signal pins of the connector are alternately set and reset. On the other hand, when the command is composed of one byte, for example, the upper 4 bits of data and the lower 4 bits of data are added or exclusive ORed, and the result is determined. In such a case, the command is output every 4 bits, and the 4-bit data is set so that the outputs of the adjacent signal pins of the connector are alternately set and reset.

  The command was output from main controller 110 in 8-bit units as parallel data. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to output the data one bit at a time in a serial manner. In this case, data input by a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 is grouped into, for example, 4 bits or 8 bits to form one group of data, and the data of the group and the data of another group are added or An exclusive OR may be performed to check whether the output command is normal.

  Although the payout return command shown in FIG. 15 is composed of 9966H and the payout initialization command is composed of AA55H, it may be composed of AA66H and 9955H, and 5566H and AA99H. The connectors 207, 208, 217, and 228 are constituted by connectors arranged in two rows as shown in FIG. And the input pins of the input / output ports 215 and 225 of the payout control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 for inputting commands output from these connectors may be arranged in a single row.

  In the present embodiment, the prize detected by the prize detecting means is that the ball hit into the game area wins one of the prize holes 63, 64, 65a. However, when the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a ball-using spinning game machine that performs a spinning game using a ball, the prize detected by the prize detecting means is determined by the operation of the start lever. This is the result of the lottery performed on board.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot has been hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times right item) can increase the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times). ). Further, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the big hit symbol is displayed. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is awarded in the special area.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described. The gaming machine described in each claim is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is a case where the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  Hereinafter, modified examples of the present invention will be described. A second value output means for outputting a second value different from the first value in a gaming machine having an operation member and first value changing means for changing a first value based on an operation amount of the operation member; Synthesizing means for synthesizing a first value changed by the first value changing means with a second value output by a second value output means, and the synthesizing means converts the first value and the second value. A gaming machine 1 comprising: a ball intensity control unit that controls a firing intensity of a ball fired from a firing unit based on a combined value. The first changing means changes the first value based on the operation amount of the operation member. When the first value that changes according to the operation amount of the operating member and the second value that is output from the second value output unit are input to the combining unit, the combining unit combines the first value and the second value. The sphere intensity control unit controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing unit based on the value obtained by synthesizing the first value and the second value by the synthesizing unit. Therefore, the firing intensity of the ball can be adjusted by the second value output from the second value output means in addition to the first value that changes according to the operation amount of the operation member.

  An operation member, a first voltage divider having at least a first variable resistor for changing a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage supplied to the first voltage divider, the first variable resistor being connected to the first variable resistor. A gaming machine having first DC voltage supply means for generating a voltage based on the resistance of a resistor in the first variable resistor, unlike the first DC voltage supply means, DC voltage supply means, addition means for adding the DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supply means to the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the first DC voltage supply means, and A game machine 2 comprising: control means for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means based on the output voltage output.

  In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, when adjusting the firing strength of a ball hit by a solenoid, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are turned to mechanically move the solenoid up, down, back and forth. Since the firing intensity is adjusted by causing the game machine to have an impact on the gaming machine or when the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are loosened due to a change over time, A problem arises in that the adjustment misalignment of the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob occurs, and the position at which the mallet of the solenoid collides with the ball is displaced, so that a prescribed firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle is not generated. was there.

  Further, since the firing intensity is adjusted by mechanically moving the solenoid up and down and back and forth by rotating the first adjusting knob and the second adjusting knob, the accuracy of the adjusting of the firing intensity is controlled by the first adjusting knob. In addition, there is a problem that the accuracy of adjusting the specified emission intensity in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle is low.

  According to the gaming machine 2, since the DC voltage is supplied from the first DC voltage supply means to the first voltage dividing means, the resistance value of the first variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member. , The DC voltage generated in the first variable resistor changes. When the DC voltage that changes according to the operation amount of the operation member and the DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supply unit are input to the addition unit, the addition unit outputs a DC voltage that changes according to the operation amount of the operation member, A voltage is obtained by adding the DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supply means. Then, based on the output voltage output from the adding means, the control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means. As described above, the launching intensity of the sphere can be adjusted by the DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supply means, in addition to the DC voltage that changes according to the operation amount of the operation member.

  Here, in order to drive the ball into the game area where the winning opening and the like are arranged, the operating member must be operated to adjust the firing intensity of the ball so as to be within a specified range. The operation amount of the operation member having the firing intensity at which the ball is hit is set to an arbitrary range including 65 degrees, which is the target value of the operation amount of the operation member, as shown in FIG. 10, for example.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), the range of the operation amount of the operation member which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area is, for example, 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees due to individual differences of the first variable resistor or the like. In some cases, the ball could not be hit into the game area at the target value of the operation amount of the operation member of 65 degrees.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine 2, by adjusting the firing intensity of the ball by the DC voltage input from the second DC voltage supply means to the addition means, as shown in FIG. The range of the operation amount of the operation member which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is struck can be changed to, for example, 57 degrees or more and 75 degrees or less. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the range of the operation amount of the operation member which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area so as to include the target value of the operation amount of the operation member of 65 degrees.

  Further, the launching intensity of the sphere is adjusted by the DC voltage input from the second DC voltage supply means to the addition means. In general, DC voltage is easy to adjust finely and accurately, and has the property of being resistant to change over time (it is hard to get out of order). , And the adjustment can be made to be resistant to a change with time (hard to be out of order).

  In the gaming machine 2, the DC value of the DC voltage input from the second DC voltage supply unit to the adding unit is variable. Since the DC voltage input from the second DC voltage supply means to the adding means is variable, the DC voltage can be finely adjusted. Here, the DC voltage input to the adding means from the second DC voltage supplying means is added to the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the adding means. Therefore, while making the fluctuation width of the output voltage output from the adding means substantially equal to the fluctuation width of the voltage generated in the first variable resistor, the voltage value of the output voltage output from the adding means is changed (fine Adjustment). Therefore, it is possible to change (fine-adjust) the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means.

  In the gaming machine 2 or 3, the second DC voltage supply unit supplies a DC voltage to the second voltage division unit having at least a second variable resistor whose resistance value can be adjusted, Power supply means for generating a voltage based on the resistance of the second variable resistor in the second variable resistor, and a DC voltage generated in the second variable resistor is input to the adding means. Gaming machine 4 to do. Since the DC voltage is supplied from the power supply unit to the second voltage dividing unit, the DC voltage input from the second variable resistor to the adding unit can be changed by changing the resistance value of the second variable resistor. it can. Therefore, by using a simple variable-cost inexpensive second variable resistor to change the output voltage output from the adding means to the control means without using a power supply circuit or the like constituted by a complicated circuit, Can be changed (fine-tuned).

  A gaming machine 5 in which any of the gaming machines 2 to 4 is provided with a constant voltage means for keeping a voltage applied to the second voltage dividing means constant. Since the constant voltage means for making the DC voltage applied to the second voltage dividing means constant is provided, even if the voltage value of the DC voltage supplied to the second voltage dividing means by the power supply means fluctuates, the second voltage dividing means is provided. The voltage applied to the means has a stable and constant value. Therefore, the DC voltage input to the adding means from the second variable resistor provided in the second voltage dividing means is stabilized, and the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine 5, the constant voltage means is constituted by a Zener diode. The voltage applied to the second voltage dividing means is kept constant by the Zener diode. Therefore, the input from the second variable resistor provided in the second voltage dividing means to the adding means using a simple structure and an inexpensive zener diode without using a constant voltage circuit or the like constituted by a complicated circuit. The DC voltage to be applied, and the emission intensity of the ball fired from the firing means can be stabilized.

  In a gaming machine having an operation member and first value changing means for changing a first value based on an operation amount of the operation member, a change amount of the first value changed by the first value change means A conversion unit that converts the change amount into a second value smaller than the change amount of the first value, and controls a firing intensity of a sphere fired from the firing unit based on the second value converted by the conversion unit. A gaming machine 7 comprising intensity control means. The first value changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, and the first value is converted to a second value that is a change amount smaller than the change amount of the first value by the conversion unit. Then, the intensity control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means based on the second value converted by the conversion means. Therefore, by converting the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member by the conversion unit to the second value, the change amount of the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing unit according to the operation amount of the operation member is also Can be smaller.

  An operation member, a first voltage divider having at least a first variable resistor for changing a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage supplied to the first voltage divider, the first variable resistor being connected to the first variable resistor. A gaming machine having first DC voltage supply means for generating a voltage based on the resistance of a resistor in the first variable resistor, a voltage dividing means for dividing a voltage generated in the first variable resistor; And a first control means for controlling the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means based on the output voltage output from the voltage dividing means. When the resistance value of the first variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage generated at the first variable resistor changes. The voltage generated in the first variable resistor is divided by a voltage divider. Based on the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means, the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means is controlled by the first control means. Therefore, by dividing the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the voltage dividing means, it is possible to reduce the variation in the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing means in accordance with the operation amount of the operating member. .

  An operation member, a first voltage divider having at least a first variable resistor for changing a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage supplied to the first voltage divider, the first variable resistor being connected to the first variable resistor. A gaming machine having first DC voltage supply means for generating a voltage based on the resistance of a resistor in the first variable resistor, a voltage dividing means for dividing a voltage generated in the first variable resistor; Unlike the first DC voltage supply unit, a second DC voltage supply unit that supplies a DC voltage, and a DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supply unit are divided by the voltage division unit. A gaming machine comprising: an adding means for adding a voltage; and a second control means for controlling a firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means based on an output voltage output from the adding means. 9. When the resistance value of the first variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage generated at the first variable resistor changes. The voltage generated in the first variable resistor is divided by a voltage divider. When the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means and the DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supplying means are input to the adding means, the adding means outputs the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means and the second voltage. (2) A voltage obtained by adding the DC voltage supplied by the DC voltage supply means is output. Based on the output voltage output from the adding means, the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means is controlled by the second control means. As described above, the firing intensity of the sphere can be adjusted not only by the DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supply means but also by the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means.

  Here, in order to drive a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is provided, an operating member must be operated to adjust the firing intensity of the ball so as to be within a specified range. In addition, the operation amount of the operation member having the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is set to an arbitrary range including the target value of the operation amount of the operation member of 65 degrees as shown in FIG. 11, for example.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), the range of the operation amount of the operation member which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area is, for example, 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees due to individual differences of the first variable resistor or the like. In some cases, the ball could not be hit into the game area at the target value of the operation amount of the operation member of 65 degrees. In that case, according to the gaming machine 9, when the resistance value of the first variable resistor is changed by operating the operation member by dividing the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the voltage dividing means. Can be reduced as compared with the fluctuation range of the voltage generated in the first variable resistor. Since the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means becomes the voltage input to the adding means, the fluctuation range of the output voltage output from the adding means can be reduced. Since the emission intensity of the sphere is determined based on the output voltage output from the adding means to the second control means, the fluctuation range of the emission intensity of the sphere can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to change the range of the operation amount of the operation member that has the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area (for example, the operation amount of the operation member that has the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or more. The range below degrees can be changed to a wide range from 23 degrees to 77 degrees (see FIG. 11). Therefore, it is possible to adjust the range of the operation amount of the operation member that becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area so as to include the target value of the operation amount of the operation member, for example, 65 degrees.

  The voltage divided by the voltage dividing means is smaller than the voltage generated in the first variable resistor, and the reduced voltage is applied to the DC input from the second DC voltage supplying means to the adding means. Can be supplemented by voltage. This makes it possible to reduce the range of variation in the firing intensity of the ball while setting the firing intensity of the ball with respect to the operation amount of the operating member to the firing intensity for driving the ball into the game area.

  In addition, since the range of the operation amount of the operation member, which is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area, can be changed, the range of the operation amount of the operation member, which is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area, is increased. (For example, the operation amount of the operation member which is the firing intensity at which the ball is shot into the game area is in the range of 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the range width 18 degrees is changed to the range of 23 degrees or more and 77 degrees or less. , The range width of which can be set to 54 degrees (see FIG. 11). Therefore, the firing intensity for hitting the ball into the game area can be finely adjusted by the operation amount of the operation member.

  Further, the launching intensity of the sphere is adjusted by the voltage (DC voltage) divided by the voltage dividing means and the DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supplying means. Generally, the DC voltage has a property that it is easy to finely and accurately adjust and is resistant to change with time (it is hard to get out of order). The width can be finely and accurately adjusted, and the adjustment can be made more resistant to time-dependent changes (to prevent deviation).

  A gaming machine (10) comprising a gaming machine (9) including first voltage changing means for changing a voltage value input from the voltage dividing means to the adding means. Since the first voltage changing means is provided, the voltage value input from the voltage dividing means to the adding means can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, by changing (finely adjusting) the voltage value input from the voltage dividing means to the adding means by the first voltage changing means, the output voltage output from the adding means to the control means is changed (finely adjusted). The firing intensity of the sphere can be changed (fine-tuned).

  In the gaming machine 10, the gaming machine 11 is characterized in that the first voltage changing means is constituted by a variable resistor whose resistance value can be adjusted. Since the first voltage changing means is constituted by a variable resistor whose resistance value can be adjusted, by changing the resistance value of the first voltage changing means, the voltage value inputted from the voltage dividing means to the adding means is changed. Can be changed (fine-tuned). Thus, the output voltage output from the adding means to the control means can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the ball can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, in general, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the firing intensity of the ball can be changed (finely adjusted) using a simple configuration and an inexpensive variable resistor.

  The gaming machine 12 of any of the gaming machines 9 to 11, further comprising a second voltage changing means for changing a voltage value input from the second DC voltage supply means to the adding means. Since the second voltage changing means is provided, the voltage input from the second DC voltage supply means to the adding means can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, the DC voltage input from the second DC voltage supply means to the adding means is added by the adding means to the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means. Therefore, the voltage value of the output voltage output from the adding means is changed (fine) while making the fluctuation width of the output voltage output from the adding means substantially equal to the fluctuation width of the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means. Adjustment).

  In the gaming machine 12, the second voltage changing means is constituted by a variable resistor whose resistance value can be adjusted. Since the second voltage changing means is constituted by a variable resistor whose resistance value can be adjusted, by changing the resistance value of the second voltage changing means, it is inputted from the second DC voltage supply means to the adding means. The voltage value can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, the output voltage output from the adding means to the control means can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the ball can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, in general, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the firing intensity of the ball can be changed (finely adjusted) using a simple configuration and an inexpensive variable resistor.

  A gaming machine 14 in which the gaming machine 12 or 13 is provided with a constant voltage means for keeping a voltage applied to the second voltage changing means constant. Since the constant voltage means for keeping the voltage applied to the second voltage changing means constant is provided, the voltage applied to the second voltage changing means has a stable constant value. Therefore, the voltage input from the second voltage changing unit to the adding unit can be stabilized. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the output voltage output from the adding means and to stabilize the firing intensity of the ball.

  In the gaming machine 14, the constant voltage means is constituted by a Zener diode. The voltage applied to the second voltage changing means is kept constant by the Zener diode. Therefore, the voltage input from the second voltage changing unit to the adding unit can be stabilized. Thus, the output voltage output from the adding means can be stabilized, and the emission intensity of the ball can be stabilized. Here, in general, a Zener diode has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a constant voltage circuit or the like composed of a complicated circuit. Therefore, the voltage value input from the second voltage changing means to the adding means can be stabilized by using a simple configuration and an inexpensive zener diode, and the emission intensity of the ball can be stabilized.

  An operating member, a detecting means for detecting an operation amount of the operating member, a firing means for firing a ball, and a firing intensity for controlling a firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means based on a detection value of the detecting means. In a gaming machine having control means, when the detection value of the detection means is in a first range, the control means controls a firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means based on a first relationship. A first control unit that controls the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing unit based on a second relationship when the detection value of the detection unit is in a second range. And the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means controlled by the second control means is greater than the firing strength of the sphere fired from the firing means controlled by the first control means. Is configured as Gaming machine 16, wherein the door. The operation amount of the operation member is detected by the detection unit, and when the detection amount is within the first range, the first control unit controls the emission intensity of the ball fired from the emission unit based on the first relationship. . On the other hand, when the amount detected by the detection means is in the second range, the second control means controls the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means based on the second relationship. Here, the emission intensity of the sphere fired from the emission means controlled by the second control means is configured to be greater than the emission intensity of the sphere fired from the emission means controlled by the first control means. I have. Therefore, when the amount of detection by the detection means falls from the first range to the second range, the emission intensity of the sphere emitted from the emission means can be switched to increase the emission intensity.

  An operation member, a first voltage dividing means having at least a first variable resistor for changing a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage being supplied to the first voltage dividing means, the first variable A first DC voltage supply means for generating a voltage based on the resistance of the resistor in the first variable resistor, wherein the reference voltage is different from the first DC voltage supply means and outputs a reference voltage. An output unit, a reference voltage output from the reference voltage output unit, and a voltage generated in the first variable resistor, respectively, and the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is input to the reference voltage output unit. A first voltage output means for outputting a predetermined DC voltage when the voltage is higher than the reference voltage output by the first or when the voltage is equal to or higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means; Adding means for adding the input voltage to the voltage generated in the first variable resistor; inputting a voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means; A game machine 17 comprising: control means for controlling the firing intensity of a ball to be fired. When the resistance value of the first variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage generated at the first variable resistor changes. The voltage generated by the first variable resistor and the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means are input to the first voltage output means. Then, the first voltage output means is provided when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means or higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means. Outputs a predetermined DC voltage. The predetermined DC voltage output from the first voltage output means is added to the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the addition means, and output from the addition means. A voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means is input to the control means, and the control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means based on the input voltage. As described above, when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is higher than the reference voltage or higher than the reference voltage, that is, when the operation amount of the operation member is higher than the predetermined value or higher than the predetermined value, the first The voltage output means outputs a predetermined DC voltage to the addition means. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than or equal to the specified value, the firing intensity of the ball can be reliably switched to the predetermined intensity.

  An operation member, a first voltage dividing means having at least a first variable resistor for changing a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage being supplied to the first voltage dividing means, the first variable A first DC voltage supply means for generating a voltage based on the resistance of the resistor in the first variable resistor, wherein the reference voltage is different from the first DC voltage supply means and outputs a reference voltage. An output unit, a reference voltage output from the reference voltage output unit, and a voltage generated in the first variable resistor, respectively, and the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is input to the reference voltage output unit. The first voltage output means for outputting a predetermined DC voltage when the reference voltage is higher than the reference voltage output by the first variable resistor or the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means; Voltage dividing means for dividing a voltage, adding means for adding the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means and the voltage outputted by the first voltage output means, and an output outputted from the adding means A gaming machine 18 comprising: a control unit for inputting a voltage associated with a voltage, and controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing unit based on the input voltage. When the resistance value of the first variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage generated at the first variable resistor changes. The voltage generated by the first variable resistor and the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means are input to the first voltage output means. Then, the first voltage output means is provided when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means or higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means. Outputs a predetermined DC voltage. The predetermined DC voltage output by the first voltage output means is added by the addition means to the voltage generated by the first variable resistor and divided by the voltage division means, and output from the addition means. A voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means is input to the control means, and based on the input voltage, the control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means. As described above, when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is higher than the reference voltage or higher than the reference voltage, that is, when the operation amount of the operation member is higher than the predetermined value or higher than the predetermined value, the first The voltage output means outputs a predetermined DC voltage to the addition means. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than or equal to the specified value, the firing intensity of the ball can be reliably switched to the predetermined intensity.

  An operation member, a first voltage dividing means having at least a first variable resistor for changing a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage being supplied to the first voltage dividing means, the first variable A first DC voltage supply means for generating a voltage based on the resistance of the resistor in the first variable resistor, wherein the reference voltage is different from the first DC voltage supply means and outputs a reference voltage. An output unit, a reference voltage output from the reference voltage output unit, and a voltage generated in the first variable resistor, respectively, and the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is input to the reference voltage output unit. The first DC voltage is output when the voltage is equal to or lower than the reference voltage output by the first variable resistor or when the voltage is lower than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output unit. Voltage output A second voltage output for outputting a second DC voltage having a voltage value higher than the first DC voltage when the reference voltage output by the means is higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means; Means, an adding means for adding the voltage output from the second voltage output means to the voltage generated in the first variable resistor, and a voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means, A game machine 19 comprising: control means for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means based on the input voltage.

  In the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are misaligned, and the position at which the mallet of the solenoid collides with the ball shifts, so that the firing intensity of the ball is weakened. Even if the operation amount of the ball is set to the maximum value, the ball cannot be hit against, for example, a return rubber (see FIG. 2) disposed at the right end of the game area where the ball fired by the solenoid flows down, and a normal game is performed. There was a problem that can not be.

  According to the gaming machine 19, the voltage generated at the first variable resistor changes by changing the resistance value of the first variable resistor based on the operation amount of the operation member. The voltage generated by the first variable resistor and the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means are input to the second voltage output means. Then, when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is equal to or lower than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means, or when the voltage generated by the first variable resistor is lower than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means, Outputs a first DC voltage, and when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means or higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means. Outputs a second DC voltage having a voltage value higher than the first DC voltage. The DC voltage output from the second voltage output means is added to the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the addition means, and output from the addition means. A voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means is input to the control means, and the control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means based on the input voltage. Thus, when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is higher than the reference voltage or higher than the reference voltage, that is, when the operation amount of the operation member is higher than the predetermined value or higher than the predetermined value, the second The voltage output means switches the voltage input to the adding means from the first DC voltage to the second DC voltage. Here, the second DC voltage is set to a voltage value larger than the first DC voltage. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than or equal to the specified value, the firing intensity of the ball can be reliably switched to the predetermined intensity. Further, the second voltage output means detects whether the operation amount of the operation member is greater than or equal to a specified value or not, by detecting a voltage (DC voltage) generated in the first variable resistor and a reference voltage output means. The comparison is made with the reference voltage (DC voltage) output by the above. Generally, a DC voltage is accurate and has a property of being resistant to change with time (it is unlikely to be out of order). Therefore, by the second voltage output means, it is possible to accurately detect the case where the operation amount of the operation member is larger than the specified value or equal to or larger than the specified value, and it is possible to make the detection more resistant to change over time (harder to change).

  An operation member, a first voltage dividing means having at least a first variable resistor for changing a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage being supplied to the first voltage dividing means, the first variable A first DC voltage supply means for generating a voltage based on the resistance of the resistor in the first variable resistor, wherein the reference voltage is different from the first DC voltage supply means and outputs a reference voltage. An output unit, a reference voltage output from the reference voltage output unit, and a voltage generated in the first variable resistor, respectively, and the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is input to the reference voltage output unit. The first DC voltage is output when the voltage is equal to or lower than the reference voltage output by the first variable resistor or when the voltage is lower than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output unit. Voltage output A second voltage output for outputting a second DC voltage having a voltage value higher than the first DC voltage when the reference voltage output by the means is higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means; Means, a voltage dividing means for dividing a voltage generated in the first variable resistor, a voltage divided by the voltage dividing means, and a voltage outputted by the second voltage output means. Adding means, and control means for inputting a voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means and controlling the firing intensity of a sphere fired from the firing means based on the input voltage. A gaming machine 20 characterized by the following.

  When the resistance value of the first variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage generated at the first variable resistor changes. The voltage generated by the first variable resistor and the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means are input to the second voltage output means. Then, when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is equal to or lower than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means, or when the voltage generated by the first variable resistor is lower than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means, Outputs a first DC voltage, and when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means or higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means. Outputs a second DC voltage having a voltage value higher than the first DC voltage. The DC voltage output by the second voltage output means is added to the voltage generated by the first variable resistor by the voltage dividing means and added by the adding means, and output from the adding means. A voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means is input to the control means, and based on the input voltage, the control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means. Thus, when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is higher than the reference voltage or higher than the reference voltage, that is, when the operation amount of the operation member is higher than the predetermined value or higher than the predetermined value, the second The voltage output means switches the voltage input to the adding means from the first DC voltage to the second DC voltage. Here, the second DC voltage is set to a voltage value larger than the first DC voltage. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than or equal to the specified value, the firing intensity of the ball can be reliably switched to the predetermined intensity.

  Further, the second voltage output means detects whether the operation amount of the operation member is greater than or equal to a specified value or not, by detecting a voltage (DC voltage) generated in the first variable resistor and a reference voltage output means. The comparison is made with the reference voltage (DC voltage) output by the above. Generally, a DC voltage is accurate and has a property of being resistant to change with time (it is unlikely to be out of order). Therefore, by the second voltage output means, it is possible to accurately detect the case where the operation amount of the operation member is larger than the specified value or equal to or larger than the specified value, and it is possible to make the detection more resistant to change over time (harder to change).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 32, in order to hit a ball into the game area, the operating member must be operated to adjust the firing intensity of the ball so as to fall within a specified range. Then, the operation amount of the operation member having the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is set to an arbitrary range including the target value of the operation amount of the operation member of 65 degrees as shown in FIG. 32, for example. At this time, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), the range of the operation amount of the operation member, which is the firing intensity at which the ball is shot into the game area, is 66 degrees or more, for example, due to individual differences of the first variable resistor or the like. In some cases, the ball could not be hit into the game area at the target value of the operation amount of the operation member of 65 degrees. In this case, according to the gaming machine 20, when the resistance value of the first variable resistor is changed by operating the operation member by dividing the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the voltage dividing means. Can be reduced as compared with the fluctuation range of the voltage generated in the first variable resistor. Since the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means becomes the voltage input to the adding means, the fluctuation range of the output voltage output from the adding means can be reduced. Since the firing intensity of the sphere is determined based on the voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means to the control means, the fluctuation range of the firing intensity of the sphere can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to change the range of the operation amount of the operation member that has the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area (for example, the operation amount of the operation member that has the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area is 66 degrees or more and The range below degrees can be changed to a range from 19 degrees to 105 degrees (see FIG. 32). Therefore, it is possible to adjust the range of the operation amount of the operation member that becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area so as to include the target value of the operation amount of the operation member, for example, 65 degrees. The voltage divided by the voltage dividing means is smaller than the voltage generated in the first variable resistor. The reduced voltage is applied to the first voltage input from the second voltage output means to the adding means. It can be supplemented by a DC voltage. This makes it possible to reduce the range of variation in the firing intensity of the ball while setting the firing intensity of the ball with respect to the operation amount of the operating member to the firing intensity for driving the ball into the game area.

  In addition, since the range of the operation amount of the operation member that has the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area can be changed, the range of the operation amount of the operation member that has the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area can be widened. (For example, when the operation amount of the operation member that has a firing intensity at which a ball is shot into the game area is in the range of 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less and the range width is 18 degrees, the operation amount is 19 degrees or more and 105 degrees or less. The range width can be changed to 86 degrees as a range (see FIG. 32). Therefore, the firing intensity for hitting the ball into the game area can be finely adjusted by the operation amount of the operation member.

  Further, the firing intensity of the sphere is adjusted by the voltage (DC voltage) divided by the voltage dividing means and the DC voltage supplied by the second voltage output means. Generally, the DC voltage has a property that it is easy to finely and accurately adjust and is resistant to change with time (it is hard to get out of order). The width can be finely and accurately adjusted, and the adjustment can be made more resistant to time-dependent changes (to prevent deviation).

  A gaming machine 21 in any one of the gaming machines 17 to 20, further comprising a reference voltage stabilizing means for keeping the reference voltage output from the reference voltage output means constant. Since the reference voltage output means is provided with the reference voltage stabilizing means for keeping the reference voltage output from the reference voltage output means constant, the reference voltage output from the reference voltage output means has an accurate and stable constant value. Thus, the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means can accurately and stably compare the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the operation of the operation member with the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means. Can be done. Therefore, the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means is provided when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is higher than the reference voltage or higher than the reference voltage, that is, when the operation amount of the operation member is smaller than the specified value. The detection in the case of a large value or a value equal to or more than a specified value can be performed accurately and stably. Further, when the operation amount of the operation member is larger than the specified value or equal to or larger than the specified value, the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means outputs the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means from the addition means. The DC voltage input to the power supply can be switched accurately and stably. Thus, the voltage output from the adding means and input to the control means can be switched accurately and stably. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is larger than the specified value or equal to or larger than the specified value, the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means can be switched accurately and stably.

  In the gaming machine 21, the reference voltage stabilizing means is constituted by a shunt regulator circuit. The shunt regulator circuit keeps the reference voltage output from the reference voltage output means constant. Thus, the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means can accurately and stably compare the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the operation of the operation member with the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means. Can be done. Therefore, the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means is provided when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is higher than the reference voltage or higher than the reference voltage, that is, when the operation amount of the operation member is smaller than the specified value. The detection in the case of a large value or a value equal to or more than a specified value can be performed accurately and stably. Here, generally, the shunt regulator circuit has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a constant voltage circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means uses a shunt regulator circuit that has a simple configuration and is inexpensive to detect when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than or equal to the specified value. And can be performed accurately and stably.

  In the gaming machine 17 or 18, or any of the gaming machines 21 or 22 subordinate to the gaming machine 17 or 18, provided in one of the gaming area in which the ball fired by the firing means flows down, and one of the gaming areas, A ball launching unit for launching the ball from the launching unit into the game area; and a ball stopper that the ball launched from the launching unit can hit. When a DC voltage is output, the voltage input to the control unit is set so that the ball fired from the firing unit via the firing unit has a firing intensity that reaches the ball stopper. A gaming machine 23 characterized in that: When the operation amount of the operation member is greater than or equal to the specified value, the first voltage output means outputs a predetermined DC voltage to the adding means. Then, an output voltage is output from the adding means, and a voltage associated with the output voltage is input to the control means. Here, the voltage input to the control unit is set so that the ball fired from the firing unit via the firing unit has a firing intensity that reaches the ball stopping member. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is larger than the specified value or is equal to or larger than the specified value, the ball fired from the firing means to the game area via the firing unit can be reliably hit on the ball stopping member. , Normal games can be played reliably.

  In the gaming machine 19 or 20, or any of the gaming machines 21 or 22 subordinate to the gaming machine 19 or 20, provided in one of the gaming area where the ball fired by the firing means flows down, and one of the gaming areas, A launching unit for launching a ball from the launching unit into the game area; and a ball stopper member against which the ball launched from the launching unit can hit. When a DC voltage is output, the voltage input to the control unit is set so that the ball fired from the firing unit via the firing unit has a firing intensity that reaches the ball stopper. A gaming machine 24 characterized by the following. When the operation amount of the operation member is greater than or equal to the specified value, the second voltage output means outputs the second DC voltage to the adding means. Then, an output voltage is output from the adding means, and a voltage associated with the output voltage is input to the control means. Here, the voltage input to the control unit is set so that the ball fired from the firing unit via the firing unit has a firing intensity that reaches the ball stopping member. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is larger than the specified value or is equal to or larger than the specified value, the ball fired from the firing means to the game area via the firing unit can be reliably hit on the ball stopping member. , A normal game can be reliably performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines 17 to 24, a constant voltage supply unit for supplying a constant value DC voltage, a DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply unit, and a voltage input to the control unit are input, respectively. When the voltage input to the control means is higher than the DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply means or is equal to or higher than the DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply means, the voltage input to the control means is reduced to a predetermined value. A gaming machine 25 comprising: voltage limiting means for limiting voltage to If the voltage input to the control means that changes according to the operation amount of the operation member is higher than the DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply means or is equal to or higher than the DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply means, the voltage limiting means Thus, the voltage input to the control means is limited to a predetermined voltage. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than or equal to the specified value, the voltage input to the control unit is limited to the predetermined voltage by the voltage limiting unit, and the operation amount of the operation member is increased. Even so, the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means is constant. Accordingly, when the operation amount of the operation member is larger than the specified value or is equal to or larger than the specified value, even if the operation amount of the operation member is increased more than necessary, the voltage applied to the firing unit by the control unit is constant. Becomes Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the voltage applied to the firing means from becoming an overvoltage, and it is possible to reduce deterioration of the firing means.

  In the gaming machine 25, the predetermined voltage limited by the voltage limiting means is a DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply means. The voltage limiting unit compares a voltage input to the control unit, which changes according to an operation amount of the operation member, with a DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply unit. When the voltage input to the control means is higher than the DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply means or is equal to or higher than the DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply means, the voltage limiting means sets the voltage input to the control means. Start restricting. Thus, the voltage limiting unit limits the voltage input to the control unit to the DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply unit. Here, the voltage limiting means includes a constant voltage, which is a voltage value at which the voltage limiting means starts limiting the voltage input to the control means, and a voltage value at which the voltage limiting means limits the voltage input to the control means. The DC voltage supplied by the supply means is used. Thereby, both the DC voltage at which the voltage limiting means starts limiting the voltage input to the control means and the DC voltage at which the voltage limiting means limits the voltage input to the control means are set to one constant voltage supply means. It can be determined by the supplied DC voltage. Therefore, it is possible to uniformly set and change the DC voltage at which the voltage limiting means starts limiting the voltage input to the control means and the DC voltage at which the voltage limiting means limits the voltage input to the control means.

  The gaming machine 27 of the gaming machine 25 or 26, wherein the constant voltage supply means is constituted by a reference voltage output means. Since the constant voltage supply means is constituted by the reference voltage output means, the voltage input to the voltage limiting means is the reference voltage output from the reference voltage output means. Here, the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means is also input to the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means. Therefore, both the voltage input to the first voltage output unit or the second voltage output unit and the voltage input to the voltage limiting unit can be supplied from one reference voltage output unit that outputs the reference voltage. Accordingly, it is possible to eliminate the need for a dedicated power supply required for the voltage limiting unit to limit the voltage input to the control unit.

  In any of the gaming machines 25 to 27, a game area in which a ball fired by the shooting means flows down, and a ball provided from one of the game areas and fired from the shooting means is fired in the game area. A launch unit, comprising a ball stopping member against which a ball launched from the launch unit can hit, and a predetermined voltage limited by the voltage limiting unit is a ball launched from the launch unit via the launch unit, A gaming machine 28 characterized in that the launch intensity is set so as to reach the ball stopping member. When the operation amount of the operation member is greater than or equal to the specified value, the limiting unit limits the voltage input to the control unit to a predetermined voltage. Here, the predetermined voltage is set so that the ball fired from the firing unit via the firing unit has a firing intensity that reaches the ball stopping member. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is larger than the specified value or is equal to or larger than the specified value, the ball fired from the firing means to the game area can reliably hit the ball stopping member, and a normal game can be played. It can be done reliably. In addition, since the voltage applied to the firing means can be prevented from becoming an overvoltage, damage to the firing means and a ball stopping member against which a ball fired from the firing means hits can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine 18 or 20, or any of the gaming machines 21 to 28 subordinate to the gaming machine 18 or 20, a first voltage changing means for changing a voltage value input from the voltage dividing means to the adding means is provided. A gaming machine 29 characterized in that: Since the first voltage changing means is provided, the voltage value input from the voltage dividing means to the adding means can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, it is possible to change (fine-adjust) the voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means to the control means, thereby changing (fine-adjusting) the firing intensity of the ball.

  In the gaming machine 29, the first voltage changing means is constituted by a variable resistor whose resistance value is adjustable. Since the variable resistor is constituted by a variable resistor whose resistance value can be adjusted, the voltage value input from the voltage dividing means to the adding means is changed (finely adjusted) by changing the resistance value of the first voltage changing means. be able to. As a result, the voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means to the control means can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the ball can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, in general, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the firing intensity of the ball can be changed (finely adjusted) using a simple configuration and an inexpensive variable resistor.

  A launching unit that launches a ball, an operating member, a first value changing unit that changes a first value based on an operation amount of the operating member, and a first value that the first value changing unit changes. A game machine comprising: a ball control means for controlling a firing intensity of a ball fired from said firing means; a setting value means for setting a second value separately from a first value changed by said first value changing means. And a synthetic value means for synthesizing a second value set by the set value means and a first value changed by the first value changing means, wherein the sphere control means is synthesized by the synthetic value means. A gaming machine 31 for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means based on the value obtained.

  In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, when adjusting the firing strength of a ball hit by a solenoid, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are turned to mechanically move the solenoid up, down, back and forth. Since the firing intensity is adjusted by causing the game machine to have an impact on the gaming machine or when the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are loosened due to a change over time, A problem arises in that the adjustment misalignment of the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob occurs, and the position at which the mallet of the solenoid collides with the ball is displaced, so that a prescribed firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle is not generated. was there.

  According to the gaming machine 31, the first value changing means changes the first value based on the operation amount of the operation member. When the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operating member and the second value that is set by the setting value unit are combined by the combination value unit, the ball control unit sets the value combined by the combination value unit. And controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means. Therefore, the combined value means combines the second value with the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, so that the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means changes based on the operation amount of the operation member. In addition to the first value, it can be changed by the second value set by the setting value means.

  In the gaming machine 31, the first value changing means includes a first voltage dividing means having at least a variable resistor for changing a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage applied to the first voltage dividing means. DC voltage supply means for supplying, and the combined value means sets a voltage value generated in the variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the DC voltage supply means as the first value, and sets the first value to the first value. A gaming machine 32 characterized by being synthesized with a second value set by a setting value means. Since the DC voltage is supplied from the DC voltage supply unit to the first voltage dividing unit, when the resistance value of the variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage value generated in the variable resistor changes. . The combining value means combines the voltage value that changes based on the operation amount of the operating member as the first value with the second value set by the setting value means. Here, in general, combining voltage values can be realized with a simple configuration. Therefore, by setting the first value synthesized by the synthesized value unit to be the voltage value, the synthesized value unit can synthesize the first value with the second value with a simple configuration.

  In the gaming machine 31 or 32, a conversion value unit for multiplying the value synthesized by the synthesis value unit by a positive real number is provided, and the ball control unit is configured to perform a conversion based on the value multiplied by the real number by the conversion value unit. A gaming machine 33 for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means. The sphere control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means based on a value obtained by multiplying the value synthesized by the synthesis value means by a positive real number by the conversion value means. Here, the conversion value unit can change the amount of change of the combined value that changes according to the operation amount of the operation member by multiplying the value combined by the combination value unit by a positive real number. Therefore, the amount of change in the emission intensity of the sphere, which changes depending on the operation amount of the operation member, can be changed by the conversion value means.

  A launching unit that launches a ball, an operating member, a first value changing unit that changes a first value based on an operation amount of the operating member, and a first value that the first value changing unit changes. A game machine having a ball control means for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means, wherein the first value changed by the first value changing means is multiplied by a positive real number and converted to a third value. A game machine comprising a conversion value means, wherein the ball control means controls the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means based on a third value converted by the conversion value means. 34. The first value changing means changes the first value based on the operation amount of the operation member. When the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member is converted to a third value by multiplying the converted value by a positive real number, the ball control unit determines, based on the third value converted by the conversion value unit, The firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means is controlled. Here, the conversion value means multiplies the first value, which changes according to the operation amount of the operation member, by a positive real number to obtain the third value, so that the change amount of the first value can be changed. Therefore, the amount of change in the emission intensity of the sphere, which changes depending on the operation amount of the operation member, can be changed by the conversion value means.

  In the gaming machine 34, the first value changing means includes a first voltage dividing means having at least a variable resistor for changing a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage applied to the first voltage dividing means. DC voltage supply means for supplying the DC voltage, and the conversion value means sets a voltage value generated in the variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the DC voltage supply means as the first value, and sets the first value to a positive value. A gaming machine 35 characterized in that the value is multiplied by a real number and converted to a third value. Since the DC voltage is supplied from the DC voltage supply unit to the first voltage dividing unit, when the resistance value of the variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage value generated in the variable resistor changes. . The conversion value means sets a voltage value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member as a first value and multiplies the first value by a positive real number to obtain a third value. Here, generally, multiplying the voltage value by a positive real number can be realized by a simple configuration. Therefore, the conversion value means can convert the first value to the third value with a simple configuration by setting the first value to be converted into the third value as the voltage value.

  In the gaming machine 34 or 35, a set value means for setting a second value separately from the first value changed by the first value change means, a second value set by the set value means, and the conversion value means Combined value means for combining the third value converted by the control means, and the sphere control means controls the emission intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means based on the value combined by the combined value means. A gaming machine 36 characterized by the following. The sphere control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means based on the value synthesized by the synthesis value means. Therefore, the combined value means combines the second value with the third value obtained by changing the amount of change of the first value by the conversion value means, and adds the emission intensity of the ball fired from the firing means to the third value. , Can also be changed by the second value set by the setting value means.

  In any one of the gaming machines 33 to 36, the conversion value means multiplies a positive real number by an adjustable value as a DC voltage value, and the conversion value means adjusts a resistance value. An adjustment variable resistor, a magnification adjustment power supply for supplying a DC voltage to the magnification adjustment variable resistor, and a DC voltage supplied by the magnification adjustment power supply, the DC voltage supplied to the magnification adjustment variable resistor. A gaming machine 37 comprising: a magnification adjusting means for adjusting a voltage value of a DC voltage as a magnification for multiplying the positive real number based on a voltage value of a voltage. The magnification that the conversion value means multiplies by a positive real number is configured to be adjustable as a voltage value of a DC voltage, and the magnification adjustment means generates a voltage in the magnification adjustment variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the magnification adjustment power supply means. Based on the voltage value of the applied voltage, the conversion value means adjusts the magnification to be multiplied by a positive real number. Therefore, by adjusting the resistance value of the magnification adjusting variable resistor, it is possible to easily adjust the magnification that the conversion value means multiplies by a positive real number.

  In the gaming machine 37, the magnification adjusting means includes: a magnification adjusting voltage acquiring means for acquiring a voltage value of the voltage generated by the magnification adjusting variable resistor; and a voltage value acquired by the magnification adjusting voltage acquiring means. A game machine 38 comprising: a magnification adjusting voltage determining means for determining a voltage value of a DC voltage as a magnification for multiplying the positive real number based on the magnification. When the voltage value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor for magnification adjustment is acquired by the voltage acquisition unit for magnification adjustment, based on the voltage value of the acquired voltage, the voltage decision unit for magnification adjustment determines that the conversion value unit has a positive value. A voltage value of the DC voltage as a magnification to be multiplied by a real number is determined. Therefore, the magnification adjusting voltage determination means can accurately determine the DC voltage value as the magnification by which the conversion value means is multiplied by a positive real number.

  In the gaming machine 38, the magnification adjusting voltage acquiring means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated by the magnification adjusting variable resistor when the gaming machine is initialized. . The magnification adjusting voltage acquiring means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the magnification adjusting variable resistor when the gaming machine is initialized. Therefore, after the initialization of the gaming machine, the magnification adjustment voltage acquiring means does not need to acquire the voltage value of the voltage generated in the magnification adjustment variable resistor. Therefore, even after the initialization of the gaming machine, the ball control means is fired from the firing means in comparison with the gaming machine in which the magnification adjusting voltage obtaining means obtains the voltage value of the voltage generated by the magnification adjusting variable resistor. It is possible to reduce the time spent for controlling the firing intensity of the ball, and to speed up the processing.

  In the gaming machine 38, the multiplying-factor adjusting voltage acquiring means is configured to periodically acquire a voltage value of a voltage generated in the multiplying-factor adjusting variable resistor after turning on the power of the gaming machine. Gaming machine 40. The magnification adjusting voltage acquisition means periodically acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the magnification adjusting variable resistor after turning on the power of the gaming machine. Therefore, after turning on the power of the gaming machine, the operating member is operated to check the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means, and adjust the resistance value of the variable resistor for magnification adjustment to adjust the firing intensity of the ball. be able to.

  In any of the gaming machines 31 to 33 and 36 to 40, the second value set by the setting value means is configured to be adjustable as a DC voltage value, and the setting value means sets a resistance value to Adjustable voltage adjusting variable resistor, voltage adjusting power supply means for supplying a DC voltage to the voltage adjusting variable resistor, and the voltage adjusting variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the voltage adjusting power supply means A gaming machine 41 comprising: a voltage adjusting unit that adjusts the voltage value of the DC voltage as the second value based on the voltage value of the voltage generated in the above. The second value set by the setting value means is configured to be adjustable as a DC voltage value, and the voltage adjusting means generates the voltage in the voltage adjusting variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the voltage adjusting power supply means. The voltage value of the DC voltage as the second value set by the setting value means is adjusted based on the voltage value of the applied voltage. Therefore, the second value set by the set value means can be easily adjusted by adjusting the resistance value of the variable resistor for voltage adjustment.

  In the gaming machine 41, the gaming machine 42 is characterized in that the voltage adjusting means is configured to be able to adjust the voltage value of the DC voltage as the second value to be positive or negative. Since the voltage adjusting means is configured to be able to adjust the voltage value of the DC voltage as the second value to be positive or negative, the second value synthesized by the synthesized value means can be made positive or negative. Therefore, by adjusting the voltage value of the DC voltage as the second value synthesized by the synthesis value means, without changing the change amount of the emission intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means, adjustment to increase the emission intensity of the sphere or Adjustments can be made to lower.

  In the gaming machine 41 or 42, the voltage adjustment unit includes an adjustment voltage acquisition unit that acquires a voltage value of a voltage generated by the voltage adjustment variable resistor, and a voltage value acquired by the adjustment voltage acquisition unit. A gaming machine 43 comprising: an adjustment voltage determining unit that determines a voltage value of the DC voltage as the second value based on the second value. When the voltage value of the voltage generated by the variable resistor for voltage adjustment is acquired by the adjustment voltage acquisition unit, the adjustment voltage determination unit is set based on the acquired voltage value of the voltage by the setting value unit. The voltage value of the DC voltage as binary is determined. Therefore, the adjustment voltage determination unit can accurately determine the voltage value of the DC voltage as the second value.

  In the gaming machine 43, the adjusting voltage acquiring means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the voltage adjusting variable resistor when the gaming machine is initialized. The adjustment voltage acquisition means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated by the voltage adjustment variable resistor when the gaming machine is initialized. Therefore, after the initialization of the gaming machine, the adjustment voltage obtaining means does not need to obtain the voltage value of the voltage generated by the voltage adjustment variable resistor. Therefore, even after the initialization of the gaming machine, the ball control means is fired from the firing means in comparison with the gaming machine in which the adjustment voltage obtaining means obtains the voltage value of the voltage generated by the voltage adjusting variable resistor. The processing time can be reduced by reducing the time spent controlling the launching intensity of the ball.

  In the gaming machine 43, the adjusting voltage acquiring means periodically acquires a voltage value of the voltage generated in the voltage adjusting variable resistor after turning on the power of the gaming machine. Machine 45. The adjustment voltage acquisition means periodically acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated by the voltage adjustment variable resistor after turning on the power of the gaming machine. Therefore, after turning on the power of the gaming machine, the operating member is operated to check the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means, and adjust the resistance value of the variable resistor for voltage adjustment to adjust the firing intensity of the ball. be able to.

  A launching unit that launches a ball, an operating member, a first value changing unit that changes a first value based on an operation amount of the operating member, and a first value that the first value changing unit changes. In a gaming machine having ball control means for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means, a second value serving as a reference is set separately from the first value changed by the first value changing means. Reference value setting means, first value detecting means for detecting a first value to be changed by the first value changing means, and the first value detected by the first value detecting means is set by the reference value setting means. Output value switching means for outputting a third value larger than the first value in place of the first value when it is determined that the value is greater than or equal to the second value. , Based on the third value output by the output value switching means, Gaming machine 46, characterized in that the elevation means so as to control the radiation strength of the sphere to be fired.

  In the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are misaligned, and the position at which the mallet of the solenoid collides with the ball shifts, so that the firing intensity of the ball is weakened. Even if the operation amount of the ball is set to the maximum value, the ball cannot be hit against, for example, a return rubber (see FIG. 2) disposed at the right end of the game area where the ball fired by the solenoid flows down, and a normal game is performed. There was a problem that can not be.

  According to the gaming machine 46, the first value changing means changes the first value based on the operation amount of the operation member, and the first value detecting means detects the changed first value. When the first value detected by the first value detection means is determined by the output value switching means to be greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the output value switching means , And outputs a third value larger than the first value instead of the first value. The sphere control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means based on the third value output by the output value switching means. Therefore, when the first value detected by the first value detecting means is determined by the output value switching means to be greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the first value is emitted from the firing means. It is possible to reliably switch the firing intensity of the ball to a predetermined intensity.

  In the gaming machine 46, the second value set by the reference value setting means is configured to be adjustable, and is provided with a value adjusting means for adjusting the second value. The second value set by the reference value setting means is configured to be adjustable, and the value adjustment means adjusts the second value. Therefore, the second value that is compared with the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member can be adjusted by the value adjustment unit.

  In the gaming machine 46 or 47, the third value output by the output value switching means is configured to be adjustable, and is provided with output value adjusting means for adjusting the third value. 48. The third value output by the output value switching means is configured to be adjustable, and the output value adjustment means adjusts the third value. Therefore, by adjusting the third value output from the output value switching means by the output value adjustment means, the first value detected by the first value detection means is set by the output value switching means by the reference value setting means. When it is determined that the value is greater than or equal to the second value, the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means can be adjusted.

  In any of the gaming machines 46 to 48, a ball is provided in one of a game area in which a ball fired by the shooting means flows down and one of the game areas, and a ball fired from the shooting means is fired in the game area. A launching unit, and a ball stopping member against which a ball fired from the firing unit can hit. The third value is such that the ball fired from the firing means via the firing unit reaches the ball stopping member. A gaming machine 49 characterized by being set so as to have a launching intensity that is high. If the first value detected by the first value detection means is determined by the output value switching means to be greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the output value switching means A third value larger than the first value is output instead of the first value. Here, the third value is set so as to be the firing intensity at which the ball fired from the firing means via the firing unit reaches the ball stopping member. Therefore, when the first value detected by the first value detecting means is determined by the output value switching means to be greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the launching means switches from the launching means to the launching part. , The ball shot into the game area can be reliably hit on the ball stopping member, and a normal game can be reliably performed.

  A gaming machine (50), characterized in that the gaming machine (48) or (49) is provided with value limiting means for limiting the upper limit of the third value adjusted by the output value adjusting means. When the output value switching means determines that the first value detected by the first value detection means is greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the output value switching means outputs the first value. The third value output in place of is limited to the upper limit value by the value limiting means. Therefore, when the third value is limited by the value limiting unit, the upper limit of the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing unit is constant even if the operation amount of the operating member is increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent damage to the ball stopping member or the like hitting the ball fired from the firing means.

  In the gaming machine 50, the firing means controls the firing intensity of the ball to be fired based on the voltage value of the applied voltage, and an upper limit value limited by the value limiting means is applied to the firing means. The voltage value as the upper limit value of the voltage is set to be less than the absolute maximum rated voltage value of the firing means. Machine 51. If the first value detected by the first value detecting means is determined by the output value switching means to be greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the value limiting means determines the output value. The third value output from the switching means is limited to an upper limit value. Here, the firing means controls the firing intensity of the ball to be fired based on the voltage value of the applied voltage, and the upper limit value at which the value limiting means limits the third value is applied to the firing means. The voltage value is configured to be adjustable as the voltage value of the voltage, and the voltage value as the upper limit value is set so as to be less than the voltage value of the absolute maximum rating of the firing means. Therefore, when the first value detected by the first value detecting means is determined by the output value switching means to be greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the first value is applied to the firing means. Since the voltage can be prevented from exceeding the absolute maximum rating, damage to the firing means can be prevented.

In any one of the gaming machines 46 to 51, the first value changing unit includes a first voltage dividing unit having at least a variable resistor that changes a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, DC voltage supply means for supplying DC voltage to the means,
The gaming machine 52, wherein a voltage value generated in the variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the DC voltage supply means is the first value. Since the DC voltage is supplied from the DC voltage supply unit to the first voltage dividing unit, when the resistance value of the variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage value generated in the variable resistor changes. . The voltage value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member is set as a first value that is changed by the first value changing unit. Therefore, the first value changing means can be realized with a simple configuration.

  In any one of the gaming machines 46 to 51, a setting value unit for setting a fourth value separately from the first value changed by the first value changing unit is provided, and the output value switching unit is configured to detect the first value. When the first value detected by the means is determined to be less than or less than the second value set by the reference value setting means, the first value to be changed by the first value changing means and the setting by the setting value means are set. A combined value means for combining and outputting the fourth value to be output, wherein the ball control means controls the emission intensity of the ball fired from the firing means based on the value combined by the combined value means. A gaming machine 53 characterized by the following. Setting value means for setting a fourth value, wherein the output value switching means determines whether the first value detected by the first value detection means is smaller than a second value set by the reference value setting means by the output value switching means. When the value is determined to be less than the above value, there is provided combined value means for combining and outputting the first value changed by the first value changing means and the fourth value set by the set value means. Therefore, until the first value detected by the first value detecting means is greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the combined value means changes based on the operation amount of the operating member. Since the fourth value is combined with the first value, the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means is added to the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operating member, and the fourth value set by the setting value means Can also be changed.

  In the gaming machine 53, the first value changing means includes a first voltage dividing means having at least a variable resistor for changing a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage applied to the first voltage dividing means. DC voltage supply means for supplying, and the combined value means sets a voltage value generated in the variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the DC voltage supply means as the first value, and sets the first value to the first value. A gaming machine 54 characterized by being synthesized with a fourth value set by a setting value means. Since the DC voltage is supplied from the DC voltage supply unit to the first voltage dividing unit, when the resistance value of the variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage value generated in the variable resistor changes. . The combining value means combines the voltage value that changes based on the operation amount of the operating member as the first value with the fourth value set by the setting value means. Here, in general, combining voltage values can be realized with a simple configuration. Therefore, since the first value synthesized by the synthesized value means can be a voltage value, the synthesized value means can synthesize the first value with the fourth value with a simple configuration.

  In the gaming machine 53 or 54, a conversion value means for multiplying the value synthesized by the synthesis value means by a positive real number is provided, and the ball control means, based on the value multiplied by the real number by the conversion value means, A gaming machine 55 for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means. The sphere control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means based on a value obtained by multiplying the value synthesized by the synthesis value means by a positive real number by the conversion value means. Here, the conversion value unit can change the amount of change of the combined value that changes according to the operation amount of the operation member by multiplying the value combined by the combination value unit by a positive real number. Therefore, it is possible to change the amount of change in the firing intensity of the sphere that changes according to the amount of operation of the operation member.

  In any of the gaming machines 46 to 51, the output value switching means determines that the first value detected by the first value detection means is less than or less than a second value set by the reference value setting means. In this case, the apparatus further comprises a conversion value means for outputting the first value changed by the first value change means by multiplying the first value by a positive real number. A game machine 56 for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means. The output value switching means outputs the first value when the first value detected by the first value detection means is determined by the output value switching means to be less than or less than the second value set by the reference value setting means. Conversion value means for outputting the first value changed by the change means multiplied by a positive real number is provided. Here, since the conversion value means multiplies the first value that changes by the operation amount of the operation member by a positive real number, the change amount of the first value can be changed. Therefore, until the first value detected by the first value detecting means is greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the converted value means adjusts the sphere of the sphere which changes according to the operation amount of the operating member. The amount of change in firing intensity can be changed.

  In the gaming machine 56, the first value changing means includes a first voltage dividing means having at least a variable resistor for changing a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage applied to the first voltage dividing means. DC voltage supply means for supplying the DC voltage, and the conversion value means sets a voltage value generated in the variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the DC voltage supply means as the first value, and sets the first value to a positive value. A gaming machine 57 characterized by being multiplied by a real number. Since the DC voltage is supplied from the DC voltage supply unit to the first voltage dividing unit, when the resistance value of the variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage value generated in the variable resistor changes. . The conversion value means sets the voltage value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member as the first value changed by the first value changing means, and multiplies the first value by a positive real number. Here, generally, multiplying the voltage value by a positive real number can be realized by a simple configuration. Therefore, since the first value converted by the conversion value means can be a voltage value, the conversion value means can convert the first value with a simple configuration.

  In the gaming machine 56 or 57, apart from the first value changed by the first value changing means, a set value means for setting a fourth value, a fourth value set by the set value means and the converted value means And a composite value means for combining and outputting a value obtained by multiplying the first value by a positive real number, and wherein the sphere control means outputs from the launch means based on the value combined by the combined value means. A gaming machine 58 for controlling the firing intensity of a ball to be fired. The firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means is controlled based on the value synthesized by the synthesis value means. Therefore, the combined value means combines the fourth value with a value obtained by multiplying the first value by a positive real number by the conversion value means and changing the amount of change of the first value. The emission intensity can be changed by the fourth value set by the setting value means in addition to the value obtained by changing the amount of change of the first value by the conversion value means.

  In any one of the gaming machines 55 to 58, the magnification that the conversion value means multiplies by a positive real number is configured to be adjustable as a voltage value of a DC voltage, and the conversion value means is a magnification capable of adjusting a resistance value. An adjustment variable resistor, a magnification adjustment power supply for supplying a DC voltage to the magnification adjustment variable resistor, and a DC voltage supplied by the magnification adjustment power supply, the DC voltage supplied to the magnification adjustment variable resistor. A game machine 59 comprising: a magnification adjusting means for adjusting a voltage value of a DC voltage as a magnification for multiplying the positive real number based on a voltage value of a voltage. The magnification that the conversion value means multiplies by a positive real number is configured to be adjustable as a voltage value of a DC voltage, and the magnification adjustment means generates a voltage in the magnification adjustment variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the magnification adjustment power supply means. Based on the voltage value of the applied voltage, the conversion value means adjusts the magnification to be multiplied by a positive real number. Therefore, by adjusting the resistance value of the magnification adjusting variable resistor, it is possible to easily adjust the magnification that the conversion value means multiplies by a positive real number.

  In the gaming machine 59, the magnification adjusting means includes a magnification adjusting voltage acquiring means for acquiring a voltage value of the voltage generated by the magnification adjusting variable resistor, and a voltage value acquired by the magnification adjusting voltage acquiring means. A gaming machine 60 comprising: a magnification adjusting voltage determination unit that determines a voltage value of a DC voltage as a magnification for multiplying the positive real number based on the magnification. When the voltage value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor for magnification adjustment is acquired by the voltage acquisition unit for magnification adjustment, based on the voltage value of the acquired voltage, the voltage decision unit for magnification adjustment determines that the conversion value unit has a positive value. A voltage value of the DC voltage as a magnification to be multiplied by a real number is determined. Therefore, the magnification adjusting voltage determination means can accurately determine the DC voltage value as the magnification by which the conversion value means is multiplied by a positive real number.

  In the gaming machine 60, the multiplying-factor adjusting voltage obtaining means obtains a voltage value of the voltage generated in the multiplying-factor adjusting variable resistor when the gaming machine is initialized. . The magnification adjusting voltage acquiring means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the magnification adjusting variable resistor when the gaming machine is initialized. Therefore, after the initialization of the gaming machine, the magnification adjustment voltage acquiring means does not need to acquire the voltage value of the voltage generated in the magnification adjustment variable resistor. Therefore, even after the initialization of the gaming machine, the ball control means is fired from the firing means in comparison with the gaming machine in which the magnification adjusting voltage obtaining means obtains the voltage value of the voltage generated by the magnification adjusting variable resistor. It is possible to reduce the time spent for controlling the firing intensity of the ball, and to speed up the processing.

  In the gaming machine 60, the multiplying-factor adjustment voltage obtaining means is configured to periodically obtain a voltage value of the voltage generated in the multiplying-factor adjusting variable resistor after turning on the power of the gaming machine. Gaming machine 62. The magnification adjusting voltage acquisition means periodically acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the magnification adjusting variable resistor after turning on the power of the gaming machine. Therefore, after turning on the power of the gaming machine, the operating member is operated to check the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means, and adjust the resistance value of the variable resistor for magnification adjustment to adjust the firing intensity of the ball. be able to.

  In any of the gaming machines 53 to 55 and 58 to 62, the fourth value set by the setting value means is configured to be adjustable as a DC voltage value, and the setting value means sets the resistance value to Adjustable voltage adjusting variable resistor, voltage adjusting power supply means for supplying a DC voltage to the voltage adjusting variable resistor, and the voltage adjusting variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the voltage adjusting power supply means A gaming machine 63 comprising: a voltage adjusting unit that adjusts the voltage value of the DC voltage as the fourth value based on the voltage value of the voltage generated in the above. The fourth value set by the set value means is configured to be adjustable as a DC voltage value, and the voltage adjustment means generates the voltage in the voltage adjustment variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied from the voltage adjustment power supply means. The voltage value of the DC voltage as the fourth value set by the setting value means is adjusted based on the voltage value of the applied voltage. Therefore, by adjusting the resistance value of the variable resistor for voltage adjustment, the fourth value set by the setting value means can be easily adjusted.

  In the gaming machine 63, the voltage adjusting means is configured to be able to adjust the voltage value of the DC voltage as the fourth value to be positive or negative. Since the voltage adjusting means is configured to be able to adjust the voltage value of the DC voltage as the fourth value to be positive or negative, the fourth value synthesized by the synthesized value means can be made positive or negative. Therefore, by adjusting the voltage value of the DC voltage as the fourth value to be synthesized by the synthesis value means, without changing the amount of change in the emission intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means, adjusting or increasing the emission intensity of the sphere Adjustments can be made to lower.

  In the gaming machine 63 or 64, the voltage adjustment unit is an adjustment voltage acquisition unit that acquires a voltage value of a voltage generated by the voltage adjustment variable resistor, and a voltage value that is acquired by the adjustment voltage acquisition unit. A gaming machine 65 comprising: an adjustment voltage determination unit that determines a voltage value of the DC voltage as the fourth value based on the fourth value. When the voltage value of the voltage generated by the variable resistor for voltage adjustment is acquired by the adjustment voltage acquisition unit, the adjustment voltage determination unit is set based on the acquired voltage value of the voltage by the setting value unit. The voltage value of the DC voltage as four values is determined. Therefore, the adjustment voltage determining means can accurately determine the voltage value of the DC voltage as the fourth value.

  In the gaming machine 65, the adjusting voltage acquiring means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the voltage adjusting variable resistor when the gaming machine is initialized. The adjustment voltage acquisition means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated by the voltage adjustment variable resistor when the gaming machine is initialized. Therefore, after the initialization of the gaming machine, the adjustment voltage obtaining means does not need to obtain the voltage value of the voltage generated by the voltage adjustment variable resistor. Therefore, even after the initialization of the gaming machine, the ball control means is fired from the firing means in comparison with the gaming machine in which the adjustment voltage obtaining means obtains the voltage value of the voltage generated by the voltage adjusting variable resistor. The processing time can be reduced by reducing the time spent controlling the launching intensity of the ball.

  In the gaming machine 65, the adjusting voltage acquiring means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the voltage adjusting variable resistor periodically after turning on the power of the gaming machine. Machine 67. The adjustment voltage acquisition means periodically acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated by the voltage adjustment variable resistor after turning on the power of the gaming machine. Therefore, after turning on the power of the gaming machine, the operating member is operated to check the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means, and adjust the resistance value of the variable resistor for voltage adjustment to adjust the firing intensity of the ball. be able to.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board (part of the game area)
51 Operation handle (operation member)
61 rails (part of the game area)
62 rails (part of the game area)
68a firing port (firing section)
69 Return rubber (ball stopper)
70 arc members (part of the game area)
142 Launch solenoid (Launch means)
202a Magnification determination table memory (part of conversion value means, part of magnification adjustment means)
202b Offset voltage determination table memory (part of set value means, part of voltage adjustment means)
202c Monitoring memory (reference value setting means)
202d Limit value memory (value limiting means)
203a Magnification memory (part of conversion value means)
203b Offset voltage memory (part of setting value means)
302 Addition voltage adjustment unit (second value output unit, second DC voltage supply unit)
303 Addition circuit (combining means, adding means)
304 voltage supply unit (ball intensity control means, control means, intensity control means, first control means, second control means)
307 Handle monitoring unit (part of first control means, part of second control means, part of first voltage output means, part of second voltage output means)
308 Voltage booster (part of ball control means, part of first control means, part of second control means, part of first voltage output means, part of second voltage output means)
309 Limiter (voltage limiting means)
310 second voltage supply unit (ball intensity control means, control means, intensity control means, first control means, second control means, emission intensity control means)
CD3 capacitor (part of reference voltage output means, part of reference voltage stabilization means, part of shunt regulator circuit, part of constant voltage supply means)
D1 Zener diode (part of constant voltage means and second voltage dividing means)
DC1 DC power supply (DC voltage supply means, magnification adjustment power supply means, voltage adjustment power supply means, first DC voltage supply means)
DC2 DC power supply (power supply means)
R9 resistor (part of the reference voltage output means, part of the reference voltage stabilizing means, part of the shunt regulator circuit, part of the constant voltage supply means)
R10 resistor (part of reference voltage output means, part of reference voltage constant pressure means, part of shunt regulator circuit, part of constant voltage supply means)
Reg1 Variable shunt regulator (part of reference voltage output means, part of reference voltage stabilizing means, part of shunt regulator circuit, part of constant voltage supply means)
VR1 variable resistor (detecting means, first variable resistor, part of first voltage dividing means, first value changing means)
VR2 variable resistor (variable resistor for magnification adjustment, first voltage changing means, part of voltage dividing means, conversion means)
VR3 variable resistor (variable resistor for voltage adjustment, second voltage changing means, second variable resistor, part of second voltage dividing means)
S1401 (part of conversion value means, magnification adjustment voltage acquisition means)
S1402 (part of conversion value unit, part of magnification adjustment unit, magnification adjustment voltage determination unit)
S1403 (part of set value means, adjustment voltage acquisition means)
S1404 (part of set value means, adjustment voltage determination means, part of voltage adjustment means)
S1604 (first value detecting means)
S1605 (part of conversion value means)
S1606 (part of composite value means)
S1607 (part of ball control means)
S1802 (part of conversion value means, magnification adjustment voltage acquisition means)
S1803 (part of conversion value means, part of magnification adjustment means, magnification adjustment voltage determination means)
S1804 (part of set value means, adjustment voltage acquisition means)
S1805 (part of set value means, adjustment voltage determination means, part of voltage adjustment means)
S1806 (first value detecting means)
No branch in S1807 (part of output value switching means)
S1808 (part of conversion value means)
S1809 (part of composite value means)
S1810 (part of ball control means)
S1811 (part of ball control means, part of output value switching means)

  The present invention relates to a ball-and-ball game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

As shown in Patent Document 1 below, as a launching device for a ball-and-ball type gaming machine, a ball launching device for a ball-and-ball game in which a ball is hit by a solenoid with a launching intensity corresponding to the operation amount of a rotary operation type operation handle. It has been known. In this ball launching device, a solenoid mounted on a mounting frame of a game board is mounted on a support frame, one end of the support frame is pivotally supported on the mounting frame, and a first adjustment knob is provided. Is provided, and the support frame is brought into contact with and supported by the eccentric disk. Therefore, by rotating the first adjustment knob, the solenoid can be adjusted in the vertical direction.
Further, the adjustment gear is supported on the shaft pin of the support frame, and the guide protrusion provided on the adjustment gear and the guide rib provided on the mounting frame rotate the second adjustment knob meshed with the adjustment gear, thereby providing a solenoid. In the front-rear direction. Thus, a plurality of adjustments of up, down, front and back of the solenoid are performed, and by adjusting the position where the mallet of the solenoid collides with the ball, the emission intensity of the ball hit by the solenoid is adjusted.

JP 2000-202094 A

  In the conventional launching device exemplified in Patent Document 1, it may be difficult to appropriately adjust the launching intensity with respect to the operation amount of the operating handle.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately adjusting the firing intensity with respect to the operation amount of an operation handle.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a launching unit that launches a ball, an operating member, and a first value changing unit that changes a first value based on an operation amount of the operating member. Ball control means for controlling the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means based on the first value changed by the first value changing means, wherein the first value changing means changes the firing strength. Set value means for setting a second value separately from the first value, and combined value means for combining the second value set by the set value means and the first value changed by the first value change means Wherein the sphere control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means based on the value synthesized by the synthesis value means.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the first value changing means changes the first value based on the operation amount of the operation member. When the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operating member and the second value that is set by the setting value unit are combined by the combination value unit, the ball control unit sets the value combined by the combination value unit. And controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means. Therefore, the combined value means combines the second value with the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, so that the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means changes based on the operation amount of the operation member. In addition to the first value, the second value set by the setting value means can be changed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in the state where the front frame and the lower plate unit were opened. (A) is a perspective view of a firing unit in a state where an opening / closing member constituting a ball feeding mechanism before a ball is placed is opened, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an internal configuration of the ball feeding mechanism by removing a lid member. It is a perspective view of the shown firing unit. (A) is a perspective view of a firing unit in a state where an opening and closing member constituting a ball feeding mechanism in a state where a ball is arranged is opened, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an internal configuration of the ball feeding mechanism by removing a lid member. It is a perspective view of the shown firing unit. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the launch control device. It is a figure showing voltage change of each signal of a launch control device. It is a figure showing change of the maximum value of the voltage applied to a firing solenoid at the time of changing a variable resistor of an addition voltage adjustment part of a firing control device. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a change in the maximum value of the voltage applied to the firing solenoid when the variable resistor of the addition voltage adjusting unit of the firing control device is changed and the variable resistor of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit is changed. It is the figure which showed the timing chart of the firing permission signal, the firing control signal, the voltage applied to the firing solenoid, and the ball feed control signal and the DC voltage applied to the ball feed solenoid. (A) is a figure which showed typically the area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a figure showing the outline of various counters. It is a figure showing a command outputted from a main control unit to a payout control unit. (A) is a figure which showed the arrangement | positioning of the signal pin of the connector provided in the main control apparatus, (b) is a figure which showed the arrangement | positioning of the signal pin of the connector provided in the payout control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in a main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 19 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation process executed in the main process of FIG. 18. 20 is a flowchart illustrating a variation start process executed in the variation process of FIG. 19. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process. 22 is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 21. It is the flowchart which showed the NMI interruption process performed by the main control device and the payout control device. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a payout control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a payout control apparatus. 26 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed in the main process of FIG. 25. 27 is a flowchart showing a winning ball payout number setting process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 26. 27 is a flowchart illustrating a state setting process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 26. 26 is a flowchart showing a status notification process executed in the main process of FIG. 25. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a launch control device of a second embodiment. It is the figure which showed the voltage change of each signal of the launch control device of 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the change of the maximum value of the voltage applied to the firing solenoid when changing the variable resistor of the voltage fluctuation adjustment part of the firing control device of 2nd Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the electric constitution of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a launch control device of a third embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the timer interruption process of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the firing control process of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the control signal processing of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the contents of a magnification determination table memory. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the contents of an offset voltage determination table memory. FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating a change in each voltage when the firing control process illustrated in FIG. 37 is executed. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a change in a maximum value of a voltage E1 applied to a firing solenoid when an offset voltage is a positive voltage. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a change in the maximum value of a voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the offset voltage is a negative voltage. By adjusting the variable resistor VR2 of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0, and the positive real number is multiplied. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when an offset voltage is added by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 to the multiplied voltage. It is the block diagram which showed the electric constitution of the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the flowchart of the firing control processing of the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a change in each voltage when the firing control process illustrated in FIG. 46 is performed. By adjusting the variable resistor VR2 of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0, and the positive real number is multiplied. The change of the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the offset voltage is added by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 to the obtained voltage and further monitoring the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is shown. FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the contents of a magnification determination table memory. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the contents of a magnification determination table memory. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the contents of an offset voltage determination table memory. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the contents of an offset voltage determination table memory.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 5) for firing a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a firing rail 143 for guiding the ball fired from the shooting solenoid 142 to the front area of the game board 13. (See FIG. 5).

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 5) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used, for example, to change the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or to change the effect content at the time of the reach effect. Is operated by

  In addition, light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot.

  In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs. Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing spheres that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided. Inside the operation handle 51, a firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 5) is provided. A touch sensor 51a for permitting driving, a push button type stop switch 51b for stopping firing of a ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 detected by a change in electric resistance. And a variable resistor VR1 (see FIG. 8). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 changes in accordance with the rotation operation amount. Then, a ball is fired with an intensity corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 that changes according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, whereby the front surface of the game board 13 is jumped with an amount of flight corresponding to the operation of the player. A ball is driven into. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62 for ball guidance, a general winning opening 63, The entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the periphery thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are provided with wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. And so on. In addition, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is provided on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70). Area that flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. In addition, the opening that connects the ball guide passage at the tip end of the inner rail 61 to which the return ball preventing member 68 is attached and the game area is defined as a firing port 68a. The ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 is launched into the game area via the firing port 68a. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is provided between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  A first symbol display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a, which are light emitting means, and a seven-segment display 37b, is provided in the upper right portion of the game area as viewed from the front (the upper right portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 performs a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing probability, reducing the time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not, by the lighting state, and a symbol corresponding to a probability change in a stop symbol. The lighting state indicates whether the symbol is a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or an off-design, or the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. The seven-segment display device 37b displays the number of rounds during a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated with a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emitted colors. .

  In addition, the above-mentioned pachinko machine 10 being in a probable change state is a game state in which the jackpot probability increases and the game easily shifts to the special game state. Further, during the probable change in the present embodiment, it is a game state in which the probability of hitting the second symbol increases and a ball easily enters the first entrance 64. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a reduced working hours, it is a state of a game in which the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64 with the probability of the big hit as it is. Also, the pachinko machine 10 being in the normal state is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is in progress (the state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased). In addition, according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the opening time of the electrically-powered accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 and the number of times the electrically-driven accessory is opened per one time are changed. It is good.

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 including a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “display device”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner when a winning in the first entrance 64 is triggered. And a second symbol display device 82 composed of a light emitting diode (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) that variably displays the second symbol when the ball passes through the second entrance 67. .

  The display contents of the third symbol display device 81 are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, and, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display having an 8-inch size, and the variable display device unit 80 includes a center frame so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. 86 are provided. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. Decorative display is performed according to. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Also, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 until the stop symbol (any one of the probable jackpot symbol, the ordinary jackpot symbol, and the off symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The number of times the ball is held is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of times the ball is held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the number of lighting of the holding lamp 85. The four holding lamps 85 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically above the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the winning in the first entrance 64 is configured to be held up to four times. However, the maximum number of holdings is not limited to four, and three or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). In addition, the holding lamp 85 is deleted, and the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning in the first entrance 64 is held numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is held. The display may be performed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) by the number of times. Further, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the holding lamp 85.

  The second symbol display device 82 has a display portion 83 of a second symbol and a holding lamp 84, and each time a ball passes through the second entrance 67, a display symbol (second symbol) is displayed on the display portion 83. The symbol “O” and the symbol “X” are alternately lit to perform a variable display, and when the variable display is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “O” in the present embodiment), The one entrance 64 is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of times held is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit by the holding lamp 84. In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the plurality of lamps on and off in the display unit 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. 81 may be used. Similarly, the holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, as with the first entrance 64, the maximum number of times of passage through the second entrance 67 is not limited to four, but is three or less, or five or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of times of suspension is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the suspension lamp 84.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entrance 64 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big hit is stopped and the LED 37a is turned on. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large-opening-port solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And The specific winning port 65a is normally in a closed state where a ball cannot be won or hard to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening mouth solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are provided. It operates so that the state and the state are alternately repeated.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot on the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is provided. During the opening of the mouth 65a, a gaming state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins in the specific winning opening 65a is defined as a special gaming state. It may be formed.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning ports 63, 64, and 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 122a for the variable resistor VR2 (see FIG. 8) and an operation knob 122b for the variable resistor VR3 (see FIG. 8). The power supply 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 123. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). The operation knob 122a of the variable resistor VR2 and the operation knob 122b of the variable resistor VR3 are operated to adjust the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142. The RAM erase switch 123 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an internal configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in a state where the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are opened.

  The pachinko machine 10 is provided with an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell, and an inner frame 12 is supported on the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. In a game arcade, the outer peripheral surface of the outer frame 11 is fixed to an installation location called an island in the game arcade. The inner frame 12, the front frame 14, and the lower plate unit 15 are configured to be openable to the front side with respect to the outer frame 11, so that the back side and the inside which are not touched from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 are provided. Inspection and adjustment are performed by opening the inner frame 12 and the like to the front side with respect to the outer frame 11.

  An upper hinge (not shown) and a lower hinge (not shown) made of metal are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view to support the inner frame 12. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable with the side provided with the upper hinge and the lower hinge as an opening / closing axis.

  The inner frame 12 mainly includes an inner frame base 52 made of ABS resin and formed in a rectangular shape. A substantially circular central window 52a is formed in the center of the inner frame base 52. A mounting portion for the game board 13 is provided on the back side of the inner frame base 52, and the game board 13 is detachably mounted.

  The lower part of the central window 52a of the inner frame base 52 is formed in a concave shape with the front side open, and a flat mounting surface 52b is formed on the back side. On the mounting surface 52b, a firing unit 140 for firing a ball to the front of the game board 13, a passage forming member 53 for forming a passage for discharging the ball to the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50, and the like are mounted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the firing unit 140 which is mounted on the lower part on the front side of the inner frame base 52 and forms a part of the inner frame 12 will be described. FIG. 5 shows a state in which the ball G1 is held by the delivery member 155 of the ball feed mechanism 144 and before the ball G1 is arranged on the front surface of the cap 142b that covers the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142. I have.

  FIG. 5A is a perspective view of the firing unit 140 in a state where the opening / closing member 152 configuring the ball feed mechanism 144 is opened, and FIG. 5B illustrates a state in which the lid member 153 is moved in the state of FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the firing unit 144 showing the internal configuration of the detachable ball feed mechanism 144.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the firing unit 140 includes a base plate 141 fixed to a mounting surface 52b (see FIG. 4) below the inner frame base 52 by screws, and a firing solenoid 142 mounted on the base plate 141. A firing rail 143 having a substantially M-shaped side surface and fixed to the base plate 141 at one end of the firing solenoid 142 so as to extend in parallel with the longitudinal direction of the firing solenoid 142, and a base end portion of the firing rail 143 (the firing solenoid). The ball feed mechanism 144 guides and guides the balls one by one to the end on the 142 side), and is mounted on the base plate 141 so as to support and position the balls placed on the base end of the firing rail 143. And a positioning member 145.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the base plate 141 is formed by pressing a flat metal plate made of a zinc alloy or the like, and is tightly attached to the mounting surface 52b of the inner frame base 52 with screws. Fixed. The firing rail 143 is for guiding the ball immediately after being fired by the firing solenoid 142, and extends linearly while maintaining a predetermined firing angle (launch angle) (a boss (not shown) fixed to the base plate 141). ) Are fixed with screws (not shown). The ball fired by the turning operation of the operation handle 51 is launched obliquely upward along the firing rail 143 and guided to the game area.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, as a launching device for launching a ball, a one-unit solenoid (launching) in which a linear solenoid is accommodated in a case member is used instead of a conventionally used combination of a motor and a launching hammer. The solenoid 142) is employed. The firing solenoid 142 is provided with a metal plunger 142a disposed in parallel with the firing rail 143 in the longitudinal direction, and a resin cap 142b covering the tip of the plunger 142a. As the material of the cap 142b, a polyester-based thermoplastic elastomer is employed in the present embodiment. During a state in which the player turns the operation handle 51 (while the touch center 51a is on and the stop switch 51b is off), the firing solenoid 142 repeats excitation and non-excitation every predetermined time. The plunger 142a repeatedly appears and disappears in response to this. When the plunger 142a projects, the sphere positioned on the firing rail 143 by the positioning member 145 is fired obliquely upward and directed by the firing rail 143. The variable resistor VR1 linked to the operation handle 51 is electrically connected to the firing solenoid 142, and the projection speed of the plunger 142a is adjusted based on the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 (the stroke amount is substantially constant). ), The launch speed of the ball, and thus the flying distance, are adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.

  The firing solenoid 142 is fixed to a pair of bosses (not shown) erected on the base plate 141 and a bolt 141b by attaching a bolt (not shown) and a nut 148, respectively. In the ball firing unit 140, the height of the firing solenoid 142 with respect to the base plate 141 is changed by adjusting the tightening of bolts and nuts 148 provided above and below the firing solenoid 142, so that the relative position between the plunger 142a and the firing rail 143 is changed. The mounting position of the ball can be adjusted, and the hit point of the ball can be adjusted. At the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10, even if there is a variation in manufacturing or assembling each part, the ball and the nut 148 are adjusted after the ball launching unit 140 is assembled to the pachinko machine 10 to finely adjust the flying distance of the ball. be able to. The firing solenoid 142 is entirely disposed inside the outer peripheral edge of the base plate 141, and when the ball firing unit 140 is assembled from the base plate 141 side to the inner frame base 52, the firing solenoid 142 is connected to other components. It is prevented from being damaged by being caught in the device.

  The positioning member 145 is a member for supporting a ball mounted on the right end (base end) of the firing rail 143 and positioning the ball at the hitting position. The firing rail 143 is provided from the base plate 141. On the side of the surface to be formed. The positioning member 145 is provided with a fastening hole penetrating along its axial direction, and the positioning member 145 is screwed to the base plate 141 by inserting a screw into the fastening hole. Here, the fastening hole of the positioning member 145 is formed not at the center of the columnar shape but at an eccentric position. For this reason, the hitting position of the ball placed on the firing rail 143 can be delicately changed by appropriately rotating the positioning member 145 and then tightening the screw. In, the amount of flight of the ball can be easily adjusted.

  The ball feed mechanism 144 feeds balls continuously guided from the upper plate 17 one by one to the base end of the firing rail 143. The ball feed mechanism 144 includes a resin pedestal member 151 fixed to the base plate 141 so as to cover the upper portion of the firing solenoid 142, and a resin that is pivotally supported on one side of the pedestal member 151 and can be opened and closed. And an opening / closing member 152 made of stainless steel. A locking claw 151a is integrally formed on the pedestal member 151 toward the front side where the opening / closing member 152 is provided, and the locking claw 151a is provided on the opening / closing member 152 in a closed state overlapping the front surface of the pedestal member 151. Is formed with a locking hole 152a for catching. Normally, the opening / closing member 152 is in a closed state in which one side is pivotally supported by the pedestal member 151 and the other side is locked by the pedestal member 151 by the locking hole 152a so as to overlap the front surface of the pedestal member 151. This closed state is released by removing the locking claw 151a of the base member 151 from the locking hole 152a of the opening / closing member 152, and the opening / closing member 152 can be opened forward with respect to the base member 151. Further, the opening / closing member 152 can be detached from the pedestal member 151 by sliding upward by opening it to the maximum with respect to the pedestal member 151.

  On the front surface of the opening / closing member 152, an inlet 152b for introducing a sphere guided from the upper plate 17 is provided at a left end portion in a front view, and the sphere is introduced from the introduction port 152b to the back side of the opening / closing member 152. Is done. A cover member 153 is detachably attached to the back side of the opening / closing member 152, and the cover member 153 covers a ball feed solenoid 154 and a delivery member 155. The ball feeding solenoid 154 and the sending member 155 are members that operate to send out the balls one by one, and as shown in FIG. 5B, the ball feeding solenoid 154 is provided in a storage space recessed in the opening / closing member 152. Are arranged side by side up and down.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, the delivery member 155 is a resin member in which one side of the introduction port 152b with respect to the opening / closing member 152 is pivotally supported up and down by a pin. One side has a holder portion 155a which is recessed so as to accommodate only one ball. A metal piece 156 is attached to an upper side portion connecting the shaft portion into which the pin is inserted and the holder portion 155a so as to face the ball feed solenoid 154.

  When the ball feed solenoid 154 is turned on (excited), the metal piece 156 is pulled by the magnetic force of the ball feed solenoid 154, and the delivery member 155 rotates upward. As a result, the ball is placed in the holder 155a. When balls are continuously introduced from the inlet 152b, the first ball G1 is accommodated in the holder portion 155a to restrict vertical movement, and the subsequent ball G2 is supported by the ball accommodated in the holder portion 155a. Downflow is regulated.

  Next, the ball feeding operation of the ball G1 by the ball feeding mechanism 144 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 shows a state in which the ball G1 flows downstream from the delivery member 155 of the ball feed mechanism 144, and the ball G1 is arranged on the front surface of the cap 142b that covers the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142.

  FIG. 6A is a perspective view of the firing unit 140 in a state where the opening / closing member 152 constituting the ball feed mechanism 144 is opened, and FIG. 6B illustrates a state in which the lid member 153 is moved in the state of FIG. FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the firing unit 140 showing an internal configuration of the detachable ball feeding mechanism 144.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, when the ball feed solenoid 154 is turned off (non-excited) in a state where the ball G1 is housed in the holder portion 155a (see FIG. 5), the sending member 155 rotates downward by its own weight. Then, the ball G1 housed in the holder part 155a flows down. At this time, since the transfer of the subsequent ball G2 to the holder portion 155a is regulated by the upper side of the sending member 155, only the ball G1 housed in the holder portion 155a is sent downward by the vertical movement of the sending member 155. The ball G1 sent downward passes through an outlet 152c (see FIG. 5A) formed by the opening / closing member 152 and the cover member 153, as shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B. Then, it is guided onto the firing rail 143. Then, the ball G1 guided on the firing rail 143 rolls to the base end of the firing rail 143 due to the weight of the ball G1 and is disposed on the front surface of the cap 142b that covers the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142. Therefore, when the ball feed solenoid 154 is repeatedly turned on (excited) and turned off (de-energized), the balls are arranged one by one on the front surface of the cap 142b covering the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 in synchronization with the repetition. Then, by turning on and off the firing solenoid 142 in synchronization with turning on and off the ball feed solenoid 154, the balls arranged on the front surface of the cap 142b covering the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 are fired one ball at a time toward the game area. can do.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In order to instruct peripheral control devices (sub-control devices) such as the pay-out control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 includes a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which values of various flags, counters, I / O, and the like are stored. Area). The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The payout control device 111 is connected to the input / output port 205 via connectors 207 and 217, and the sound lamp control device 113 is connected via connectors 208 and 228, respectively. In addition, the input / output port 205 is connected to the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 82, the emission control device 112, the external output terminal board 261, and various switches 206 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown). ing. A hall computer 262 is configured to be connectable to the external output terminal board 261, and data and the like can be output from the main controller 110 to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261.

  When the main controller 110 issues an instruction to fire a ball, the firing control device 112 arranges the ball feed solenoid so as to arrange the ball in front of a cap 142b (see FIG. 5) that covers the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142. 154 is controlled, and the firing solenoid 142 is controlled so as to have a ball launching strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The driving of the firing solenoid 142 and the ball feeding solenoid 154 is permitted when predetermined conditions are satisfied.

  Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the payout control is performed on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (not operated). The firing permission signal SG3 is input from the signal conversion circuit 241 of the board 111 to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. When the firing permission signal SG3 is input to the input / output port 205, the MPU 201 outputs a firing control signal α and a ball feed control signal β from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 112. When the firing control signal α is input to the firing control device 112, a voltage is supplied to the firing solenoid 142, and the firing solenoid 142 moves a ball previously disposed on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. Fire at the game area with the strength according to. When the ball feed control signal β is input to the firing control device 112, a voltage is supplied to the ball feed solenoid 154, and the ball feed solenoid 154 in the ball feed mechanism 144 sends out one ball, and the ball is sent out. The sphere is located on the front of firing solenoid 142.

  Here, the firing permission signal SG3 will be described. The firing permission signal SG3 is a signal output from the signal conversion circuit 241 in the payout control device 111 to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. The signal conversion circuit 241 that outputs the firing control signal SG3 mainly includes an AND circuit that is a logic circuit. The firing permission signal SG3 is turned on only when the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the stop switch 51b is turned off, and turned off if any of the sensors does not satisfy the above condition. When the player rotates the operation handle 51 for the purpose of firing, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the stop switch 51b is turned off. Therefore, in principle, the player operates the operation handle 51 for the purpose of firing. In the state where the rotating operation of 51 is performed, a ball is fired by the firing solenoid 142.

  Although details will be described with reference to FIG. 12, the firing of the ball by the firing solenoid 142 and the arrangement of the ball on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 performed by the ball feeding solenoid 154 in the ball feeding mechanism 144 are not performed at the same time. Is configured.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.

  The work area of the RAM 213 is provided with a total prize ball number memory 213a, an upper command storage buffer 213b, a payout error flag 213c, and a payout permission flag 213d.

  The total prize ball number memory 213a is a memory that stores the total number of unpaid prize balls to be paid out by the payout control device 111. When the ball hit into the game area wins one of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and this is detected by the main controller 110, the payout of the number of prize balls according to the winning is performed by the prize ball command. (See FIG. 15), the main controller 110 instructs the payout controller 111. The total number of prize balls paid out by the prize ball command is added and stored in the total prize ball memory 213a. If the value of the total prize ball memory 213a is not 0, a prize ball is paid out, and the value is decremented by 1 each time one prize ball is detected. The payout of prize balls is performed until the value of the total prize ball number memory 213a becomes 0.

  The upper command storage buffer 213b is a buffer that stores an upper command (a first byte command) of the 2-byte commands output from the main controller 110 to the payout controller 111 shown in FIG. The main controller 110 outputs a payout return command, a payout initialization command, and 15 types of prize ball commands to the payout control device 111. The upper command storage buffer 213b stores these upper commands (99H , AAH, FOH to FEH) are stored. The contents of the upper command storage buffer 213b are cleared to 0 when the lower command (the second byte command) is input.

  The payout error flag 213c is a flag that is turned on when the payout control device 111 cannot normally input a 2-byte command output from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111 shown in FIG. When the payout error flag 213c is turned on, the character “C” is displayed on the 7-segment LED 121 by the state notification processing (S906 in FIGS. 25 and 29), and the occurrence of the command error is notified. The payout error flag 213c once turned on is turned off when a normal command of 2 bytes is input. When the payout error flag 213c is turned off, the error display of the 7-segment LED 121 is also canceled.

  The payout permission flag 213d is a flag for permitting the payout of the prize ball or the loaned ball, and is turned off in the startup process (S808, S811, S812 in FIG. 24), and the normal output from the main control device 110. When a command (payment initialization command, payout restoration command, prize ball command, etc.) is input, the command is turned on. That is, the payout permission flag 213d is a flag for confirming that the main control device 110 has started up.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110 is connected to input / output port 215 via connectors 207 and 217, and 7-segment LED 121, payout motor 216, external output terminal board 261 and the like are connected to each other. Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 241, and further connected to a prize ball detection switch (not shown) for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The seven-segment LED 121 is a display (display means) for notifying the state of the payout control device 111. When the payout control device 111 inputs a command output from the main control device 110 and determines that the command is an unspecified command (invalid command), the character “C” is displayed by the 7-segment LED 121. Is displayed and the occurrence of the command error is notified. Further, a hall computer 262 is configured to be connectable to the external output terminal board 261, and data and the like can be output from the payout control device 111 to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261. An error or the like generated in the payout control device 111 can also be output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 262.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and displays the display control device 114. This controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed in the above. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110 is connected to the input / output port 225 via connectors 208 and 228, and the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the like are also connected.

  The display control device 114 controls the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. It has. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, the ROM 232, the work RAM 233, and the image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Note that the pachinko machine 10 is a model having the same design as the design displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having different jackpot lottery probabilities and different numbers of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce cost.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the symbol display command input from the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs. The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores effect data such as symbols (background symbols and third symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The video RAM 234 is a memory for storing the effect data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 234.

  The image controller 236 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read out the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 having a RAM erasure switch 123. ing. The power supply unit 251 supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, and supplies a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches, solenoids, motors, etc., a voltage of 5 volts for logic, a RAM A backup voltage or the like for backup is generated, and these 12 volt, 5 volt, and backup voltages are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like with necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption) has occurred when this voltage falls below 22 volts. The power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing.

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit that outputs a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 123 is pressed. Main controller 110 clears backup data (contents of RAM 203) when RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

  Next, the launch control device 112 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the launch control device 112. The firing control device 112 includes a voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301, an added voltage adjusting unit 302, an adding circuit unit 303, a voltage supplying unit 304, a firing solenoid control unit 305, and a ball feed solenoid control unit 306. Have been.

  The voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 is a circuit that divides the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51, and includes an operational amplifier OP1 and a variable resistor having a variable resistance value. VR2. Here, the resistance value of the variable resistor VR2 can be adjusted by the operation knob 122a (see FIG. 3).

  The positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 on the input side of the power supply fluctuation adjustment unit 301 is connected to a variable resistor VR1 that detects the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance.

  In addition, a DC power supply DC1 of 5 volts is connected to one end of the variable resistor VR1, and the other end of the variable resistor VR1 is grounded. This is because the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 changes in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51, a DC voltage corresponding to the change in the resistance value is generated in the variable resistor VR1, and the generated DC voltage ( This is for inputting the signal SA1) to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1.

  The negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 is short-circuited with the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1, and the output of the operational amplifier OP1 is directly fed back to the negative input terminal of the operational amplifier OP1. Therefore, the operational amplifier OP1 is used as a buffer circuit that outputs the DC voltage input from the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 to the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 with an amplification degree of almost 1.

  One end of a variable resistor VR2 is connected in series to the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1, and the other end of the variable resistor VR2 is grounded. Therefore, the DC voltage (signal SA1) input from the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 has an amplification degree of almost 1, and is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1, and the output DC voltage is variable. The voltage is divided by the resistor VR2. The divided DC voltage is input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303. The DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 can be adjusted by adjusting the resistance value of the variable resistor VR2 with the operation knob 122a (see FIG. 3).

  In addition, a variation in the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is reduced by the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2, thereby playing a game. It is possible to adjust the range of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 and the width of the range in which the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the region is obtained. However, the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 is obtained by dividing the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by the variable resistor VR2. (Refer to signal SB1 in FIG. 9). This reduced voltage can be compensated for by the DC voltage input to the addition circuit unit 303 from the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 described below.

  The addition voltage adjustment unit 302 is a circuit that generates a DC voltage having a constant value, and includes a DC power supply DC2 of 12 volts, a resistor R1 having a fixed resistance value, a variable resistor VR3 having a variable resistance value, and a Zener. It is composed of a diode D1 and a capacitor CD1. Here, the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3 can be adjusted by the operation knob 122b (see FIG. 3).

  The other end of the variable resistor VR3 is grounded, and one end of the variable resistor VR3 is connected to the cathode of the Zener diode D1, one end of the capacitor CD1, and one end of the resistor R1. Since the anode of the Zener diode D1 is grounded, the Zener diode D1 and the variable resistor VR3 are connected in parallel. Further, since the other end of the capacitor CD1 is grounded, the capacitor CD1 and the variable resistor VR3 are connected in parallel similarly to the Zener diode D1. Therefore, a parallel circuit is formed by the capacitor CD1, the Zener diode D1, and the variable resistor VR3. The other end of the resistor R1 is connected to a DC power supply DC2 of 12 volts. The Zener diode D1 is used for stabilizing the constant voltage generated in the Zener diode D1 in order to make the DC voltage generated in the Zener diode D1 a constant value (constant voltage). The resistor R1 is used to limit the current supplied from the DC power supply DC2 of 12 volts.

  A 12-volt DC voltage supplied from a 12-volt DC power supply DC2 is divided by a resistor R1 and a parallel circuit of a capacitor CD1, a zener diode D1, and a variable resistor VR3. The constant DC voltage (Zener voltage) generated in the Zener diode D1 is also generated in the variable resistor VR3 connected in parallel with the Zener diode D1. Here, by adjusting the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3 with the operation knob 122b (see FIG. 3), the DC voltage output from the variable resistor VR3 can be adjusted at a voltage equal to or lower than the Zener voltage. Note that the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 is input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303. Here, by inputting the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, the range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is changed. Instead, only the range can be adjusted (see signal SC1 in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10). Therefore, by dividing the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301, the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 is changed. Even if the voltage becomes lower than the DC voltage (signal SA1) generated in the variable resistor VR1, the reduced voltage can be compensated for by the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3.

  Since the DC voltage supplied from the 12-volt DC power supply DC2 is made constant using the Zener diode D1, the DC voltage supplied from the 12-volt DC power supply DC2 becomes unstable, and the DC voltage varies. Also, the DC voltage generated in the Zener diode D1 has a stable constant value (constant voltage). Therefore, a stable constant voltage is also generated in the variable resistor VR3 connected in parallel with the Zener diode D1, so that the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 also becomes a stable constant voltage.

  The addition circuit unit 303 adds (adds) the DC voltage (signal SB1) generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 and the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302. ) Output circuit, and includes resistors R2, R3, R4, and R5 having fixed resistance values, and an operational amplifier OP2.

  The variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 is connected to one end of the resistor R2, and the variable resistor VR3 of the added voltage adjusting unit 302 is connected to one end of the resistor R3. Here, the resistance values of the resistors R2, R3, R4, and R5 are all the same, and the other end of the resistor R3 is connected to the other end of the resistor R2 and the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2. ing. One end of a resistor R4 and one end of a resistor R5 are connected to a minus input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2. Is grounded.

  Therefore, the circuit composed of the resistors R2, R3, R4, and R5 and the operational amplifier OP2 uses a DC voltage (signal SB1) input from one end of the resistor R2 (generated at the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301). And a DC voltage input from one end of the resistor R3 (generated at the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjusting unit 302) and added (added) to function as an addition circuit that outputs the result from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2. I do. The DC voltage output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 is input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the voltage supply unit 304.

  The voltage supply unit 304 is a circuit that supplies a voltage to the firing solenoid 142. The voltage supply unit 304 includes an operational amplifier OP3, a low-pass filter F1, a DC-DC converter CV1 that is a booster, and a DC power supply DC3 that supplies a 32 volt DC voltage. And a capacitor CD2. Since the minus input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 and the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 are short-circuited, the operational amplifier OP3 functions as a buffer amplifier. The plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 is connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303. Therefore, the DC voltage generated at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit 303 is input from the plus input terminal of the operational amplifier OP3, has an amplification of almost 1, and is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3.

  The output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 is connected to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F1, and the low-pass filter F1 reduces noise (high-frequency component) superimposed on the DC voltage output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3. The output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 is connected to the input terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, and the DC-DC converter CV1 is further connected to a DC power supply DC3 for supplying a DC voltage of 32 volts. A DC voltage of 32 volts is supplied from the power supply DC3 to the DC-DC converter CV1. Therefore, the DC voltage (signal SC1) output from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 is boosted to the DC voltage Ec by the DC-DC converter CV1.

  One end (plus terminal) of a capacitor CD2 is connected to the output terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, and the other end of the capacitor CD2 is grounded. Therefore, the boosted DC voltage Ec output from the output terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1 is applied to the capacitor CD2 when the conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 described later is cut off. As a result, the capacitor CD2 stores an electric charge determined by the product of the capacitance of the capacitor CD2 and the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2. Note that a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 142 in accordance with the charge stored in the capacitor CD2.

  One end of a firing solenoid 142 is connected to the output terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, and the other end of the firing solenoid 142 is connected to the drain terminal D of the FET switch SW1 of the firing solenoid control unit 305. . Further, a diode D2 is connected between one end and the other end of the firing solenoid 142 at a stage subsequent to the capacitor CD2. Connected to the other end. This diode D2 suppresses back electromotive force (surge voltage) generated after the firing operation of the ball of the firing solenoid 142.

  The firing solenoid control unit 305 is a circuit for controlling on / off of the firing solenoid 142, and includes a resistor R6 having a fixed resistance value, a low-pass filter F2, a Schmitt trigger inverter IC1, an FET switch SW1, and a 5-volt switch. And a DC power supply DC1 for supplying a DC voltage.

  The input terminal of the low-pass filter F2 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and one end of the resistor R6 is connected between the input / output port 205 and the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2. The other end of the resistor R6 is connected to the DC power supply DC1, and when the input / output port 205 is in the on state (5 volt state), 5 volts is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2. Is in the off state (zero volt state), the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2 is in the non-input state (zero volt state). Since the input / output port 205 is repeatedly turned on and off, a firing control signal α which is a pulse signal generated when the input / output port 205 is turned on is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2.

  When the emission control signal α is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F2, the noise (high-frequency component) superimposed on the emission control signal α is reduced by the low-pass filter F2. The output terminal of the low-pass filter F2 is connected to the input terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1, and the firing control signal α input to the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1 has its waveform shaped and inverted by the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1. Then, it is output as the firing control signal γ from the output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1.

  The output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1 is connected to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1. One end of the drain terminal D of the FET switch SW1 is connected to the other end of the firing solenoid 142 connected to the DC-DC converter CV1 and the anode of the diode D2, and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 is grounded. Therefore, when the firing control signal γ is input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1 (5 volt state), the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 conduct, and the firing solenoid 142 is connected to the capacitor CD2. A voltage E1 (maximum value Ec volts) generated by the stored charge is applied. As a result, the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 projects, and fires a ball disposed on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 toward the game area. Although details will be described with reference to FIG. 12 (d), the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD2 becomes the maximum value Ec volt at the moment of application, and with the lapse of time, The voltage value decreases.

  On the other hand, when the firing control signal γ is not input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1 (in a zero volt state), the conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 is cut off, and the firing solenoid 142 receives a voltage. E1 is not applied. As a result, the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 is returned from the projected state to the initial state by a spring (not shown) provided inside the firing solenoid 142.

  The ball feed solenoid control unit 306 is a circuit for controlling on / off of the ball feed solenoid 154, and includes a resistor R7 having a fixed resistance value, a low-pass filter F3, a Schmitt trigger inverter IC2, an FET switch SW2, The DC power supply DC1 supplies a DC voltage of 12 volts, and the DC power supply DC2 supplies a DC voltage of 12 volts.

  The input terminal of the low-pass filter F3 is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and one end of the resistor R7 is connected between the input / output port 205 and the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3. The other end of the resistor R7 is connected to the DC power supply DC1, and when the input / output port 205 is on (5 volts), 5 volts is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3. Is in the off state (zero volt state), the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3 is in the non-input state (zero volt state). Since the input / output port 205 is repeatedly turned on and off, the ball feed control signal β which is a pulse signal generated when the input / output port 205 is turned on is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3.

  When the ball feed control signal β is input to the input terminal of the low-pass filter F3, the noise (high-frequency component) superimposed on the ball feed control signal β is reduced by the low-pass filter F3. The output terminal of the low-pass filter F3 is connected to the input terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2. It is inverted and output as the ball feed control signal δ from the output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2.

  The output terminal of the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2 is connected to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2. The drain terminal D of the FET switch SW2 is connected to the other end of the ball feed solenoid 154 and the anode of the diode D3. One end of the ball feed solenoid 154 has a cathode of the diode D3 and a DC power source DC2 for supplying a 12 volt DC voltage. Is connected. The source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 is grounded. Therefore, when the ball feed control signal δ is input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2 (5 volt state), the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 conduct, and the DC power supply is supplied to the ball feed solenoid 154. A DC voltage E2 of 12 volts supplied from DC2 is applied. As a result, the ball feeding solenoid 154 is turned on (excited), the metal piece 156 of the sending member 155 is pulled by the magnetic field of the ball feeding solenoid 154, and the sending member 155 rotates upward (see FIG. 5). Accordingly, the ball G1 is in a state of being accommodated in the holder 155a (see FIG. 5). The surge voltage generated when the ball feeding solenoid 154 is switched from on to off is suppressed by the diode D3.

  On the other hand, when the ball feed control signal δ is not input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2 (zero volt state), the conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 is cut off, and the ball feed solenoid 154 is turned off. No DC voltage E2 is applied. As a result, the sending member 155 rotates downward by its own weight, and the ball G1 housed in the holder 155a is sent out downward, and is arranged on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 6).

  Next, the operation of the firing control device 112 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating voltage changes of respective signals of the firing control device 112 illustrated in FIG. 8, and FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating changes in the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjusting unit 302 of the firing control device 112 illustrated in FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (a change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) when the firing solenoid 142 is activated.

  Further, FIG. 11 shows that the firing solenoid 142 when the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjusting unit 302 of the firing control device 112 shown in FIG. 8 is changed and the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 is changed. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a change in the maximum value of the applied voltage E1 (a change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2). FIG. 12 shows the firing permission signal SG3, the firing control signals α and γ, and the firing solenoid 142. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a timing chart of an applied voltage E1, ball feed control signals β and δ, and a DC voltage E2 applied to a ball feed solenoid 154.

  In FIG. 9, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the voltage of each signal. As shown in FIG. 9, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is set from a minimum value of zero degrees to a maximum value of 120 degrees, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 The DC voltage generated at the resistor VR1 (see FIG. 8) changes. When the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1, that is, the signal SA1, is input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 in the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301, the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 outputs A signal having an amplification degree of almost 1 is output (see FIG. 8). In the present embodiment, when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is zero degrees, the DC voltage value of the signal SA1 is about 0.7 volt, and the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is the maximum value 120. In this case, the DC voltage value of the signal SA1 is set to about 4.3 volts.

  Next, the signal output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 is divided by the variable resistor VR2, and the divided DC voltage signal SB1 is input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 (FIG. 8). In the present embodiment, when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is zero, which is the minimum value, the DC voltage value of the signal SB1 is about 0.25 volt, and the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is the maximum. When the value is 120 degrees, the DC voltage value of the signal SB1 is set to about 1.55 volts.

  On the other hand, the DC voltage (about 2.25 volts in the present embodiment) generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 is input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 (FIG. 2). 8). Therefore, the signal SB1 input to the resistor R2 of the adder circuit 303 and approximately 2.25 volts input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit 303 are added (added), and output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2. You.

  The signal output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 is input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3, which is a buffer amplifier, and is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 with an amplification degree of approximately 1 (FIG. 8). reference). The signal output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 has its noise component (high-frequency component) removed by the low-pass filter F1, and is output as the signal SC1 from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 (see FIG. 8). When the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is zero degree, which is the minimum value, the DC voltage value of the signal SC1 is approximately 0.25 volts of the DC voltage value of the signal SB1 input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303. And the DC voltage value of 2.25 volts input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit 303, which is approximately 2.50 volts, and the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is 120 degrees, which is the maximum value. At this time, the DC voltage of the signal SC1 is about 1.55 volts of the signal SB1 input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303, and the DC voltage value of 2.1.5 V input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303. It is about 3.80 volts, which is the sum of 25 volts.

  The signal SC1 output from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 is input to the input terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, is boosted, and becomes a DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2 (see FIG. 8).

  Next, referring to FIG. 10, a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjusting unit 302 of the firing control device 112 shown in FIG. 8 is changed ( The change of the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) will be described. In FIG. 10, the following conditions are set in order to clarify a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 due to a change in the variable resistor VR3.

  Voltage division by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 is not performed (the signal SA1 output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 is not divided), and the signal SA1 is input as the signal SB1 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303. I do. Under this condition, when the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 generates a constant value DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 (FIG. 10A), A comparison is made between the case where the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is not generated by the variable resistor VR3 of FIG. 302 (FIG. 10B).

  In FIG. 10, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2). Here, when the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 becomes less than 17.5 volts, the ball hit by the firing solenoid 142 becomes a foul ball. Also, when the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 becomes larger than 21 volts, the ball hit by the firing solenoid 142 becomes a right-hit ball. The foul ball is a launch rail 143 (see FIG. 5) that does not reach the launch port 68a where the return ball preventing member 68 (see FIG. 2) is located because the launching force (firing strength) of the launch solenoid 142 is weak. It means a ball returning to the side. A right-hit ball is a ball that has a strong launching force (firing strength) of the firing solenoid 142, moves along the rail 62 after being launched from the launch port 68a, and directly hits the return rubber 69 (see FIG. 2). Means

  As shown in FIG. 10B, when the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is not generated by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is reduced. When changing from zero degrees to 120 degrees, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 changes from about 4.5 volts to about 28.5 volts. Further, the range of the ball to be fouled is such that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is from zero to less than 66 degrees, and the range of the ball to be right-handed is that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 84 degrees to 120 degrees. I have. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is provided is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less. Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 10, the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 that becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area usually has a target value of 65 degrees which is the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51. It is set within an arbitrary range including.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10B, when the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is not generated by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, the turning operation of the operation handle 51 is performed. The target value of the amount of 65 degrees is not included in the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 (not less than 66 degrees and not more than 84 degrees), and the target value of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 65 degrees. , Can not hit the ball into the game area. Therefore, it is necessary to adjust the firing intensity of the ball (the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, that is, the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) with respect to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 10A, when a constant value DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is generated by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, When the amount of turning operation of the handle 51 is changed from zero degrees to 120 degrees, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 can be changed from about 6.0 volts to about 30.0 volts. . Further, the range of the ball to be fouled is when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is from zero degrees to less than 57 degrees, and the range of the ball to be hit right is when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 75 degrees to 120 degrees. I have. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is provided is 57 degrees or more and 75 degrees or less. Accordingly, the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 generates a constant DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, and includes 65 degrees which is the target value of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51. In this manner, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 that is the firing intensity at which the ball is struck into the game area can be adjusted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 11, the case where the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 of the firing control device 112 shown in FIG. 8 is changed and the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 is changed is shown. The change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) will be described. In FIG. 11, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the variable resistor VR3 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 is changed while the variable resistor VR3 of the added voltage adjusting unit 302 is changed. To clarify the change, the following conditions are used.

  The variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 generates a constant DC voltage to be input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, and the DC voltage is input to the variable resistor VR2 by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301. When the signal SB1 is divided into a signal SB1 (FIG. 11A), as in FIG. 10B, the signal SB1 is input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302. When the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is not divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 (the signal SA1 is directly used as the signal SB1) ( FIG. 11 (b)).

  11, as in FIG. 10, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 and the vertical axis represents the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2). I have.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 does not generate a constant DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, and the variable resistor VR3 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 When the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is not divided by the device VR2, the signal is applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degrees to 120 degrees. The maximum value of voltage E1 varies from about 4.5 volts to about 28.5 volts. Further, the range of the ball to be fouled is such that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is from zero to less than 66 degrees, and the range of the ball to be right-handed is that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 84 degrees to 120 degrees. I have. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into the game area in which the winning opening and the like are provided is not less than 66 degrees and not more than 84 degrees, and the target value of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is set. Is not included in the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 (not less than 66 degrees and not more than 84 degrees). Also, the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for hitting the ball into the game area, which originally requires fine adjustment of the launching strength of the ball, is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the width of the range Is 18 degrees.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11A, a constant value DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is generated by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, and the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 When the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 into a signal SB1 (FIG. 11A), the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degrees to 120 degrees. In this case, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 changes from about 16.0 volts to about 24.0 volts. In this case, the range in which the ball is a foul ball is such that the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is from zero degrees to less than 23 degrees, and the range in which the ball is a right-handed ball is that the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 77 degrees and 120 degrees. Degree. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is provided is 23 degrees or more and 77 degrees or less. Accordingly, a constant value DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is generated by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, and the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 is connected to the variable resistor VR2. When the input signal is divided and the signal SB1 is obtained, an operation handle having a firing intensity at which a ball is hit into the game area is included so as to include 65 degrees which is a target value of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. It is possible to adjust the range of the amount of rotation operation of 51.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11A, the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 generates a constant value DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, and the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301. When the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 to obtain the signal SB1, the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area is 23 degrees or more. It is 77 degrees or less, and the width of the range is 54 degrees. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 11 (a), as compared with 18 degrees which is the range width of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which the ball is hit into the game area in the case of FIG. 11 (b). In the example, the range width of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 at which the firing intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area is increased by 36 degrees. Therefore, the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 does not generate a DC voltage having a constant value input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, and the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 controls the variable resistor VR2. Compared with the case where the input signal is not divided (see FIG. 11B), the constant value DC input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302. When a voltage is generated and the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to obtain a signal SB1 (FIG. 11A), the ball is placed in the game area. Since the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving is widened, the firing intensity of the ball for driving the ball into the game area can be finely adjusted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 12, the relationship between the firing permission signal SG3, the firing control signals α and γ, and the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, and the ball feed control signals β and δ and the voltage applied to the ball feed solenoid 154 The relationship with the applied DC voltage E2 will be described. FIG. 12 shows the relationship between the firing permission signal SG3, the firing control signals α and γ, and the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, and the relationship between the ball feed control signals β and δ and the DC voltage E2 applied to the ball feed solenoid 154. 6 is a timing chart showing a relationship. In the present embodiment, the output time S1 of the firing control signal α is 12 ms, the output time S2 of the ball feed control signal β is 74 ms, and the output period S3 of the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β is 602 ms. . By setting the output cycle S3 of the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β to 602 ms, the firing of the ball by the firing solenoid 142 is reduced to 99.67 or less per minute.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, when the player touches the operation handle 51, the touch sensor 51a is turned on. If the stop switch 51b is off (from t1 to t4), the firing permission signal SG3 input from the signal conversion circuit 241 to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 is turned on (5 volt state).

  Then, the firing control signal α is output from the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 to the firing solenoid control unit 305 of the firing control device 112 for each output period S3 for each output period S3 (the state becomes zero volt, FIG. b)). The firing control signal α output to the firing solenoid control unit 305 is inverted by the Schmitt trigger inverter IC1 (see FIG. 8) to become a firing control signal γ (see FIG. 12C).

  The firing control signal γ is input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1 (see FIG. 8). As a result, the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1 is turned on (5 volt state), and the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 are electrically connected during the output time S1 (see FIG. 8). When the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 are turned on, as shown in FIG. 12D, the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD2 is applied to the firing solenoid 142 as a voltage E1 (FIG. 8). reference). As a result, the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 protrudes, and fires a ball disposed on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 toward the game area (see FIG. 5). After the output time S1 has elapsed, the firing control signal α is turned off (5 volt state), so that the firing control signal γ is also turned off (zero volt state). When the firing control signal γ is turned off, the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW1 is also turned off (zero volt state), and the conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW1 is cut off (FIG. 8). As a result, the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 is returned from the projected state to the initial state by a spring (not shown) provided inside the firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 5).

  The voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 becomes the maximum value Ec at each of t1, t2, and t3, and the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 decreases as the charge stored in the capacitor CD2 decreases. (See FIG. 12D). The voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2 is the maximum voltage value at each of t1, t2, and t3 of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142.

  When the player releases his / her hand from the operation handle 51, the firing permission signal SG3 is turned off (when the player touches the operation handle 51 after t4 in FIG. 12A, the stop switch 51b is on. The firing control signal α is not output from the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and the voltage E1 is not applied to the firing solenoid 142. Therefore, the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142 is not protruded and remains in the initial state (see FIG. 5).

  As shown in FIG. 12 (e), when the firing permission signal SG3 is in the ON state, the ball feed control signal β is output from the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110 to the ball feed solenoid controller 306 of the firing controller 112 in an output cycle. An output time S2 is output for each S3 (becomes a zero volt state). The ball feed control signal β output to the ball feed solenoid control unit 306 is inverted by the Schmitt trigger inverter IC2 (see FIG. 8) to become a ball feed control signal δ (see FIG. 12 (f)).

  The ball feed control signal δ is input to the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2 (see FIG. 8). As a result, the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2 is turned on (5 volt state), and the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 are electrically connected during the output time S2 (see FIG. 8). When the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 are turned on, as shown in FIG. 12 (g), a DC voltage E2 (12 volts) is applied to the ball feed solenoid 154 by the DC power supply DC2 ( See FIG. 8). As a result, the ball feed solenoid 154 is turned on (excitation state), the metal piece 156 of the sending member 155 is pulled by the magnetic field of the ball feeding solenoid 154, and the sending member 155 rotates upward (see FIG. 5). Accordingly, the ball G1 is in a state of being accommodated in the holder 155a (see FIG. 5). After the output time S2 has elapsed, the ball feed control signal β is turned off (5 volt state), so that the ball feed control signal δ is also turned off (zero volt state). When the ball feed control signal δ is turned off, the gate terminal G of the FET switch SW2 is also turned off (zero volt state), and the conduction between the drain terminal D and the source terminal S of the FET switch SW2 is cut off ( See FIG. 8). As a result, the sending member 155 rotates downward by its own weight, and the ball G1 housed in the holder 155a is sent out downward, and is arranged on the front surface of the firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 6).

  When the firing permission signal SG3 is off (after time t4 in FIG. 12A), the ball feed control signal β is not output from the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110, and the DC voltage is also applied to the ball feed solenoid 154. E2 (12 volts) is not applied. Therefore, the delivery member 155 is not rotated upward but remains rotated downward by its own weight (see FIG. 6).

  The timing at which the firing solenoid 142 starts firing the ball and the timing at which the ball feeding solenoid 154 starts feeding the ball are the same as shown in FIG. 12, but the timing at which the firing solenoid 142 fires the ball. Does not coincide with the timing at which the ball is placed in front of the firing solenoid 142 by the ball feed solenoid 154. The reason will be described. The output time S2 of the ball feed control signal β for controlling the operation of the ball feed solenoid 154 is 74 ms, which is longer than the output time S1 of the firing control signal α for controlling the operation of the firing solenoid 142, which is 12 ms. . This is because the firing solenoid 142 completes firing of the ball during the time from when the ball feeding solenoid 154 starts feeding the ball to when the ball accommodated in the holder 155a of the ball feeding mechanism 144 is sent downward. This means that a longer time is required compared to the time required. Due to this time difference, the ball whose ball-feeding solenoid 154 starts ball-feeding at the same time as the timing at which the firing solenoid 142 starts to fire the ball fires a ball previously disposed on the front of the firing solenoid 142. After 142 is completed, it will be located on the front of firing solenoid 142. Therefore, even when the timing at which the firing solenoid 142 starts firing a ball and the timing at which the ball feed solenoid 154 starts ball feeding are simultaneous, the firing of the ball of the firing solenoid 142 and the ball toward the front of the firing solenoid 142 are performed. Is not simultaneous, and the firing of the ball by the firing solenoid 142 and the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 154 are performed alternately.

  Next, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 13A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 13B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9" and one type of petal-shaped sub-type formed smaller than the main symbols. Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol made of a wooden box, and the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are Large numbers are added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are provided with an accessory design imitating a character such as a furoshiki, a helmet, etc., with a talisman covering almost the front of the wooden box, An even number is added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so as to be small in green and displayed in front of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display ends. It is configured as follows. When shifting to the high-probability state (probable change state) after the end of the jackpot, a fluctuation display is performed in which main symbols (corresponding to “high-probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added are aligned. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low-probability state after the end of the big hit, a fluctuation display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to “low-probability symbols”) to which even-numbered numbers are aligned are provided. Here, the high-probability state refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as added value after the jackpot ends, that is, a so-called probability change (probable change). The normal state (low-probability state) refers to a state in which the probability of success is not constant, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of success is lower than that in the case of probability change.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into upper and lower parts, and a lower two-thirds is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The upper third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect and a character.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. For this reason, a total of 20 third symbols of 10 main symbols and 10 sub symbols are set in each symbol row, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity. The variable display is performed. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, a third symbol is displayed in three stages of upper, middle, and lower for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols in three rows and three columns. In the main display area Dm, five effective lines, that is, an upper line L1, a middle line L2, a lower line L3, a rising line L4, and a rising line L5 are set. Then, at the time of each game, the variable display stops in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and at the time of the stop, the combination of the big hit symbols on any of the activated lines (in this embodiment, If they are arranged with the same combination of the main symbols), the big hit movie will be displayed as a big hit.

  The sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is equally divided into three notice areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Here, the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3 are usually covered with a double-sided opaque door that is electrically opened and closed by a solenoid (not shown). When opened, the display area becomes visible to the player. The center notice area Ds2 is a display area that is always visible without being covered by the door.

  As shown in FIG. 13B, on the actual display screen, a total of nine main symbols and three sub symbols are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, the left and right doors are closed, and the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3 are covered and hidden, so that the display screen cannot be viewed. If one or both of the left and right doors are opened during the change display, a moving image is displayed in the left and right notice areas Ds1 and Ds3, and the player is informed that the state is easier to transition to the big hit than usual. It is suggested. In the center notice area Ds2, normally, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in the present embodiment) performs a predetermined operation, sometimes performs a special operation different from the predetermined operation, or a different character is displayed. And an announcement performance is performed. Although the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is divided into upper and lower display areas Dm and Ds in principle, the third symbol and characters are displayed larger across the display areas Dm and Ds. A display effect can be performed.

  Next, a counter provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37, lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 82, and the like.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37, a first random number counter C1 used for a jackpot lottery, a first hit type symbol counter C2 used for selecting a jackpot symbol, and a stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. In addition, a second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 82, and a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated at an interval of 4 ms, which is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 18), or at an interval of 2 ms, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21). The data is appropriately stored in the counter buffer. The RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area including one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored in synchronization with the ball winning timing.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 738 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738). In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 21) is executed. It is updated once and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 18). The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once every timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment), and is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Stored in the area. The number of random hit values at the time of low probability and the high probability are set at two types. The number of random numbers at the time of low probability is two, and the value is “373,727”. Yes, the number of random number values that will be a big hit at a high probability is 14, and the value is "59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733".

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 at the time of a big hit. In the present embodiment, the first hit type counter C2 is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 4 to obtain the maximum value ( That is, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 4). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64. Stored in the area. Note that the value of the random number that becomes the high probability state after the big hit is “1, 2, 3”, the value of the random number that becomes the low probability state after the big hit is “0, 4”, and two types of the hit types are determined. You. Therefore, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots, a high probability state and a low probability state, and a display mode corresponding to a loss. Any one of the three types of display modes is selected.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop pattern selection counter C3, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. A "reach out of front and rear" (for example, in the range of 0 to 8) to stop, and a "reach other than front and rear out of reach" (for example, in the range of 9 to 38) in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than before and after the reach symbol after the reach is also generated. , "Stop completely" (for example, in the range of 39 to 238) in which no reach occurs, three stop (effect) patterns are selected. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203. Is stored in

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random numbers from which the stop pattern is selected. This depends on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high-probability state or the low-probability state, in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random number value is stored (that is, the number of reserved), and the like. This is for changing the selection ratio of the stop pattern.

  For example, in the high-probability state, a table in which the range of the random value corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is as large as 10 to 238 is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur, It becomes easy to select "completely out of order". In this table, the “reach out of front and rear” is narrowed to 0 to 5 and the “reach other than front and rear out” is also narrowed to 6 to 9, making it difficult to select “reach out of front and rear” or “reach other than front and rear out”. Further, if the random numbers are not stored in the reserved ball storage area in the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64, the disturbance corresponding to the "completely out" stop pattern is required. A table whose numerical value range is as narrow as 51 to 238 is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely out of range”. In this table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop pattern of “reach other than front and rear out” is widened to 9 to 50, and “reach other than front and back out” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, the ball entry time of the ball into the first entrance 64 can be ensured, so that the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously.

  Of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is configured to be added one by one in the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The other variation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 240, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240). In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”.

  A rough display mode such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and the like is determined by the first variation type counter CS1. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Further, the second variation type counter CS2 determines the variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (the middle symbol in the present embodiment) stops after the occurrence of the reach. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the display control device 114 determines the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third display device 81. Therefore, by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode by a combination of the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol. The values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 18) described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  The value of the variation type counter CS3 is, for example, added one by one in the range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is also referred to as “third variation type counter”. The third symbol display device 81 according to the present embodiment performs a decorative effect according to the display mode of the first symbol display device 37. In addition to the symbol variation, the third symbol display device 81 slides a fluctuating symbol. For example, a notice effect such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the announcement effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3. More specifically, an effect pattern that does not add or subtract the time required for the notice effect to the fluctuation time, or subtracts the fluctuation time to shorten the time of fluctuation display, or selects the fluctuation time is selected. . In addition, similarly to the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS3 is provided with a plurality of tables having different ranges of random numbers from which the effect pattern is selected, and determines whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state. The selection ratio of each effect pattern is configured to be different depending on whether it is in the low probability state, in which area of the reserved ball storage area each random number value is stored, and the like.

  As described above, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and the time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time is determined by the variation type counter CS3. Therefore, the final variation time until the final stop symbol stops is determined by the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter which is sequentially incremented by one in a range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 250). In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is determined that the ball has passed the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Acquired when detected. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is executed once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 21). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 18).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a command output from main controller 110 to payout controller 111 will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing commands output from main control device 110 to payout control device 111. The command is composed of 2 bytes, and is output from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111 in the order of the first byte and the second byte via the connectors 207 and 217 as 8-bit parallel data. In the first byte of the command, the most significant bit is set ("1"), and in the second byte, the most significant bit is reset ("0"). Therefore, the payout control device 111 can determine whether the input data is the first byte or the second byte of the command by setting or resetting the most significant bit.

  In the pachinko machine 10, not all commands shown in FIG. 15 are necessarily used. That is, some pachinko machines 10 use only a part of the commands shown in FIG. For example, there is also a pachinko machine 10 that uses only a payout return command, a payout initialization command, a five-prize-ball payout command, and a fifteen-prize-ball payout command.

  Data input / output between the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 is performed only in one direction from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111. This is because the number of input signals to the main control device 110 that performs the main control of the game is reduced as much as possible, so that an illegal act on the main control device 110 is suppressed. For this reason, even if the output command data changes due to noise, disconnection or short-circuit of the signal line, fraud, etc., main controller 110 cannot detect the change and cannot detect an abnormality.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the command output from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111 is composed of 2 bytes, and when these are added or exclusive ORed one by one, the least significant one byte after the operation is calculated. Is set to FFH. Accordingly, the payout control device 111 adds or exclusive ORs the input 2-byte command one byte at a time, and if the result is not FFH, determines that the command is not a normal command and inputs the command. Is invalidated, and the character "C" is displayed on the 7-segment LED 121 provided in the payout control device 111 to notify a command error.

  Commands output from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111 include a prize ball command instructing payout of a prize ball. Since the prize ball command has a great effect on the player and the game arcade, even if the output of the command is only in one direction from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111, the command is input in the payout control device 111. The configuration is such that it can be determined whether or not the command is normal.

  If there is a disconnection in the signal line that outputs the prize ball command, it can be reliably detected by the above method (the result of addition or exclusive OR is FFH). That is, if any signal line is disconnected, the data (bit) of that signal line always becomes the same data (“0 and 0” or “1 and 1”) in both the first byte and the second byte. Therefore, when the first byte and the second byte of the command are added or exclusive ORed, the bit corresponding to the disconnected signal line becomes 0, and the result of the addition or exclusive OR does not become FFH. It is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the payout control device 111 is started, the payout return command and the payout initialization command always output from the main control device 110 are used, and a signal line for transmitting these commands, It is possible to detect whether or not there is a short (solder bridge) in the connectors 207 and 217 for connecting the signal lines.

  FIG. 16A is a diagram showing an arrangement of signal pins of a connector 207 provided in the main control device 110, and FIG. FIG.

  A short circuit of a signal line or a signal pin or a solder bridge occurs in an adjacent signal line (pin). As shown in FIG. 16A, the connector 207 of the main control device 110 has signal pins arranged adjacent to each other in bit order. Therefore, by setting the first byte of the payout initialization command to AAH (1010B) and the second byte to 55H (0101B), the output of the payout initialization command causes the adjacent signal line or signal pin of the connector 207 to be connected. Can be set or reset alternately. Therefore, when the payout control device 111 can normally input the payout initialization command, it is possible to detect the absence of a short circuit or a solder bridge in these signal lines or signal pins.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 16B, the connector 217 of the payout device 111 has signal pins arranged in two stages. Therefore, by setting the first byte of the payout return command to 99H (1001B) and the second byte to 66H (0110B), the output of the payout return command causes the signal lines adjacent to the connector 217 in the vertical and horizontal directions to be output. Alternatively, the signal pins can be set or reset alternately. In addition, by setting the first byte of the payout initialization command to AAH (1010B) and the second byte to 55H (0101B), the output of the payout initialization command causes the signal line or signal pin obliquely adjacent to the connector 217 to be output. Can be set or reset alternately. Therefore, when the payout control device 111 can normally input the payout return command and the payout initialization command, it is possible to detect the absence of a short circuit or a solder bridge in these signal lines or signal pins.

  The connector 217 may be configured in the arrangement shown in FIG. 16A, or the connector 207 may be configured in the arrangement shown in FIG. Further, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 may be connected using a connector other than the arrangement shown in FIG. 16 (a) or 16 (b). In such a case, the payout return command and the payout initialization command are configured as data for alternately setting or resetting signal lines or signal pins adjacent in the vertical and horizontal directions of the connector.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (in the present embodiment, at a period of 2 ms). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a startup process and The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, for example, every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt processing, first, various pay switches are read (S501). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information). Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (738 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), the counter value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, first type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and second random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are set to the maximum value (this embodiment). Then, when they reach 738, 4, 238, 250), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Thereafter, a start winning process (see FIG. 22) accompanying the winning in the first entrance 64 is executed (S504), a firing control process is executed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and turns on the launch of the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is not operated. / Off determination. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the payout control is performed on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (not operated). The firing permission signal SG3 is input from the signal conversion circuit 241 of the board 111 to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 110. When the firing permission signal SG3 is input to the input / output port 205, the MPU 201 outputs the firing control signal α from the input / output port 205 to the firing solenoid control unit 305 (see FIG. 8) of the firing control device 112, and fires. The ball feed control signal β is output from the input / output port 205 to the ball feed solenoid control unit 306 of the control device 112. When the firing permission signal SG3 is not input to the input / output port 205, the MPU 201 does not output the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β.

  The start winning process executed in the process of S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start winning) (S601). If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the number N of pending balls of the first symbol display device 37 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). It is determined (S602). If there is a prize in the first entrance 64 and the number N of active balls is less than 4 (S602: Yes), the number N of active balls is incremented by 1 (S603), and further updated in step S503. The values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in the first of the free reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S604). On the other hand, whether there is no prize in the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the number of active balls is not N <4 (S602: No). , S603 and S604 are skipped, the start winning process ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S701). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the dispatching / launching control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. This start-up process is started by a reset interrupt process when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S101). More specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value, and the control devices on the sub side (the peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are set in an operable state. In order to wait, a wait process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed. Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasure switch 123 provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S110. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 123 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105). If not, the RAM 203 is not stored (S105: No). Since the backup data is not stored, the process also proceeds to S110 in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S110 in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S213 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S110, a payout initialization command (see FIG. 15) is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S110). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the ball payout control (FIG. 28). After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S111, S112).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 123. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 123 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S111, S112) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process (S111, S112) of the RAM 203 is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S111, S112), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S111), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S112). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S113.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 123 is not turned on (S104: No), the power-off information is stored (S105: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S104: No). S107: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command (see FIG. 15) at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S113. I do. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the ball payout control while holding the data stored in the RAM 213 (see FIG. 28).

  In the process of S113, the interrupt is permitted, and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, the output data such as the command updated in the previous process is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S201). Specifically, the presence / absence of prize detection information detected in the switch reading process of S501 is determined, and if there is prize detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the acquired ball number is transmitted to the payout control device 111. As shown in FIG. 15, the prize ball command is composed of 15 types of 2-byte commands of FE01H to F00FH, and by this external output processing, a total of 2 bytes are continuously transmitted one by one via the connectors 207 and 217. The byte is transmitted (output) to the payout control device 111. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop symbol command, a stop command, an effect time addition command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted via the connectors 208 and 228. It is transmitted (output) to the sound lamp control device 113. Furthermore, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted (output) to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when their counter value reaches the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and the second process are performed. A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). The details of the fluctuation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the fluctuation process, a large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 in the case of the big hit state is executed (S205). In other words, the specific winning opening 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. When any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “○” or “X”) by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S206). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained at the timing of passing, and the second symbol display device 82 Of the second symbol is displayed on the display unit 83. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol hits, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the above-described processes from S201 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S208: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 is repeatedly executed (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the change type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when their counter value reaches the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Here, the execution time of each processing of S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, so the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 can also be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S207, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 23 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S211 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power shutdown notification command indicating that the power has been shut down is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). The message is transmitted (S212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the processing of S207 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206 or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. It can be started from the processing of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201, similarly to the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S101). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S201. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the fluctuation processing (S204) will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. In the fluctuation processing, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is currently underway (S301). The term “big hit” includes the middle of the big hit game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of the big hit and the middle of the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is being hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), it is determined whether or not the number N of operation pending balls is larger than 0 (S303). If the number N of operation-reserved balls is 0 (S303: No), the present process is terminated as it is. If the number of active balls N> 0 (S303: Yes), the number N of active balls is subtracted by 1 (S304), and the data stored in the reserved ball storage area is shifted (S305). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side, and includes a first reserved area → an execution area, a second reserved area → The data in each area is shifted in the order of the first reserved area, the third reserved area → the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area → the third reserved area, and so on. After the data shift processing, a fluctuation start processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the changing time has elapsed (S307). The display time during the fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the fluctuation type counter CS3. If it has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308). In the present embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation is started, the red LED is turned off. Turns off and turns on the green LED.If the green LED is turned on, turns off the green LED and turns on the blue LED.If the blue LED is turned on, turns on the blue LED. A display mode for turning off the red LED and turning on the red LED is set. Note that the fluctuation process is executed every 4 ms, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed for each fluctuation process, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, in order to make the player confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED, the variation process counts a counter (not shown) by 1 each time the execution is performed, and when the counter reaches 100, the lighting of the LED is performed. The color is changed, and the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset (cleared to 0) when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuating time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S309). The setting of the stop symbol is determined as to whether or not a large hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. It is determined whether the symbol is in the low probability state. In the present embodiment, the red LED is turned on when the high probability state is reached after the jackpot, the green LED is turned on when the low probability state is set, and the blue LED is turned on when the state is off. . The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stopped symbol is set in the process of S309, the fluctuation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. A command is set (S310). When receiving the stop command, the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to stop. The variation of the third symbol display device 81 stops after the variation time elapses, and the variation effect of 1 in the third symbol display device 81 ends by receiving the stop command.

  Next, the change start process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the change start process (S306), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit has occurred based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S401). Whether or not a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the first hit random number counter value and the mode at that time. As described above, “373, 727” is the hit value among the numerical values 0 to 738 of the first random number counter C1 at the time of normal low probability, and “59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367” at the time of high probability. , 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733 "are the winning values.

  If it is determined that the hit is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is confirmed, and the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S402). ). In the processing of S402, whether to shift to the high probability state or the low probability state after the big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2. When the transition state after the big hit is set, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the stop symbol of the jackpot of the third symbol display device 81 is set by the display control device 114. That is, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 can be set by setting the transition state after the big hit in the process of S402. Note that among the numerical values 0 to 4 of the first hit type counter C2, if the value is "0, 4", the state shifts to the low probability state, and if the value is "1, 2, 3", the state shifts to the high probability state.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S403). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S403, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol is determined. You. At this time, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are checked, and rough symbol variations such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. The fluctuation time is determined, and the fluctuation time (in other words, the number of fluctuation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol Z2) stops after the occurrence of the reach based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. decide.

  Note that the relationship between the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation time and the relationship between the value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are defined in advance by a table or the like. However, the fluctuation time can be set using only the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, and can be set only by the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Whether to perform the setting or to set both values of both the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is appropriately determined in accordance with the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game condition each time.

  If it is determined in the processing of S401 that the hit is not a big hit (S401: No), a display mode at the time of departure is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. The effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / rear out, or complete out of reach. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of the value corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 depends on whether the state is the high probability state, the low probability state, and the number of operation suspensions N. The tables are set differently.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined (S405), the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the departure symbol. Is determined. At this time, as in the process of S403, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are checked, and based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are performed. And the like, and the fluctuation time until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol Z2) stops after the occurrence of the reach based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. (For example, the number of fluctuating symbols).

  When the processing of S403 or the processing of S405 is completed, an effect time to be added to or subtracted from the fluctuation time determined by the first and second type counters CS1 and CS2 is determined (S406). At this time, the addition or subtraction of the rendering time is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display is performed. The fluctuation time of the device 81 is set. In the present embodiment, the determination of the effect time addition / subtraction is determined according to the value of the third variation type counter CS3, when the variation display time is not changed, when the variation display time is added by 1 second, and when the variation display time is added by 2 seconds. In the case of adding seconds, four types of added values are determined, in which the variable display time is subtracted by 1 second.

  In the case where the variable display time is added or subtracted, a notice effect in which the expected value of the jackpot is increased in the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a slip effect in which the variable symbol is made longer than usual and the slip is accompanied by a slip effect, or the like) An effect of displaying an advance notice character, an effect of shortening the fluctuation time of a fluctuating symbol shorter than usual, and immediately stopping, and the like are performed. When the value of the first random number counter C1 is a big hit, the probability that the added value of 2 seconds is selected is set to be high, so that the player can expect the big hit by confirming the announcement effect. Can be.

  Next, a variation pattern command is set in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the process of S403 or S405 (S407), and a stop symbol command is set in accordance with the stop symbol set in the process of S402 or S404. (S408). Then, an effect time addition command is set according to the effect time addition value determined in the process of S406 (S409), and the process returns to the fluctuation process.

  Next, payout control executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a start-up process of the payout control device 111. This start-up process is executed when the power is turned on. First, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, RAM access is permitted (S802), and an external interrupt vector is set (S803).

  After that, a data backup process is performed on the RAM 213 in the MPU 211. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 (S804). If it is not stored (S804: No), the backup data is not stored, so the process proceeds to S811. Transition. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 (S804: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S805). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S805: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S811 in such a case. As described later in the process of S917 in FIG. 25, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 213. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 213 is correctly stored.

  In the initialization processing of the RAM in S811, S812, all the areas of the RAM 213 are cleared to 0 (S811), and the initial value of the RAM 213 is set (S812). After that, initialization of peripheral devices of the MPU 211 is performed (S809), interruption is permitted (S810), and the process proceeds to the main processing.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is set (S804: Yes) and the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal (S806: Yes), the data backed up in the RAM 213 is held, In addition to clearing the power-off occurrence information (S807), the pay-out permission flag 213d is turned off in order to wait for the payout of payout balls (S808). After that, initialization of peripheral devices of the MPU 211 is performed (S809), interruption is permitted (S810), and the process proceeds to the main processing.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to a flowchart of FIG. The main process first receives a prize ball command, a payout return command, and a payout initialization command from the main control device 110, and performs a command determination process for determining the type of the command (S901). Although the details of the command determination process will be described later, in this process, when a normal command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the payout permission flag 213d is turned on, and the payout of the prize ball or the loaned ball is permitted.

  That is, after execution of the command determination process (S901), the state of the payout permission flag 213d is determined (S902), and if the payout permission flag 213d is not turned on (S902: No), the main control device 110 is still in a started state. In such a case, the command determination process (S901) is repeatedly executed until the payout permission flag 213d is turned on in the command determination process (S901). On the other hand, in the process of S902, if the payout permission flag 213d is turned on (S902: Yes), the main control device 110 has already been started up. When it is determined that the return operation is started, the state return operation is performed (S903).

  After that, the setting of the lower plate full state or the lower plate full release state is executed according to the change of the state of the lower plate 50 (S904). That is, the full state of the lower plate 50 is determined by the detection signal of the lower plate full switch, and when the lower plate is full, the setting of the lower plate full state is executed. Then, the lower plate full state release state is set. In addition, the setting of the tank ball absence state or the tank ball absence release state is executed according to the change of the state of the tank ball (S905). That is, the tank ball absence switch is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball absence switch, and when the tank ball has become empty, the setting of the tank ball absence state is executed. Execute the settings. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is a notification state, and if there is a notification state, the notification is made by the 7-segment LED 121 provided in the payout control device 111 (S906). The state notification process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a prize ball payout process is executed by each process of S907 to S909. That is, if the prize ball is not in the payout disabled state and the value of the total prize ball number memory 213a that stores the number of prize balls is not 0 (S907: No, S908: No), the prize ball is paid out. The ball control process is started (S909). On the other hand, if the prize ball cannot be paid out (S907: Yes) or the value of the total prize ball number memory 213a is 0 (S908: Yes), the process shifts to the ball lending payout process.

  In the ball lending payout processing from S910 to S912, if the ball lending is not in the ball lending impossible state and a ball lending payout request is received from the card unit (S910: No, S911: Yes), the ball lending is paid out. To start the ball lending control process. On the other hand, if the rental ball cannot be paid out (S910: Yes) or if the rental ball payout request has not been received (S911: No), the process proceeds to S913. Also, after the ball lending control process (S912) ends, the process similarly shifts to S913.

  In the processing of S913, control of the vibrator 134 (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged (S913). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 (S914). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored (S914: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. Since no output has been made and the power has not been cut off, in such a case, the processing shifts to S901, and the main processing from S901 to S913 is repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S914, if the power-off occurrence information is stored (S914: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. 23 has been executed. Therefore, in such a case, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S915), and the command determination process is executed again in order to prevent the omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110 (S916). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the RAM 213 (S917), access to the RAM 213 is prohibited (S918), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed. Here, for example, the RAM determination value is a checksum value in the stack area and the work area of the RAM 213 to be backed up.

  In the processing of S914, the power-off occurrence information is checked at the end of one cycle of the main processing of the payout control device 111. Therefore, when returning from the state before the power-off, the processing is started. After the end of the processing, the processing can be started from the processing of S901. That is, the main process can be started in a manner similar to the case where the main process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 211 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not changed in the initialization process (S801). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S901. Therefore, the control load of the payout control device 111 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the payout control device 111 to malfunction or run away. Further, since the power-off process is executed at the timing when each process is completed, the amount of information to be backed up in the RAM 213 can be reduced.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed in the main process of the payout control device 111. The command determination process determines whether the received command is a normal command, and if the command is a normal command, executes a process corresponding to the command.

  First, it is checked whether or not there is a new received command (S1001). If there is no new received command (S1001: No), this process ends. If there is a new received command (S1001: Yes), it is determined whether the received command is the first byte data or the second byte data (S1002). As described above with reference to FIG. 15, if the most significant bit is set, it is the first byte data (S1002: Yes). Is checked (S1003).

  When two bytes of the command are received, the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is cleared to 0. Therefore, the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is 0 when the data of the first byte is received normally. Therefore, if the value of the higher-order command storage buffer 213b is not 0 (S1003: No), since some abnormality has occurred, the payout error flag 213c is turned on (S1004), and the process proceeds to S1005. On the other hand, if the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is 0 (S1003: Yes), the process skips S1004 and shifts the process to S1005. In the processing of S1005, the received first byte data is written to the upper command storage buffer 213b and stored (S1005).

  In the process of S1002, if the received command is not the first byte data but the second byte data (S1002: No), the second byte data of the received command and the upper command storage in the process of S1005 The value stored in the buffer 213b, that is, the data of the first byte is added (S1006). If the result of the addition is FFH (S1007: Yes), since the received command is normal, it is checked whether the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is F0H or more (S1008).

  As shown in FIG. 15, if the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is equal to or greater than F0H (S1008: Yes), the received command is a prize ball command. In such a case, a prize ball payout number setting process is executed. (S1009). On the other hand, if the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is not equal to or greater than F0H (S1008: No), the received command is the payout return command or the payout initialization command, and in such a case, the state setting process is executed ( S1010). After execution of the prize ball payout number setting process or the status setting process, the process proceeds to S1001 and the above-described process is repeated. The prize ball payout number setting processing or the state setting processing will be described later.

  In the process of S1007, if the result of the addition of the first byte data and the second byte data is not FFH (S1007: No), some abnormality has occurred. Therefore, in such a case, the pay-out error flag 213c is turned on (S1011) to indicate the occurrence of a command error, and the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is cleared to 0 (S1012), and the received 2-byte command is deleted. Disable. This can prevent malfunction of the payout control device 111 due to reception of an abnormal command. After the processing in S1012, the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processing is repeated.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the prize ball payout number setting process (S1009) executed in the command determination process. In the prize ball payout number setting process, the value of the total prize ball number memory 213a is updated according to the received prize ball command.

  First, it is checked whether the number of winning balls of the received winning ball command is 1 or more and 15 or less (S1101). If not (S1101: No), an incorrect winning ball command is received (FIG. 15). reference). Therefore, in such a case, the received command is invalidated, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the number of award balls in the received award ball command is 1 or more and 15 or less (S1101: Yes), the number of award balls indicated by the award ball command is added to the total award ball number memory 213a (S1102). The added number of winning balls are paid out by the above-described winning ball control process (S909). After that, the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is cleared to 0 (S1103), and the payout permission flag 213d is turned on (S1104) to prepare for the reception of the next command, and the payout of the prize balls is permitted. Further, the pay-out error flag 213c is turned off (S1105), and this processing ends.

  As described above, since the payout error flag 213c is turned off by receiving a normal command, even when an abnormal command is temporarily input due to the influence of noise or the like, the normal command is input. By releasing the notification of the command error, the game can be continued normally.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a state setting process (S1010) executed in the command determination process. In the state setting processing, processing corresponding to the payout return command or the payout initialization command is executed.

  If the received command is the payout return command (S1201: Yes), the process proceeds to S1206. Then, the payout permission flag 213d is turned on (S1206), the payout of the prize ball is permitted, the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is cleared to 0 (S1207), and a payout error is prepared in preparation for receiving the next command. The flag 213c is turned off (S1208), and this process ends.

  If the received command is the payout initialization command (S1201: No, S1202: Yes), the state of the payout permission flag 213d is checked (S1203). If the payout permission flag 213d is off (S1203: No), the payout initialization command is normally received. In such a case, the work area of the RAM 213 is cleared to 0 (S1204), and the work area is initialized. The initial value of the time is set (S1205), and the work area of the RAM 213 is initialized.

  Thereafter, as in the case of receiving the payout return command, the payout permission flag 213d is turned on (S1206), the payout of the prize balls is permitted, the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is cleared to 0 (S1207), In addition, in preparation for the reception of this command, the payout error flag 213c is turned off (S1208), and this processing ends.

  Even if the received command is the payout initialization command (S1201: No, S1202: Yes), if the payout permission flag 213d is turned on (S1203: Yes), any of the normal commands shown in FIG. Upon receiving the command, the payout control of the prize balls is enabled. Therefore, in such a case, in order to avoid initialization of the work area of the RAM 213, the processing from S1204 to S1206 is skipped, and the processing shifts to S1207. Thereafter, the value of the upper command storage buffer 213b is cleared to 0 (S1207), the payout error flag 213c is turned off in preparation for the reception of the next command (S1208), and this processing ends.

  If the received command is neither a payout return command (S1201: No) nor a payout initialization command (S1202: No), an incorrect prize ball command is received (see FIG. 15). , The received command is invalidated, and this processing ends.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the state notification process (S906) executed in the main process. In the state notification process, first, the state of the payout error flag 213c is confirmed (S1301), and if it is on (S1301: Yes), the character "C" is displayed on the 7-segment LED 121 to indicate that a command error has occurred. A notification is issued (S1302). On the other hand, when the payout error flag 213c is not turned on (S1302: No), or after the process of S1302, other states of the payout control device 111, such as the full state of the lower plate 50 and the storage state of the ball of the tank, etc. Is notified (S1303), and this process ends.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 based on the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51. Changes. The DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301, and the divided DC voltage is input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303. When the DC voltage output from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 is input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 outputs the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301. And the DC voltage output by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjusting unit 302 is added. Then, based on the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit 303, the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 is controlled by the voltage supply unit 304.

  Here, as shown in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, in the conventional ball launching apparatus, when adjusting the launching strength of the ball hit by the solenoid, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are turned. The firing intensity is adjusted by mechanically moving the solenoid up and down and back and forth. Therefore, when the player or the like causes an impact on the gaming machine or when the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are loosened due to a change with time, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are out of adjustment. Occurs. Therefore, there has been a problem that a predetermined firing intensity corresponding to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle is not generated due to a shift of the position where the mallet of the solenoid collides with the ball.

  On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 is changed by the variable resistor of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302. By the adjustment by VR3, the DC voltage divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 is generated from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 to the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302. The DC voltage obtained by adding the obtained DC voltages is output. Therefore, by adjusting the DC voltage input to the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 by the variable resistor VR3, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 (the game width) at which the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area becomes When the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the ball is fired into the area is in the range of 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, the ball is added to the game area without changing the range width (18 degrees). It is possible to change the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 at which the firing intensity is applied. For example, when the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the shooting intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is in the range of 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, the center value 75 degrees of the range is added by the variable resistor VR3. By adjusting the DC voltage input to the operational amplifier OP2 of the circuit unit 303, the center value is set to 66 degrees, and the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51, which is a firing intensity at which a ball is driven into the game area, is 57 degrees or more and 75 degrees. The following range can be set.

  Therefore, as described above, by adjusting the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, the operation handle It is possible to adjust the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 to be the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area so as to include, for example, 65 degrees, which is the target value of the amount of rotation of the 51.

  Further, by dividing the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 by the variable resistor VR2, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51. Of the divided voltage (the difference between the minimum DC voltage value generated in the variable resistor VR2 and the maximum DC voltage value), and the fluctuation width of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (to the variable resistor VR1). (The difference between the minimum DC voltage value and the maximum DC voltage value). That is, the gradient of the divided voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 (a straight line connecting the minimum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 and the maximum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 (the signal SB1 in FIG. 9) ) Changes the gradient of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (the minimum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 and the maximum of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1) in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. It can be made smaller than a straight line connecting the values (the slope of the signal SA1 in FIG. 9).

  Here, the divided voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 becomes a voltage input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303, and thus a fluctuation width (gradient) of the voltage input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303. Can be reduced, and the fluctuation range of the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 (the gradient of the signal SC1 in FIG. 9) can be reduced. Then, as the fluctuation width (slope) of the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the adding circuit unit 303 decreases, the fluctuation width (slope) of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 also decreases. . Since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 for hitting a ball into the game area is within a certain range (for example, 17.5 volts to 21.0 volts (see FIG. 11)), the voltage applied to the firing solenoid 142 By reducing the fluctuation range (inclination) of E1, it is possible to widen the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area (for example, the firing intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area is obtained). The rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the range width of 18 degrees can be set in the range of 23 degrees or more and 77 degrees or less, and the range width can be expanded to 54 degrees (see FIG. 11). )). Therefore, the range of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 can be adjusted so as to include the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, for example, 65 degrees.

  The voltage divided by the variable resistor VR2 is smaller than the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. However, the reduced voltage can be compensated for by the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303. As a result, even if the range of variation in the firing intensity of the sphere is reduced by the variable resistor VR2, the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is increased by the variable resistor VR3, thereby turning the operation handle 51. The firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 with respect to the operation amount can be the firing intensity for driving the ball into the game area.

  In addition, the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the shooting intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area can be changed to have a wide range width. That is, it is possible to widen the range of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area. Therefore, the firing intensity for hitting a ball into the game area can be finely adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.

  Here, as shown in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, in the conventional ball launching device, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are turned to mechanically move the solenoid up and down, back and forth. Since the emission intensity is adjusted, the accuracy of the adjustment of the emission intensity depends on the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob. There was a problem that it was low.

  However, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the firing intensity of the sphere fired by the firing solenoid 142 is changed by the direct current input from the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303. The voltage and the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 are adjusted. In general, the DC voltage has a property that it is easy to finely and accurately adjust and is resistant to change over time (it is hard to get out of order). Alternatively, the range width can be finely and accurately adjusted, and the adjustment can be made strong against change over time (to prevent deviation).

  Further, since the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 includes the variable resistor VR2, the DC voltage input from the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, the DC voltage input from the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 may change from the initially set value due to the aging of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 or the like. In this case, when the DC voltage input from the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 changes, the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 to the voltage supply unit 304 also changes. I do. Then, since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 also changes, the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area changes from the initially set range. . Further, there is a case where the range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area becomes smaller than the range width initially set.

  In these cases, the voltage value input from the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 is changed (finely adjusted) by the variable resistor VR2, so that the voltage supplied from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 to the voltage supply unit The output voltage output to 304 can be changed (finely adjusted). Thus, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, it is possible to change (fine-adjust) the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 or the range width thereof, which is the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area, to the initially set range or the initially set range width. it can.

  Further, the voltage value input from the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 is changed using the variable resistor VR2. Generally, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the range of the turning amount of the operation handle 51 or the range width of the turning amount of the operation handle 51 which can be the firing strength at which the ball is hit into the game area can be finely adjusted by using the inexpensive variable resistor VR2 having a simple configuration.

  Further, since the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 includes the variable resistor VR3, the DC voltage input from the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 can be changed (finely adjusted). The DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is the same as the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303. It is only added by the addition circuit unit 303. Therefore, the fluctuation width of the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 is the same as the fluctuation width of the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303. However, only the voltage value of the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 can be changed (finely adjusted). The firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 is determined based on the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 to the voltage supply unit 304. Therefore, by changing (fine-adjusting) the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, the operation handle 51 having the firing intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area is provided. Can be finely adjusted without changing the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 (for example, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 that has the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area). The range from 66 degrees to 84 degrees can be changed to a range from 57 degrees to 75 degrees (see FIG. 10). Therefore, when the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 deteriorates due to, for example, aging, and the ball cannot be driven into the game area unless the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is set to be larger than the initially set range. However, by changing (fine-adjusting) the DC voltage input from the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 with the variable resistor VR3, the operation handle 51 having the firing intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area can be obtained. Can be finely adjusted to the initially set range.

  Further, by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, the DC voltage input to the resistance R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 can be changed (finely adjusted). As a result, the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 to the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, in general, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 or the range width thereof can be finely adjusted by using the simple configuration and the inexpensive variable resistor VR3 so that the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area can be obtained.

  Further, since the voltage applied to the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 is kept constant by the Zener diode D1, it is assumed that the voltage value of the DC voltage supplied to the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 by the DC power supply DC2 fluctuates. Also, the DC voltage applied to the variable resistor VR3 has a stable constant value. Therefore, the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 can be stabilized. As a result, the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 to the voltage supply unit 304 can also be stabilized, and the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be stabilized. Accordingly, it is possible to stabilize the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area.

  Further, the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is stabilized by the Zener diode D1. In general, a Zener diode has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a constant voltage circuit or the like composed of a complicated circuit. Therefore, the voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistance R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is stabilized by using a simple configuration and an inexpensive zener diode D1, and the ball is driven into the game area. It is possible to stabilize the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 that becomes the emission intensity.

  Lastly, as in the present embodiment, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the game board 13 is made larger than the conventional pachinko machine, the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 tends to have a variation in the firing intensity. However, as described above, the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 adjusts the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area, and the variable resistance VR of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301. By adjusting the width of the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 to be the firing intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area by the device VR2, even if the game board 13 is enlarged, the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can play the game. The range and the range width of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 can be adjusted so as to be driven into the region. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the variation of the firing strength of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  Next, a pachinko machine according to a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment is obtained by changing the launch control device 112 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment to another launch control device 300. The launch control device 300 according to the second embodiment adds a handle monitoring unit 307, a voltage increasing unit 308, and a limiter unit 309 to the launch control device 112 according to the first embodiment, and performs the addition used in the first embodiment. The configuration is such that the voltage adjustment unit 302 is omitted. Further, instead of the DC-DC converter CV1 of the voltage supply unit 304 used in the first embodiment, a DC-DC converter CV2 having a different voltage boosting degree is used, and a functional block using the DC-DC converter CV2 is provided. The second voltage supply unit 310 is provided.

  According to the launch control device 300 of the second embodiment, in addition to being able to adjust the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area or the width of the range, the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 can be adjusted. Is larger than a prescribed value (105 degrees in the present embodiment), a right-hit ball can be reliably fired, and the firing intensity of the right-hit ball can be kept constant.

  FIG. 30 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the launch control device 300 according to the second embodiment. The same parts as those of the launch control device 112 of the first embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 8 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The handle monitoring unit 307 is a circuit that detects that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 has become larger than a specified value (105 degrees in the present embodiment). The comparator OP4 used as a comparator and the resistance value are fixed. , A variable shunt regulator Reg1 used as a reference voltage source, a capacitor CD3, and a DC power supply DC2 for supplying a DC voltage of 12 volts.

  A variable resistor VR1 of the operating handle 51 is connected to a minus input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4, and a DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to a turning operation amount of the operating handle 51 is: The signal is input to the negative input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the comparator OP4.

  On the other hand, one end of a resistor R8 is connected to a plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4, and a DC power supply DC2 for supplying a DC voltage of 12 volts is connected to the other end of the resistor R8. . One end of a resistor R9 is connected to a plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4, and one end of a resistor R10 is connected to the other end of the resistor R9. The other end of the resistor R10 is grounded. Further, the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 includes the cathode of the variable shunt regulator Reg1, the plus terminal that is one end of the capacitor CD3, and the plus input terminal (non-inverting input) of the operational amplifier OP6 of the limiter unit 309 described later. Terminals) are connected. Here, the anode of the variable shunt regulator Reg1 and the other end of the capacitor CD3 are grounded, and the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg1 is connected between the resistors R9 and R10. The capacitor CD3 is used to prevent oscillation of the variable shunt regulator Reg1.

  When a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC2 to the resistor R8, a DC voltage is supplied to the variable shunt regulator Reg1, and a reference voltage is generated from the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg1 (in the present embodiment). , About 2.45 volts). Generally, the reference voltage provided by the variable shunt regulator is highly accurate. Since this high-precision reference voltage is applied to the resistor R10 connected in parallel with the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg1, the other end of the resistor R9 is connected to one end of the resistor R10 and the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg1. Then, by connecting one end of the resistor R9 to the cathode of the variable shunt regulator Reg1, a highly accurate DC voltage is applied to the resistors R9 and R10 (about 3.85 volts in the present embodiment). The highly accurate DC voltage applied to the resistors R9 and R10 is input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4.

  Here, the reference voltage (about 2.45 volts in the present embodiment) applied to the resistor R10 is added to the value obtained by dividing the resistance value of the resistor R9 by the resistance value of the resistor R10. A DC voltage is obtained by adding a DC voltage having a value obtained as described above and a reference voltage (about 2.45 volts in the present embodiment) applied to the resistor R10 (about 3.85 in the present embodiment). bolt).

  In this way, a high-precision DC voltage (this voltage is applied to the resistors R9 and R10 formed using the reference voltage (about 2.45 volts in the present embodiment) of the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg1). In the embodiment, by inputting about 3.85 volts) to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4, the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 is compared. The reference voltage is used as the reference voltage, and the comparator OP4 functions as a comparator. In this embodiment, about 3.85 volts is used as the comparison reference voltage, and this comparison reference voltage is generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees. DC voltage.

  When the player rotates the operation handle 51 and a DC voltage (signal SA2) generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of the rotation operation is input to the minus input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4. The comparator OP4 compares the DC voltage input to the negative input terminal (inverted input terminal) with the comparative DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverted input terminal) of about 3.85 volts. The DC voltage input to the minus input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4, that is, the DC voltage (signal SA2) generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is the plus voltage of the comparator OP4. When the comparison DC voltage input to the input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) is about 3.85 volts or less (when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees or less), the output terminal of the comparator OP4 is high. It becomes an impedance state. On the other hand, the DC voltage input to the negative input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the comparator OP4, that is, the DC voltage (signal SA2) generated in the variable resistor VR1 in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is positively input. If the comparison DC voltage input to the terminal (non-inverting input terminal) is greater than about 3.85 volts (when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees), the output terminal of the comparator OP4 is at zero volts. State.

  The voltage raising unit 308 inputs a DC voltage to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303, and adds the voltage when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 becomes larger than a specified value (105 degrees in the present embodiment). This is a circuit that raises the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the circuit unit 303 to a predetermined value, and includes an operational amplifier OP5 functioning as a buffer amplifier, three resistors R11, R12, R13 having a fixed resistance value, and a reference. It comprises a variable shunt regulator Reg2 used as a voltage source, a capacitor CD4, and a DC power supply DC2 for supplying a DC voltage of 12 volts.

  One end of a resistor R11 is connected to a positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5, and a DC power supply DC2 for supplying a DC voltage of 12 volts is connected to the other end of the resistor R11. One end of a resistor R12 is connected to a plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5, and one end of a resistor R13 is connected to the other end of the resistor R12. The other end of the resistor R13 is connected to the output terminal of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitor 307. Further, the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5 is connected to the cathode of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 and the positive terminal which is one end of the capacitor CD4. Here, the anode of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 and the other end of the capacitor CD4 are grounded, and the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 is connected between the resistors R12 and R13. The capacitor CD4 is used to prevent oscillation of the variable shunt regulator Reg2. Further, the resistor R11 is a resistor for limiting the current supplied from the DC power supply DC2.

  The negative input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5 and the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5 are short-circuited, and are further connected to one end of the resistor R3 of the adder circuit 303.

  A DC power supply DC2 that supplies a DC voltage of 12 volts is connected to the resistor R11, and a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC2. Further, the DC voltage input to the minus input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307, that is, the DC voltage (signal SA2) generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of turning operation of the operating handle 51 ) Is less than or equal to about 3.85 volts, which is the comparison DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4, the output terminal of the comparator OP4 is in a high impedance state. Therefore, most of the reference voltage (about 2.45 volts in the present embodiment) generated at the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 is applied to the output terminal of the comparator OP4.

  Here, the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5 will be described. The DC voltage (signal SA2) generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is a comparison DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4, which is about 3. When the voltage is 85 volts or less, the output terminal of the comparator OP4 is in a high impedance state. Therefore, most of the reference voltage (about 2.45 volts in the present embodiment) generated at the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 is applied to the output terminal of the comparator OP4. Therefore, almost no voltage is applied to the resistors R12 and R13. Thus, the voltage at the cathode of the variable shunt regulator Reg2, that is, the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5 is substantially the same as the reference voltage output from the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg2. It is a voltage value (about 2.45 volts in the present embodiment). A voltage (about 2.45 volts in the present embodiment) substantially the same as the reference voltage output from the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 is input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5, Is approximately 1 and is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5, so that a DC voltage of about 2.45 volts is input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit 303.

  On the other hand, the DC voltage input to the minus input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4, that is, the DC voltage (signal SA2) generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is compared with the comparator OP4. Is greater than the comparison DC voltage (approximately 3.85 volts in the present embodiment) input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal), the output terminal of the comparator OP4 is in a state of zero volts. In this case, since the other end of the resistor R13 is grounded, when a DC voltage of 12 volts is supplied from the DC power supply DC2 to the resistor R11, the DC voltage is also supplied to the variable shunt regulator Reg2, and the variable shunt regulator is controlled. A reference voltage is generated from the Ref terminal of Reg2 (about 2.45 volts in the present embodiment). Since the reference voltage of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 is applied to the resistor R13 connected in parallel with the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg2, the other end of the resistor R12 is connected to one end of the resistor R13 and the Ref terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg2. By connecting one end of the resistor R12 to the cathode of the variable shunt regulator Reg2, a highly accurate DC voltage is applied to the resistors R12 and R13 (about 4.90 volts in the present embodiment).

  Therefore, the resistance R12 and the resistance R13 (at the cathode of the variable shunt regulator Reg2) have a value obtained by integrating the reference voltage applied to the resistance R13 to the value obtained by dividing the resistance value of the resistance R12 by the resistance value of the resistance R13. A DC voltage obtained by adding the DC voltage and the reference voltage applied to the resistor R13 is applied (about 4.90 volts in the present embodiment).

  The DC voltage of the cathode of the variable shunt regulator Reg2 (approximately 4.90 volts in the present embodiment) is input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP5, the amplification degree is almost 1, and the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5. , A DC voltage of about 4.90 volts is input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit 303.

  Thus, the DC voltage input to the minus input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307, that is, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of turning operation of the operating handle 51 When (the signal SA2) is equal to or lower than the comparison DC voltage (about 3.85 volts in the present embodiment) input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4, Is 105 degrees or less), the DC voltage input from the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage raising unit 308 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is approximately 2.45 volts. The DC voltage of about 2.45 volts is added by the addition circuit unit 303 to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301. Accordingly, the voltage divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 is smaller than the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51. The reduced voltage is divided by the voltage increasing unit 308. It can be supplemented by a DC voltage of about 2.45 volts input from the operational amplifier OP5 to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit 303.

  On the other hand, the DC voltage input to the minus input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307, that is, the DC voltage (signal SA2) generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of turning operation of the operating handle 51 ) Is greater than the comparison DC voltage (about 3.85 volts in the present embodiment) input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 (rotation of the operation handle 51). When the operation amount is larger than 105 degrees), the DC voltage input from the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage increasing unit 308 to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 is approximately 4.90 volts.

  The limiter unit 309 is a circuit that limits the voltage value so that the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 does not exceed about 3.85 volts. , A diode D4, and a DC power supply DC2 for supplying a DC voltage of 12 volts.

  The positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 is connected to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307, and as described above, the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of this comparator OP4. Since a DC voltage of about 3.85 volts is applied to the inverting input terminal by the variable shunt regulator Reg1, the DC voltage of about 3.85 volts is also applied to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6. Is applied.

  One end of a resistor R14 is connected to the negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6, and the other end of the resistor R14 is connected to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the buffer amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310. It is connected to the. This resistor R14 is used for the purpose of preventing overshoot of the DC voltage limited by the operational amplifier OP6. Further, a resistor R15 having a fixed resistance connected between the addition circuit unit 303 and the second voltage supply unit 310 is used for stabilizing the operation of the limiter unit 309 (for balance with the resistor R14). ing. Therefore, the emission control device 300 may be configured by deleting both the resistors R14 and R15.

  The output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6 is connected to the cathode of the diode D4, and the anode of the diode D4 is connected to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310. Note that one end of a power supply terminal of the operational amplifier OP6 is supplied with a DC voltage of 12 volts from the DC power supply DC2, and the other end of the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier OP6 is grounded.

  The voltage value of the DC voltage input to the negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6, that is, the voltage of the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 When the value is equal to or less than about 3.85 volts, which is the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 (when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than 105 degrees). In this case, a DC voltage of 12 volts is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6. However, even if a DC voltage of 12 volts is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6, the conduction of the diode D4 is cut off, so that the output DC voltage of 12 volts is entirely applied to the diode D4. Therefore, the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 changes to the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6. If the voltage value is equal to or less than 3.85 volts (when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than 105 degrees), the limiter unit 309 connects the positive input terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 ( The voltage value of the DC voltage input to the non-inverting input terminal is not limited.

  On the other hand, the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6, that is, the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 Is larger than about 3.85 volts, which is the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 (when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is less than 105 degrees). If it is larger, the voltage at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6 is about 3.85 volts, which is the same as the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6. Therefore, the diode D4 conducts, and the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 decreases. Therefore, the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 decreases. Then, when the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 becomes about 3.85 volts or less, the DC voltage of 12 volts from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6. The voltage is output, the conduction of the diode D4 is cut off, and the restriction of the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 is interrupted.

  In this way, the limiter unit 309 limits the voltage value of the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 so as not to exceed about 3.85 volts. are doing.

  The second voltage supply unit 310 is a circuit that supplies a voltage to the firing solenoid 142, and includes an operational amplifier OP3, a low-pass filter F1, a DC-DC converter CV2 that is a booster, and a DC power supply DC3 that supplies a 32-volt DC voltage. And a capacitor CD2. Note that the voltage supply unit 304 and the second voltage supply unit 310 of the first embodiment are different from each other in that the DC-DC converter CV1 is replaced with a DC-DC converter CV2, but the DC-DC converter CV1 and the DC-DC converter The only difference from CV2 is the degree of boosting of the voltage. Therefore, the operation of the voltage supply unit 304 and the operation of the second voltage supply unit 310 in the first embodiment are the same, and a detailed description of the second voltage supply unit 310 is omitted.

  Next, the operation of the launch control device 300 of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 30 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a voltage change of each signal of the launch control device 300 of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 30. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing voltage fluctuations of the launch control device 300 of the second embodiment shown in FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (a change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) when the variable resistor VR2 of the adjustment unit 301 is changed.

  First, the operation of the launch control device 300 of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 30 will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 31, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the voltage of each signal. The rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is set from a minimum value of zero degrees to a maximum value of 120 degrees, and the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by the rotation operation of the operation handle 51, that is, When the signal SA2 is input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 in the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, a signal having an amplification degree of approximately 1 is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 (see FIG. 30). When the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is zero degree, the DC voltage value of the signal SA2 is about 0.7 volt, and when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 120 degrees which is the maximum value, The DC voltage value of SA2 is about 4.3 volts.

  Next, the signal output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP1 is divided by the variable resistor VR2, and the divided DC voltage signal SB2 is input to the resistor R2 of the adder circuit 303 (FIG. 30). When the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is zero degrees, the DC voltage value of the signal SB2 is about 0.20 volt, and when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 120 degrees which is the maximum value, The DC voltage value of SB2 is about 1.15 volts.

  On the other hand, the DC voltage (signal SC2) generated at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage increasing unit 308 is input to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 (see FIG. 30). As described above with reference to FIG. 30, the signal SC2 which is a DC voltage generated at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage increasing unit 308 is a DC voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51. , Ie, when the voltage value of the signal SA2 is about 3.85 volts or less (when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is from zero degrees to 105 degrees or less), it becomes about 2.45 volts and the signal becomes When the voltage value of SA2 is greater than about 3.85 volts (when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees and up to 120 degrees), the voltage is about 4.90 volts.

  The signal SB2 input to the resistor R2 of the adder circuit 303 and the signal SC2 input to the resistor R3 of the adder circuit 303 are added (added) by the operational amplifier OP2 and output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2. The voltage is input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 via the resistor R15 (see FIG. 30). Here, the DC voltage value input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 is limited by the limiter circuit 309 so as not to exceed about 3.85 volts. .

  The signal input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3, which is the buffer amplifier of the second voltage supply unit 310, is output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 with an amplification of about 1. The signal output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 is subjected to a low-pass filter F1 to remove noise components (high-frequency components), and output as a signal SD2 from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 (see FIG. 30). When the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is zero degree, the DC voltage value of the signal SD2 is added to about 0.20 volts of the DC voltage value of the signal SB2 input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit 303. It is approximately 2.67 volts, which is a sum of approximately 2.45 volts of the DC voltage value of the signal SC2 input to the resistor R3 of the circuit unit 303, and when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is 120 degrees. , The DC voltage value of the signal SD2 is about 3.85 volts (the DC voltage value of the signal SB2 input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit section 303 is about 1.00 volts, and the resistance R3 of the addition circuit section 303 is The DC voltage obtained by adding the DC voltage value of the signal SC2 input to the DC power supply to about 4.90 volts is about 5.90 volts, and the limiter section 309 outputs the signal which is the DC voltage output from the addition circuit section 303. S The voltage value of 2 is limited so as not to exceed about 3.85 volts).

  The signal SD2 output from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 is input to the input terminal of the DC-DC converter CV2. DC voltage Ec).

  Next, referring to FIG. 32, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 of the firing control device 300 of the second embodiment shown in FIG. The change in the maximum value (change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) will be described.

  In FIG. 32, the operation of the firing control device 300 of the second embodiment and the change of the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 is changed are shown. For the sake of clarity, the case where the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to obtain a signal SB2 (FIG. 32A), and FIG. 10B Similarly to the above, the voltage input to the variable resistor VR2 is not divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 (the signal SA2 is used as it is as the signal SB2), and the voltage increasing unit 308 sends the signal to the adding circuit unit 303. (FIG. 32 (b)) when no DC voltage is input to the resistor R3.

  In FIG. 32, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2). As shown in FIG. 32B, the voltage input to the variable resistor VR2 is not divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301, and the voltage is increased from the voltage increasing unit 308 to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303. When the input DC voltage is not generated, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is about 4.5 when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degrees to 120 degrees. It varies from volts to about 28.5 volts. Further, the range of the ball to be fouled is such that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is from zero to less than 66 degrees, and the range of the ball to be right-handed is that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 84 degrees to 120 degrees. I have. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into the game area in which the winning opening and the like are provided is not less than 66 degrees and not more than 84 degrees, and the target value of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is set. Is not included in the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 (not less than 66 degrees and not more than 84 degrees). Furthermore, the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area, which originally requires fine adjustment of the launching intensity of the ball, is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less. The width is 18 degrees. The foul ball is a launch rail 143 (see FIG. 5) that does not reach the launch port 68a where the return ball preventing member 68 (see FIG. 2) is located because the launching force (firing strength) of the launch solenoid 142 is weak. It means a ball returning to the side. A right-hit ball is a ball that has a strong launching force (firing strength) of the firing solenoid 142, moves along the rail 62 after being launched from the launch port 68a, and directly hits the return rubber 69 (see FIG. 2). Means

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32A, when the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 into a signal SB2, the signal SB2 is applied to the firing solenoid 142. The maximum value of the voltage E1 varies from about 17.1 volts to about 25.0 volts. In this case, the range of the ball to be fouled is from zero degrees to less than 19 degrees of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51, and the range to be the right-handed ball is the range of the turning operations of the operation handle 51 from 105 degrees to 120 degrees. ing. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is provided is 19 degrees or more and 105 degrees or less. Therefore, when the voltage input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to obtain the signal SB2, 65 degrees which is the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 65 degrees. Can be adjusted so that the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is included.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 into a signal SB2, the ball is placed in the game area. Is within a range of 19 degrees or more and 105 degrees or less, and the width of the range is 86 degrees.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 32 (a), compared with 18 degrees which is the range width of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, which is the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area in the case of FIG. 32 (b). In the case of, the range width of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 at which the shooting intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is increased by 68 degrees. Therefore, the voltage input to the variable resistor VR2 is not divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, and the DC voltage input from the voltage increasing unit 308 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is not generated. Compared to the case (see FIG. 32 (b)), when the signal input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to obtain a signal SB2 (FIG. 32 (a) )), Since the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area is widened, the firing intensity of the ball for driving the ball into the game area can be finely adjusted.

  Further, when the voltage input to the variable resistor VR2 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to obtain a signal SB2 (FIG. 32A), the range of the right-hit ball is manipulated. The amount of turning operation of the handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees and up to 120 degrees. At this time, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is set to a voltage that can reliably fire a right-hit ball. The voltage is raised to a value of about 25.0 volts by the voltage raising unit 308, and the voltage value is set to a constant value by the limiter unit 309. Therefore, when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, a right-hit ball can be reliably fired. When the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the limiter unit 309 even if the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is increased more than necessary. Is constant at about 25.0 volts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 from becoming an overvoltage, so that the deterioration of the firing solenoid 142 can be reduced. In addition, since the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 can be prevented from being an overvoltage, it is possible to prevent damage to the return rubber 69 and the like hitting a ball fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is changed by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 based on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Change. Then, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 that changes according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, and the divided DC voltage is added to the addition circuit unit 303. The DC voltage output from the voltage raising unit 308 is input to the resistor R2, and the DC voltage is input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303. Then, a voltage obtained by adding the DC voltage divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 and the DC voltage output by the voltage increasing unit 308 is output from the adding circuit unit 303. Then, based on the output voltage output from the addition circuit unit 303, the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 is controlled by the second voltage supply unit 310.

  By dividing the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 by the variable resistor VR2, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51. The fluctuation width of the applied voltage (the difference between the minimum DC voltage value generated in the variable resistor VR2 and the maximum DC voltage value) is generated in the fluctuation width of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (the variable resistor VR1). (The difference between the minimum DC voltage value and the maximum DC voltage value). That is, the gradient of the divided voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 (a straight line connecting the minimum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 and the maximum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 (the signal SB1 in FIG. 9) ) Changes the gradient of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (the minimum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 and the maximum of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1) in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. It can be made smaller than a straight line connecting the values (the slope of the signal SA1 in FIG. 9).

  Here, the divided voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 becomes a voltage input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303, and thus a fluctuation width (gradient) of the voltage input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303. Can be reduced, and the fluctuation range of the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 (the gradient of the signal SC1 in FIG. 9) can be reduced. Then, as the fluctuation width (slope) of the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the adding circuit unit 303 decreases, the fluctuation width (slope) of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 also decreases. . Since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 for hitting a ball into the game area is within a certain range (for example, 17.5 volts to 21.0 volts (see FIG. 11)), the voltage applied to the firing solenoid 142 By reducing the fluctuation range (inclination) of E1, it is possible to widen the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area (for example, the firing intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area is obtained). The rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the range width of 18 degrees can be set in the range of 23 degrees or more and 77 degrees or less, and the range width can be expanded to 54 degrees (see FIG. 11). )). Therefore, the range of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 can be adjusted so as to include the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, for example, 65 degrees.

  The voltage divided by the variable resistor VR2 is smaller than the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. However, the reduced voltage can be compensated for by the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303. As a result, even if the range of variation in the firing intensity of the sphere is reduced by the variable resistor VR2, the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is increased by the variable resistor VR3, thereby turning the operation handle 51. The firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 with respect to the operation amount can be the firing intensity for driving the ball into the game area.

  In addition, the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the shooting intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area can be changed to have a wide range width. That is, it is possible to widen the range of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area. Therefore, the firing intensity for hitting a ball into the game area can be finely adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.

  Furthermore, the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 is determined by the DC voltage input from the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 and the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage increasing unit 308. The adjustment is performed by the DC voltage input from the output terminal to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303. In general, the DC voltage has a property that it is easy to finely and accurately adjust and is resistant to change over time (it is hard to get out of order). Alternatively, the range width can be finely and accurately adjusted, and the adjustment can be made strong against change over time (to prevent deviation).

  Further, since the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 includes the variable resistor VR2, the DC voltage input from the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, the DC voltage input from the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 may change from the initially set value due to the aging of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 or the like. In this case, when the DC voltage input from the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 changes, the output voltage output from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 to the voltage supply unit 304 also changes. I do. Then, since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 also changes, the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area changes from the initially set range. . Further, there is a case where the range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area becomes smaller than the range width initially set.

  In these cases, the voltage value input from the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 is changed (finely adjusted) by the variable resistor VR2, so that the voltage supplied from the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 to the voltage supply unit The output voltage output to 304 can be changed (finely adjusted). Thus, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, it is possible to change (fine-adjust) the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 or the range width thereof, which is the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area, to the initially set range or the initially set range width. it can.

  Further, the voltage value input from the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 is changed using the variable resistor VR2. Here, in general, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the range of the turning amount of the operation handle 51 or the range width of the turning amount of the operation handle 51 which can be the firing strength at which the ball is hit into the game area can be finely adjusted by using the inexpensive variable resistor VR2 having a simple configuration.

  According to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 includes the DC voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 input to the negative input terminal (inverting input terminal) and the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal). 3.85 volts (a DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees), which is a comparison reference voltage input to the terminal. Then, when the handle monitor unit 307 detects that the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the voltage raising unit 308 changes the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 to about 2.45. Raise from bolts to about 4.90 volts. When the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 increases, the output voltage output from the addition circuit unit 303 also increases. Therefore, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the second voltage supply unit 310 Can be increased to about 25.0 volts, which is a voltage value that can reliably fire a right-hit ball. Therefore, when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be switched accurately and stably.

  In addition, the handle monitoring unit 307 detects the case where the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees by the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 and inputs the variable resistor to the minus input terminal (inverted input terminal). The DC voltage generated at VR1 and about 3.85 volts, which is a comparison reference voltage input to a plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) (when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees, This is performed by comparing with a DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1). Generally, a DC voltage is accurate and has a property of being resistant to change with time (it is unlikely to be out of order). Therefore, the handle monitoring unit 307 can accurately detect a case where the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is greater than 105 degrees, and can make the detection more resistant to change over time (harder to change).

  The comparison reference voltage of about 3.85 volts input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 is connected in parallel to the variable shunt regulator Reg1 and the variable shunt regulator Reg1. A constant voltage value is obtained by a circuit including resistors R9 and R10 and a capacitor CD3 connected in parallel to the variable shunt regulator Reg1. Accordingly, the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 outputs the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by the turning operation of the operation handle 51 input to the minus input terminal (inverted input terminal) to the plus input terminal (non-inverted input terminal). About 3.85 volts (DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees), which is a comparison reference voltage input to the terminal). Accurate and stable. Therefore, the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 determines that the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is larger than the comparison reference voltage of about 3.85 volts, that is, the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees. The case can be accurately and stably detected. Here, a circuit generally configured by a variable shunt regulator has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a constant voltage circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, a circuit composed of the variable shunt regulator Reg1, which is simple and inexpensive, the resistors R9 and R10 connected in parallel to the variable shunt regulator Reg1, and the capacitor CD3 connected in parallel to the variable shunt regulator Reg1 is provided. By using this, it is possible to accurately and stably detect when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 performed by the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 is larger than 105 degrees.

  When the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the voltage booster 308 reduces the DC voltage input from the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage booster 308 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit 303 by about 2. Accurate and stable switching from 45 volts to about 4.90 volts. Accordingly, the DC voltage output from the addition circuit unit 303 and input to the second voltage supply unit 310 can also be accurately and stably switched. Therefore, when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be accurately and stably switched.

  When the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the DC voltage input from the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage booster 308 to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit 303 is changed from about 2.45 volts to about 4.90. Switch to bolts. Here, when the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 becomes approximately 4.90 volts, the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 is transmitted from the firing solenoid 142 to the firing port 68a. It is set so that the ball fired via the rail moves along the rail 62 and reaches the return rubber 69. That is, when the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 becomes approximately 4.90 volts, the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 is the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142. Is set to be about 25.0 volts, which is a voltage value that can reliably fire a right-hit ball. Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 to the game area can be reliably applied to the return rubber 69 along the rail 62, and the normal Game can be played reliably.

  The operational amplifier OP6 of the limiter unit 309 has an output terminal connected to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310, and the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) also has a resistor R14. Is connected to the minus terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the second voltage supply unit 310 via the. Then, about 3.85 volts, which is the comparison reference voltage, that is, the DC voltage of the cathode terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg1 of the handle monitoring unit 307 is input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6. . Here, the operational amplifier OP6 inputs the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 to a negative terminal (inverting input terminal), and inputs the DC voltage and the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6. The comparison reference voltage (about 3.85 volts) is compared. When the DC voltage input to the negative terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 becomes larger than about 3.85 volts, the limiter unit 309 controls the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310. Limiting is started to limit the DC voltage at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6 to approximately 3.85 volts. Therefore, the DC voltage (DC voltage input to the minus terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6) at which the limiter unit 309 starts limiting the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 and the limiter unit 309 The DC voltage (DC voltage at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6) that limits the voltage input to the two-voltage supply unit 310 has the same voltage value. Accordingly, the limiter unit 309 sets the DC voltage for starting the restriction of the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 and the DC voltage for restricting the voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 together by one. Can be determined by the DC voltage at the cathode terminal of the variable shunt regulator Reg1 (approximately 3.85 volts, which is the comparison reference voltage). Therefore, the limiter unit 309 uniformly sets and changes the DC voltage that starts limiting the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 and the DC voltage that limits the voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310. It can be carried out. The limiter unit 309 starts limiting the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 (the DC voltage input to the minus terminal (inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6). Both the DC voltage (DC voltage at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP6) that limits the voltage input to the two voltage supply unit 310 and the DC voltage at the cathode terminal of one variable shunt regulator Reg1 (approximately 3. 85 volts). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for a dedicated power supply required for the limiter unit 309 to limit the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310.

  Here, as shown in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, in the conventional ball launching device, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are misaligned, and the position where the mallet of the solenoid collides with the ball is determined. By shifting, the firing strength of the ball is weakened, and even when the operation amount of the operation handle is set to the maximum value, the ball is placed on the right end of the game area where the ball fired by the solenoid flows down, for example, a return rubber (see FIG. 2). There was a problem that it was not possible to hit, and it was not possible to play a normal game.

  On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, even if the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is increased more than necessary, , The DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 is limited to a constant value of about 3.85 volts. Here, when the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 is set to about 3.85 volts, the sphere fired from the firing solenoid 142 via the firing port 68a moves along the rail 62 and returns. The emission intensity reaches rubber 69. That is, when the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 is set to about 3.85 volts, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is a voltage that can reliably fire a right-hit ball. The value is set to be about 25.0 volts. Therefore, when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 to the game area is made a right-hit ball, and is reliably applied to the return rubber 69 along the rail 62. And a normal game can be played reliably. When the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the limiter unit 309 even if the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is increased more than necessary. Is constant at about 25.0 volts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 from becoming an overvoltage, and thus it is possible to prevent damage to the return rubber 69 and the like hitting a ball fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  Next, a pachinko machine according to a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine of the third embodiment is obtained by changing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area or the width of the range is determined by using a voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, an addition voltage adjustment unit 302, and an addition circuit unit 303 using an electronic circuit. However, in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment, the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 executes the range or the range width of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into the game area. The adjustment is performed by the startup process (see FIG. 35) and the firing control process (see FIG. 37).

  According to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area or the width of the range can be adjusted widely (see FIG. 44A). On the other hand, in some cases, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area or the width of the range can be adjusted to be narrow.

  FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. Note that the same parts as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above with reference to FIG.

  The A / D converter 501 is an analog-digital converter that converts a DC voltage (analog value) generated in the variable resistor VR1 into a digital value and outputs the converted digital value to the input / output port 205. The A / D converter 501 has an input terminal (analog input terminal) connected to the variable resistor VR1 built in the operation handle 51, and an output terminal (digital output terminal) connected to the input / output port 205.

  The A / D converter 502 is an analog-digital converter that converts a DC voltage (analog value) generated in the variable resistor VR2 into a digital value and outputs the converted digital value to the input / output port 205. The A / D converter 502 has an input terminal (analog input terminal) connected to the variable resistor VR2 provided on the operation knob 122a, and an output terminal (digital output terminal) connected to the input / output port 205.

  The A / D converter 503 is an analog-digital converter that converts a DC voltage (analog value) generated in the variable resistor VR3 into a digital value and outputs the converted digital value to the input / output port 205. The A / D converter 503 has an input terminal (analog input terminal) connected to the variable resistor VR3 provided on the operation knob 122b, and an output terminal (digital output terminal) connected to the input / output port 205.

  The operation handle 51 is an operation member for adjusting the firing strength of a ball hitting the front of the game board 13. The variable resistor VR1 built in the operation handle 51 is connected to the input / output port 205 via the A / D converter 501. Therefore, when the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 changes in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 of the player, a DC voltage corresponding to the change in the resistance value is generated in the variable resistor VR1, and the generated voltage is generated. The DC voltage (analog value) is input to the A / D converter 501. The input DC voltage is converted into a digital value by the A / D converter 501 and output to the input / output port 205. Thereby, the DC voltage generated in variable resistor VR1 is input to main controller 110 as a digital value.

  The operation knob 122a is an operation element for adjusting a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 input to the input / output port 205 by a positive real number. The operation knob 122a is provided with a variable resistor VR2 and a 5-volt DC power supply DC1. One end of the variable resistor VR2 is connected to a 5-volt DC power supply DC1, and the other end of the variable resistor VR2 is grounded. The variable resistor VR2 is connected to the input / output port 205 via the A / D converter 502. Therefore, when the operation knob 122a is operated, the resistance value of the variable resistor VR2 changes, and a DC voltage corresponding to the change in the resistance value is generated in the variable resistor VR2. When the DC voltage (analog value) generated in the variable resistor V2 is input to the A / D converter 502, the input DC voltage is converted into a digital value by the A / D converter 502, and the input / output port 205. As a result, the DC voltage generated in variable resistor VR2 is input to main controller 110 as a digital value.

  The operation knob 122b is an operation element for adjusting a DC voltage applied to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 input to the input / output port 205. The operation knob 122b is provided with a variable resistor VR3 and a 5-volt DC power supply DC1. One end of the variable resistor VR3 is connected to a 5-volt DC power supply DC1, and the other end of the variable resistor VR3 is grounded. The variable resistor VR3 is connected to the input / output port 205 via the A / D converter 503. Therefore, when the operation knob 122b is operated, the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3 changes, and a DC voltage corresponding to the change in the resistance value is generated in the variable resistor VR3. When the DC voltage (analog value) generated in the variable resistor V3 is input to the A / D converter 503, the input DC voltage is converted into a digital value by the A / D converter 503, and the input / output port 205. As a result, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 is input to the main controller 110 as a digital value.

  The signal conversion circuit 241 is incorporated in the launch control device 400. The signal conversion circuit 241 is provided on condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is off (not operated). Then, a firing permission signal SG3 is output to the input / output port 205. The firing permission signal SG3 input to the input / output port 205 is input to the main control device 110.

  The D / A converter 504 converts the emission applied voltage Eα (digital value) output from the input / output port 205 into an analog value, and outputs the converted analog value to the emission control device 400 as the emission applied voltage Eα. It is an analog converter. The D / A converter 504 has an input terminal (digital input terminal) connected to the input / output port 205 and an output terminal (analog output terminal) connected to the launch control device 400.

  When the firing permission signal SG3 is input to the main control device 110, the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 emits the firing applied voltage Eα (digital value), the firing control signal α, and the ball feed control signal β from the input / output port 205. Output to the control device 400 via the input / output port 205. The output firing applied voltage Eα (digital value) is converted by the D / A converter 504 into an analog firing applied voltage Eα, and by the converted firing applied voltage Eα and the firing control signal α, the firing solenoid 142 Fire a ball at the game area. In response to the output ball feed control signal β, the ball feed solenoid 154 places the ball in front of the cap 142b (see FIGS. 5B and 6B) that covers the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142. I do.

  The magnification determination table memory 202a is a memory that stores a magnification determination table that determines a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 input to the input / output port 205 by a positive real number. When the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the operation knob 122a is read by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, the MPU 201 corrects the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the DC voltage. Is determined by a magnification determination table.

  The offset voltage determination table memory 202b determines a DC voltage (hereinafter, referred to as “offset voltage”) to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 input to the input / output port 205 by a positive real number. It is a memory that stores an offset voltage determination table. When the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the operation knob 122b is read by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, the MPU 201 corrects the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 according to the DC voltage. The offset voltage to be added to the voltage multiplied by the real number is determined by the offset voltage determination table.

  The magnification memory 203a is a memory that stores, when the MPU 201 determines a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number, the determined magnification. When a DC voltage is generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the operation knob 122a, and the generated DC voltage is read by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the processing of S1401 of the start-up processing shown in FIG. In accordance with the obtained DC voltage, the MPU 201 determines a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number in the magnification determination table in the processing of S1402 of the startup processing. The determined magnification for multiplying the positive real number is stored in the magnification memory 203a.

  The offset voltage memory 203b is a memory that stores, when the MPU 201 determines an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number, the determined offset voltage. is there. When a DC voltage is generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the operation knob 122b, and the generated DC voltage is read into the main controller 110 in the processing of S1403 of the start-up processing shown in FIG. In accordance with the voltage, the MPU 201 determines an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number in the offset voltage determination table in the processing of S1404 of the startup processing. The determined offset voltage is stored in the offset voltage memory 203b.

  Next, the launch control device 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the launch control device 400. The firing control device 400 is obtained by changing the electrical configuration of the firing control device 112 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. The emission control device 400 omits the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, the added voltage adjustment unit 302, and the addition circuit unit 303 used in the emission control device 112, and adds a positive input terminal (non-input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the voltage supply unit 304. (Inverting input terminal) is connected to the input / output port 205. Further, the emission control device 400 has a configuration in which the signal conversion circuit 241 is built. In the description of FIG. 34, the same portions as those of the launch control device 112 of the first embodiment described above with reference to FIG.

  When the firing application voltage Eα is output from the input / output port 205 and the output firing application voltage Eα is input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the voltage supply unit 304, the firing application voltage Eα becomes , Are output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 with an amplification degree of almost 1. The voltage output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP3 has its noise component (high-frequency component) removed by the low-pass filter F1, and is output from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1.

  The voltage output from the output terminal of the low-pass filter F1 is input to the input terminal of the DC-DC converter CV1, is boosted, and becomes a DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2. Thus, the capacitor CD2 stores an electric charge determined by the product of the capacitance of the capacitor CD2 and the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2. The voltage E1 (maximum value Ec volts) is applied to the firing solenoid 142 in accordance with the electric charge stored in the capacitor CD2.

  Next, referring to FIG. 35, a process of determining a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated at variable resistor VR1 of operation handle 51 by a positive real number, and the voltage generated at variable resistor VR1 of operation handle 51. A process for determining an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying by a positive real number will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. The start-up processing shown in FIG. 35 occurs in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 between the processing of S112 and the processing of S113 of the start-up processing of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. Processing for determining a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated by the real resistor by a positive real number and processing for determining an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number (processing of S1401 to S1404) ) Is added. Therefore, the same portions as those in the start-up processing of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 17 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the start-up processing of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, after the initialization of the RAM 203 (S112) is performed, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the operation knob 122a is read (S1401), and the read variable resistor VR2 is read. Is determined from the magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a by using the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number. It is stored in the magnification memory 203a (S1402).

  As described above, the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 in the startup process (S1401), and multiplies the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Since the magnification to be performed is determined (S1402), there is no need to read the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 after the start-up processing of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment. Therefore, even after the start-up process, compared with a pachinko machine that reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2, a firing control process for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 (FIG. 36 described later) (The processing of S1501) can be reduced, and the firing control processing can be sped up.

  Further, the pachinko machine of the third embodiment reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 in the start-up process (S1401), and multiplies the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. (S1402), even if the operation knob 122a changes from the set position during the game and the resistance value of the variable resistor VR2 changes, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number. There is no change in magnification. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the operation strength of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 from changing due to the operation knob 122a changing from the set position during the game.

  Here, the magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the contents of the magnification determination table memory 202a. The magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a includes a ratio for multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number according to the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR2. It is a table for determination by the MPU 201.

  In the magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 in accordance with a change in the voltage generated from the variable resistor VR2 (from zero volt to 5 volts). The magnification for multiplying a given DC voltage by a positive real number is set from zero to 2.0.

  Therefore, if the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 read in the processing of S1401 of the startup processing shown in FIG. 35 is, for example, zero volts, the MPU 201 performs the operation of the operation handle in the processing of S1402 of the startup processing. The magnification for multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 at 51 by a positive real number is determined to be “zero”. When the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined to be “zero”, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by zero. You. That is, a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is zero volt.

  Further, if the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 read in the processing of S1401 of the startup processing is, for example, 5.0 volts, the MPU 201 performs the operation of the operation handle 51 in the processing of S1402 of the startup processing. Is determined to be "2.0" for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 incorporated therein by a positive real number. When the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined to be “2.0”, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 becomes 2 .0 times.

  Since the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 is set from zero volts to 5.0 volts, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is set to a positive value. If it exceeds 5.0 volts when multiplied by a real number, the MPU 201 sets the firing applied voltage Eα to 5.0 volts regardless of the positive multiplication factor determined in the processing of S1402 in the start-up processing shown in FIG. And output from the input / output port 205 to the launch control device 400.

  The description returns to the start-up process shown in FIG. After the processing in S1402, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the operation knob 122b is read (S1403), and the offset voltage determination table memory 202b is used by using the read DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. The offset voltage to be added to the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined from the offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table and stored in the offset voltage memory 203b (S1404). After the processing in S1404, the flow shifts to the processing in S113.

  As described above, the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 in the start-up process (S1403), and reads the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51. Since the offset voltage to be added to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number is determined (S1404), there is no need to read the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 after the start-up processing of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment. Therefore, even after the start-up process, compared with a pachinko machine that reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3, a firing control process for controlling the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 (see FIG. 36 described later) (The process of S1501) can be reduced, and the firing control process can be sped up.

  In the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 is read in the startup process (S1403), and the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is set to a positive value. Since the offset voltage to be added to the voltage multiplied by the real number is determined (S1404), even if the operation knob 122b changes from the set position during the game and the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3 changes, the offset voltage is generated in the variable resistor VR1. There is no change in the offset voltage applied to the voltage obtained by multiplying the input voltage by a positive real number. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the operation strength of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 from changing due to the operation knob 122 b changing from the set position during the game.

  Here, an offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing the contents of the offset voltage determination table memory 202b. The offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b generates, in the variable resistor VR3, an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number. 5 is a table to be determined by the MPU 201 according to the voltage being applied.

  The offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b includes a voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 in accordance with a change in the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 (from zero volt to 5 volts). The offset voltage to be added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage by a positive real number is set from -2.8 volts to +2.8 volts.

  Therefore, if the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 read in the processing of S1403 of the startup processing shown in FIG. 35 is, for example, zero volts, the MPU 201 performs the operation of the operation handle in the processing of S1404 of the startup processing. An offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 at 51 by a positive real number is determined to be "-2.8 volts". When the offset voltage applied to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined to be “−2.8 volts”, the voltage is generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51. "-2.8 volts" is added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage by a positive real number.

  Further, if the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 read in the processing of S1403 of the startup processing is, for example, 2.5 volts, the MPU 201 performs the processing of the operation handle 51 in the processing of S1404 of the startup processing. Is determined to be "zero volt" by adding a voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. When the offset voltage to be added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined to be “zero volt”, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is reduced. "Zero volts" is added to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number. That is, nothing is added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number.

  Further, if the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 read in the processing of S1403 of the start-up processing is, for example, 5.0 volts, the MPU 201 executes the operation handle 51 in the processing of S1404 of the start-up processing. Is determined to be "2.8 volts" to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. When an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined to be “2.8 volts”, the voltage is generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51. "2.8 volts" is added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage by a positive real number.

  As described above, the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 is set from zero volts to 5.0 volts, and thus is generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51. When adding an offset voltage to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage by a positive real number exceeds 5.0 volts, regardless of the offset voltage determined in the processing of S1404 of the start-up processing shown in FIG. The voltage Eα is set to 5.0 volts and output from the input / output port 205 to the launch control device 400.

  By the processing of S1401 to S1404 in the start-up processing shown in FIG. It is possible to determine an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage that is present by a positive real number.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a process of outputting the firing applied voltage Eα to the firing control device 400 and a process of outputting the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β to the firing control device 400 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 36 is performed by the firing control process (S505, the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β) of the timer interrupt process of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. Is changed to a process of outputting the firing applied voltage Eα to the firing control device 400, and after the firing control process (S1501), the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β are sent to the firing control device 400. This is a process to which a control signal process (S1502) to be output is added. Therefore, the same parts as those in the start-up processing of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above with reference to FIG.

  In the timer interruption process, after the start winning process (S504), a firing control process (S1501) for outputting the firing applied voltage Eα from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 is executed. After the execution of the firing control process, a control signal process (S1502) for outputting the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 is executed, and the timer interrupt process ends.

  Here, the launch control process (S1501) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the firing control process (S1501) of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment. In the firing control process, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number, and an offset voltage is added to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number to generate a firing applied voltage Eα to the firing control device 400. This is the output process.

  In the firing control process (S1501), first, it is determined whether or not the firing permission signal SG3 output from the signal conversion circuit 241 in the firing control device 400 has been input (S1601), and the firing permission signal SG3 has not been input. If (S1601: No), this firing control process (S1501) ends.

  On the other hand, if the firing permission signal SG3 has been input (S1601: Yes), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is read (S1604) and multiplied by the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a. Based on the magnification, the voltage generated in the read variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number (S1605).

  After the processing of S1605, based on the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b, an offset voltage is added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number (S1606). The voltage to which the offset voltage is added is output to the firing control device 400 as the firing applied voltage Eα (S1607), and the firing control process (S1501) ends.

  By this firing control processing (S1501), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operating handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number, and the voltage multiplied by the positive real number is added to an offset voltage to obtain a firing applied voltage Eα. The firing application voltage Eα can be output to the firing control device 400.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 41, a description will be given of a voltage change due to the processing of S1604 to S1607 in the firing control processing (S1501) shown in FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a change in each voltage when the firing control process illustrated in FIG. 37 is executed. In FIG. 41, the magnification for multiplying the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a is about 0.36. Further, the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is about 2.25 volts.

  In FIG. 41, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the voltage. As shown in FIG. 41, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is set from a minimum value of zero degrees to a maximum value of 120 degrees, and by the rotation operation of the operation handle 51, as shown in FIG. The DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 changes from about 0.7 volts to about 4.30 volts, and the amount of change is about 3.60 volts. The voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is read by the MPU 201 in the processing of S1604 of the firing control processing (S1501) shown in FIG. 37, and is stored in the magnification memory 203a in the processing of S1605 of the firing control processing. When the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number based on a magnification that is multiplied by a positive real number (about 0.36 in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment), as shown in FIG. The voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number changes from about 0.25 volts to about 1.55 volts, and the amount of change is about 1.30 volts.

  Therefore, by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0, the amount of voltage change can be compared with the DC voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1. Can be reduced. In the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the magnification for multiplying the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a is about 0.36, but the magnification for multiplying the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a is, for example, 1 When the magnification is set to about 1.1 which is larger than 0.0, the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number changes from about 0.77 volts to about 4.73 volts. The change is about 3.96 volts. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number by a factor greater than 1.0, thereby increasing the amount of change in the voltage as compared with the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1. Can be.

  In the process of S1606 of the firing control process (S1501) shown in FIG. 37, the operation handle 51 is controlled based on the offset voltage (about 2.25 volts in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment) stored in the offset voltage memory 203b. When an offset voltage is added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, as shown in (c), the voltage generated by the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number. The voltage to which the offset voltage is added changes from about 2.50 volts to about 3.80 volts, and the amount of change is the amount of change in the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by a positive real number. The same is about 1.30 volts. Therefore, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 is increased by a positive real number without changing the amount of change of the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 by the positive real number due to the offset voltage. Can be increased, and that voltage can be used as the firing applied voltage Eα input to the firing control device 400.

  In the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is about 2.25 volts, but the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR3. For example, when the voltage is -0.25 volts, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 and multiplied by a positive real number changes from about zero volts to about 1.30 volts. Therefore, if the offset voltage is made negative, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 becomes a positive real number without changing the amount of change of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by the positive real number. By reducing the voltage value of the doubled voltage, the voltage can be used as the firing applied voltage Eα input to the firing control device 400.

  In the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is about 2.25 volts, but the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR3. For example, when the voltage is set to zero volt, the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number changes from about 0.25 volt to about 1.55 volt. Therefore, if the offset voltage is set to zero volt, the firing voltage Eα input to the firing control device 400 is applied to the firing control device 400 without adding an offset voltage to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. be able to.

  As described above, by the firing control process (S1501) shown in FIG. 37, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is changed, and the firing applied voltage Eα output to the firing control device 400 is adjusted. Can be. The voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is determined by the adjusted firing applied voltage Eα.

  Here, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to make the offset voltage a positive voltage will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (a change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) when the offset voltage is a positive voltage. In FIG. 42, the following conditions are set in order to clarify a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142.

  The voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to a voltage multiplied by 1.0 by the positive offset voltage. When the voltage is added (FIG. 42 (a)), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the voltage is changed to a voltage multiplied by 1.0. The case where the offset voltage by the resistor VR3 is not applied (the offset voltage is set to zero volt) (FIG. 42B) is compared.

  Here, FIG. 42 (b) shows a case where the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is the firing applied voltage Eα that is directly input to the firing control device 400. Therefore, this comparison shows a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (a change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) when the offset voltage is applied as a positive voltage.

  In FIG. 42, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2). Here, when the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 becomes less than 17.5 volts, the ball hit by the firing solenoid 142 becomes a foul ball. When the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 becomes larger than 21.0 volts, the ball hit by the firing solenoid 142 becomes a right-hit ball. The foul ball is a launch rail 143 (see FIG. 5) that does not reach the launch port 68a where the return ball preventing member 68 (see FIG. 2) is located because the launching force (firing strength) of the launch solenoid 142 is weak. It means a ball returning to the side. A right-hit ball is a ball that has a strong launching force (firing strength) of the firing solenoid 142, moves along the rail 62 after being launched from the launch port 68a, and directly hits the return rubber 69 (see FIG. 2). Means

  As shown in FIG. 42B, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by the variable resistor VR2, multiplied by 1.0, and the variable resistor is adjusted to a voltage multiplied by 1.0. When the offset voltage by VR3 is not applied (offset voltage is set to zero), when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degree to 120 degrees, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is reduced. The maximum varies from about 4.5 volts to about 28.5 volts. Further, the range of the ball to be fouled is such that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is from zero to less than 66 degrees, and the range of the ball to be right-handed is that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 84 degrees to 120 degrees. I have. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is provided is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less. Here, as shown in FIG. 42, the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing strength at which the ball is hit into the game area usually has a target value of 65 degrees which is the target value of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51, for example. It is set in an arbitrary range including.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by the variable resistor VR2, multiplied by 1.0, and changed to a voltage multiplied by 1.0. When the offset voltage by the resistor VR3 is not applied (the offset voltage is set to zero), the target value of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 of 65 degrees is within the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51. (Not less than 66 degrees and not more than 84 degrees), the ball cannot be hit into the game area at 65 degrees which is the target value of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. Therefore, it is necessary to adjust the firing intensity of the ball (the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, that is, the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) with respect to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 42A, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by the variable resistor VR2 to multiply by 1.0, and the voltage multiplied by 1.0 is applied. When a positive offset voltage is applied by the variable resistor VR3 to the control valve 51, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degrees to 120 degrees. Can be varied from about 6.0 volts to about 30.0 volts. Further, the range of the ball to be fouled is when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is from zero degrees to less than 57 degrees, and the range of the ball to be hit right is when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 75 degrees to 120 degrees. I have. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is provided is 57 degrees or more and 75 degrees or less. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to a voltage multiplied by 1.0 by the positive offset. When the voltage is applied, the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 to be the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is adjusted so as to include the target value of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 of 65 degrees. Can be.

  Next, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the offset voltage is set to a negative voltage by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (a change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) when the offset voltage is a negative voltage. In FIG. 43, the following conditions are set in order to clarify the change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142.

  The voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to the voltage multiplied by 1.0 to reduce the negative offset voltage. When added (FIG. 43 (a)), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to 1.0 by multiplying the voltage generated by the variable resistor VR2 to 1.0, and the voltage is adjusted to 1.0 times the voltage. The case where the offset voltage by the resistor VR3 is not applied (the offset voltage is set to zero) (FIG. 43B) is compared. Here, FIG. 43 (b) shows a case where the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is the firing applied voltage Eα that is directly input to the firing control device 400. Therefore, this comparison shows a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (a change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) when the offset voltage is applied as a negative value.

  The condition of FIG. 43 (b) is the same as the condition of FIG. 42 (b) described above (the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2). The pachinko machine used in FIG. 43 and the pachinko machine used in FIG. 42 are obtained by multiplying the voltage by 1.0 and not adding the offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3 to the voltage multiplied by 1.0 (when the offset voltage is set to zero). Are different from each other, and the change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is different due to the difference in the model (for example, the difference in the capacity of the capacitor CD2).

  In FIG. 43, the horizontal axis represents the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2). As shown in FIG. 43 (b), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by the variable resistor VR2, multiplied by 1.0, and the variable resistor is adjusted to a voltage multiplied by 1.0. When the offset voltage by VR3 is not applied (offset voltage is set to zero), when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degree to 120 degrees, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is reduced. The maximum varies from about 7.8 volts to about 32.0 volts.

  Further, the range of the ball to be fouled is when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is from zero to less than 47 degrees, and the range of the ball to be hit right is when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is more than 65 degrees to 120 degrees. I have. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is provided is 47 degrees or more and 65 degrees or less. As described above with reference to FIG. 42, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 at which the shooting intensity at which a ball is hit into the game area is usually a target value of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 as shown in FIG. 43, for example. It is set within an arbitrary range including a certain 65 degrees.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 43B, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to 1.0 by multiplying the voltage generated by the variable resistor VR2 to a voltage multiplied by 1.0. When the offset voltage by the resistor VR3 is not applied (the offset voltage is set to zero), the target value of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 of 65 degrees is within the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51. (Not less than 47 degrees and not more than 65 degrees). Therefore, it is necessary to adjust the firing intensity of the ball (the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, that is, the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) with respect to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 43A, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by the variable resistor VR2 to multiply by 1.0, and the voltage multiplied by 1.0 is applied. When a negative offset voltage is applied by the variable resistor VR3 to the motor, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degree to 120 degrees. Can be varied from about 6.0 volts to about 30.0 volts. Further, the range of the ball to be fouled is when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is from zero degrees to less than 57 degrees, and the range of the ball to be hit right is when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 75 degrees to 120 degrees. I have. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is provided is 57 degrees or more and 75 degrees or less. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to the voltage multiplied by 1.0 by the negative offset. When the voltage is applied, the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 to be the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is adjusted so as to include the target value of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 of 65 degrees. Can be.

  Next, referring to FIG. 44, the variable resistor VR2 of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 33 is adjusted to increase the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by 1.0. A change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to a voltage multiplied by a positive real number at a smaller magnification and the offset voltage is added to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number (capacitor CD2 (A change in the DC voltage Ec applied to). FIG. 44 shows that the variable resistor VR2 is adjusted to multiply the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0, and to obtain a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage by a positive real number. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (a change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) when an offset voltage is applied by adjusting the variable resistor VR3. In FIG. 44, the following conditions are set in order to clarify a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142.

  The voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to a positive real number by a factor smaller than 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the voltage of the variable resistor VR3 is multiplied by the positive real number. The voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 as in the case where the offset voltage is applied by adjustment (FIG. 44 (a)) and FIG. 42 (b). This is compared with the case where the offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3 is not added (the offset voltage is set to zero) to the voltage multiplied by 1.0 and the voltage multiplied by 1.0 (FIG. 44B). Since the pachinko machine used in FIG. 44 and the pachinko machine used in FIG. 42 are the same, the change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 shown in FIG. ) Is the same as the change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 shown in FIG.

  44, as in FIG. 42, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2). I have.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (b), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the variable resistor is adjusted to a voltage multiplied by 1.0. When the offset voltage by VR3 is not applied (offset voltage is set to zero), when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degree to 120 degrees, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is reduced. The maximum varies from about 4.5 volts to about 28.5 volts. Further, the range of the ball to be fouled is such that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is from zero to less than 66 degrees, and the range of the ball to be right-handed is that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 84 degrees to 120 degrees. I have. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into the game area in which the winning opening and the like are provided is not less than 66 degrees and not more than 84 degrees, and the target value of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is set. Is not included in the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 (not less than 66 degrees and not more than 84 degrees). Also, the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for hitting the ball into the game area, which originally requires fine adjustment of the launching strength of the ball, is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the width of the range Is 18 degrees.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44A, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 to a magnification smaller than 1.0 (the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment). Is about 0.36), and when the offset voltage is applied by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number, the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 becomes zero degree. , The maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 changes from about 16.0 volts to about 24.0 volts. In this case, the range in which the ball is a foul ball is such that the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is from zero degrees to less than 23 degrees, and the range in which the ball is a right-handed ball is that the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 77 degrees and 120 degrees. Degree. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is provided is 23 degrees or more and 77 degrees or less. Accordingly, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to a positive real number by a factor of less than 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the variable resistor VR is adjusted to a voltage multiplied by the positive real number. When VR3 is adjusted and an offset voltage is applied, the rotation of the operation handle 51 at which the ball is shot into the game area so as to include 65 degrees, which is the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, is included. The range of the dynamic operation amount can be adjusted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 44A, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to a positive real number by a factor less than 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2. When an offset voltage is added by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 to a voltage multiplied by the positive real number, the range of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area is 23 degrees or more and 77 degrees or less. And the width of the range is 54 degrees. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 44 (a), as compared with 18 degrees which is the range width of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51, which is the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area in the case of FIG. 44 (b). In the example, the range width of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 at which the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is increased by 36 degrees. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3 is not added to the multiplied voltage of 1.0. The voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 to make the magnification smaller than 1.0 times as compared with the case where the offset voltage is set to zero (FIG. 44B). When the offset voltage is added by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number in FIG. 44 (FIG. 44 (a)), the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area is used. Since the range of the rotation operation amount is widened, the firing intensity of the ball for hitting the ball into the game area can be finely adjusted.

  The voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and an offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3 is not added to the multiplied voltage by 1.0 ( When the offset voltage is set to zero) and it is desired to narrow the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into the game area, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is determined. The variable resistor VR2 may be adjusted and multiplied by a positive real number at a magnification greater than 1.0, and the variable resistor VR3 may be adjusted to add the offset voltage to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number. With this adjustment, it is possible to narrow the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area.

  Next, the control signal processing (S1502) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing control signal processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. The control signal process is a process of outputting the launch control signal α and the ball feed control signal β to the launch control device 400. By executing the control signal processing, the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β corresponding to the above-described timing chart shown in FIG. Is output.

  In the control signal processing (S1502), first, it is determined whether or not the firing permission signal SG3 output from the firing control device 400 has been input (S1701), and if the firing permission signal SG3 has been input (S1701: Yes). It is determined whether or not the firing control signal α is zero volts, that is, whether or not the firing control signal α is output (S1702).

  If the firing control signal α is not zero volt, that is, if the firing control signal α is not output (S1702: No), when the firing control signal α falls to zero volt, that is, the firing control signal α is output It is determined whether 602 ms or more has elapsed from the time (S1703). In the process of S1703, the output cycle of the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β is set to 602 ms. Accordingly, the launch control signal α and the ball feed control signal β are output from the input / output port 205 (see FIG. 33) to the launch control device 400 at a cycle of 602 ms (see S3 in FIG. 12).

  When the firing control signal α falls to zero volts, that is, when 602 ms or more has elapsed from when the firing control signal α was output (S1703: Yes), the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β fall. Since the period, that is, the period for outputting the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β, the firing control signal α is set to zero volt (S1704), and the ball feed control signal β is set to zero volt (S1705). By the processing in S1704 and S1705, the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β are output to the firing control device 400. After the processing in S1705, the flow shifts to the processing in S1708.

  On the other hand, when the firing control signal α falls to zero volts, that is, when 602 ms or more has not elapsed since the firing control signal α was output (S1703: No), the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β Since this is not the cycle of falling, that is, the cycle of outputting the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β, the next processing is S1708 while maintaining the current output state of the launch control signal α and the ball feed control signal β. Move to the processing of.

  When the firing permission signal SG3 is not input in the processing of S1701 (S1701: No), and when the firing control signal α is zero volt, that is, when the firing control signal α is output in the processing of S1702 (S1702: Yes). It is determined whether the firing control signal α has fallen to zero volts, that is, whether 12 ms or more has elapsed since the firing control signal α was output (S1706). In the process of S1706, the output time of the firing control signal α is set to 12 ms. Therefore, the firing control signal α is output from the input / output port 205 (see FIG. 33) to the firing control device 400 with an output time of 12 ms (see S1 in FIG. 12).

  Even when the firing permission signal SG3 is not input (S1701: No), when the firing control signal α falls to zero volt, that is, whether 12 ms or more has elapsed since the firing control signal α was output. This is determined (S1706) when the firing control signal α has fallen to zero volts and 12 ms or more has not elapsed, and the output time of the firing control signal α has been lost even if the input of the firing permission signal SG3 has been lost. During 12 ms, the firing control signal α is kept at zero volts, that is, the output of the firing control signal α is continued. By the processing of S1701 and S1706, even if the player releases his / her hand from the operation handle 51 when 12 ms or more has not elapsed since the time when the firing control signal α dropped to zero volt (the input of the firing permission signal SG3 is lost. ), The firing control signal α is normally output (maintained at zero volt) for the output time of 12 ms.

  When the firing control signal α falls to zero volts, that is, when 12 ms or more has elapsed since the firing control signal α was output (S1706: Yes), 12 ms, which is the output time of the firing control signal α, has elapsed. The firing control signal α is set to 5 volts (S1707). By the processing in S1707, the output of the firing control signal α is stopped. After the processing in S1707, the flow shifts to the processing in S1708.

  On the other hand, when the firing control signal α falls to zero volts, that is, when 12 ms or more has not elapsed since the time when the firing control signal α was output (S1706: No), it is within the output time of the firing control signal α. Then, while maintaining the output state of the firing control signal α, the processing shifts to the next processing of S1708.

  In the process of S1708, it is determined whether or not the ball feed control signal β is zero volt, that is, whether or not the ball feed control signal β is output (S1708). If the ball feed control signal β is not zero volt, that is, if the ball feed control signal β is output (S1708: Yes), when the ball feed control signal β falls to zero volt, that is, the ball feed control signal β is output It is determined whether or not 74 ms or more has elapsed since the time of the execution (S1709). In the process of S1709, the output time of the ball feed control signal β is set to 74 ms. Therefore, the ball feed control signal β is output from the input / output port 205 (see FIG. 33) to the launch control device 400 with an output time of 74 ms (see S2 in FIG. 12).

  Note that, even when the firing permission signal SG3 is not input (S1701: No), the processing from S1706 to S1708 is executed, and when the ball feed control signal β falls to zero volt, that is, when the ball feed control signal β Since it is determined whether or not 74 ms has elapsed since the time of output (S1709), the input of the firing permission signal SG3 is not performed when 74 ms or more has not elapsed since the ball feed control signal β fell to zero volt. Even if the ball feed control signal β is output, the ball feed control signal β can be maintained at zero volt for 74 ms, which is the output time of the ball feed control signal β, that is, the output of the ball feed control signal β can be continued. Thus, when the ball feed control signal β has fallen to zero volts and 74 ms or more has not elapsed, even if the player releases his hand from the operation handle 51 (even if the firing permission signal SG3 is no longer input), The feed control signal β is normally output (maintained at zero volt) for the output time of 74 ms.

  When the ball feed control signal β falls to zero volts, that is, when 74 ms or more has elapsed since the ball feed control signal β was output (S1709: Yes), 74 ms which is the output time of the ball feed control signal β Has elapsed, the ball feed control signal β is set to 5 volts (S1710). By the processing in S1710, the output of the firing control signal α is stopped. After the processing in S1710, the control signal processing (S1502) ends.

  When the ball feed control signal β is not zero volt in the process of S1708, that is, when the ball feed control signal β is not output (S1708: No) and when the ball feed control signal β falls to zero volt, that is, the ball feed If 74 ms or more has not elapsed since the control signal β was output (S1709: No), this control signal processing (S1502) ends while the current output state of the ball feed control signal β is maintained.

  By this control signal processing (S1502), the launch control signal α and the ball feed control signal β are output from the input / output port 205 (see FIG. 33) to the launch control device 400. In response to the firing control signal α, the firing solenoid 142 fires a ball toward the game area. In response to the output ball feed control signal β, the ball feed solenoid 154 places the ball in front of the cap 142b (see FIGS. 5B and 6B) that covers the tip of the plunger 142a of the firing solenoid 142. I do.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is changed by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 based on the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. Change. The MPU 201 calculates a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 and a magnification determination table ( (See FIG. 39), and the magnification for multiplying the determined positive real number is stored in the magnification memory 203a. Then, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by the MPU 201 by the positive real number according to the magnification multiplied by the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a. Further, the MPU 201 stores an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. The offset voltage is determined using the determined offset voltage determination table (see FIG. 40), and the determined offset voltage is stored in the offset voltage memory 203b. Then, the MPU 201 determines the firing applied voltage Eα by adding the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. The MPU 201 outputs the determined firing application voltage Eα from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400. The output firing applied voltage Eα is input to the voltage supply unit 304 of the firing control device 400, and the voltage supply unit 304 controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  Here, as shown in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, in the conventional ball launching apparatus, when adjusting the launching strength of the ball hit by the solenoid, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are turned. The firing intensity is adjusted by mechanically moving the solenoid up and down and back and forth. Therefore, when the player or the like causes an impact on the gaming machine or when the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are loosened due to a change with time, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are out of adjustment. Occurs. Therefore, there has been a problem that a predetermined firing intensity corresponding to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle is not generated due to a shift of the position where the mallet of the solenoid collides with the ball.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 42, according to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to a positive real number by adjusting the variable resistor VR2. By adjusting the variable resistor VR3 to a voltage multiplied by the positive real number, a firing applied voltage Eα obtained by adding a positive offset voltage can be output to the firing control device 400. Therefore, the magnification of multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number by the variable resistor VR2 is set to 1.0, and the offset voltage is set to a positive voltage by the variable resistor VR3. The range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area (the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, which is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area, is 66 to 84 degrees) When the range is 18 degrees, it is possible to change the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area without changing the range width of 18 degrees. For example, when the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the shooting intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is in the range of 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, the center value 75 degrees of the range is operated by the variable resistor VR2. The center value is set to 66 degrees by adjusting the magnification of multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the handle 51 by a positive real number to 1.0, and adjusting the positive offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3 to 66%. The amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 at which the launch intensity at which the ball is hit into the area can be set to a range of 57 degrees or more and 75 degrees or less.

  Therefore, even when the range of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 at which the ball is shot into the game area is shifted to a larger value than the target value, the target value of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is set. It is possible to adjust the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing strength at which the ball is hit into the game area so as to include, for example, 65 degrees.

  As shown in FIG. 43, according to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to the variable resistor VR2 and multiplied by a positive real number. The firing application voltage Eα obtained by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 to a voltage multiplied by a positive real number and adding a negative offset voltage can be output to the firing control device 400. Therefore, the magnification of multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number by the variable resistor VR2 is set to 1.0, and the offset voltage is set to a negative voltage by the variable resistor VR3. The width of the range of the turning amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area (the turning amount of the operating handle 51 that is the firing strength at which the ball is hit into the game area is 47 to 65 degrees) , The range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 can be changed without changing the range width of 18 degrees) without changing the range width. For example, when the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is in the range of 47 degrees or more and 65 degrees or less, the center value 56 degrees of the range is operated by the variable resistor VR2. The center value is set to 66 degrees by adjusting the magnification of multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the handle 51 by a positive real number to 1.0, and adjusting the negative offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3 to make the center value 66 degrees. The amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 at which the launch intensity at which the ball is hit into the area can be set to a range of 57 degrees or more and 75 degrees or less.

  Therefore, even when the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is shifted to a smaller value than the target value, the target value of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 is It is possible to adjust the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 to be the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area so as to include, for example, 65 degrees.

  Further, by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 and multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 by a real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0 in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51, The amount of change in the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by a positive real number according to the amount of rotation operation (the minimum voltage of the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by a positive real number) The difference between the value and the maximum value) is made smaller than the amount of change in the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (the difference between the minimum value and the maximum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1). it can. That is, the slope of the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by a positive real number (connects the minimum value and the maximum value of the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number). The straight line (slope of FIG. 41B) is defined by the slope of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (the minimum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1) in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. It can be made smaller than a straight line connecting the maximum value (the slope of FIG. 41A).

  Here, since the firing applied voltage Eα is adjusted by a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the change amount of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 (Slope) also decreases. Since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 for hitting a ball into the game area is within a certain range (for example, from about 17.5 volts to about 21.0 volts (see FIG. 44)), the voltage E1 is applied to the firing solenoid 142. By reducing the amount of change (slope) of the voltage E1, the range width of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area can be widened (for example, the firing intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area) The rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the range width of 18 degrees can be set in the range of 23 degrees or more and 77 degrees or less, and the range width can be expanded to 54 degrees (FIG. 44)). Therefore, the range of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 can be adjusted so as to include the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, for example, 65 degrees.

  In addition, the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the shooting intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area can be changed to have a wide range width. That is, it is possible to widen the range of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area. Therefore, the firing intensity for hitting a ball into the game area can be finely adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.

  Further, by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 and multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number at a magnification larger than 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51, The amount of change in the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by a positive real number (the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number) in accordance with the amount of rotation operation of the variable resistor 51 Of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (the difference between the minimum value and the maximum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1). be able to.

  Here, since the firing applied voltage Eα is adjusted by a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the change amount of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 (Tilt) also increases. Therefore, when it is desired to narrow the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into the game area, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2. By multiplying by a positive real number at a magnification greater than 1.0, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area can be narrowed.

  Here, as shown in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, in the conventional ball launching device, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are turned to mechanically move the solenoid up and down, back and forth. Since the emission intensity is adjusted, the accuracy of the adjustment of the emission intensity depends on the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob. There was a problem that it was low.

  However, according to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 is determined by the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 and the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. And it is adjusted by. In general, the DC voltage has a property that it is easy to finely and accurately adjust and is resistant to change over time (it is hard to get out of order). Alternatively, the range width can be finely and accurately adjusted, and the adjustment can be made strong against change over time (to prevent deviation).

  Further, since the pachinko machine of the third embodiment is provided with the variable resistor VR2 for adjusting the magnification of multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is generated. It is possible to change (fine-adjust) the magnification by which the applied voltage is multiplied by a positive real number. Here, the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 may change from the initially set value due to the aging of the input / output port 205 and the like. In this case, since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 also changes, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area changes from the initially set range. Resulting in. Further, there is a case where the range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area becomes smaller than the range width initially set.

  In these cases, by changing (fine-tuning) the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 by the variable resistor VR2, the voltage supply within the firing control device 400 from the input / output port 205 is changed. The firing applied voltage Eα output to the unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted). Thus, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, it is possible to change (fine-adjust) the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 or the range width thereof, which is the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area, to the initially set range or the initially set range width. it can.

  Further, the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is changed by using the variable resistor VR2. Generally, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the range of the turning amount of the operation handle 51 or the range width of the turning amount of the operation handle 51 which can be the firing strength at which the ball is hit into the game area can be finely adjusted by using the inexpensive variable resistor VR2 having a simple configuration.

  Further, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 can be simply multiplied by a positive real number by the MPU 201 without using a complicated circuit or the like.

  Also, the MPU 201 generates the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 in the processing of S1402 of the startup processing based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 read in the processing of S1401 of the startup processing shown in FIG. Is determined by multiplying the applied voltage by a positive real number. Therefore, the MPU 201 can accurately determine the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number.

  Further, the MPU 201 applies an offset voltage to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Therefore, the offset voltage can be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number without using a complicated circuit or the like.

  Also, the MPU 201 generates the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 in the processing of S1404 of the startup processing based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 read in the processing of S1403 of the startup processing shown in FIG. The offset voltage to be added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the applied voltage by a positive real number is determined. Therefore, the MPU 201 can accurately determine an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number.

  Further, the pachinko machine of the third embodiment is provided with a variable resistor VR3 for adjusting an offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Can be changed (fine-tuned). Here, the offset voltage is simply added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Therefore, without changing the amount of change of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, only the voltage value can be changed (finely adjusted) to obtain the firing applied voltage Eα. The firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 is determined based on the firing applied voltage Eα. Therefore, by changing (finely adjusting) the offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the rotation of the operation handle 51 that has a firing intensity at which a ball is driven into the game area is achieved. The range of the operation amount can be finely adjusted without changing the range of the operation amount (for example, the operation amount of the operation handle 51, which is the firing intensity at which the ball is shot into the game area, is 66 degrees or more) The range of 84 degrees or less can be changed to a range of 57 degrees or more and 75 degrees or less (see FIG. 42).

  Therefore, when the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 deteriorates due to, for example, aging, and the ball cannot be driven into the game area unless the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is set to be larger than the initially set range. However, by changing (fine-adjusting) the variable resistor VR3 to an offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the firing intensity at which the ball is shot into the game area is adjusted. The range of the amount of rotation of the handle 51 can be finely adjusted to the initially set range.

  Further, by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3, it is possible to change (finely adjust) the offset voltage to be added to the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. As a result, the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, in general, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 or the range width thereof can be finely adjusted by using the simple configuration and the inexpensive variable resistor VR3 so that the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area can be obtained.

  Next, a pachinko machine according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment is obtained by changing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area or the width of the range is determined by using a voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, an addition voltage adjustment unit 302, and an addition circuit unit 303 using an electronic circuit. When the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than a specified value (105 degrees in the case of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment), a right-hit ball is reliably fired and a right-hit ball is shot. The steering monitor 307, the voltage riser 308, and the limiter 309 using an electronic circuit make the emission intensity constant. In the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, a start-up process (see FIG. 35) executed by the main control device 110 and a launching process are performed by the main control device 110 to set the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 or the width of the range for driving the ball into the game area. Adjustment is performed by the control process (see FIG. 46), and when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 becomes larger than a specified value, a right-hit ball is reliably fired and the firing intensity of the right-hit ball is kept constant. Is performed by the firing control process (see FIG. 46) executed by main controller 110.

  According to the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the range of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area or the range width thereof can be adjusted widely (see FIG. 48A). On the other hand, in some cases, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area or the width of the range can be adjusted to be narrow. Furthermore, when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than a specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment), a right-hit ball can be reliably fired and a right-hit ball can be shot. Can be made constant.

  FIG. 45 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment. In the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, a monitoring memory 202c and a limit value memory 202d are provided in the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment. Therefore, the same portions as those of the pachinko machine of the third embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 33 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The monitoring memory 202c indicates that the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 has become larger than a specified value (105 degrees in the case of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment), that is, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51. Is a memory that stores a specified value as a voltage so that the MPU 201 detects that the value becomes larger than a specified value. The MPU 201 compares the specified value stored in the monitoring memory 202c with the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 in the process of S1807 of the firing control process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the voltage generated in the VR VR is equal to or lower than a specified value stored in the monitoring memory 202c. By this determination, the MPU 201 can determine that the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 has become larger than the specified value.

  The limit value memory 202d is a memory that stores a limit value as a voltage value that limits the voltage value so that the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 does not exceed a predetermined value. When the MPU 201 determines in the processing of S1807 of the firing control processing shown in FIG. 46 to be described later that the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 has become larger than a specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment). In the process of S1811 of the firing control process shown in FIG. 46, the firing applied voltage Eα is limited to the limit value stored in the limit value memory 202d. When the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 becomes larger than a specified value due to the limitation of the voltage value, it is possible to reliably fire a right-hit ball and keep the firing intensity of the right-hit ball constant. Can be.

  The magnification memory 203a and the offset voltage memory 203b have the same configuration as the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, but the timings at which the respective values are stored in the magnification memory 203a and the offset voltage memory 203b are different. I do.

  The magnification memory 203a will be described. When a DC voltage is generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the operation knob 122a, and the generated DC voltage is read by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the process of S1802 of the launch control process shown in FIG. In accordance with the obtained DC voltage, the MPU 201 stores the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number in the magnification determination table memory 202a in the processing of S1803 of the firing control processing shown in FIG. Determined by the determined magnification determination table. By the processing in S1803 of the firing control processing, the determined magnification to multiply by the positive real number is stored in the magnification memory 203a.

  The offset voltage memory 203b will be described. When a DC voltage is generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the operation knob 122b, when the generated DC voltage is read into the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the processing of S1804 of the firing control processing shown in FIG. In accordance with the obtained DC voltage, the MPU 201 determines the offset voltage to be added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number in the offset control process in the step S1805 of the firing control process shown in FIG. It is determined by the offset voltage determination table stored in the memory 202b. The offset voltage determined by the processing in S1805 of the firing control processing is stored in the offset voltage memory 203b.

  Next, the launch control process (S1501) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the firing control processing of the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment. The firing control process of the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment includes a process of determining a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, and a process of multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. This is a process of determining an offset voltage to be added to the applied voltage and a process of outputting the firing applied voltage Eα to the firing control device 400. The firing control process (S1501) of the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment is a process executed in the above-described timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  In the launch control process (S1501) of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the launch permission signal SG3 output from the launch control device 400 is input (S1801), and the launch permission signal SG3 is input. If not (S1601: No), this firing control process (S1501) ends.

  On the other hand, if the firing permission signal SG3 has been input (S1601: Yes), the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the operation knob 122a is read (S1802), and generated in the read variable resistor VR2. Using the DC voltage, a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined from the magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a and stored in the magnification memory 203a. (S1803).

  As described above, in the firing control process (S1501) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) of the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, the MPU 201 reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 ( (S1802) Since the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is determined (S1803), the magnification for multiplying the positive real number is determined each time the timer interrupt processing is executed (every 2ms). can do. Therefore, while confirming the firing strength of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 by rotating the operation handle 51, the firing strength of the ball can be adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2.

  After the processing in S1803, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the operation knob 122b is read (S1804), and the offset voltage determination table memory 202b is used by using the read DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. The offset voltage to be added to the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is determined from the offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table and stored in the offset voltage memory 203b (S1805).

  As described above, in the firing control process (S1501) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36) of the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, the MPU 201 reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 ( (S1804) Since the offset voltage to be added to the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is determined (S1805), the offset voltage is determined every time the timer interrupt processing is executed (every 2ms). can do. Therefore, while confirming the emission intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 by rotating the operation handle 51, the emission intensity of the ball can be adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR3.

  After the execution of the process of S1805, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is read (S1806), and the voltage generated in the read variable resistor VR1 is lower than a specified value of the monitoring memory 202c. That is, it is determined whether the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than a specified value (105 degrees in the case of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment) (S1807).

  The voltage generated in the read variable resistor VR1 is equal to or less than a specified value of the monitoring memory 202c, that is, the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than a specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment). If there is (S1807: No), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 read in the processing of S1806 is multiplied by a positive real number based on the magnification multiplied by the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a (S1808). .

  After execution of the processing in S1808, based on the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b, an offset voltage is added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number (S1809). The added voltage is output as the firing application voltage Eα to the firing control device 400 (S1810), and the firing control process (S1501) ends. As described above, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than the specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is reduced. The voltage is multiplied by a positive real number, and an offset voltage is added to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number to obtain a firing applied voltage Eα.

  On the other hand, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 read in the process of S1807 is larger than the specified value of the monitoring memory 202c, that is, the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 is equal to the specified value (the fourth embodiment). If it is larger than 105 degrees (Pachinko machine: 105 degrees) (S1807: Yes), the voltage of the firing application voltage Eα is set to the limit value of the limit value memory 202d and output to the firing control device 400 (S1811). By the process of S1811, the voltage value of the firing applied voltage Eα output to the firing control device 400 is limited to the limit value of the limit value memory 202d, and thus the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 becomes larger than the specified value. In this case, a right-hit ball can be reliably fired, and the firing intensity of the right-hit ball can be made constant.

  If the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is equal to or smaller than the specified value (105 degrees in the case of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment) by the launch control process (S1501) of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the operation handle An operation for hitting a ball into the game area by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of 51 by a positive real number and adding the offset voltage to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number to obtain the firing applied voltage Eα. The range of the amount of rotation of the handle 51 or the range thereof can be adjusted widely, and the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving a ball into the game area or the range thereof can be adjusted to be narrow. it can.

  When the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 becomes larger than the specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment), the voltage value of the firing applied voltage Eα output to the firing control device 400 is reduced. Since the limit value is limited to the limit value in the limit value memory 202d, a right-hit ball can be reliably fired, and the firing intensity of the right-hit ball can be constant.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a description will be given of a voltage change due to the firing control process (S1501) of the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a change in each voltage when the firing control process (S1501) illustrated in FIG. 46 is executed. In FIG. 47, the magnification for multiplying the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a is about 0.29. Further, the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is about 2.47 volts. The specified value of the monitoring memory 202c is set to about 3.85 volts (a DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees), and The limit is about 3.85 volts.

  In FIG. 47, the horizontal axis represents the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the voltage. As shown in FIG. 47, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is set from a minimum value of zero degrees to a maximum value of 120 degrees, and as shown in FIG. The DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 45) changes from about 0.7 volts to about 4.30 volts, and the amount of change is about 3.60 volts.

  The voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than the specified value of the monitoring memory 202c, that is, the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is equal to or smaller than the specified value (105 in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment). If it is not more than (degrees), the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is read into the MPU 201 in the processing of S1806 of the firing control processing (S1501) shown in FIG. 46, and S1808 of the firing control processing In the process (1), the MPU 201 corrects the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 based on the magnification (approximately 0.29 in the case of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment) that is multiplied by a positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a. Times the real number.

  Then, as shown in (b), the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number changes from about 0.20 volts to about 1.15 volts, and the amount of change is about 0.95 volts. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number by a factor smaller than 1.0, so that the amount of change in the voltage is reduced as compared with the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1. Can be.

  In the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the magnification for multiplying the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a is about 0.29, but the magnification for multiplying the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a is, for example, 1 When the magnification is set to about 1.1, which is larger than 0.0, the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number changes from about 0.77 volts to about 4.73 volts. The amount will be about 3.96 volts. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number by a factor greater than 1.0, thereby increasing the amount of change in the voltage as compared with the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1. Can be.

  In the process of S1809 of the firing control process, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 based on the offset voltage (approximately 2.47 volts in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment) stored in the offset voltage memory 203b. When the offset voltage is added to a voltage obtained by multiplying by a positive real number, the voltage becomes the firing applied voltage Eα. As shown in (c), the firing applied voltage Eα is such that the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than a specified value of the monitoring memory 202c, that is, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is If it is less than or equal to the prescribed value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment), the change will be from about 2.67 volts to about 3.47 volts (when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees). , The amount of change is about 0.80 volts. Here, as shown in (b), the amount of change in the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by a positive real number is from about 0.20 volts to about 1.00 volts (of the operation handle 51). (When the rotation operation amount is 105 degrees), and the change amount is about 0.80 volt.

  Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than the specified value, a voltage obtained by adding the offset voltage to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 shown in FIG. The change amount of the firing application voltage Eα) is the same as the change amount of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by a positive real number shown in (b). Therefore, when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is equal to or less than the specified value, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by the offset voltage does not change the change amount of the voltage multiplied by a positive real number. The voltage value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by a positive real number can be increased.

  In the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is about 2.47 volts, but the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b is reduced to, for example, -0.20 volt. Then, a voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number changes from about zero volts to about 0.95 volts. Therefore, if the offset voltage is made negative, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is changed to a positive real number without changing the amount of change of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. The voltage value of the doubled voltage can be reduced.

  The voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is larger than a specified value of the monitoring memory 202c, that is, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is a specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment). If it is larger, the voltage of the firing applied voltage Eα is set to about 3.85 volts which is the limit value of the limit value memory 202d in the processing of S1811 of the firing control processing (S1501) shown in FIG.

  Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than the specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment), as shown in FIG. It can be limited to a constant voltage.

  Next, referring to FIG. 48, the variable resistor VR2 of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 45 is adjusted to increase the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by 1.0 times. A firing solenoid when a positive real number is multiplied by a small magnification, an offset voltage is added by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number, and a DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is further monitored. A change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the capacitor 142 (change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) will be described. FIG. 48 shows that the variable resistor VR2 is adjusted to multiply the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0, and to change the voltage to a positive real number. The resistor VR3 is adjusted to add an offset voltage. Further, when the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is monitored, a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (applied to the capacitor CD2) FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a change in the DC voltage Ec). In FIG. 48, the following conditions are set in order to clarify a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142.

  By adjusting the variable resistor VR2, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0, and the voltage obtained by multiplying the positive real number by the variable resistor VR3. When the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is monitored (FIG. 48A), the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted. The resistor VR2 is adjusted and multiplied by 1.0, the offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3 is not added to the voltage multiplied by 1.0 (the offset voltage is set to zero), and the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is further adjusted. This is compared with the case where the DC voltage is not monitored (FIG. 48B).

  The change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 shown in FIG. 48 (b) depends on the voltage E1 (variable resistor VR1 of the operating handle 51) applied to the firing solenoid 142 shown in FIG. Is the same as the change of the maximum value of the firing applied voltage Eα input to the firing control device 400 as it is. Therefore, from this comparison, a change in the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment (change in the DC voltage Ec applied to the capacitor CD2) can be found.

  In FIG. 48, as in FIGS. 42, 43, and 44, the horizontal axis represents the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and the vertical axis represents the maximum value of the voltage E1 (applied to the capacitor CD2) to the firing solenoid 142. DC voltage Ec).

  As shown in FIG. 48 (b), the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to 1.0 by multiplying the voltage generated by the variable resistor VR2, and the variable resistor is adjusted to a voltage multiplied by 1.0. When the offset voltage by VR3 is not applied (offset voltage is set to zero) and the voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is not monitored, the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is reduced from zero to 120 degrees. When changed, the maximum value of voltage E1 applied to firing solenoid 142 varies from about 4.5 volts to about 28.5 volts. Further, the range of the ball to be fouled is such that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is from zero to less than 66 degrees, and the range of the ball to be right-handed is that the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 84 degrees to 120 degrees. I have. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into the game area in which the winning opening and the like are provided is not less than 66 degrees and not more than 84 degrees, and the target value of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is set. Is not included in the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 (not less than 66 degrees and not more than 84 degrees). Also, the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for hitting the ball into the game area, which originally requires fine adjustment of the launching strength of the ball, is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the width of the range Is 18 degrees.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48 (a), the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 to a magnification smaller than 1.0 (the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment). Then, the voltage is multiplied by a positive real number at about 0.29), the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to add the offset voltage to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number, and the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is monitored. In this case, when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is changed from zero degrees to 120 degrees, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is about 17.1 volts to about 25.0 volts. Has changed. In this case, the range of the ball to be fouled is from zero degrees to less than 19 degrees of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51, and the range to be the right-handed ball is the range of the turning operations of the operation handle 51 from 105 degrees to 120 degrees. ing. Therefore, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 for hitting a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is provided is 19 degrees or more and 105 degrees or less.

  Therefore, by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by a positive real number with a magnification smaller than 1.0, and the voltage is multiplied by the positive real number. When VR3 is adjusted to add an offset voltage, and further, when the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is monitored, 65 degrees, which is the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, is included. It is possible to adjust the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 48A, the variable resistor VR2 is adjusted to multiply the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0. When the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to add the offset voltage to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number, and when the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is monitored, an operation for driving a ball into the game area is performed. The range of the turning operation amount of the handle 51 is 19 degrees or more and 105 degrees or less, and the width of the range is 86 degrees.

  Therefore, in the case of FIG. 48 (a), as compared with 18 degrees which is the range width of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing strength at which the ball is hit into the game area in the case of FIG. 48 (b). In the case of, the range width of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 at which the shooting intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is increased by 68 degrees. Accordingly, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is multiplied by 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the voltage multiplied by 1.0 is not added with the offset voltage by the variable resistor VR3 ( The offset voltage is set to zero). Further, the variable resistor VR2 is adjusted to adjust the variable resistance of the operation handle 51 as compared with the case where the voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is not monitored (FIG. 48B). The voltage generated in the resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number at a magnification of less than 1.0, the variable resistor VR3 is adjusted to add the offset voltage to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number, and When the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 is monitored (FIG. 48 (a)), the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area is expanded, so that the ball is driven into the game area. It is possible to finely adjust the radiation strength of the sphere.

  Further, the variable resistor VR2 is adjusted to multiply the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0 times, and the voltage is multiplied by the positive real number. When VR3 is adjusted to apply an offset voltage and the DC voltage of the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is monitored (FIG. 48 (a)), the range of the right-handed ball is the rotation of the operation handle 51. Although the operation amount is larger than 105 degrees and up to 120 degrees, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 at this time is set to about 25 which is a voltage value that can surely fire a right-hit ball. The voltage value is limited to about 25.0 volts. Therefore, when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, a right-hit ball can be reliably fired.

  Further, when the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is approximately equal even if the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is increased more than necessary. Limited to 25.0 volts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 from becoming an overvoltage, and thus it is possible to prevent damage to the return rubber 69 and the like hitting a ball fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  Further, when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, that is, about 25.0 volts, is less than the absolute maximum rated voltage value of the firing solenoid. Is set. Therefore, even if the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is increased more than necessary, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 does not exceed the absolute maximum rating, so that the damage of the firing solenoid 142 is prevented. be able to.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is changed by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor VR1 based on the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. Change. The MPU 201 calculates a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 and a magnification determination table (FIG. 39) stored in a magnification determination table memory 202a. ), And the determined magnification for multiplying the positive real number is stored in the magnification memory 203a. Then, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by the MPU 201 by the positive real number according to the magnification multiplied by the positive real number stored in the magnification memory 203a. Further, the MPU 201 stores an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. The offset voltage is determined using the determined offset voltage determination table (see FIG. 40), and the determined offset voltage is stored in the offset voltage memory 203b. Then, the MPU 201 determines the firing applied voltage Eα by adding the offset voltage stored in the offset voltage memory 203b to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. The MPU 201 outputs the determined firing application voltage Eα to the firing control device 400. The output firing applied voltage Eα is input to the voltage supply unit 304 of the firing control device 400, and the voltage supply unit 304 controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  According to the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to a positive real number by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the voltage is adjusted to a voltage multiplied by the positive real number. By adjusting the VR3, the firing application voltage Eα to which the positive offset voltage is added can be output to the firing control device 400. Therefore, the magnification of multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number by the variable resistor VR2 is set to 1.0, and the offset voltage is set to a positive voltage by the variable resistor VR3. Without changing the width of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the ball is shot into the game area, without changing the width of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the shot intensity is shot at the ball. Can be changed.

  Therefore, even when the range of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 at which the ball is shot into the game area is shifted to a larger value than the target value, the target value of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is set. It is possible to adjust the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing strength at which the ball is hit into the game area so as to include, for example, 65 degrees.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted to a positive real number by adjusting the variable resistor VR2, and the voltage is multiplied by the positive real number. The firing application voltage Eα to which the negative offset voltage is added by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 can be output to the firing control device. Thus, the magnification of multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number by the variable resistor VR2 is set to 1.0, and the offset voltage is set to a negative voltage by the variable resistor VR3. Without changing the width of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the ball is shot into the game area, without changing the width of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the shot intensity is shot at the ball. Can be changed.

  Therefore, even when the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is shifted to a smaller value than the target value, the target value of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 is It is possible to adjust the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 to be the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area so as to include, for example, 65 degrees.

  Further, by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 to multiply the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number at a magnification smaller than 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR1 in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51, The amount of change in the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by a positive real number (the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number) in accordance with the amount of rotation operation of the variable resistor 51 Of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (the difference between the minimum value and the maximum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1). be able to. That is, the slope of the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by a positive real number (connects the minimum value and the maximum value of the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number). The straight line (the slope of FIG. 47 (b)) is defined as the slope of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (the minimum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1) in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. It can be made smaller than a straight line connecting the maximum value (the slope of FIG. 47A).

  Here, since the firing applied voltage Eα is adjusted by a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the change amount of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 (Slope) also decreases. Since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 for driving a ball into the game area is within a certain range (for example, about 17.5 volts to about 21.0 volts (see FIG. 48)), the voltage E1 is applied to the firing solenoid 142. By reducing the amount of change (slope) of the voltage E1, the range width of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area can be widened (for example, the firing intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area) The rotation width of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the range width 18 degrees can be set in the range of 19 degrees or more and 105 degrees or less, and the range width can be expanded to 86 degrees (FIG. 48)). Therefore, the range of the operation amount of the operation handle 51 can be adjusted so as to include the target value of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, for example, 65 degrees.

  In addition, the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 at which the shooting intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area can be changed to have a wide range width. That is, it is possible to widen the range of the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area. Therefore, the firing intensity for hitting a ball into the game area can be finely adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51.

  Further, by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 and multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number at a magnification larger than 1.0 by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 in accordance with the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51, The amount of change in the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 multiplied by a positive real number (the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number) in accordance with the amount of rotation operation of the variable resistor 51 Of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 (the difference between the minimum value and the maximum value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1). be able to.

  Here, since the firing applied voltage Eα is adjusted by a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the change amount of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 (Tilt) also increases. Therefore, when it is desired to narrow the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2. What is necessary is to multiply the positive real number by a factor larger than 1.0 and adjust the variable resistor VR3 to the voltage multiplied by the positive real number to add an offset voltage. With this adjustment, it is possible to narrow the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area.

  Further, the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 is adjusted by the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 and the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. In general, the DC voltage has a property that it is easy to finely and accurately adjust and is resistant to change over time (it is hard to get out of order). Alternatively, the range width can be finely and accurately adjusted, and the adjustment can be made strong against change over time (to prevent deviation).

  Further, since the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment is provided with the variable resistor VR2 for adjusting the magnification of multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is adjusted. It is possible to change (fine-adjust) the magnification by which the applied voltage is multiplied by a positive real number. Here, the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 may change from the initially set value due to the aging of the input / output port 205 and the like. In this case, since the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 also changes, the range of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area changes from the initially set range. Resulting in. Further, there is a case where the range width of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area becomes smaller than the range width initially set.

  In these cases, the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 is changed (finely adjusted) by the variable resistor VR2, and is output from the input / output port 205 to the voltage supply unit 304. The firing applied voltage Eα can be changed (finely adjusted). Thus, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, it is possible to change (fine-adjust) the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 or the range width thereof, which is the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area, to the initially set range or the initially set range width. it can.

  Further, the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is changed by using the variable resistor VR2. Generally, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the range of the turning amount of the operation handle 51 or the range width of the turning amount of the operation handle 51 which can be the firing strength at which the ball is hit into the game area can be finely adjusted by using the inexpensive variable resistor VR2 having a simple configuration.

  Further, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is multiplied by a positive real number by the MPU 201. Therefore, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 can be simply multiplied by a positive real number without using a complicated circuit or the like.

  The MPU 201 stores the data in the magnification determination table memory 202a in the processing of S1803 of the firing control processing based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 read in the processing of S1802 of the firing control processing shown in FIG. The magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is determined using the obtained magnification determination table. Therefore, the MPU 201 can accurately determine the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number.

  Further, the MPU 201 applies an offset voltage to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Therefore, the offset voltage can be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number without using a complicated circuit or the like.

  Further, the MPU 201 generates the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 in the processing of S1806 of the firing control processing based on the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 read in the processing of S1805 of the firing control processing shown in FIG. The offset voltage to be added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage by a positive real number is determined using the offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b. Therefore, the MPU 201 can accurately determine an offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number.

  Further, the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment is provided with a variable resistor VR3 for adjusting an offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Can be changed (fine-tuned). This offset voltage is only added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Therefore, only the voltage value of the firing applied voltage Eα can be changed (finely adjusted) without changing the amount of change in voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Here, the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 is determined based on the firing applied voltage Eα. Therefore, by changing (finely adjusting) the offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the rotation of the operation handle 51 that has a firing intensity at which a ball is driven into the game area is achieved. It is possible to finely adjust only the range of the rotation operation amount without changing the range width of the operation amount. Therefore, when the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 deteriorates due to, for example, aging, and the ball cannot be driven into the game area unless the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is set to be larger than the initially set range. However, by changing (fine-adjusting) the variable resistor VR3 to an offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number, the firing intensity at which the ball is shot into the game area is adjusted. The range of the amount of rotation of the handle 51 can be finely adjusted to the initially set range.

  Further, by changing the resistance value of the variable resistor VR3, it is possible to change (finely adjust) the offset voltage to be added to the voltage generated by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. As a result, the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the voltage supply unit 304 in the firing control device 400 can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, in general, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 or the range width thereof can be finely adjusted by using the simple configuration and the inexpensive variable resistor VR3 so that the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area can be obtained.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the MPU 201 controls the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 and the prescribed value of 3.85 volts stored in the monitoring memory 202c (operation handle). (A DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is 105 degrees). Then, when the MPU 201 detects that the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the MPU 201 increases the firing applied voltage Eα to about 3.85 volts. Here, since the firing applied voltage Eα is a voltage input to the voltage supply unit 304 in the firing control device 400, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage supply unit 304 is reliably right-handed. It can be raised to about 25.0 volts, the voltage value at which a ball can be fired. Therefore, when the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be switched accurately and stably.

  Further, the MPU 201 executes the detection when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees by detecting the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51. Generally, the detection of a DC voltage is accurate, and has a property of being resistant to change with time (hard to change). Therefore, the MPU 201 can accurately detect the case where the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, and can make the detection more resistant to change over time (harder to change).

  Further, the MPU 201 operates accurately and stably. Therefore, when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the MPU 201 reduces the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the voltage supply unit 304 in the firing control device 400 by about 3 Accurate and stable switching to .85 volts. Therefore, when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 can be accurately and stably switched.

  Here, as shown in the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, in the conventional ball launching device, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are misaligned, and the position where the mallet of the solenoid collides with the ball is determined. By shifting, the firing strength of the ball is weakened, and even when the operation amount of the operation handle is set to the maximum value, the ball is placed on the right end of the game area where the ball fired by the solenoid flows down, for example, a return rubber (see FIG. 2). There was a problem that it was not possible to hit, and it was not possible to play a normal game.

  On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the MPU 201 raises the firing applied voltage Eα to about 3.85 volts. Here, the firing applied voltage Eα raised to about 3.85 volts is the firing intensity at which the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 via the firing opening 68 a moves along the rail 62 and reaches the return rubber 69. Is set to be. That is, when the firing applied voltage Eα input to the voltage supply unit 304 in the firing control device 400 becomes about 3.85 volts, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is surely right-handed. The voltage is set to be about 25.0 volts, which is a voltage value at which a ball can be fired. Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 to the game area can be reliably applied to the return rubber 69 along the rail 62, and the normal Game can be played reliably.

  When the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, even if the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is increased more than necessary, the limit value (about 3.85) stored in the limit value memory 202d is used. (Volts), the MPU 201 limits the firing applied voltage Eα input to the voltage supply unit 304 in the firing control device 400 to a constant value of about 3.85 volts. When the firing applied voltage Eα input to the voltage supply unit 304 is limited to a constant value of about 3.85 volts, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is limited to about 25.0 volts. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 from becoming an overvoltage, and thus it is possible to prevent damage to the return rubber 69 and the like hitting a ball fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  Further, based on the limit value (about 3.85 volts) stored in the limit value memory 202d, about 25.0 volts, which is the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 limited by the MPU 201, is used as the firing solenoid. Is set to less than the absolute maximum rated voltage value. Therefore, even if the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is increased more than necessary, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 does not exceed the absolute maximum rating of the firing solenoid 142, so that the firing solenoid 142 is damaged. Can be prevented.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  For example, the numerical values given in the embodiments are merely examples, and other numerical values can be naturally used.

  The pachinko machine of the first embodiment is configured such that the DC voltage input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 can be adjusted by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, but is not necessarily limited to this. Instead of the variable resistor VR2, a fixed resistor having a fixed resistance value may be used. In this case, the range width of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area which can be changed by the variable resistor VR2 (the rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area) The difference between the minimum value of the amount and the maximum value of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area cannot be adjusted, but only the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area can be adjusted. Naturally, the range width of the rotation operation amount can be widened.

  In the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is configured to be adjustable by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, but is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, a fixed resistor having a fixed resistance value may be used instead of the variable resistor VR3. In this case, it becomes impossible to adjust the range of the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area which can be changed by the variable resistor VR3. The range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 at which the firing intensity is applied can be naturally changed.

  In the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, the DC voltage input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 is configured to be adjustable by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, but is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 may be input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303. In this case, the range width of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area cannot be changed, but the resistance R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is controlled by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302. By adjusting the DC voltage to be input to the game area, it is possible to adjust the range of the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area.

  In the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 is configured to be adjustable by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, but is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 may be deleted, and the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 may be directly input to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the voltage adjustment unit 304. good. In this case, the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for driving the ball into the game area cannot be changed, but the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 controls the operational amplifier OP3 of the voltage adjustment unit 304. By adjusting the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal), it is possible to adjust the range of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, which is the firing intensity at which a ball is driven into the game area.

  Further, the pachinko machine of the first embodiment is not provided with the limiter unit 309 provided in the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, but is not necessarily limited thereto. May be provided with a limiter unit 309. In this case, the anode terminal of the diode D4 of the limiter unit 309 and the other end of the resistor 14 are connected to the positive input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP3 of the voltage supply unit 304 of the pachinko machine of the first embodiment. . Then, a power supply that outputs a DC voltage of 3.85 volts may be connected to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 of the limiter unit 304. As a result, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, which is changed by the turning operation of the operation handle 51, can be set to a constant voltage of 25.0 volts by the limiter unit 309.

  Note that by setting the DC voltage of the power supply connected to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 of the limiter unit 304 to be smaller than 3.85 volts, the firing solenoid 142 changed by the turning operation of the operation handle 51 can be used. The maximum value of the applied voltage E1 can be smaller than 25.0 volts. On the other hand, by setting the DC voltage of the power supply connected to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 of the limiter section 304 to be greater than 3.85 volts, The maximum value of the applied voltage E1 can be greater than 25.0 volts.

  Also, the pachinko machine of the first embodiment is not provided with the handle monitoring unit 307 and the voltage increasing unit 308, but is not necessarily limited to this, and the handle monitoring unit provided in the second embodiment is not limited thereto. The unit 307 and the voltage increasing unit 308 may be provided in the firing control device 300 of the first embodiment. In this case, for example, one end of a fixed resistor having the same resistance value as the resistors R2 and R3 is connected to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 of the adder circuit 303 in parallel with the resistors R2 and R3. The output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage raising unit 308 is connected to the other end of the fixed resistor. Then, the negative input terminal (inverted input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 is connected to the positive input terminal (non-inverted input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP1 of the voltage fluctuation adjusting unit 301. With this configuration, the DC voltage divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 and the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 are output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303. A DC voltage obtained by adding the voltage and the DC voltage generated at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage increasing unit 308 is output. Therefore, when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the DC voltage input from the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage booster 308 to the fixed resistor of the addition circuit 303 is changed from about 2.45 volts to about 4.90. Switch to bolts. Here, when the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 becomes approximately 4.90 volts, the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 is transmitted from the firing solenoid 142 to the firing port 68a. It is set so that the ball fired via the rail moves along the rail 62 and reaches the return rubber 69. That is, when the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 becomes approximately 4.90 volts, the DC voltage input to the second voltage supply unit 310 is the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142. Is set to be about 25.0 volts, which is a voltage value that can reliably fire a right-hit ball. Therefore, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the ball fired from the firing solenoid 142 to the game area can be reliably applied to the return rubber 69 along the rail 62, and the normal Game can be played reliably.

  In the pachinko machine of each embodiment, the DC voltage input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 is generated by the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301, and the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 Is generated by the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302, but the invention is not limited to this. The variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301 and the variable resistor VR3 of the addition voltage adjustment unit 302 are Instead of a resistor having a fixed value, a DC voltage input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 and a DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 may be generated. When a DC voltage to be input to the resistor R2 of the adding circuit unit 303 and a DC voltage to be input to the resistor R3 of the adding circuit unit 303 are generated by using a resistor having a fixed resistance value, the resistance value is fixed. Therefore, the DC voltage input to the resistor R2 of the addition circuit unit 303 and the DC voltage input to the resistor R3 of the addition circuit unit 303 cannot be readjusted. However, in general, the resistance value is fixed by the variable resistor. Since the resistance is lower, the costs of the launch control device 112 and the launch control device 300 can be reduced.

  In addition, the pachinko machine of each embodiment is configured to output the firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β input to the firing control device 112 from the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110. The firing control signal α and the ball feed control signal β input to the firing control device 112 are fired from the input / output port 215 of the payout control device 111 or the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113. You may comprise so that it may output to the control apparatus 112.

  Further, in the pachinko machine of each embodiment, the signal conversion circuit 241 is provided in the payout control device 111, but the present invention is not limited to this. The signal conversion circuit 241 is provided in the launch control device 112. Is also good. In this case, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the signal conversion is performed on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing permission signal SG3 output from the circuit 241 is output from the signal conversion circuit 241 provided in the firing control device 112 to the input / output port 205, and is input to the main control device 110.

  In the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, when the handle monitoring unit 307 detects that the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 has become larger than 105 degrees, the voltage applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage raising unit 308. The maximum value of E1 was increased to about 25.0 volts, which is a voltage value that can reliably fire a right-handed ball. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 detected by the handle monitoring unit 307 (the operation handle for increasing the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the voltage increasing unit 308). 51 may be set to, for example, 105 degrees or less, or may be set to be larger than 105 degrees.

  When the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 detected by the handle monitoring unit 307 is set to, for example, 105 degrees or less, the value obtained by dividing the resistance R9 of the handle monitoring unit 307 by the resistance R10 is used as the rotation of the operation handle 51. The resistance R9 of the handle monitoring unit 307 when the operation amount is 105 degrees is made smaller than a value obtained by dividing the resistance R9 by the resistance R10. As a result, the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 decreases, and the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 detected by the handle monitoring unit 307 is set to 105 degrees or less. can do. Therefore, the right-handed ball can be fired from the firing solenoid 142 even when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 becomes 105 degrees or less.

  When the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 detected by the handle monitoring unit 307 is set to be larger than, for example, 105 degrees, a value obtained by dividing the resistance R9 of the handle monitoring unit 307 by the resistance R10 is used. The resistance R9 of the handle monitoring unit 307 when the rotation operation amount is 105 degrees is made larger than a value obtained by dividing the resistance R9 by the resistance R10. As a result, the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 increases, and the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 detected by the handle monitoring unit 307 is set to be larger than 105 degrees. can do. Therefore, the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 for firing the right-handed ball from the firing solenoid 142 can be made larger than 105 degrees.

  The pachinko machine of the second embodiment is provided with a limiter unit 309. With this limiter unit 309, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, regardless of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, The maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 was 25.0 volts. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 when the turning operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees can surely fire a right-hit ball. Any voltage value is possible, for example, 23.0 volts.

  When the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is set to, for example, 23.0 volts, the value obtained by dividing the resistance R9 of the handle monitor 307 by the resistance R10 is the voltage applied to the firing solenoid 142. The resistance R9 of the handle monitor 307 when the maximum value of E1 is 25.0 volts is made smaller than the value obtained by dividing the resistance R9 by the resistance R10. As a result, the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 of the limiter unit 309 decreases, and the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 is set to, for example, 23.0 volts. be able to. In this case, damage to the return rubber 69 colliding with the right-handed ball fired by the firing solenoid 142 can be further reduced.

  However, as described above, the detection of the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 by the handle monitoring unit 307 and the setting of the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 by the limiter unit 309 are both performed by the resistance of the handle monitoring unit 307. Since R9 is calculated based on the value obtained by dividing the resistance by the resistance R10 of the handle monitoring unit 307, the setting of only one of the handle monitoring unit 307 and the limiter unit 309 cannot be changed. When changing the setting of only one of the handle monitoring unit 307 and the limiter unit 309, the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the comparator OP4 of the handle monitoring unit 307 and the limiter unit 309 What is necessary is just to comprise so that the direct-current voltage input into the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP6 may be input from an independent separate circuit (a direct-current voltage generation circuit or the like). With this configuration, the setting of only one of the handle monitoring unit 307 and the limiter unit 309 can be changed.

  The pachinko machine of the second embodiment is provided with a limiter unit 309. With this limiter unit 309, when the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, regardless of the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51, The maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 was 25.0 volts. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the limiter unit 309 may be deleted. According to this configuration, when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the limiter 309 sets the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 to a constant voltage of 25.0 volts. This is only impossible, and when the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 is larger than 105 degrees, the right-handed ball can be reliably fired from the firing solenoid 142.

  Further, the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment converts the DC voltage input to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 into the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 of the voltage fluctuation adjustment unit 301. And the DC voltage output from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage increasing unit 308, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one end of a fixed resistor having the same resistance value as the resistors R2 and R3 is connected to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 in parallel with the resistors R2 and R3. A variable resistor having a variable resistance value is connected to the other end. Then, a DC power supply for outputting a DC voltage is connected to one end of the variable resistor, and the other end of the variable resistor is grounded.

  With this configuration, by inputting the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor to the plus input terminal (non-inverting input terminal) of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303, the voltage from the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 is The DC voltage obtained by adding the DC voltage divided by the variable resistor VR2 of the fluctuation adjusting unit 301, the DC voltage generated at the output terminal of the operational amplifier OP5 of the voltage increasing unit 308, and the DC voltage generated at the variable resistor. Is output. Therefore, by adjusting the DC voltage input to the operational amplifier OP2 of the addition circuit unit 303 by the variable resistor, the range width of the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 (the game area When the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 at which the launching strength of the ball is driven falls within the range of 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, the ball is moved into the game area without changing the range width of 18 degrees). It is possible to change the range of the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 that is the firing intensity to be driven.

  In the pachinko machine of the third embodiment and the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, first, the MPU 201 reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2, and converts the DC voltage generated in the read variable resistor VR2. MPU 201 multiplies the voltage generated in variable resistor VR1 of operation handle 51 by a positive real number, then reads the DC voltage generated in variable resistor VR3 by MPU 201, and reads the read variable resistor. The MPU 201 adds the offset voltage to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number using the DC voltage generated at the VR3, and fires the firing applied voltage Eα. It was configured to output to the control device 400.

  However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, first, the MPU 201 reads a DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3, and uses the read DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3, The MPU 201 applies an offset voltage to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51, and then reads the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 by the MPU 201, and generates the DC voltage in the read variable resistor VR2. The MPU 201 multiplies a voltage obtained by adding the offset voltage to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 to a positive real number using the DC voltage, and generates the firing applied voltage Eα by the firing control device 400. May be output.

  In the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment and the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, the magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a has a variable magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. The setting is made so as to increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the resistor VR2. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a frequently used positive real number multiplication factor may be finely set. Alternatively, the magnification for multiplying the positive real number that is less frequently used may be set roughly.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 49, a description will be given of a magnification determination table in which the magnification for multiplying the positive real number frequently used is finely set, and the magnification for multiplying the positive real number less frequently used is roughly set. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the contents of the magnification determination table memory 202a.

  In the magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 in accordance with a change in the voltage generated from the variable resistor VR2 (from zero volt to 5 volts). The magnification for multiplying a given DC voltage by a positive real number is set from zero to 2.0.

  However, this magnification determination table finely sets a magnification (from zero to 1.0 times) for multiplying a positive real number that is frequently used, and a magnification (1.0 times) for a positive real number that is rarely used. (Up to 2.0 times larger). Therefore, even if the change in the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2 is from zero volts to 5 volts, the variable resistor VR2 is adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR2 at a multiple of a positive real number frequently used. The magnification can be finely adjusted. Therefore, according to the magnification determining table, it is possible to finely adjust the magnification for multiplying the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number at the frequently used positive real number magnification. Can be.

  Further, in the pachinko machine of the third embodiment and the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a is a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Is set so as to increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 is set to a positive value. The magnification to be multiplied by a real number may be set so as not to increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2.

  Here, referring to FIG. 50, a magnification determining table in which a magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is set so as not to increase in proportion to the voltage generated in variable resistor VR2. Will be described. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing the contents of the magnification determination table memory 202a.

  In the magnification determination table stored in the magnification determination table memory 202a, the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 in accordance with a change in the voltage generated from the variable resistor VR2 (from zero volt to 5 volts). The magnification for multiplying a given DC voltage by a positive real number is set from zero to 2.0.

  However, the magnification determination table is set so that the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number does not increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR2. Therefore, according to this magnification determination table, even if the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR2 increases proportionally, the magnification for multiplying the voltage generated at the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number does not increase proportionally. can do.

  In the pachinko machine of the third embodiment and the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b is a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. Is set so as to increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the offset voltage that is frequently used is finely divided. The offset voltage which is set and used less frequently may be roughly set.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 51, an offset voltage determination table in which the frequently used offset voltage is set finely and the infrequently used offset voltage is roughly set will be described. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing the contents of the offset voltage determination table memory 202b.

  The offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b includes a voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 in accordance with a change in the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 (from zero volt to 5 volts). The offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the DC voltage by a positive real number is set from -2.8 volts to 2.8 volts.

  However, this offset voltage determination table finely sets the frequently used offset voltage (from 2.0 volts to 2.8 volts), and sets the less frequently used offset voltage (from -2.8 volts to 2.0 volts). (Less than bolt) is set roughly. Therefore, even when the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 changes from zero volts to 5 volts, the offset voltage is finely adjusted by adjusting the variable resistor VR3 in an offset voltage that is frequently used. Can be adjusted. Therefore, according to the offset voltage determination table, the offset voltage to be added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the DC voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 by a positive real number is finely adjusted at the frequently used offset voltage. be able to.

  In the pachinko machine of the third embodiment and the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, the offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b is obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number. The offset voltage applied to the set voltage is set so as to increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The offset voltage to be added to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage by a positive real number may be set so as not to increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3.

  Here, referring to FIG. 52, a setting is made such that an offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number is not proportionally increased with respect to the voltage generated in variable resistor VR3. The offset voltage determination table will be described. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing the contents of the offset voltage determination table memory 202b.

  The offset voltage determination table stored in the offset voltage determination table memory 202b includes a voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 in accordance with a change in the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 (from zero volt to 5 volts). The offset voltage to be added to a voltage obtained by multiplying the DC voltage by a positive real number is set from -2.8 volts to 2.8 volts.

  However, this offset voltage determination table is set so that the offset voltage applied to a voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number does not increase in proportion to the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3. . Therefore, even if the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR3 increases proportionally, the offset voltage applied to the voltage obtained by multiplying the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 by a positive real number can be set not to increase proportionally. .

  In the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 is larger than a specified value (105 degrees in the case of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment), that is, the variable resistance VR1 of the operation handle 51 is generated. The monitoring memory 202c that stores the specified value for the MPU 201 to detect that the voltage being applied has become larger than the specified value, and the firing applied voltage Eα output from the input / output port 205 to the firing control device 400 has a predetermined value. Although a limit value memory 202d for storing a limit value so as not to exceed the limit value is provided in the ROM 202, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a rewritable memory for storing various data in a power-on state is provided. At the same time, a flash memory, which is a memory capable of retaining its contents even after the power is turned off, is provided in the main controller 110, Of one monitoring memory 202c or limit value memory 202d in the flash memory, or may be provided both a monitoring memory 202c and limit value memory 202d.

  When the monitoring memory 202c is provided in the flash memory, the specified value as the voltage stored in the monitoring memory 202c can be rewritten. Thus, the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 detected by the MPU 201 (the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 that causes the MPU 201 to increase the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142) is set to, for example, 105 degrees or less. Or set to be greater than 105 degrees.

  When the flash memory is provided with the limit value memory 202d, the limit value as the voltage value stored in the limit value memory 202d can be rewritten. Thus, the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142, which is changed by the turning operation of the operation handle 51, can be set to 25.0 volts or less, or can be set to more than 25.0 volts.

  In the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, one specified value as a voltage stored in the monitoring memory 202c is stored. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the specified value as a voltage is stored in the monitoring memory 202c. A plurality of values may be stored. In this case, the MPU 201 stores, in a predetermined area of the RAM 203, one specified value selected by a setter who sets the state of the pachinko machine from a plurality of specified values stored in the monitoring memory 202c. Then, the MPU 201 uses one specified value stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 to determine that the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 has become larger than the specified value (105 degrees in the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment). In other words, it may be configured to detect that the voltage generated in the variable resistor VR1 of the operation handle 51 has become larger than a specified value. With this configuration, the specified value as the voltage stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 can be rewritten without using the flash memory. Therefore, the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 detected by the MPU 201 (MPU 201 Can increase the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 (the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51) to, for example, 105 degrees or less, or can be set to more than 105 degrees.

  In the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment, one limit value as a voltage stored in the limit value memory 202d is stored. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a voltage is stored in the limit value memory 202d as a voltage. May be stored. In this case, the MPU 201 stores, in a predetermined area of the RAM 203, one limit value selected by a setter who sets the state of the pachinko machine from the plurality of limit values stored in the limit value memory 202d. The MPU 201 is configured to limit the maximum value of the voltage E1 applied to the firing solenoid 142 that is changed by the turning operation of the operation handle 51, using one limit value stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Just do it. With this configuration, it is possible to rewrite the limit value as a voltage stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 without using a flash memory. The maximum value of the applied voltage E1 can be set to 25.0 volts or less, or can be set to more than 25.0 volts.

  In the first embodiment, the command output from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main control device 110 may output the voice lamp control device 113 or another command. The present invention may be applied to commands output to the peripheral control device. When applied to the command output to the sound ramp control device 113, the game effect can be performed only when a normal effect command is input, so that the game effect control is performed normally. Can be made. In such a case, according to the arrangement of the signal pins of the connectors 208 and 228, which connect the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, the signal lines are set so that adjacent pins alternately set and reset. Composing a command to detect a short circuit or a solder bridge.

  When an abnormal command is input, the occurrence of a command error is reported by the 7-segment LED 121. Instead, a lamp (lamp display device (light decoration unit) provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 is used instead. 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) may be turned on or blinked to notify the user, or a predetermined error sound or the like may be output from the speaker (sound output device 226) to notify the user. Further, the occurrence of the command error may be output to the hall computer 262 via the external output terminal board 261. If the occurrence of the command error is output to the hall computer 262, the occurrence of the error can be immediately reported to the manager of the game arcade. Note that if the command error is not reported by the pachinko machine 10 and is output only to the hall computer 262, if the player inputs an abnormal command as a result of misconduct, The fraudulent activity can be reported to the manager of the game hall without being noticed by the player who has committed the fraud. Therefore, it can be used for extracting a wrongdoer.

  Further, the first embodiment is applied to a command composed of 2 bytes, but the present invention may be applied to a command composed of 3 bytes or more or a command composed of 1 byte. For example, when the command is composed of three or more bytes, the first predetermined input data and the second predetermined input data are subjected to addition or exclusive OR to determine the result. . Further, the first predetermined input data and the second predetermined input data are set so that the outputs of adjacent signal pins of the connector are alternately set and reset. On the other hand, when the command is composed of one byte, for example, the upper 4 bits of data and the lower 4 bits of data are added or exclusive ORed, and the result is determined. In such a case, the command is output every 4 bits, and the 4-bit data is set so that the outputs of the adjacent signal pins of the connector are alternately set and reset.

  The command was output from main controller 110 in 8-bit units as parallel data. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to output the data one bit at a time in a serial manner. In this case, data input by a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 is grouped into, for example, 4 bits or 8 bits to form one group of data, and the data of the group and the data of another group are added or An exclusive OR may be performed to check whether the output command is normal.

  Although the payout return command shown in FIG. 15 is composed of 9966H and the payout initialization command is composed of AA55H, it may be composed of AA66H and 9955H, and 5566H and AA99H. The connectors 207, 208, 217, and 228 are constituted by connectors arranged in two rows as shown in FIG. And the input pins of the input / output ports 215 and 225 of the payout control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 for inputting commands output from these connectors may be arranged in a single row.

  In the present embodiment, the prize detected by the prize detecting means is that the ball hit into the game area wins one of the prize holes 63, 64, 65a. However, when the present invention is applied to a slot machine or a ball-using spinning game machine that performs a spinning game using a ball, the prize detected by the prize detecting means is determined by the operation of the start lever. This is the result of the lottery performed on board.

  The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot has been hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times right item) can increase the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times). ). Further, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the big hit symbol is displayed. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is awarded in the special area.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described. The gaming machine described in each claim is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is a case where the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  Hereinafter, modified examples of the present invention will be described. A second value output means for outputting a second value different from the first value in a gaming machine having an operation member and first value changing means for changing a first value based on an operation amount of the operation member; Synthesizing means for synthesizing a first value changed by the first value changing means with a second value output by a second value output means, and the synthesizing means converts the first value and the second value. A gaming machine 1 comprising: a ball intensity control unit that controls a firing intensity of a ball fired from a firing unit based on a combined value. The first changing means changes the first value based on the operation amount of the operation member. When the first value that changes according to the operation amount of the operating member and the second value that is output from the second value output unit are input to the combining unit, the combining unit combines the first value and the second value. The sphere intensity control unit controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing unit based on the value obtained by synthesizing the first value and the second value by the synthesizing unit. Therefore, the firing intensity of the ball can be adjusted by the second value output from the second value output means in addition to the first value that changes according to the operation amount of the operation member.

  An operation member, a first voltage divider having at least a first variable resistor for changing a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage supplied to the first voltage divider, the first variable resistor being connected to the first variable resistor. A gaming machine having first DC voltage supply means for generating a voltage based on the resistance of a resistor in the first variable resistor, unlike the first DC voltage supply means, DC voltage supply means, addition means for adding the DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supply means to the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the first DC voltage supply means, and A game machine 2 comprising: control means for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means based on the output voltage output.

  In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, when adjusting the firing strength of a ball hit by a solenoid, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are turned to mechanically move the solenoid up, down, back and forth. Since the firing intensity is adjusted by causing the game machine to have an impact on the gaming machine or when the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are loosened due to a change over time, A problem arises in that the adjustment misalignment of the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob occurs, and the position at which the mallet of the solenoid collides with the ball is displaced, so that a prescribed firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle is not generated. was there.

  Further, since the firing intensity is adjusted by mechanically moving the solenoid up and down and back and forth by rotating the first adjusting knob and the second adjusting knob, the accuracy of the adjusting of the firing intensity is controlled by the first adjusting knob. In addition, there is a problem that the accuracy of adjusting the specified emission intensity in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle is low.

  According to the gaming machine 2, since the DC voltage is supplied from the first DC voltage supply means to the first voltage dividing means, the resistance value of the first variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member. , The DC voltage generated in the first variable resistor changes. When the DC voltage that changes according to the operation amount of the operation member and the DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supply unit are input to the addition unit, the addition unit outputs a DC voltage that changes according to the operation amount of the operation member, A voltage is obtained by adding the DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supply means. Then, based on the output voltage output from the adding means, the control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means. As described above, the launching intensity of the sphere can be adjusted by the DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supply means, in addition to the DC voltage that changes according to the operation amount of the operation member.

  Here, in order to drive the ball into the game area where the winning opening and the like are arranged, the operating member must be operated to adjust the firing intensity of the ball so as to be within a specified range. The operation amount of the operation member having the firing intensity at which the ball is hit is set to an arbitrary range including 65 degrees, which is the target value of the operation amount of the operation member, as shown in FIG. 10, for example.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), the range of the operation amount of the operation member which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area is, for example, 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees due to individual differences of the first variable resistor or the like. In some cases, the ball could not be hit into the game area at the target value of the operation amount of the operation member of 65 degrees.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine 2, by adjusting the firing intensity of the ball by the DC voltage input from the second DC voltage supply means to the addition means, as shown in FIG. The range of the operation amount of the operation member which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is struck can be changed to, for example, 57 degrees or more and 75 degrees or less. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the range of the operation amount of the operation member which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area so as to include the target value of the operation amount of the operation member of 65 degrees.

  Further, the launching intensity of the sphere is adjusted by the DC voltage input from the second DC voltage supply means to the addition means. In general, DC voltage is easy to adjust finely and accurately, and has the property of being resistant to change over time (it is hard to get out of order). , And the adjustment can be made to be resistant to a change with time (hard to be out of order).

  In the gaming machine 2, the DC value of the DC voltage input from the second DC voltage supply unit to the adding unit is variable. Since the DC voltage input from the second DC voltage supply means to the adding means is variable, the DC voltage can be finely adjusted. Here, the DC voltage input to the adding means from the second DC voltage supplying means is added to the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the adding means. Therefore, while making the fluctuation width of the output voltage output from the adding means substantially equal to the fluctuation width of the voltage generated in the first variable resistor, the voltage value of the output voltage output from the adding means is changed (fine Adjustment). Therefore, it is possible to change (fine-adjust) the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means.

  In the gaming machine 2 or 3, the second DC voltage supply unit supplies a DC voltage to the second voltage division unit having at least a second variable resistor whose resistance value can be adjusted, Power supply means for generating a voltage based on the resistance of the second variable resistor in the second variable resistor, and a DC voltage generated in the second variable resistor is input to the adding means. Gaming machine 4 to do. Since the DC voltage is supplied from the power supply unit to the second voltage dividing unit, the DC voltage input from the second variable resistor to the adding unit can be changed by changing the resistance value of the second variable resistor. it can. Therefore, by using a simple variable-cost inexpensive second variable resistor to change the output voltage output from the adding means to the control means without using a power supply circuit or the like constituted by a complicated circuit, Can be changed (fine-tuned).

  A gaming machine 5 in which any of the gaming machines 2 to 4 is provided with a constant voltage means for keeping a voltage applied to the second voltage dividing means constant. Since the constant voltage means for making the DC voltage applied to the second voltage dividing means constant is provided, even if the voltage value of the DC voltage supplied to the second voltage dividing means by the power supply means fluctuates, the second voltage dividing means is provided. The voltage applied to the means has a stable and constant value. Therefore, the DC voltage input to the adding means from the second variable resistor provided in the second voltage dividing means is stabilized, and the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means can be stabilized.

  In the gaming machine 5, the constant voltage means is constituted by a Zener diode. The voltage applied to the second voltage dividing means is kept constant by the Zener diode. Therefore, the input from the second variable resistor provided in the second voltage dividing means to the adding means using a simple structure and an inexpensive zener diode without using a constant voltage circuit or the like constituted by a complicated circuit. The DC voltage to be applied, and the emission intensity of the ball fired from the firing means can be stabilized.

  In a gaming machine having an operation member and first value changing means for changing a first value based on an operation amount of the operation member, a change amount of the first value changed by the first value change means A conversion unit that converts the change amount into a second value smaller than the change amount of the first value, and controls a firing intensity of a sphere fired from the firing unit based on the second value converted by the conversion unit. A gaming machine 7 comprising intensity control means. The first value changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, and the first value is converted to a second value that is a change amount smaller than the change amount of the first value by the conversion unit. Then, the intensity control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means based on the second value converted by the conversion means. Therefore, by converting the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member by the conversion unit to the second value, the change amount of the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing unit according to the operation amount of the operation member is also Can be smaller.

  An operation member, a first voltage divider having at least a first variable resistor for changing a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage supplied to the first voltage divider, the first variable resistor being connected to the first variable resistor. A gaming machine having first DC voltage supply means for generating a voltage based on the resistance of a resistor in the first variable resistor, a voltage dividing means for dividing a voltage generated in the first variable resistor; And a first control means for controlling the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means based on the output voltage output from the voltage dividing means. When the resistance value of the first variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage generated at the first variable resistor changes. The voltage generated in the first variable resistor is divided by a voltage divider. Based on the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means, the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means is controlled by the first control means. Therefore, by dividing the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the voltage dividing means, it is possible to reduce the variation in the firing intensity of the ball fired by the firing means in accordance with the operation amount of the operating member. .

  An operation member, a first voltage divider having at least a first variable resistor for changing a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage supplied to the first voltage divider, the first variable resistor being connected to the first variable resistor. A gaming machine having first DC voltage supply means for generating a voltage based on the resistance of a resistor in the first variable resistor, a voltage dividing means for dividing a voltage generated in the first variable resistor; Unlike the first DC voltage supply unit, a second DC voltage supply unit that supplies a DC voltage, and a DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supply unit are divided by the voltage division unit. A gaming machine comprising: an adding means for adding a voltage; and a second control means for controlling a firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means based on an output voltage output from the adding means. 9. When the resistance value of the first variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage generated at the first variable resistor changes. The voltage generated in the first variable resistor is divided by a voltage divider. When the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means and the DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supplying means are input to the adding means, the adding means outputs the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means and the second voltage. (2) A voltage obtained by adding the DC voltage supplied by the DC voltage supply means is output. Based on the output voltage output from the adding means, the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means is controlled by the second control means. As described above, the firing intensity of the sphere can be adjusted not only by the DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supply means but also by the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means.

  Here, in order to drive a ball into a game area where a winning opening or the like is provided, an operating member must be operated to adjust the firing intensity of the ball so as to be within a specified range. In addition, the operation amount of the operation member having the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is set to an arbitrary range including the target value of the operation amount of the operation member of 65 degrees as shown in FIG. 11, for example.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), the range of the operation amount of the operation member which becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is driven into the game area is, for example, 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees due to individual differences of the first variable resistor or the like. In some cases, the ball could not be hit into the game area at the target value of the operation amount of the operation member of 65 degrees. In that case, according to the gaming machine 9, when the resistance value of the first variable resistor is changed by operating the operation member by dividing the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the voltage dividing means. Can be reduced as compared with the fluctuation range of the voltage generated in the first variable resistor. Since the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means becomes the voltage input to the adding means, the fluctuation range of the output voltage output from the adding means can be reduced. Since the emission intensity of the sphere is determined based on the output voltage output from the adding means to the second control means, the fluctuation range of the emission intensity of the sphere can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to change the range of the operation amount of the operation member that has the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area (for example, the operation amount of the operation member that has the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area is 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or more. The range below degrees can be changed to a wide range from 23 degrees to 77 degrees (see FIG. 11). Therefore, it is possible to adjust the range of the operation amount of the operation member that becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area so as to include the target value of the operation amount of the operation member, for example, 65 degrees.

  The voltage divided by the voltage dividing means is smaller than the voltage generated in the first variable resistor, and the reduced voltage is applied to the DC input from the second DC voltage supplying means to the adding means. Can be supplemented by voltage. This makes it possible to reduce the range of variation in the firing intensity of the ball while setting the firing intensity of the ball with respect to the operation amount of the operating member to the firing intensity for driving the ball into the game area.

  In addition, since the range of the operation amount of the operation member, which is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area, can be changed, the range of the operation amount of the operation member, which is the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area, is increased. (For example, the operation amount of the operation member which is the firing intensity at which the ball is shot into the game area is in the range of 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less, and the range width 18 degrees is changed to the range of 23 degrees or more and 77 degrees or less. , The range width of which can be set to 54 degrees (see FIG. 11). Therefore, the firing intensity for hitting the ball into the game area can be finely adjusted by the operation amount of the operation member.

  Further, the launching intensity of the sphere is adjusted by the voltage (DC voltage) divided by the voltage dividing means and the DC voltage supplied by the second DC voltage supplying means. Generally, the DC voltage has a property that it is easy to finely and accurately adjust and is resistant to change with time (it is hard to get out of order). The width can be finely and accurately adjusted, and the adjustment can be made more resistant to time-dependent changes (to prevent deviation).

  A gaming machine (10) comprising a gaming machine (9) including first voltage changing means for changing a voltage value input from the voltage dividing means to the adding means. Since the first voltage changing means is provided, the voltage value input from the voltage dividing means to the adding means can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, by changing (finely adjusting) the voltage value input from the voltage dividing means to the adding means by the first voltage changing means, the output voltage output from the adding means to the control means is changed (finely adjusted). The firing intensity of the sphere can be changed (fine-tuned).

  In the gaming machine 10, the gaming machine 11 is characterized in that the first voltage changing means is constituted by a variable resistor whose resistance value can be adjusted. Since the first voltage changing means is constituted by a variable resistor whose resistance value can be adjusted, by changing the resistance value of the first voltage changing means, the voltage value inputted from the voltage dividing means to the adding means is changed. Can be changed (fine-tuned). Thus, the output voltage output from the adding means to the control means can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the ball can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, in general, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the firing intensity of the ball can be changed (finely adjusted) using a simple configuration and an inexpensive variable resistor.

  The gaming machine 12 of any of the gaming machines 9 to 11, further comprising a second voltage changing means for changing a voltage value input from the second DC voltage supply means to the adding means. Since the second voltage changing means is provided, the voltage input from the second DC voltage supply means to the adding means can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, the DC voltage input from the second DC voltage supply means to the adding means is added by the adding means to the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means. Therefore, the voltage value of the output voltage output from the adding means is changed (fine) while making the fluctuation width of the output voltage output from the adding means substantially equal to the fluctuation width of the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means. Adjustment).

  In the gaming machine 12, the second voltage changing means is constituted by a variable resistor whose resistance value can be adjusted. Since the second voltage changing means is constituted by a variable resistor whose resistance value can be adjusted, by changing the resistance value of the second voltage changing means, it is inputted from the second DC voltage supply means to the adding means. The voltage value can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, the output voltage output from the adding means to the control means can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the ball can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, in general, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the firing intensity of the ball can be changed (finely adjusted) using a simple configuration and an inexpensive variable resistor.

  A gaming machine 14 in which the gaming machine 12 or 13 is provided with a constant voltage means for keeping a voltage applied to the second voltage changing means constant. Since the constant voltage means for keeping the voltage applied to the second voltage changing means constant is provided, the voltage applied to the second voltage changing means has a stable constant value. Therefore, the voltage input from the second voltage changing unit to the adding unit can be stabilized. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the output voltage output from the adding means and to stabilize the firing intensity of the ball.

  In the gaming machine 14, the constant voltage means is constituted by a Zener diode. The voltage applied to the second voltage changing means is kept constant by the Zener diode. Therefore, the voltage input from the second voltage changing unit to the adding unit can be stabilized. Thus, the output voltage output from the adding means can be stabilized, and the emission intensity of the ball can be stabilized. Here, in general, a Zener diode has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a constant voltage circuit or the like composed of a complicated circuit. Therefore, the voltage value input from the second voltage changing means to the adding means can be stabilized by using a simple configuration and an inexpensive zener diode, and the emission intensity of the ball can be stabilized.

  An operating member, a detecting means for detecting an operation amount of the operating member, a firing means for firing a ball, and a firing intensity for controlling a firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means based on a detection value of the detecting means. In a gaming machine having control means, when the detection value of the detection means is in a first range, the control means controls a firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means based on a first relationship. A first control unit that controls the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing unit based on a second relationship when the detection value of the detection unit is in a second range. And the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means controlled by the second control means is greater than the firing strength of the sphere fired from the firing means controlled by the first control means. Is configured as Gaming machine 16, wherein the door. The operation amount of the operation member is detected by the detection unit, and when the detection amount is within the first range, the first control unit controls the emission intensity of the ball fired from the emission unit based on the first relationship. . On the other hand, when the amount detected by the detection means is in the second range, the second control means controls the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means based on the second relationship. Here, the emission intensity of the sphere fired from the emission means controlled by the second control means is configured to be greater than the emission intensity of the sphere fired from the emission means controlled by the first control means. I have. Therefore, when the amount of detection by the detection means falls from the first range to the second range, the emission intensity of the sphere emitted from the emission means can be switched to increase the emission intensity.

  An operation member, a first voltage dividing means having at least a first variable resistor for changing a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage being supplied to the first voltage dividing means, the first variable A first DC voltage supply means for generating a voltage based on the resistance of the resistor in the first variable resistor, wherein the reference voltage is different from the first DC voltage supply means and outputs a reference voltage. An output unit, a reference voltage output from the reference voltage output unit, and a voltage generated in the first variable resistor, respectively, and the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is input to the reference voltage output unit. A first voltage output means for outputting a predetermined DC voltage when the voltage is higher than the reference voltage output by the first or when the voltage is equal to or higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means; Adding means for adding the input voltage to the voltage generated in the first variable resistor; inputting a voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means; A game machine 17 comprising: control means for controlling the firing intensity of a ball to be fired. When the resistance value of the first variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage generated at the first variable resistor changes. The voltage generated by the first variable resistor and the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means are input to the first voltage output means. Then, the first voltage output means is provided when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means or higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means. Outputs a predetermined DC voltage. The predetermined DC voltage output from the first voltage output means is added to the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the addition means, and output from the addition means. A voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means is input to the control means, and the control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means based on the input voltage. As described above, when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is higher than the reference voltage or higher than the reference voltage, that is, when the operation amount of the operation member is higher than the predetermined value or higher than the predetermined value, the first The voltage output means outputs a predetermined DC voltage to the addition means. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than or equal to the specified value, the firing intensity of the ball can be reliably switched to the predetermined intensity.

  An operation member, a first voltage dividing means having at least a first variable resistor for changing a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage being supplied to the first voltage dividing means, the first variable A first DC voltage supply means for generating a voltage based on the resistance of the resistor in the first variable resistor, wherein the reference voltage is different from the first DC voltage supply means and outputs a reference voltage. An output unit, a reference voltage output from the reference voltage output unit, and a voltage generated in the first variable resistor, respectively, and the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is input to the reference voltage output unit. The first voltage output means for outputting a predetermined DC voltage when the reference voltage is higher than the reference voltage output by the first variable resistor or the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means; Voltage dividing means for dividing a voltage, adding means for adding the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means and the voltage outputted by the first voltage output means, and an output outputted from the adding means A gaming machine 18 comprising: a control unit for inputting a voltage associated with a voltage, and controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing unit based on the input voltage. When the resistance value of the first variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage generated at the first variable resistor changes. The voltage generated by the first variable resistor and the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means are input to the first voltage output means. Then, the first voltage output means is provided when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means or higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means. Outputs a predetermined DC voltage. The predetermined DC voltage output by the first voltage output means is added by the addition means to the voltage generated by the first variable resistor and divided by the voltage division means, and output from the addition means. A voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means is input to the control means, and based on the input voltage, the control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means. As described above, when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is higher than the reference voltage or higher than the reference voltage, that is, when the operation amount of the operation member is higher than the predetermined value or higher than the predetermined value, the first The voltage output means outputs a predetermined DC voltage to the addition means. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than or equal to the specified value, the firing intensity of the ball can be reliably switched to the predetermined intensity.

  An operation member, a first voltage dividing means having at least a first variable resistor for changing a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage being supplied to the first voltage dividing means, the first variable A first DC voltage supply means for generating a voltage based on the resistance of the resistor in the first variable resistor, wherein the reference voltage is different from the first DC voltage supply means and outputs a reference voltage. An output unit, a reference voltage output from the reference voltage output unit, and a voltage generated in the first variable resistor, respectively, and the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is input to the reference voltage output unit. The first DC voltage is output when the voltage is equal to or lower than the reference voltage output by the first variable resistor or when the voltage is lower than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output unit. Voltage output A second voltage output for outputting a second DC voltage having a voltage value higher than the first DC voltage when the reference voltage output by the means is higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means; Means, an adding means for adding the voltage output from the second voltage output means to the voltage generated in the first variable resistor, and a voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means, A game machine 19 comprising: control means for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means based on the input voltage.

  In the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are misaligned, and the position at which the mallet of the solenoid collides with the ball shifts, so that the firing intensity of the ball is weakened. Even if the operation amount of the ball is set to the maximum value, the ball cannot be hit against, for example, a return rubber (see FIG. 2) disposed at the right end of the game area where the ball fired by the solenoid flows down, and a normal game is performed. There was a problem that can not be.

  According to the gaming machine 19, the voltage generated at the first variable resistor changes by changing the resistance value of the first variable resistor based on the operation amount of the operation member. The voltage generated by the first variable resistor and the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means are input to the second voltage output means. Then, when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is equal to or lower than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means, or when the voltage generated by the first variable resistor is lower than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means, Outputs a first DC voltage, and when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means or higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means. Outputs a second DC voltage having a voltage value higher than the first DC voltage. The DC voltage output from the second voltage output means is added to the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the addition means, and output from the addition means. A voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means is input to the control means, and the control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means based on the input voltage. Thus, when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is higher than the reference voltage or higher than the reference voltage, that is, when the operation amount of the operation member is higher than the predetermined value or higher than the predetermined value, the second The voltage output means switches the voltage input to the adding means from the first DC voltage to the second DC voltage. Here, the second DC voltage is set to a voltage value larger than the first DC voltage. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than or equal to the specified value, the firing intensity of the ball can be reliably switched to the predetermined intensity. Further, the second voltage output means detects whether the operation amount of the operation member is greater than or equal to a specified value or not, by detecting a voltage (DC voltage) generated in the first variable resistor and a reference voltage output means. The comparison is made with the reference voltage (DC voltage) output by the above. Generally, a DC voltage is accurate and has a property of being resistant to change with time (it is unlikely to be out of order). Therefore, by the second voltage output means, it is possible to accurately detect the case where the operation amount of the operation member is larger than the specified value or equal to or larger than the specified value, and it is possible to make the detection more resistant to change over time (harder to change).

  An operation member, a first voltage dividing means having at least a first variable resistor for changing a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage being supplied to the first voltage dividing means, the first variable A first DC voltage supply means for generating a voltage based on the resistance of the resistor in the first variable resistor, wherein the reference voltage is different from the first DC voltage supply means and outputs a reference voltage. An output unit, a reference voltage output from the reference voltage output unit, and a voltage generated in the first variable resistor, respectively, and the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is input to the reference voltage output unit. The first DC voltage is output when the voltage is equal to or lower than the reference voltage output by the first variable resistor or when the voltage is lower than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output unit. Voltage output A second voltage output for outputting a second DC voltage having a voltage value higher than the first DC voltage when the reference voltage output by the means is higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means; Means, a voltage dividing means for dividing a voltage generated in the first variable resistor, a voltage divided by the voltage dividing means, and a voltage outputted by the second voltage output means. Adding means, and control means for inputting a voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means and controlling the firing intensity of a sphere fired from the firing means based on the input voltage. A gaming machine 20 characterized by the following.

  When the resistance value of the first variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage generated at the first variable resistor changes. The voltage generated by the first variable resistor and the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means are input to the second voltage output means. Then, when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is equal to or lower than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means, or when the voltage generated by the first variable resistor is lower than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means, Outputs a first DC voltage, and when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means or higher than the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means. Outputs a second DC voltage having a voltage value higher than the first DC voltage. The DC voltage output by the second voltage output means is added to the voltage generated by the first variable resistor by the voltage dividing means and added by the adding means, and output from the adding means. A voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means is input to the control means, and based on the input voltage, the control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means. Thus, when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is higher than the reference voltage or higher than the reference voltage, that is, when the operation amount of the operation member is higher than the predetermined value or higher than the predetermined value, the second The voltage output means switches the voltage input to the adding means from the first DC voltage to the second DC voltage. Here, the second DC voltage is set to a voltage value larger than the first DC voltage. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than or equal to the specified value, the firing intensity of the ball can be reliably switched to the predetermined intensity.

  Further, the second voltage output means detects whether the operation amount of the operation member is greater than or equal to a specified value or not, by detecting a voltage (DC voltage) generated in the first variable resistor and a reference voltage output means. The comparison is made with the reference voltage (DC voltage) output by the above. Generally, a DC voltage is accurate and has a property of being resistant to change with time (it is unlikely to be out of order). Therefore, by the second voltage output means, it is possible to accurately detect the case where the operation amount of the operation member is larger than the specified value or equal to or larger than the specified value, and it is possible to make the detection more resistant to change over time (harder to change).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 32, in order to hit a ball into the game area, the operating member must be operated to adjust the firing intensity of the ball so as to fall within a specified range. Then, the operation amount of the operation member having the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area is set to an arbitrary range including the target value of the operation amount of the operation member of 65 degrees as shown in FIG. 32, for example. At this time, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), the range of the operation amount of the operation member, which is the firing intensity at which the ball is shot into the game area, is 66 degrees or more, for example, due to individual differences of the first variable resistor or the like. In some cases, the ball could not be hit into the game area at the target value of the operation amount of the operation member of 65 degrees. In this case, according to the gaming machine 20, when the resistance value of the first variable resistor is changed by operating the operation member by dividing the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the voltage dividing means. Can be reduced as compared with the fluctuation range of the voltage generated in the first variable resistor. Since the voltage divided by the voltage dividing means becomes the voltage input to the adding means, the fluctuation range of the output voltage output from the adding means can be reduced. Since the firing intensity of the sphere is determined based on the voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means to the control means, the fluctuation range of the firing intensity of the sphere can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to change the range of the operation amount of the operation member that has the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area (for example, the operation amount of the operation member that has the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area is 66 degrees or more and The range below degrees can be changed to a range from 19 degrees to 105 degrees (see FIG. 32). Therefore, it is possible to adjust the range of the operation amount of the operation member that becomes the firing intensity at which the ball is hit into the game area so as to include the target value of the operation amount of the operation member, for example, 65 degrees. The voltage divided by the voltage dividing means is smaller than the voltage generated in the first variable resistor. The reduced voltage is applied to the first voltage input from the second voltage output means to the adding means. It can be supplemented by a DC voltage. This makes it possible to reduce the range of variation in the firing intensity of the ball while setting the firing intensity of the ball with respect to the operation amount of the operating member to the firing intensity for driving the ball into the game area.

  In addition, since the range of the operation amount of the operation member that has the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area can be changed, the range of the operation amount of the operation member that has the firing strength at which the ball is driven into the game area can be widened. (For example, when the operation amount of the operation member that has a firing intensity at which a ball is shot into the game area is in the range of 66 degrees or more and 84 degrees or less and the range width is 18 degrees, the operation amount is 19 degrees or more and 105 degrees or less. The range width can be changed to 86 degrees as a range (see FIG. 32). Therefore, the firing intensity for hitting the ball into the game area can be finely adjusted by the operation amount of the operation member.

  Further, the firing intensity of the sphere is adjusted by the voltage (DC voltage) divided by the voltage dividing means and the DC voltage supplied by the second voltage output means. Generally, the DC voltage has a property that it is easy to finely and accurately adjust and is resistant to change with time (it is hard to get out of order). The width can be finely and accurately adjusted, and the adjustment can be made more resistant to time-dependent changes (to prevent deviation).

  A gaming machine 21 in any one of the gaming machines 17 to 20, further comprising a reference voltage stabilizing means for keeping the reference voltage output from the reference voltage output means constant. Since the reference voltage output means is provided with the reference voltage stabilizing means for keeping the reference voltage output from the reference voltage output means constant, the reference voltage output from the reference voltage output means has an accurate and stable constant value. Thus, the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means can accurately and stably compare the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the operation of the operation member with the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means. Can be done. Therefore, the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means is provided when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is higher than the reference voltage or higher than the reference voltage, that is, when the operation amount of the operation member is smaller than the specified value. The detection in the case of a large value or a value equal to or more than a specified value can be performed accurately and stably. Further, when the operation amount of the operation member is larger than the specified value or equal to or larger than the specified value, the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means outputs the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means from the addition means. The DC voltage input to the power supply can be switched accurately and stably. Thus, the voltage output from the adding means and input to the control means can be switched accurately and stably. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is larger than the specified value or equal to or larger than the specified value, the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means can be switched accurately and stably.

  In the gaming machine 21, the reference voltage stabilizing means is constituted by a shunt regulator circuit. The shunt regulator circuit keeps the reference voltage output from the reference voltage output means constant. Thus, the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means can accurately and stably compare the voltage generated in the first variable resistor by the operation of the operation member with the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means. Can be done. Therefore, the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means is provided when the voltage generated in the first variable resistor is higher than the reference voltage or higher than the reference voltage, that is, when the operation amount of the operation member is smaller than the specified value. The detection in the case of a large value or a value equal to or more than a specified value can be performed accurately and stably. Here, generally, the shunt regulator circuit has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a constant voltage circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means uses a shunt regulator circuit that has a simple configuration and is inexpensive to detect when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than or equal to the specified value. And can be performed accurately and stably.

  In the gaming machine 17 or 18, or any of the gaming machines 21 or 22 subordinate to the gaming machine 17 or 18, provided in one of the gaming area in which the ball fired by the firing means flows down, and one of the gaming areas, A ball launching unit for launching the ball from the launching unit into the game area; and a ball stopper that the ball launched from the launching unit can hit. When a DC voltage is output, the voltage input to the control unit is set so that the ball fired from the firing unit via the firing unit has a firing intensity that reaches the ball stopper. A gaming machine 23 characterized in that: When the operation amount of the operation member is greater than or equal to the specified value, the first voltage output means outputs a predetermined DC voltage to the adding means. Then, an output voltage is output from the adding means, and a voltage associated with the output voltage is input to the control means. Here, the voltage input to the control unit is set so that the ball fired from the firing unit via the firing unit has a firing intensity that reaches the ball stopping member. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is larger than the specified value or is equal to or larger than the specified value, the ball fired from the firing means to the game area via the firing unit can be reliably hit on the ball stopping member. , A normal game can be reliably performed.

  In the gaming machine 19 or 20, or any of the gaming machines 21 or 22 subordinate to the gaming machine 19 or 20, provided in one of the gaming area where the ball fired by the firing means flows down, and one of the gaming areas, A launching unit for launching a ball from the launching unit into the game area; and a ball stopper member against which the ball launched from the launching unit can hit. When a DC voltage is output, the voltage input to the control unit is set so that the ball fired from the firing unit via the firing unit has a firing intensity that reaches the ball stopper. A gaming machine 24 characterized by the following. When the operation amount of the operation member is greater than or equal to the specified value, the second voltage output means outputs the second DC voltage to the adding means. Then, an output voltage is output from the adding means, and a voltage associated with the output voltage is input to the control means. Here, the voltage input to the control unit is set so that the ball fired from the firing unit via the firing unit has a firing intensity that reaches the ball stopping member. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is larger than the specified value or is equal to or larger than the specified value, the ball fired from the firing means to the game area via the firing unit can be reliably hit on the ball stopping member. , A normal game can be reliably performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines 17 to 24, a constant voltage supply unit for supplying a constant value DC voltage, a DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply unit, and a voltage input to the control unit are input, respectively. When the voltage input to the control means is higher than the DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply means or is equal to or higher than the DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply means, the voltage input to the control means is reduced to a predetermined value. A gaming machine 25 comprising: voltage limiting means for limiting voltage to If the voltage input to the control means that changes according to the operation amount of the operation member is higher than the DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply means or is equal to or higher than the DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply means, the voltage limiting means Thus, the voltage input to the control means is limited to a predetermined voltage. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is greater than or equal to the specified value, the voltage input to the control unit is limited to the predetermined voltage by the voltage limiting unit, and the operation amount of the operation member is increased. Even so, the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means is constant. Accordingly, when the operation amount of the operation member is larger than the specified value or is equal to or larger than the specified value, even if the operation amount of the operation member is increased more than necessary, the voltage applied to the firing unit by the control unit is constant. Becomes Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the voltage applied to the firing means from becoming an overvoltage, and it is possible to reduce deterioration of the firing means.

  In the gaming machine 25, the predetermined voltage limited by the voltage limiting means is a DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply means. The voltage limiting unit compares a voltage input to the control unit, which changes according to an operation amount of the operation member, with a DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply unit. When the voltage input to the control means is higher than the DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply means or is equal to or higher than the DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply means, the voltage limiting means sets the voltage input to the control means. Start restricting. Thus, the voltage limiting unit limits the voltage input to the control unit to the DC voltage supplied by the constant voltage supply unit. Here, the voltage limiting means includes a constant voltage, which is a voltage value at which the voltage limiting means starts limiting the voltage input to the control means, and a voltage value at which the voltage limiting means limits the voltage input to the control means. The DC voltage supplied by the supply means is used. Thereby, both the DC voltage at which the voltage limiting means starts limiting the voltage input to the control means and the DC voltage at which the voltage limiting means limits the voltage input to the control means are set to one constant voltage supply means. It can be determined by the supplied DC voltage. Therefore, it is possible to uniformly set and change the DC voltage at which the voltage limiting means starts limiting the voltage input to the control means and the DC voltage at which the voltage limiting means limits the voltage input to the control means.

  The gaming machine 27 of the gaming machine 25 or 26, wherein the constant voltage supply means is constituted by a reference voltage output means. Since the constant voltage supply means is constituted by the reference voltage output means, the voltage input to the voltage limiting means is the reference voltage output from the reference voltage output means. Here, the reference voltage output by the reference voltage output means is also input to the first voltage output means or the second voltage output means. Therefore, both the voltage input to the first voltage output unit or the second voltage output unit and the voltage input to the voltage limiting unit can be supplied from one reference voltage output unit that outputs the reference voltage. Accordingly, it is possible to eliminate the need for a dedicated power supply required for the voltage limiting unit to limit the voltage input to the control unit.

  In any of the gaming machines 25 to 27, a game area in which a ball fired by the shooting means flows down, and a ball provided from one of the game areas and fired from the shooting means is fired in the game area. A launch unit, comprising a ball stopping member against which a ball launched from the launch unit can hit, and a predetermined voltage limited by the voltage limiting unit is a ball launched from the launch unit via the launch unit, A gaming machine 28 characterized in that the launch intensity is set so as to reach the ball stopping member. When the operation amount of the operation member is greater than or equal to the specified value, the limiting unit limits the voltage input to the control unit to a predetermined voltage. Here, the predetermined voltage is set so that the ball fired from the firing unit via the firing unit has a firing intensity that reaches the ball stopping member. Therefore, when the operation amount of the operation member is larger than the specified value or is equal to or larger than the specified value, the ball fired from the firing means to the game area can reliably hit the ball stopping member, and a normal game can be played. It can be done reliably. In addition, since the voltage applied to the firing means can be prevented from becoming an overvoltage, damage to the firing means and a ball stopping member against which a ball fired from the firing means hits can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine 18 or 20, or any of the gaming machines 21 to 28 subordinate to the gaming machine 18 or 20, a first voltage changing means for changing a voltage value input from the voltage dividing means to the adding means is provided. A gaming machine 29 characterized in that: Since the first voltage changing means is provided, the voltage value input from the voltage dividing means to the adding means can be changed (finely adjusted). Therefore, it is possible to change (fine-adjust) the voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means to the control means, thereby changing (fine-adjusting) the firing intensity of the ball.

  In the gaming machine 29, the first voltage changing means is constituted by a variable resistor whose resistance value is adjustable. Since the variable resistor is constituted by a variable resistor whose resistance value can be adjusted, the voltage value input from the voltage dividing means to the adding means is changed (finely adjusted) by changing the resistance value of the first voltage changing means. be able to. As a result, the voltage associated with the output voltage output from the adding means to the control means can be changed (finely adjusted), and the firing intensity of the ball can be changed (finely adjusted). Here, in general, a variable resistor has a simple configuration and is inexpensive as compared with a power supply circuit or the like configured by a complicated circuit. Therefore, the firing intensity of the ball can be changed (finely adjusted) using a simple configuration and an inexpensive variable resistor.

  A launching unit that launches a ball, an operating member, a first value changing unit that changes a first value based on an operation amount of the operating member, and a first value that the first value changing unit changes. A game machine comprising: a ball control means for controlling a firing intensity of a ball fired from said firing means; a setting value means for setting a second value separately from a first value changed by said first value changing means. And a synthetic value means for synthesizing a second value set by the set value means and a first value changed by the first value changing means, wherein the sphere control means is synthesized by the synthetic value means. A gaming machine 31 for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means based on the value obtained.

  In Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, when adjusting the firing strength of a ball hit by a solenoid, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are turned to mechanically move the solenoid up, down, back and forth. Since the firing intensity is adjusted by causing the game machine to have an impact on the gaming machine or when the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are loosened due to a change over time, A problem arises in that the adjustment misalignment of the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob occurs, and the position at which the mallet of the solenoid collides with the ball is displaced, so that a prescribed firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle is not generated. was there.

  According to the gaming machine 31, the first value changing means changes the first value based on the operation amount of the operation member. When the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operating member and the second value that is set by the setting value unit are combined by the combination value unit, the ball control unit sets the value combined by the combination value unit. And controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means. Therefore, the combined value means combines the second value with the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, so that the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means changes based on the operation amount of the operation member. In addition to the first value, it can be changed by the second value set by the setting value means.

  In the gaming machine 31, the first value changing means includes a first voltage dividing means having at least a variable resistor for changing a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage applied to the first voltage dividing means. DC voltage supply means for supplying, and the combined value means sets a voltage value generated in the variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the DC voltage supply means as the first value, and sets the first value to the first value. A gaming machine 32 characterized by being synthesized with a second value set by a setting value means. Since the DC voltage is supplied from the DC voltage supply unit to the first voltage dividing unit, when the resistance value of the variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage value generated in the variable resistor changes. . The combining value means combines the voltage value that changes based on the operation amount of the operating member as the first value with the second value set by the setting value means. Here, in general, combining voltage values can be realized with a simple configuration. Therefore, by setting the first value synthesized by the synthesized value unit to be the voltage value, the synthesized value unit can synthesize the first value with the second value with a simple configuration.

  In the gaming machine 31 or 32, a conversion value unit for multiplying the value synthesized by the synthesis value unit by a positive real number is provided, and the ball control unit is configured to perform a conversion based on the value multiplied by the real number by the conversion value unit. A gaming machine 33 for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means. The sphere control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means based on a value obtained by multiplying the value synthesized by the synthesis value means by a positive real number by the conversion value means. Here, the conversion value unit can change the amount of change of the combined value that changes according to the operation amount of the operation member by multiplying the value combined by the combination value unit by a positive real number. Therefore, the amount of change in the emission intensity of the sphere, which changes depending on the operation amount of the operation member, can be changed by the conversion value means.

  A launching unit that launches a ball, an operating member, a first value changing unit that changes a first value based on an operation amount of the operating member, and a first value that the first value changing unit changes. A game machine having a ball control means for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means, wherein the first value changed by the first value changing means is multiplied by a positive real number and converted to a third value. A game machine comprising a conversion value means, wherein the ball control means controls the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means based on a third value converted by the conversion value means. 34. The first value changing means changes the first value based on the operation amount of the operation member. When the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member is converted to a third value by multiplying the converted value by a positive real number, the ball control unit determines, based on the third value converted by the conversion value unit, The firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means is controlled. Here, the conversion value means multiplies the first value, which changes according to the operation amount of the operation member, by a positive real number to obtain the third value, so that the change amount of the first value can be changed. Therefore, the amount of change in the emission intensity of the sphere, which changes depending on the operation amount of the operation member, can be changed by the conversion value means.

  In the gaming machine 34, the first value changing means includes a first voltage dividing means having at least a variable resistor for changing a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage applied to the first voltage dividing means. DC voltage supply means for supplying the DC voltage, and the conversion value means sets a voltage value generated in the variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the DC voltage supply means as the first value, and sets the first value to a positive value. A gaming machine 35 characterized in that the value is multiplied by a real number and converted to a third value. Since the DC voltage is supplied from the DC voltage supply unit to the first voltage dividing unit, when the resistance value of the variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage value generated in the variable resistor changes. . The conversion value means sets a voltage value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member as a first value and multiplies the first value by a positive real number to obtain a third value. Here, generally, multiplying the voltage value by a positive real number can be realized by a simple configuration. Therefore, the conversion value means can convert the first value to the third value with a simple configuration by setting the first value to be converted into the third value as the voltage value.

  In the gaming machine 34 or 35, a set value means for setting a second value separately from the first value changed by the first value change means, a second value set by the set value means, and the conversion value means Combined value means for combining the third value converted by the control means, and the sphere control means controls the emission intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means based on the value combined by the combined value means. A gaming machine 36 characterized by the following. The sphere control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means based on the value synthesized by the synthesis value means. Therefore, the combined value means combines the second value with the third value obtained by changing the amount of change of the first value by the conversion value means, and adds the emission intensity of the ball fired from the firing means to the third value. , Can also be changed by the second value set by the setting value means.

  In any one of the gaming machines 33 to 36, the conversion value means multiplies a positive real number by an adjustable value as a DC voltage value, and the conversion value means adjusts a resistance value. An adjustment variable resistor, a magnification adjustment power supply for supplying a DC voltage to the magnification adjustment variable resistor, and a DC voltage supplied by the magnification adjustment power supply, the DC voltage supplied to the magnification adjustment variable resistor. A gaming machine 37 comprising: a magnification adjusting means for adjusting a voltage value of a DC voltage as a magnification for multiplying the positive real number based on a voltage value of a voltage. The magnification that the conversion value means multiplies by a positive real number is configured to be adjustable as a voltage value of a DC voltage, and the magnification adjustment means generates a voltage in the magnification adjustment variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the magnification adjustment power supply means. Based on the voltage value of the applied voltage, the conversion value means adjusts the magnification to be multiplied by a positive real number. Therefore, by adjusting the resistance value of the magnification adjusting variable resistor, it is possible to easily adjust the magnification that the conversion value means multiplies by a positive real number.

  In the gaming machine 37, the magnification adjusting means includes: a magnification adjusting voltage acquiring means for acquiring a voltage value of the voltage generated by the magnification adjusting variable resistor; and a voltage value acquired by the magnification adjusting voltage acquiring means. A game machine 38 comprising: a magnification adjusting voltage determining means for determining a voltage value of a DC voltage as a magnification for multiplying the positive real number based on the magnification. When the voltage value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor for magnification adjustment is acquired by the voltage acquisition unit for magnification adjustment, based on the voltage value of the acquired voltage, the voltage decision unit for magnification adjustment determines that the conversion value unit has a positive value. A voltage value of the DC voltage as a magnification to be multiplied by a real number is determined. Therefore, the magnification adjusting voltage determination means can accurately determine the DC voltage value as the magnification by which the conversion value means is multiplied by a positive real number.

  In the gaming machine 38, the magnification adjusting voltage acquiring means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated by the magnification adjusting variable resistor when the gaming machine is initialized. . The magnification adjusting voltage acquiring means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the magnification adjusting variable resistor when the gaming machine is initialized. Therefore, after the initialization of the gaming machine, the magnification adjustment voltage acquiring means does not need to acquire the voltage value of the voltage generated in the magnification adjustment variable resistor. Therefore, even after the initialization of the gaming machine, the ball control means is fired from the firing means in comparison with the gaming machine in which the magnification adjusting voltage obtaining means obtains the voltage value of the voltage generated by the magnification adjusting variable resistor. It is possible to reduce the time spent for controlling the firing intensity of the ball, and to speed up the processing.

  In the gaming machine 38, the multiplying-factor adjusting voltage acquiring means is configured to periodically acquire a voltage value of a voltage generated in the multiplying-factor adjusting variable resistor after turning on the power of the gaming machine. Gaming machine 40. The magnification adjusting voltage acquisition means periodically acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the magnification adjusting variable resistor after turning on the power of the gaming machine. Therefore, after turning on the power of the gaming machine, the operating member is operated to check the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means, and adjust the resistance value of the variable resistor for magnification adjustment to adjust the firing intensity of the ball. be able to.

  In any of the gaming machines 31 to 33 and 36 to 40, the second value set by the setting value means is configured to be adjustable as a DC voltage value, and the setting value means sets a resistance value to Adjustable voltage adjusting variable resistor, voltage adjusting power supply means for supplying a DC voltage to the voltage adjusting variable resistor, and the voltage adjusting variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the voltage adjusting power supply means A gaming machine 41 comprising: a voltage adjusting unit that adjusts the voltage value of the DC voltage as the second value based on the voltage value of the voltage generated in the above. The second value set by the setting value means is configured to be adjustable as a DC voltage value, and the voltage adjusting means generates the voltage in the voltage adjusting variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the voltage adjusting power supply means. The voltage value of the DC voltage as the second value set by the setting value means is adjusted based on the voltage value of the applied voltage. Therefore, the second value set by the set value means can be easily adjusted by adjusting the resistance value of the variable resistor for voltage adjustment.

  In the gaming machine 41, the gaming machine 42 is characterized in that the voltage adjusting means is configured to be able to adjust the voltage value of the DC voltage as the second value to be positive or negative. Since the voltage adjusting means is configured to be able to adjust the voltage value of the DC voltage as the second value to be positive or negative, the second value synthesized by the synthesized value means can be made positive or negative. Therefore, by adjusting the voltage value of the DC voltage as the second value synthesized by the synthesis value means, without changing the change amount of the emission intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means, adjustment to increase the emission intensity of the sphere or Adjustments can be made to lower.

  In the gaming machine 41 or 42, the voltage adjustment unit includes an adjustment voltage acquisition unit that acquires a voltage value of a voltage generated by the voltage adjustment variable resistor, and a voltage value acquired by the adjustment voltage acquisition unit. A gaming machine 43 comprising: an adjustment voltage determining unit that determines a voltage value of the DC voltage as the second value based on the second value. When the voltage value of the voltage generated by the variable resistor for voltage adjustment is acquired by the adjustment voltage acquisition unit, the adjustment voltage determination unit is set based on the acquired voltage value of the voltage by the setting value unit. The voltage value of the DC voltage as binary is determined. Therefore, the adjustment voltage determination unit can accurately determine the voltage value of the DC voltage as the second value.

  In the gaming machine 43, the adjusting voltage acquiring means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the voltage adjusting variable resistor when the gaming machine is initialized. The adjustment voltage acquisition means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated by the voltage adjustment variable resistor when the gaming machine is initialized. Therefore, after the initialization of the gaming machine, the adjustment voltage obtaining means does not need to obtain the voltage value of the voltage generated by the voltage adjustment variable resistor. Therefore, even after the initialization of the gaming machine, the ball control means is fired from the firing means in comparison with the gaming machine in which the adjustment voltage obtaining means obtains the voltage value of the voltage generated by the voltage adjusting variable resistor. The processing time can be reduced by reducing the time spent controlling the launching intensity of the ball.

  In the gaming machine 43, the adjusting voltage acquiring means periodically acquires a voltage value of the voltage generated in the voltage adjusting variable resistor after turning on the power of the gaming machine. Machine 45. The adjustment voltage acquisition means periodically acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated by the voltage adjustment variable resistor after turning on the power of the gaming machine. Therefore, after turning on the power of the gaming machine, the operating member is operated to check the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means, and adjust the resistance value of the variable resistor for voltage adjustment to adjust the firing intensity of the ball. be able to.

  A launching unit that launches a ball, an operating member, a first value changing unit that changes a first value based on an operation amount of the operating member, and a first value that the first value changing unit changes. In a gaming machine having ball control means for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means, a second value serving as a reference is set separately from the first value changed by the first value changing means. Reference value setting means, first value detecting means for detecting a first value to be changed by the first value changing means, and the first value detected by the first value detecting means is set by the reference value setting means. Output value switching means for outputting a third value larger than the first value in place of the first value when it is determined that the value is greater than or equal to the second value. , Based on the third value output by the output value switching means, Gaming machine 46, characterized in that the elevation means so as to control the radiation strength of the sphere to be fired.

  In the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-202094, the first adjustment knob and the second adjustment knob are misaligned, and the position at which the mallet of the solenoid collides with the ball shifts, so that the firing intensity of the ball is weakened. Even if the operation amount of the ball is set to the maximum value, the ball cannot be hit against, for example, a return rubber (see FIG. 2) disposed at the right end of the game area where the ball fired by the solenoid flows down, and a normal game is performed. There was a problem that can not be.

  According to the gaming machine 46, the first value changing means changes the first value based on the operation amount of the operation member, and the first value detecting means detects the changed first value. When the first value detected by the first value detection means is determined by the output value switching means to be greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the output value switching means , And outputs a third value larger than the first value instead of the first value. The sphere control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means based on the third value output by the output value switching means. Therefore, when the first value detected by the first value detecting means is determined by the output value switching means to be greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the first value is emitted from the firing means. It is possible to reliably switch the firing intensity of the ball to a predetermined intensity.

  In the gaming machine 46, the second value set by the reference value setting means is configured to be adjustable, and is provided with a value adjusting means for adjusting the second value. The second value set by the reference value setting means is configured to be adjustable, and the value adjustment means adjusts the second value. Therefore, the second value that is compared with the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member can be adjusted by the value adjustment unit.

  In the gaming machine 46 or 47, the third value output by the output value switching means is configured to be adjustable, and is provided with output value adjusting means for adjusting the third value. 48. The third value output by the output value switching means is configured to be adjustable, and the output value adjustment means adjusts the third value. Therefore, by adjusting the third value output from the output value switching means by the output value adjustment means, the first value detected by the first value detection means is set by the output value switching means by the reference value setting means. When it is determined that the value is greater than or equal to the second value, the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means can be adjusted.

  In any of the gaming machines 46 to 48, a ball is provided in one of a game area in which a ball fired by the shooting means flows down and one of the game areas, and a ball fired from the shooting means is fired in the game area. A launching unit, and a ball stopping member against which a ball fired from the firing unit can hit. The third value is such that the ball fired from the firing means via the firing unit reaches the ball stopping member. A gaming machine 49 characterized by being set so as to have a launching intensity that is high. If the first value detected by the first value detection means is determined by the output value switching means to be greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the output value switching means A third value larger than the first value is output instead of the first value. Here, the third value is set so as to be the firing intensity at which the ball fired from the firing means via the firing unit reaches the ball stopping member. Therefore, when the first value detected by the first value detecting means is determined by the output value switching means to be greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the launching means switches from the launching means to the launching part. , The ball shot into the game area can be reliably hit on the ball stopping member, and a normal game can be reliably performed.

  A gaming machine (50), characterized in that the gaming machine (48) or (49) is provided with value limiting means for limiting the upper limit of the third value adjusted by the output value adjusting means. When the output value switching means determines that the first value detected by the first value detection means is greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the output value switching means outputs the first value. The third value output in place of is limited to the upper limit value by the value limiting means. Therefore, when the third value is limited by the value limiting unit, the upper limit of the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing unit is constant even if the operation amount of the operating member is increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent damage to the ball stopping member or the like hitting the ball fired from the firing means.

  In the gaming machine 50, the firing means controls the firing intensity of the ball to be fired based on the voltage value of the applied voltage, and an upper limit value limited by the value limiting means is applied to the firing means. The voltage value as the upper limit value of the voltage is set to be less than the absolute maximum rated voltage value of the firing means. Machine 51. If the first value detected by the first value detecting means is determined by the output value switching means to be greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the value limiting means determines the output value. The third value output from the switching means is limited to an upper limit value. Here, the firing means controls the firing intensity of the ball to be fired based on the voltage value of the applied voltage, and the upper limit value at which the value limiting means limits the third value is applied to the firing means. The voltage value is configured to be adjustable as the voltage value of the voltage, and the voltage value as the upper limit value is set so as to be less than the voltage value of the absolute maximum rating of the firing means. Therefore, when the first value detected by the first value detecting means is determined by the output value switching means to be greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the first value is applied to the firing means. Since the voltage can be prevented from exceeding the absolute maximum rating, damage to the firing means can be prevented.

In any one of the gaming machines 46 to 51, the first value changing unit includes a first voltage dividing unit having at least a variable resistor that changes a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, DC voltage supply means for supplying DC voltage to the means,
The gaming machine 52, wherein a voltage value generated in the variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the DC voltage supply means is the first value. Since the DC voltage is supplied from the DC voltage supply unit to the first voltage dividing unit, when the resistance value of the variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage value generated in the variable resistor changes. . The voltage value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member is set as a first value that is changed by the first value changing unit. Therefore, the first value changing means can be realized with a simple configuration.

  In any one of the gaming machines 46 to 51, a setting value unit for setting a fourth value separately from the first value changed by the first value changing unit is provided, and the output value switching unit is configured to detect the first value. When the first value detected by the means is determined to be less than or less than the second value set by the reference value setting means, the first value to be changed by the first value changing means and the setting by the setting value means are set. A combined value means for combining and outputting the fourth value to be output, wherein the ball control means controls the emission intensity of the ball fired from the firing means based on the value combined by the combined value means. A gaming machine 53 characterized by the following. Setting value means for setting a fourth value, wherein the output value switching means determines whether the first value detected by the first value detection means is smaller than a second value set by the reference value setting means by the output value switching means. When the value is determined to be less than the above value, there is provided combined value means for combining and outputting the first value changed by the first value changing means and the fourth value set by the set value means. Therefore, until the first value detected by the first value detecting means is greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the combined value means changes based on the operation amount of the operating member. Since the fourth value is combined with the first value, the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means is added to the first value that changes based on the operation amount of the operating member, and the fourth value set by the setting value means Can also be changed.

  In the gaming machine 53, the first value changing means includes a first voltage dividing means having at least a variable resistor for changing a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage applied to the first voltage dividing means. DC voltage supply means for supplying, and the combined value means sets a voltage value generated in the variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the DC voltage supply means as the first value, and sets the first value to the first value. A gaming machine 54 characterized by being synthesized with a fourth value set by a setting value means. Since the DC voltage is supplied from the DC voltage supply unit to the first voltage dividing unit, when the resistance value of the variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage value generated in the variable resistor changes. . The combining value means combines the voltage value that changes based on the operation amount of the operating member as the first value with the fourth value set by the setting value means. Here, in general, combining voltage values can be realized with a simple configuration. Therefore, since the first value synthesized by the synthesized value means can be a voltage value, the synthesized value means can synthesize the first value with the fourth value with a simple configuration.

  In the gaming machine 53 or 54, a conversion value means for multiplying the value synthesized by the synthesis value means by a positive real number is provided, and the ball control means, based on the value multiplied by the real number by the conversion value means, A gaming machine 55 for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means. The sphere control means controls the firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means based on a value obtained by multiplying the value synthesized by the synthesis value means by a positive real number by the conversion value means. Here, the conversion value unit can change the amount of change of the combined value that changes according to the operation amount of the operation member by multiplying the value combined by the combination value unit by a positive real number. Therefore, it is possible to change the amount of change in the firing intensity of the sphere that changes according to the amount of operation of the operation member.

  In any of the gaming machines 46 to 51, the output value switching means determines that the first value detected by the first value detection means is less than or less than a second value set by the reference value setting means. In this case, the apparatus further comprises a conversion value means for outputting the first value changed by the first value change means by multiplying the first value by a positive real number. A game machine 56 for controlling the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means. The output value switching means outputs the first value when the first value detected by the first value detection means is determined by the output value switching means to be less than or less than the second value set by the reference value setting means. Conversion value means for outputting the first value changed by the change means multiplied by a positive real number is provided. Here, since the conversion value means multiplies the first value that changes by the operation amount of the operation member by a positive real number, the change amount of the first value can be changed. Therefore, until the first value detected by the first value detecting means is greater than or equal to the second value set by the reference value setting means, the converted value means adjusts the sphere of the sphere which changes according to the operation amount of the operating member. The amount of change in firing intensity can be changed.

  In the gaming machine 56, the first value changing means includes a first voltage dividing means having at least a variable resistor for changing a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage applied to the first voltage dividing means. DC voltage supply means for supplying the DC voltage, and the conversion value means sets a voltage value generated in the variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the DC voltage supply means as the first value, and sets the first value to a positive value. A gaming machine 57 characterized by being multiplied by a real number. Since the DC voltage is supplied from the DC voltage supply unit to the first voltage dividing unit, when the resistance value of the variable resistor changes based on the operation amount of the operation member, the voltage value generated in the variable resistor changes. . The conversion value means sets the voltage value that changes based on the operation amount of the operation member as the first value changed by the first value changing means, and multiplies the first value by a positive real number. Here, generally, multiplying the voltage value by a positive real number can be realized by a simple configuration. Therefore, since the first value converted by the conversion value means can be a voltage value, the conversion value means can convert the first value with a simple configuration.

  In the gaming machine 56 or 57, apart from the first value changed by the first value changing means, a set value means for setting a fourth value, a fourth value set by the set value means and the converted value means And a composite value means for combining and outputting a value obtained by multiplying the first value by a positive real number, and wherein the sphere control means outputs from the launch means based on the value combined by the combined value means. A gaming machine 58 for controlling the firing intensity of a ball to be fired. The firing intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means is controlled based on the value synthesized by the synthesis value means. Therefore, the combined value means combines the fourth value with a value obtained by multiplying the first value by a positive real number by the conversion value means and changing the amount of change of the first value. The emission intensity can be changed by the fourth value set by the setting value means in addition to the value obtained by changing the amount of change of the first value by the conversion value means.

  In any one of the gaming machines 55 to 58, the magnification that the conversion value means multiplies by a positive real number is configured to be adjustable as a voltage value of a DC voltage, and the conversion value means is a magnification capable of adjusting a resistance value. An adjustment variable resistor, a magnification adjustment power supply for supplying a DC voltage to the magnification adjustment variable resistor, and a DC voltage supplied by the magnification adjustment power supply, the DC voltage supplied to the magnification adjustment variable resistor. A game machine 59 comprising: a magnification adjusting means for adjusting a voltage value of a DC voltage as a magnification for multiplying the positive real number based on a voltage value of a voltage. The magnification that the conversion value means multiplies by a positive real number is configured to be adjustable as a voltage value of a DC voltage, and the magnification adjustment means generates a voltage in the magnification adjustment variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the magnification adjustment power supply means. Based on the voltage value of the applied voltage, the conversion value means adjusts the magnification to be multiplied by a positive real number. Therefore, by adjusting the resistance value of the magnification adjusting variable resistor, it is possible to easily adjust the magnification that the conversion value means multiplies by a positive real number.

  In the gaming machine 59, the magnification adjusting means includes a magnification adjusting voltage acquiring means for acquiring a voltage value of the voltage generated by the magnification adjusting variable resistor, and a voltage value acquired by the magnification adjusting voltage acquiring means. A gaming machine 60 comprising: a magnification adjusting voltage determination unit that determines a voltage value of a DC voltage as a magnification for multiplying the positive real number based on the magnification. When the voltage value of the voltage generated in the variable resistor for magnification adjustment is acquired by the voltage acquisition unit for magnification adjustment, based on the voltage value of the acquired voltage, the voltage decision unit for magnification adjustment determines that the conversion value unit has a positive value. A voltage value of the DC voltage as a magnification to be multiplied by a real number is determined. Therefore, the magnification adjusting voltage determination means can accurately determine the DC voltage value as the magnification by which the conversion value means is multiplied by a positive real number.

  In the gaming machine 60, the multiplying-factor adjusting voltage obtaining means obtains a voltage value of the voltage generated in the multiplying-factor adjusting variable resistor when the gaming machine is initialized. . The magnification adjusting voltage acquiring means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the magnification adjusting variable resistor when the gaming machine is initialized. Therefore, after the initialization of the gaming machine, the magnification adjustment voltage acquiring means does not need to acquire the voltage value of the voltage generated in the magnification adjustment variable resistor. Therefore, even after the initialization of the gaming machine, the ball control means is fired from the firing means in comparison with the gaming machine in which the magnification adjusting voltage obtaining means obtains the voltage value of the voltage generated by the magnification adjusting variable resistor. It is possible to reduce the time spent for controlling the firing intensity of the ball, and to speed up the processing.

  In the gaming machine 60, the multiplying-factor adjustment voltage obtaining means is configured to periodically obtain a voltage value of the voltage generated in the multiplying-factor adjusting variable resistor after turning on the power of the gaming machine. Gaming machine 62. The magnification adjusting voltage acquisition means periodically acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the magnification adjusting variable resistor after turning on the power of the gaming machine. Therefore, after turning on the power of the gaming machine, the operating member is operated to check the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means, and adjust the resistance value of the variable resistor for magnification adjustment to adjust the firing intensity of the ball. be able to.

  In any of the gaming machines 53 to 55 and 58 to 62, the fourth value set by the setting value means is configured to be adjustable as a DC voltage value, and the setting value means sets the resistance value to Adjustable voltage adjusting variable resistor, voltage adjusting power supply means for supplying a DC voltage to the voltage adjusting variable resistor, and the voltage adjusting variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the voltage adjusting power supply means A gaming machine 63 comprising: a voltage adjusting unit that adjusts the voltage value of the DC voltage as the fourth value based on the voltage value of the voltage generated in the above. The fourth value set by the set value means is configured to be adjustable as a DC voltage value, and the voltage adjustment means generates the voltage in the voltage adjustment variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied from the voltage adjustment power supply means. The voltage value of the DC voltage as the fourth value set by the setting value means is adjusted based on the voltage value of the applied voltage. Therefore, by adjusting the resistance value of the variable resistor for voltage adjustment, the fourth value set by the setting value means can be easily adjusted.

  In the gaming machine 63, the voltage adjusting means is configured to be able to adjust the voltage value of the DC voltage as the fourth value to be positive or negative. Since the voltage adjusting means is configured to be able to adjust the voltage value of the DC voltage as the fourth value to be positive or negative, the fourth value synthesized by the synthesized value means can be made positive or negative. Therefore, by adjusting the voltage value of the DC voltage as the fourth value to be synthesized by the synthesis value means, without changing the amount of change in the emission intensity of the sphere fired from the firing means, adjusting or increasing the emission intensity of the sphere Adjustments can be made to lower.

  In the gaming machine 63 or 64, the voltage adjustment unit is an adjustment voltage acquisition unit that acquires a voltage value of a voltage generated by the voltage adjustment variable resistor, and a voltage value that is acquired by the adjustment voltage acquisition unit. A gaming machine 65 comprising: an adjustment voltage determination unit that determines a voltage value of the DC voltage as the fourth value based on the fourth value. When the voltage value of the voltage generated by the variable resistor for voltage adjustment is acquired by the adjustment voltage acquisition unit, the adjustment voltage determination unit is set based on the acquired voltage value of the voltage by the setting value unit. The voltage value of the DC voltage as four values is determined. Therefore, the adjustment voltage determining means can accurately determine the voltage value of the DC voltage as the fourth value.

  In the gaming machine 65, the adjusting voltage acquiring means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the voltage adjusting variable resistor when the gaming machine is initialized. The adjustment voltage acquisition means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated by the voltage adjustment variable resistor when the gaming machine is initialized. Therefore, after the initialization of the gaming machine, the adjustment voltage obtaining means does not need to obtain the voltage value of the voltage generated by the voltage adjustment variable resistor. Therefore, even after the initialization of the gaming machine, the ball control means is fired from the firing means in comparison with the gaming machine in which the adjustment voltage obtaining means obtains the voltage value of the voltage generated by the voltage adjusting variable resistor. The processing time can be reduced by reducing the time spent controlling the launching intensity of the ball.

  In the gaming machine 65, the adjusting voltage acquiring means acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated in the voltage adjusting variable resistor periodically after turning on the power of the gaming machine. Machine 67. The adjustment voltage acquisition means periodically acquires the voltage value of the voltage generated by the voltage adjustment variable resistor after turning on the power of the gaming machine. Therefore, after turning on the power of the gaming machine, the operating member is operated to check the firing intensity of the ball fired from the firing means, and adjust the resistance value of the variable resistor for voltage adjustment to adjust the firing intensity of the ball. be able to.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board (part of the game area)
51 Operation handle (operation member)
61 rails (part of the game area)
62 rails (part of the game area)
68a firing port (firing section)
69 Return rubber (ball stopper)
70 arc members (part of the game area)
142 Launch solenoid (Launch means)
202a Magnification determination table memory (part of conversion value means, part of magnification adjustment means)
202b Offset voltage determination table memory (part of set value means, part of voltage adjustment means)
202c Monitoring memory (reference value setting means)
202d Limit value memory (value limiting means)
203a Magnification memory (part of conversion value means)
203b Offset voltage memory (part of setting value means)
302 Addition voltage adjustment unit (second value output unit, second DC voltage supply unit)
303 Addition circuit (combining means, adding means)
304 voltage supply unit (ball intensity control means, control means, intensity control means, first control means, second control means)
307 Handle monitoring unit (part of first control means, part of second control means, part of first voltage output means, part of second voltage output means)
308 Voltage booster (part of ball control means, part of first control means, part of second control means, part of first voltage output means, part of second voltage output means)
309 Limiter (voltage limiting means)
310 second voltage supply unit (ball intensity control means, control means, intensity control means, first control means, second control means, emission intensity control means)
CD3 capacitor (part of reference voltage output means, part of reference voltage stabilization means, part of shunt regulator circuit, part of constant voltage supply means)
D1 Zener diode (part of constant voltage means and second voltage dividing means)
DC1 DC power supply (DC voltage supply means, magnification adjustment power supply means, voltage adjustment power supply means, first DC voltage supply means)
DC2 DC power supply (power supply means)
R9 resistor (part of the reference voltage output means, part of the reference voltage stabilizing means, part of the shunt regulator circuit, part of the constant voltage supply means)
R10 resistor (part of reference voltage output means, part of reference voltage constant pressure means, part of shunt regulator circuit, part of constant voltage supply means)
Reg1 Variable shunt regulator (part of reference voltage output means, part of reference voltage stabilizing means, part of shunt regulator circuit, part of constant voltage supply means)
VR1 variable resistor (detecting means, first variable resistor, part of first voltage dividing means, first value changing means)
VR2 variable resistor (variable resistor for magnification adjustment, first voltage changing means, part of voltage dividing means, conversion means)
VR3 variable resistor (variable resistor for voltage adjustment, second voltage changing means, second variable resistor, part of second voltage dividing means)
S1401 (part of conversion value means, magnification adjustment voltage acquisition means)
S1402 (part of conversion value unit, part of magnification adjustment unit, magnification adjustment voltage determination unit)
S1403 (part of set value means, adjustment voltage acquisition means)
S1404 (part of set value means, adjustment voltage determination means, part of voltage adjustment means)
S1604 (first value detecting means)
S1605 (part of conversion value means)
S1606 (part of composite value means)
S1607 (part of ball control means)
S1802 (part of conversion value means, magnification adjustment voltage acquisition means)
S1803 (part of conversion value means, part of magnification adjustment means, magnification adjustment voltage determination means)
S1804 (part of set value means, adjustment voltage acquisition means)
S1805 (part of set value means, adjustment voltage determination means, part of voltage adjustment means)
S1806 (first value detecting means)
No branch in S1807 (part of output value switching means)
S1808 (part of conversion value means)
S1809 (part of composite value means)
S1810 (part of ball control means)
S1811 (part of ball control means, part of output value switching means)

Claims (6)

Firing means for firing a ball;
An operating member;
First value changing means for changing a first value based on an operation amount of the operation member;
A ball controlling means for controlling a firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means based on a first value changed by the first value changing means,
Setting value means for setting a second value separately from the first value changed by the first value changing means;
Combined value means for combining a second value set by the set value means and a first value changed by the first value changing means;
A gaming machine, wherein the ball control means controls the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means based on a value synthesized by the synthesis value means. The first value changing unit includes a first voltage dividing unit having at least a variable resistor that changes a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage supply that supplies a DC voltage to the first voltage dividing unit. And means,
The composite value means sets a voltage value generated in the variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the DC voltage supply means as the first value, and sets the first value to a second value set by the set value means. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is combined with the game machine. A conversion value means for multiplying the value synthesized by the synthesis value means by a positive real number;
3. The method according to claim 1, wherein the sphere control means controls the firing intensity of a sphere fired from the firing means based on a value multiplied by a positive real number by the conversion value means. The gaming machine described. Firing means for firing a ball;
An operating member;
First value changing means for changing a first value based on an operation amount of the operation member;
A ball controlling means for controlling a firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means based on a first value changed by the first value changing means,
Conversion value means for converting the first value changed by the first value change means to a positive real number and converting the first value to a third value;
A gaming machine, wherein the ball control means controls the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means based on a third value converted by the conversion value means. The first value changing unit includes a first voltage dividing unit having at least a variable resistor that changes a resistance value based on an operation amount of the operation member, and a DC voltage supply that supplies a DC voltage to the first voltage dividing unit. And means,
The conversion value means converts the voltage value generated in the variable resistor by the DC voltage supplied by the DC voltage supply means as the first value, multiplies the first value by a positive real number, and converts the first value to a third value. The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein Setting value means for setting a second value separately from the first value changed by the first value changing means;
A combination value unit that combines a second value set by the set value unit and a third value converted by the conversion value unit;
The game according to claim 4 or 5, wherein the ball control means controls the firing intensity of a ball fired from the firing means based on a value synthesized by the synthesis value means. Machine.

Images